62957400B_CDC_752_Hardware_Reference_Manual62957400B.1978 62957400B CDC 752 Hardware Reference Manual62957400B.1978
62957400B_CDC_752_Hardware_Reference_Manual62957400B.1978 62957400B_CDC_752_Hardware_Reference_Manual62957400B.1978
User Manual: Pdf 62957400B_CDC_752_Hardware_Reference_Manual62957400B.1978
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 460
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
62-957400
&J 1::\ CONTf\.OL DATA
\::1 r::J CO[\PO~TION
CDC®752
KEYBOARD DISPLAY TERMINAL
HARDWARE MAINTENANCE MANUAL
.,
I
I
J
!
t
I
1
I
I
....
,... ......,..................
............ ..................
.,.............................
.,.,·.
.·.......
==:.r··
,..,
...............
...
'..
- ... ...
')~.,....
~.-~
........
,..................... . .
..............................
'·
....... fA,.. .................... ..
-...;to:
......
My..,
.,........,........................
,
~
.
.
.
....... Title_....._........,.....,.._______....
~
.·.··.'·.·.·· . A ........
··.·.·.~.·
.............
·In
.
...
............
.
u•••, ••
Conhol ... 4 ....,_
T...... M . . . . .r. . .tstwnt
............ No,. _ _.....,_ _....
PIOM:
,.,....,..,,~·--
St. Paul, MlilitiltN 51113
Nil•-·------------~· -------------------
I
,L~----~--------------------
I
I ,
I
I
I
CONSitVI
Monulit
Title-------------
t
t
N.h_,_ Net. _ __._ _..... llitvfsfon _ _ __
I
FtoM:
f
I
I
~ -----------------------
~~-------------------
I
L .....,. . .:. . . . - - - - - - _,__ - - - - - - - - - - - . . . .;. . . - __: - . . . . . . -.
I
I
Ic
ow .....: .............~......- - - - - - - I
...... ____________
I
I
I
t
,r:(_,::, · 1
'~
' ;~
I
'
..-:f·;
Contrctl
Date·~
T.chftiCIIil Nlll-'-~nt
2401*th..............
St. ,_1,
55113
Mht•*•.,..
......,ntte
--------------------
·Mlwfon No. _ _ _ _ _ Revision._ __
....
............:HeMe---------________________
~
'll./1"' ~~-.t/A. \V·~·-;'~:r.;f~·:; ;'~·t'I;G:~··'~
t·' ::·;.:;~·. '"'!~,~.':'. .;~:_l.,.~;tq
''
t
>·''""'~- .. -·,•,:.(-•"• ..""'ifo"·--,;,~ ~'"IJ< "'"f'"""-'....,_.,,......,t~•·T~..;~''Jo-•""'~'(....,.\.
~''"""-'r~"·'"""""'>'·;,,,.,....,,.!".,.~~'· ~-"""'"
:,....
'"'!·:;)
r
,;(';!.t;'!
·c'!l>. ·¥ t•' c' .,:r
~ J.;.~~:
. c-~·,:'-:\"';i.;~lM , t-t}t '1 ..
,_'~""'~-,
{
j
-'i",#'-'
'""'""'""·"'""-
!'':!·-.:.;;.~·f.
--~---~-:., .... ,.
'<;;tt\·i. '"'''"·""'"""'''"
•!'?""'-'_,.,..
'
H'
REVISION RECORD
REVISION
01
DESCRIPTION
Draft copy.
(02-18-77)
02
Revised draft copy.
(03-22-77)
03
Revised draft copy. Corrections made to section 6 materia I.
(04-25-77)
A
(09-30-77)
Manual released. This printing obsoletes all previous editions. Text
incorporates ECOs 10908, 10935, 10952, 10996, 11000, 11189, 11226,
~
11394, 11413, 11438, 11442, 11547, 11616, 11709, 11747, 11761,
11821, 11953, 12096, 12107, 12153, and 12170.
B
(04-25-78)
Manual revised. Interim released (draft copy) as
B revision. Two appendixes added: C, which
contains information on the 82-Key Typewriter
Keyboarq.;
D, which contains DDLT's and
Procedures for the 70-LPM Impact Printe.r
Publication No.
62957400
REVISION LffiERS I, 0, Q AND X ARE NOT USED
c
1977, 1978
by Control Data Corporation
Printed in the United States of America
o......
Address comments concernin 9 this
manual to:
Control Data Corporation
Technical Pub Iications Department
2401 North Fairview Avenue
St. Paul, Minnesota 55113
or use Com~ent Sheet in the back
of this manual.
v/vi
MANUAL TO EQUIPMENT LEVEL CORRELATION
This manual refleds the equipment configurations listed below.
EXPLANATION: Locate the equipment type and series number, as shown on the equipment FCO log, in the list below.
Immediately to the right of the series number is an FCO number. If that number and all of the numbers underneath it match
all of the numbers on the equipment FCO log, then this manual accurately reRects the equipment.
EQUIPMENT TYPE
SERIES
WITH FCO'S
COMMENTS
CC555-A
A01
-
ECO 10653 (Release ECO)
CC555-B
A01
-
ECO 10653 (Release ECO)
0198'1'•2
62957400 A
vii
MANUAL TO EQUIPMENT LEVEL CORRELATION (CONTD)
EQUIPMENT TYPE
SERIES WITH FCO'S
COMMENTS
CC555-C
AOl
-
ECO 16053 (Release ECO)
CC555-D
AOl
-
ECO 10653 (Release ECO)
01987-3
viii
62957400 A
MANUAL TO EQUIPMENT LEVEL CORRELATION (CONTD)
'
I
1'--
l
EQUIPMENT TYPE
COMMENTS
SERIES WITH FCC'S
CC555-E
AOl
-
ECO 10656 (Release ECO)
CC555-F
AOl
-
ECO 10653 (Release ECO)
CA150-A
AOl
---
ECO N/A
CA150-B
AOl
---
ECO N/A
CA150-C
AOl
·---
ECO N/A
CA150-D
AOl
---
ECO N/A
'
OIU7-3
62957400 B
ix/x
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
New features, as well as changes, deletions, and additions to information in this manual are indicated by bars
in the margins or by a dot near the page number if the entire page is affected. A bar by the page number
indicates pagination rather than content has changed.
PAGE
Front Cover
Title Sheet
Updates Sheet
SFC
t
PAGE
REV
-
SFC
t
PAGE
REV
SFC t
REV
xxviii
A
4-5
A
1-1
A
4-6
A
1-2
A
A
A
4-7
4-8
A
4-9
A
A
vi
A
1-3
1-4
vii
A
1-5
A
viii
A
A
ix
B
1-6
1-7
4-10
4-11
A
4-12
A
X
A
1-8
A
4-13
A
xi
A
1-9
A
A
xii
A
1-10
A
4-14
4-15
xiii
A
A
4-16
A
xiv
A
1-11
1-12
A
A
XV
B
A
xvi
A
1-13
1-14
A
4-17
4-18
4-19
xvii
B
A
4-20
A
xviii
A
1-15
1-16
A
4-21
A
xix
A
1-17
A
5-1
A
XX
A
1-18
A
5-2
A
xxi
A
1-19
A
5-3
A
xxii
A
2-1
A
5-4
A
xxiii
A
A
5-5
A
xxiv
B
3-1
4-1
A
5-6
A
XXV
A
4-2
A
5-7
A
xxvi
A
A
A
5-8
5-9
A
xxvii
4-3
4-4
v
B
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
t SFC Software Feature Change
629457400 B
xi
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (CONTD)
PAGE
SFC t
REV
PAGE
SFC t
REV
PAGE
SFC
1
REV
5-10
A
5-39
A
6-8
A
5-11
A
5-40
A
6-9
A
5-12
A
5-41
A
6-10
A
5-13
A
5-42
A
6-11
A
5-14
A
5-43
A
6-12
A
5-15
A
5-44
A
6-13
A
5-16
A
5-45
A
6-14
A
5-17
A
5-46
A
6-15
A
5-18
A
5-47-
A
6-16
A
5-19
A
5-48
A
6-17
A
5-20
A
5-49
A
6-18
A
5-21
A
5-50
A
6-19
A
5-22
A
5-51
A
6-20
A
5-23
A
5-52
A
6A-1
A
5-24
A
5-53
A
6A-2
A
5-25
A
5-54
A
6A-3
A
5-26
A
5-55
A
6A-4
A
5-27
A
5-56
A
6A-5
A
5-28
A
5-57
A
6A-6
A
5-29
A
5-58
A
6A-7
A
5-30
A
5-59
A
6A-8
A
5-31
A
5-60
A
6A-9
A
5-32
A
6-1
A
6A-10
A
5-33
A
6-2
A
6A-11
A
5-34
A
6-3
A
6A-12
A
5-35
A
6-4
A
6A-13
A
5-36
A
6-5
A
6A-14
A
5-37
A
6-6
A
6A-15
A
5-38
A
6-7
A
6A-16
t SFC Software Feature Change
xii
A
ozou-z
62957400 A
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (CONTD)
PAGE
REV
PAGE
SFC 1
REV
PAGE
SFC
1
REV
6A-17
A
68-27
A
68-56
A
6A-18
6A-19
A
A
68-28
A
68-29
A
68-57
68-58
A
A
68-1
A
A
68-30
A
68-59
A
A
A
68-60
A
A.R. ,f.J_
A
68-2
(
SFC I
68-3
68-4
A
68-31
68-32
A
68-33
A
6C-1
A
68-5
A
68-34
A
6C-2
A
68-6
A
68-35
A
6C-3
A
68-7
A
68-36
A
6C-4
A
68-8
A
A
6C-5
A
68-9
68-10
A
68-37
68-38
A
6C-6
A
A
6C-7
A
68-11
A
68-39
68-40
A
6C-8
A
68-12
A
68-41
A
6C-9
A
68-13
A
68-42
A
6C-10
A
68-14
A
68-43
A
6C-11
A
68-15
A
68-44
A
6C-12
A
68-16
A
68-45
A
6C-13
A
68-17
A
68-46
A
6C-14
A
68-18
A
68-47
A
6C-15
A
68-19
A
68-48
A
6C-16
A
68-20
A
68-49
A
68-21
A
68-50
A
68-22
A
A
6C-17
A
68-51
6C-18
A
68-23
A
A
68-52
6C-19
A
68-24
A
A
6C-20
68-53
A
68-25
A
A
68-54
6C-21
A
68-26
A
A
68-55
6C-22
A
60-1
A
t SFC Software Feature Change
62957400 A
A
02012-2
xiii
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (CONTD)
PAGE
SFC t
REV
PAGE
SFC t
REV
PAGE
SFC
t
REV
60-2
A
60-31
A
7-22
A
60-3
A
60-32
A
7-23
A
60-4
A
60-33
A
7-24
A
60-5
A
60-34
A
A
60-6
60-7
A
60-35
A
7-25
7-26
A
AD-~1.
A
7-27
A
60-8
A
6E-1
A
7-28
A
60-9
60-10
A
6E-2
A
7-29
A
A
7-1
A
7-30
A
60-11
A
7-2
A
7-31
A
60-12
A
B
7-32
A
60-13
A
7-3
7-4
A
7-33
A
60-14
A
7-5
A
7-34
A
60-15
A
7-6
A
7-35
A
60-16
A
7-7
A
7-36
A
60-17
A
7-8
A
7-37
A
60-18
A
7-9
A
7-38
A
60-19
A
A
A
A
7-39
7-40
A
60-20
7-10
7-11
60-21
A
7-12
A
7-41
A
60-22
A
7-13
A
7-42
A
60-23
A
7-14
A
7-43
A
60-24
A
7-15
A
7-44
A
60-25
A
7-16
A
7-45
A
60-26
A
7-17
A
7-46
A
60-27
A
7-18
A
7-47
A
60-28
A
7-19
A
7-48
A
60-29
A
7-20
A
7-49
A
60-30
A
7-21
A
7-50
A
A
A
t SFC Software Feature Change
xiv
62957400 B
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (CONTD)
PAGE
t
REV
7-51
7-52
7-53
7-54
7-55
7-56
7-57
7-58
7-59
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
7-(;JJ
A
A
A
A
A
A
7-61
7-62
7-63
7-64
7-65
7-66
7-67
7-68
7-69
7-70
7-71
7-72
7-73
7-74
7-75
7-76
7-77
7-78
7-79
t
SFC
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
SFC Software Feature Change
62957400 B
PAGE
SFC
1
REV
7-80
7-81
A
A
7-82
7-83
7-84
7-85
7-86
7-87
7-88
7-89
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
7-90
7-91
7-92
7-93
7-94
7-95
7-96
7-97
7-98
7-99
7-100
7-101
7-102
7-103
7-104
7-105
8-1
A-1
A-2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
PAGE
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-8
A-9
A-10
B-1
B-2
Appendix c
---- -·-·
Appendix D
~-
Comment Sheet
Moiler
Back Cover
SFC
T
REV
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
-
-
-
A
A
A
A
A
A
02012-2
xv/xvi
'
PREFACE
r
This manual contains maintenance information for the CDC® 752 Keyboard Display
Terminal. This terminal is a remote communication device that operates in a conversational mode with a central processor at speeds of 110 to 9600 baud. The terminal is available in different configurations to meet both national and international
standards, and to provide compatibility with different types of communication
facilities. The genealogy chart in the Parts Data section of this manual provides
the equipment configuration for each type of terminal. Additionally, three different
types of character printers are also available for use as peripheral devices on the
terminal.*
·
Maintenance information found in this manual is intended for field service personnel,
and for repair center or technical support personnel. Field service maintenance
information is found principally in sections 11 4, 6, and 8 of this manual. Repair
center maintenance information is contained in sections 5 and 7. In addition to
this manual, field servicing of the terminal requires use of the 752 Keyboard
Display Terminal Operators Guide/Reference Manual/Installation Instructions and
may require use of the Matrix Printer Reference and Field Service manual if the
terminal is configured with an impact printer as a peripheral. Following is a listing
of manuals associated with the operation and maintenance of the terminal. With
the exception of those manuals previously noted, most of the manuals in the listing
are for use by repair center personnel.
Title
Publication Number
752 Keyboard Display Terminal Operators Guide/
Reference Manual/Installation Instructions
Video Display Unit Hardware Maintenance Manual
Nonimpact Printer Hardware Maintenance Manual
62957300
62961800
62952500
Additional copies of this manual or the previously listed manuals are available from:
Control Data Corporation
Technical Publications Department
2401 North Fairview Avenue
St. Paul, Minnesota 55113
*Two appendixes have been added as interim change packages:
1) appendix C has information on the 82-Key Typewriter
Keyboard and Numeric Pad (previously only the 80-Key was
mentioned; 2) appendix D, contains DDLT's _and Procedures
for the 70-LPM Impact Printer. Equipments CA150A-D are
included for the new 82-Key Typewriter Keyboard.
62957400 8
xvii
Title
Matrix
Matrix
Matrix
Matrix
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Operator Handbook
Reference and Field Service Manual
Family Spare Parts List
Parts Identification Manual
Publication Number
76670900
95390800
95366300
76671100
These manuals are available from:
Control Data Corporation
Literature and Distribution Services
8001 East Bloomington Freeway
Minneapolis, Minnesota 55420
xviii
62957400 A
CONTENTS
Section
1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . ....
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
Operator Controls ••••••••••••••••••.••••• 1-6
System Display Terminal Interface •••••••••••••• 1-7
Functions
Features
Display Unit • . • . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
Power Supply • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Display Assembly ••••••••••••••••••
Logic Module Assembly •••••••••••••••••••
Keyboard Assembly ••••••••.•••••••••••••••
Nonimpact Printer • . . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . .
Print Meehan ism • . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . • . .
Interface and Control Logic Cards ••••••••••••
Power Supply •.•••••••••••••••...•••••
1-9
Features Summary • • • • • • • • . • • • . • • • • . •••••.•
1-14
1-11
1-11
1-11
Impact Printer • • • • • • • • • • • . • • . • • • • • . • • • • • • 1-11
Print Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Interface and Control Logic Cards •••••••••••• 1-13
Power Supp I y • . . . • . . • . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . 1-13
Equipment Characteristics •••••••••••••••••••••
Environmental Requirements ••••••••••••••••••
Display Terminal-Electrical ••••••••••••••••••
Nonimpact Printer-Electrical •••••••••••••••••
Impact Printer-Electrical ••••••••••••••••••••
Display Terminal-Physical •••••••••••••••••••
Non impact Printer- Phys i ca I • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Impact Printer-Physical
•••••••••••.••••••••
1-15
1-16
1-16
1-16
1-17
1-17
1-17
1-17
2
OPERATION
2-1
3
INSTALLATION AND CHECKOUT
3-1
4
THEORY OF OPERATION
Keyboard Assembly • • • • • • • •
Video Display Assembly • . • • •
Cathode-Ray Tube (CRT) • •
Vertical Choke • . . . . . . .
Mon itor PC Board
• . •• • •
+15-V de Regulator Assembly
CRT Yoke and CRT Cap • • •
62957400 A
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
.
4-2
4-5
4-5
• • • . • • • . . • . • . . •• . .
4- 6
4-5
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-7
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4-8
xix
Page
Section
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-8
High-Voltage Transformer
Logic Module Assembly o • o • • o • o o o o • o o o • • o o o o o •
Rear Panel Assembly •••••••••••••••••••••••••
Power Supply Assembly o • o o o o o o o • o o o • • o • o • o • o o
4-11
4-12
Nonimpact Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Impact Printer ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 4-21
Miscellaneous Terminal Components o o • • • o o o • o o • o • o 4-21
5
DIAGRAMS
Logic Diagram Contents Sheet o • o • • o o • • • o • o • o • o • •
Key To Diagrams Physical Location Codes o • o o • o • o o o o
Key To Symbols o • o o • • o o • o • • o o o • o o o • • o o o o • o •
Diagram 100 Main Timing, Horizontal Scan, and
Vertical Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram 101 Horizontal and Vertical Control, Vertical
Address Counter, and Read;Write Control o • • o • o o • o o
Diagram 102 Memory Output Latch,- Character
Generator, Video Serializer, Blink Counter, Display
Cursor Fl ip-Fiop •••••••••••••.••••••.••••.•
Diagram 103 Y Cursor Counter and Mux, and Video
Driver Circuit ••.•.•.••.••••••.••..••.•...
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-8
5-10
5-14
Diagram 104 Cursor Function Decode, Cursor Position
Decode, Last Line Counter • o o o o • • o • o • • • • o • o • o 5-16
Diagram 105 UART, X Compare, Cursor Compare o • • 5-18
Diagrams 106 and 107 Memory Bank A and Memory
Bank B • • . . . . . • . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . 5-22
Diagram 108 Clear Control, Receive, and Keyboard
Centro I • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-26
Diagram 109 Memory Address Conversion, Data
Decode
•••.•••••••••••••• • •• • • • • • • • • • • 5-30
Diagram 110 Baud Counter, Modem Control o o o • • • 5-32
Diagram 111 Phase Lock Oscillator, Current Loop
Receive and Transmit o o • o • • • • • • o • • • o • • o • o o o • 5-34
Diagram 112 Internal Switches, Break and Alarm,
Last-Line Compare
••••••••••••.••••••••••• 5-36
Diagram 113 X Cursor Control, Y Cursor Control,
and X Cursor Counter o • • o o o • • • • • o • o • • o o • • • o o 5-38
Diagram 114 Modem Interface, RTS Control o • • • • • 5 .. 40
Diagram 115 Baud Select, X/Y Position Control o • o • 5-44
Timing Diagram • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . . . • . . • • 5-46
Block Diagram •••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 5-49
AC/DC Power Interconnect Diagram o • o o o • o • • • o o o • • 5-50
Schematic Diagram, Met Pwr Supply : ••••••••••••• 5-51
Interconnect ion Diagram Signa I o o • o • o • o o • • • • • o • • 5-52
5-53
Schematic Diagram, 6CTD-O (Rear Panel Interconnect}
XX
62957400 A
)
Section
Schematic Diagram Video Display Electronics Non
Composite Video (68ND-O) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5-54
Schematic Diagram 68ND-O (Non Composite Video
Board) •.••••.••......•••••..•.•......•. 5-56
5-60
Schematic Diagram Regulator Assy (+15V)
6
MAINTENANCE
6-1
6-3
Maintenance Aids . . • . . . • • . . • . . . • . . • . • • • • • . •
Preventive Maintenance •••••••••••••••••••••• 6-3
6-3
Keyboard Display PMTs
6-4
Keyboard Display PMTPs
6-5
Nonimpact Printer PMTs
6-6
Nonimpact Printer PMTPs
Impact Printer PMTs •••••••• _••••••••••••••• 6-8
Impact Printer PMTPs •••••••••••••••••••••• 6-9
Diagnostic and Corrective Maintenance •••••••••••• 6-12
Diagnostic Tables . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • 6-12
Condit ions Quadrant •••••••••••••••••••• 6-13
Situations Quadrant
•••••••••••••••••••• 6-13
Sequence Quadrant ••••••••••••••••••••• 6-15
Actions Quadrant • . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . 6-16
General Instructions •••••••••••••••••••••• 6-16
DOLTs and Procedures
•••••••••••••••.••••• 6-16
Procedure TS1
Turning On Subsystem Power ••• 6A-2
Procedure TS2 Turning Off Subsystem Power ••• 6A-3
Procedure TS3 Removing/Replacing Subsystem
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-3
Procedure TS4 Checking Subsystem Cables
6A-4
Procedure TS5 Removing/Replacing Subsystem
Equipments
• . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . • . . . • . • • 6A-4
6A-5
Procedure T56 Term ina I Subsystem Checkout
Turning On Display Terminal
Procedure CRT1 Power • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 68-5
Procedure CRT2 Turning Off Display Terminal
Power ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 68-5
Procedure CRT3
Checking the Keyboard ••••• 68-5
Procedure CRT4 Replacing the Keyboard
68-8
Procedure CRT5 Removing the Display Cabinet
Hood ••••••••••••••••••••••••.•••• 68-9
Procedure CRT 6 Check/Replace Rear Panel
Components • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 68-10
Procedure CRT7 Check/Repl~ce Power Supply
Assembly
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-14
Suggested Emergency Maintenance Procedure •••••••••
. . . . .. . . . . ... . . . . . ..
. ... .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. .
. . . . . . . . .. .. .......
62957400 A
xxi
Section
Procedure CRT8 Check/Replace '15-V Regulator
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68- 18
Procedure CRT9 Measuring Voltages on Monitor
PC Board • • • . • • • • . • . • • • • . • • • . • • • • . . • • 68-21
Procedure CRTlO Video Monitor Adjustments ••• 6B-22
Check/Replace Front- Rear
Procedure CRT 11 INTENSITY Control ••••••••••••••••••••• 6B-26
Procedure CRT12 Replacing Monitor
PC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-27
Procedure CRT13 Replacing High-Voltage
Transformer • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • • • • • . • 68-28
Procedure CRT14 Replacing the Vertical
Choke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-29
Procedure CRT 15
Check/Replace CRT Cap ••••• 6B-30
Procedure CRT 16
Replacing Monitor CRT •••••• 6B-31
Procedure CRT 17
Replacing CRT Yoke ••••••• 6B-33
Replacing Video Monitor
Procedure CRT 18
Assembly . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-35
Procedure CRT19 Alarm
Check/Replace Audible
. . . . . . . . . . • . . • • • . • • . . . . . . • . . . . 68-36
Procedure CRT20 -
Replacing Control Logic
PC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68-37
Nonimpact Printer Corrective Maintenance
Procedures General •••••••••••••••••••• 6C-3
Procedure Nl Pl
Paper Loading and Power On ••• 6C-3
Procedure NIP2 1-kHz Oscillator Adjustment ••• 6C-4
Procedure NIP3 Retriggerable One-Shot (ROS)
Adiustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . 6C-4
Procedure N I P4 Brake LED Block and Brake
One-Shot Adjustment ••••••••••••••••••••• 6C-5
Procedure N I P5 Head Compensating Circuit
Ad iustment • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6C-6
Procedure Nl P6 Carriage Return LED Block
Adiustment . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • 6C-6
Procedure Nl P7 Printhead Actuation
Ad iustment . . • . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C- 10
Procedure NIPS Print Quality Adjustments ••••• 6C-12
Procedure NIP9 Out-of-Paper Switch
Ad iustment • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6C- 12
Procedure Nl PlO Serial Input Clock
Ad iustment . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C- 13
Procedure Nl Pll
Replacing Print Mechanism ••• 6C-14
Procedure Nl P12 Replacing ~ower Supply •••••• 6C-15
Procedure NIP13 Replacing/Adjusting
Miscellaneous Parts ••••••••••••••••••••• 6C-15
xxii
62957400 A
(
Section
Impact Printer Corrective Maintenance
Procedures General • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6D-5
Procedure IMPl Turning On Impact Printer
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-6
Procedure IMP2 Turning Off Impact Printer
Power . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-8
Procedure IMP3 Installing/Aligning Paper Forms
in Impact Printer • . • • • • • • • . • . • • • • • • • . • .
Procedure IMP4 -
Installing Ribbon in Impact
Printer
• • . • • • . • . • • • • • • • • • • . . • • . . . • •
60- 10
Printer
••••••••••••.•••..•..••..••.
60-12
Procedure IMPS -
I
Installing Format Tape in Impact
Procedure IMP6 Opening/Removing Impact
Printer Cabinet •••••••••••••••••••••••
Procedure IMP? Removing/Replacing Logic
Chassis PC Boards •••••••••••••••••••••
Procedure IMPS Checking/Setting Internal
Switches and Jumpers • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Procedure IMP9 Removing/Replacing Driver
PC Board • • . • • • . • . . • . . . • . • . . . . . . . • • .
Procedure IMP10 Removing/Replacing Line
Start PC Board • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Procedure IMP11 Removing/Replacing Character
Start PC Board • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check/Replace Fuses • • • • • •
Procedure IMP12 Procedure IMP13 Removing/Replacing Internal
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure IMP14 Checking Internal Cables • • •
Procedure IMP15 Mechanism Checks/
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure IMP16 Electrical Checks/
Adiustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure IMP17 Parts Replacement • • • • • • • •
j
I
INDEX
7
6D-13
6D-14
6D-15
60- 15
6D-16
6D- 16
6D-17
60-18
6D-19
60-20
60-20
6D-21
6E-1
PARTS DATA
Genealogy Chart . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts Data
7-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 1
Spare Parts Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Genealogy Chart 752 Display
••••••••••
752 Display Terminal •• ,•••••••• , • • • • •
Power Supply Assembly • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
PC Card Assembly 6AFD-O (Met Power Supply)
Heat Sink Assy
62957400 A
60-8
.
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
•
. 7-2
• 7-3
• 7-4
• 7-18
• 7-20
•. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •. •. . .
7-22
xxiii
W/L Heat Sink Assy • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7·24
8
W/L Power Supply • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Cable Assy Kybd Internal • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Ground Wire Assy • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Cable Assy DC Power • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
CRT Ground Clip Assy • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Logic Module Assy (61407657) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
P.C. Card Assy, 6CUD-O (Logic Module) • • • • • • • • • • •
Logic Module Assy (61407656) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • •
PC Card Assy 6CVD-O (Logic Module with Current
Loop} • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Rear Panel Assy 60 Hz • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
W/L Rear Panel Assy 60Hz • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Rear Panel Assy 50 Hz • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
W/L Rear Pane I Assy 50 Hz • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
P C Card Assembly 6 CTD-0 (Rear Panel Signal Wiring) • • •
Keyboard Assembly 80 Key • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Cable Assy Keyboard External • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Keyboard Assembly 80 Key (Shielded) • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Cable Assy Keyboard External • • • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • •
Video Display Assembly Non-Composite
•••••••••••
P C Card Assy 6BND-O (Composite Video) • • • • • • • • • • •
Regulator Assy (+15 Volts) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
W/L Regulator Assy (+15V) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Cable Assy -Yoke • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
CRT Socket Assy . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
W/L Video Display • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Choke Assy • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . .
High Voltage Transformer Assy • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Cable Assy Video Display • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Front Panel Assembly, Mod 1
••••••••••••••••••
Intensity Control Cable Assy • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Cable Assembly Rear Panel -Monitor
•••••••••••••
752DisplayTerm ••••••••••••••••••••••••••
SPL Printer, Serial, Thermal 60Hz •••••••••••••••
SPL Printer, Serial, Thermal 50 Hz •••••••••••••••
7-25
WIRE LISTS
8-1
7-26
7-30
7-32
7-34
7-36
7-38
7-42
7-44-
7-48
7-51
7-52
7-55
7-56
7-58
7-YJ
7-64
7-66
7-70
7-72
7-76
7-78
7-80
7-82
7-84
7-86
7-88
7-92
7-94
7-96
7-98
7-102
7-104
7-105
APPENDIXES
I
xxiv
A
CODES AND CHARACTER SETS
A-1
B
MOS CIRCUIT PRECAUTIONS
8-1
c
82-Key Typewriter Keyboard and Numeric Pad
C-l
D
70-LPM Impact Printer DDLT's and Procedures D-l
62957400 B
FIGURES
Section
Figure
Page
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
4
Display Terminal Configurations ••••••••••••
Display Unit Components •••••••••••••••••
Keyboard Layout ••••••••••••••••••••••
Display Terminal Rear Panel
••••••••••••••
NonimpactPrinter •••••••••••••••••••••
Nonimpact Printer Components •••••••••••••
Impact Printer ••••••••••••••••••••••••
Impact Printer Components
•••••••••••••••
Display Terminal Dimensions ••••••••••••••
Nonimpact Printer Dimensions •••••••••••••
Impact Printer Dimensions • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1-2
1-3
1-5
1-6
1-10
1-10
1-12
1-12
1-18
1-19
1-19
THEORY OF OPERATION
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
Functional Block Diagram of Display Terminal ••• 4-1
Keyboard Module ••••••••••••••••••••• 4-2
Location of Video Display Subassemblies ••••••• 4-6
+15-V de Regulator Assembly •••••••••••••• 4-7
Location of Logic Module Assembly PC Board
in Display Terminal ••••••••••••••••••• 4-9
Logic Module Assembly PC Board Block
Diagram . . . • • . • • • . . . . • . . • . • . • . . . . . • 4-10
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
Terminal Rear Panel Location and Layout ••••••• 4-12
Top and Front Views of Power Supply Module •••• 4-13
Location of Power Supply in Display Terminal •••• 4-14
Nonimpact Printer Subassemblies •••••••••••• 4-15
Nonimpact Printer Wiring Harness ••••••••••• 4-16
Nonimpact Printer Block Diagram ••••.•••••• 4-17
Nonimpact Printer Print-Mechanism Assembly •••• 4-17
Nonimpact Printer Character Print Timing •••••• 4-18
Nonimpact Printer Line Feed Operation
4-16
Non impact Printer Carriage Return Operation
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Timing • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
62957400 A
XXV
Section
6
Figure
Page
MAINTENANCE
6-1
6-2
TS1
TS2
TS3
Example of a Diagnostic Decision Logic
Table • . . . . . . . • . • • . • • • . • . • • • • • . . .
Arrangement of Diagnostic and Corrective
Maintenance Information
••••••••••••••
Terminal Cabling
••••••••••••••••••••
Data Set Connector Pin Assignments for Unipolar,
Full-Duplex, Current Loop Communication
Channe I • • . • • • • • • . • • .. • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Data Set Connector Pin Assignments for Unipolar,
Half-Duplex, Current Loop Communication
Channe I ••••••••••••••••.••••••••
6B-39
Control Code Dot Matrix Formations and
Octal Codes . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Module Components ••••••••••••
Keyboard Display Cabinet Hood Removal •••••
CP2/CJ2 and Rear Panel Locations •••••••••
Rear Panel Removal and Connections ••••••••
Monitor Assembly and Bezel Screw Removal ••••
Power Supply Module Layout and Input/Output
Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+15-V de Regulator Location •••••••••••••
+15-V de Regulator Assembly Detail
(Rear View) • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
Monitor PC Board Voltages ••••••••••••••
Location of Video Monitor Adjustments •••••••
Yoke Adjustments •••••••••••••••••••••
Monitor PC Board Adjustments ••••••••••••
Character Resolution ••••••••••••••••••
CRT11
CRT12
CRT13
CRT14
CRT15
xxvi
•••••••••••••••••••••••••
CRT2
CRT9
CRTlO
6A-15
6A-15
6A-16
6A-17
Raster Display
CRT3
CRT4
CRT5
CRT6
CRT7
CRT8
6-17
6A-14
................•.•..•
TS4
TS5
CRT1
Impact Printer Test Print Pattern •••••••••••
Keyboard Display Internal Switches and
Controls
~ 14
6B-40
6B-41
6B-41
6B-42
6B-43
6B-44
6B-45
6B-46
6B-47
6B-48
6B-48
6B-49
6B-49
6B-50
62957400A
r
Section
Figure
CRT16
CRT17
CRT1S
CRT19
CRT20
CRT21
CRT22
CRT23
CRT24
CRT25
CRT26
CRT27
CRT2S
CRT29
NIP1
NIP2
NIP3
NIP4
NIPS
NIP6
NIP7
NIPS
NIP9
NIP10
IMP1
IMP2
IMP3
IMP4
IMP5
IMP6
IMP7
IMPS
IMP9
IMP10
IMP11
IMP12
IMP13
IMP14
IMP15
IMP16
62957400 A
Applying Overlay to CRT Screen
••••••••••
Identifying Display Distortion
••••••••••••
Attaching Correction Magnet to Dowel
••••••
Magnet Placement and Distortion Correction
Intensity Control Assembly Location •••••••••
Monitor PC Board Connect ions ••••••••••.•
Monitor PC Board Placement •••••••••••••
High-Voltage Transformer Installation •••••••
CRT Cap Remove I •••••••••••••••.•••.•
CRT Yoke Assembly ••••••••••••••••••••
Static Discharge Spring Location •••••••••••
Position of Shielding Sleeve •••••••••••••
Monitor Assembly Removal •••••••••••••••
Location of Audible Alarm and Control Logic
PC Board •••••••• • • · • • • • • • • • • • • • _. · •
Paper loading, Nonimpact Printer ••••••••••
Printer, Front View • • • • • •• • • • ••• • • • • • •
Printer, Right Side View
•••••••••••••••
Printer, Right Front View • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Printhead Home Position ••••••••••••••••
Guide Bar Arm Travel • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Damper Pad Adjustment •••••••••••••••••
Printer, Rear View • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
6B-53
6B-53
6B-53
6B-54
6B-55
6B-56
6B-56
6B-57
6B-5S
6B-5S
6B-59
6B-59
6B-60
6B-61
6C-16
6C-17
6C-1S
6C-19
6C-19
6C-20
6C-20
6C-21
6C-21
6C-22
6D-23
6D-24
6D-24
6D-25
6D-25
6D-26
Serial Clock Timing •••••••••••••••••••
Location of Major Replaceable Modules •••••.
Forms Installing/Aligning in Impact Printer ••••
Ribbon Path in Impact Printer •••••••••••••
Ribbon positioning on Spools •••••••••.•••
Format Tape Path in Impact Printer •••••••••
Format Tape Characteristics
•••••••••••••
Logic Chassis Board Locations
••••••••••••
Internal Switches and Jumpers (RS-232-C
Interface Board) •.•••.•••••..•.••.•• 6D-27
Solenoid Driver Board with Fuse
ldentifi cation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6D-2S
Power Supply Board with Fuse Identification •••• 6D-29
Impact Printer Major Assemblies ••••••••••• 6D-30
Impact Printer Internal Connectors ••.••••••• 6D-31
60-Hz AC Distribution ••.•••••••••.•••• 6D-32
Universal AC Distribution •••.•••.••••.•• 6D-33
DC Distribution and Ribbon Logic ••.•.•••.. 6D-34
Configuration Drawing ••••••••.•••••••. 6D-35
Chassis Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6D-36
xxvii
TABLES
Section
1
Table
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1-1
1-2
1-3
4
TS3
TS4
CRTl
CRT2
CRT3
NIP1
NIP2
IMP1
• • • • • • • • • • • 4-4
Logic Module Assembly Test Point Data
••••••
5-2
Keyboard Display PMTs
••••••••••••••••
Nonimpact Printer PMTs ••••••••••••••••
Impact Printer PMTs
••••••••••••••••••
DOLT for Terminal Subsystem •••••••••••••
Voltage Level Channel (RS-232-C/CCITT V. 24)
Interface Connector Pin Assignments •••••••
Peripheral Connector Pin Assignments
•••••••
Keyboard Interface Signal Lines •••••••••••
DOLT for Keyboard Display ••••••••••.•••
DOLT for Keyboard Display ••••••••••••••
DOLT for Keyboard Display ••••••••••••••
DOLT for Nonimpact Printer ••••••••••••••
Print Quality . . • . . . . • . • . . . . . • . . . . . . .
DOLT for Impact Printer
6-4
6-5
6-8
6A-1
6A-18
6A-18
6A-19
68-1
68-2
68-3
6C-l
6C-22
60-1
PARTS DATA
7-1
xxviii
A
Keyboard Interface Signal Lines
MAINTENANCE
6-1
6-2
6-3
TSl
TS2
7
1-8
DIAGRAMS
5-1
6
1-1
1-7
THEORY OF OPERATION
4-1
5
Available Terminal Configurations
•••••••••
Peripheral Connector Pin Assignments
•••••••
. Voltage Level Channel Interface Connector
Pin Assignments • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Explanation of Column Headings on Assembly
Parts Lists • . • . . . . • • • . • . . . • . . . . • . . .
7-2
62957400 A
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1
This section describes the general functions, features, and equipment characteristics
of the 752 Keyboard Display Terminal and of the two printers that may be associated
with the terminal. It includes descriptions of both the basic terminal and its avai 1able variations.
The basic terminal is a 50- or 60-Hz terminal with an 80-key keyboard and a
modem interface. The user can select 60-Hz versions of the terminal with a current
loop interface for connection to a current loop communication facility, or he can
select 50-Hz versions with a current loop interface and/or FTZ-approved shielding.*
The features incorporated in each type of 752 Keyboard Display Terminal are indicated with Xs in table 1-1.
TABLE 1-1. AVAilABLE TERMINAL CONFIGURATIONS
--
L
TERMINAL TYPE
"
-
---
-~
60Hz
50 Hz
CURRENT LOOP
752-10
X
-
-
752-11
X
752-20
752-21
U ndes ig noted
Undesignated
-
-
X
FTZ SHIELDING
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
Additionally, the display terminal is available with either a nonimpact thermal
printer or an impact printer. The display terminal and the two different printers
are shown in figure 1-1 •
* FTZ (Fernmelde Technisches Zentralamt) is a German licensing agency that sets
limits on the radio frequency emissions generated by electrical and electronic
devices. Many European countries have adopted FTZ _requirements for the shielding of electronic equipment in order to control the level of stray radio frequencies
in the atmosphere.
62957400 A
1-1
DISPLAY
TERMINAL
02201
NOTE: BROKEN LINES SHOW INTERCONNECTING CABLE PATHS.
Figure 1-1. Display Terminal Configurations
FUNCTIONS
The display terminal functions as a stand-alone, remote input/output device for a
computer system. It performs input and terminal control functions via a detachable
keyboard assembly, and it monitors both input and output functions on a 12-inch
crt display screen. Included within the display terminal are all of the necessary
electronics, including an asynchronous, bit-serial, word-serial, communication
facility interface, to permit it to operate in conversational mode in the same
manner as a teletypewriter unit. The display terminal, however, incorporates many
features not commonly found in teletypewriter terminals. The addition of one of
the available printer peripherals provides the terminal with hardcopy printout
capabilities.
FEATURES
The following text highlights six major features of the terminal. These are the
display unit, keyboard, operator control, system/terminal interface, nonimpact
printer, and impact printer. A features summary list follows the six major features.
Other portions of this manual describe many of these fe_atures in greater detai I; this
portion of text provides brief descriptions and a features summary to foci I i tate
fami Ii ari zation and com pari son.
1-2
62957400 A
DISPLAY UNIT
The display unit of the terminal is self-contained and includes a video display
assembly, a logic module assembly, and a power supply. The keyboard, communication line, and printer unit interfaces are part of the logic PC board. The location
of major components within the display unit is shown in figure 1-2.
VIDEO DISPLAY
ASSEMBLY
LOGIC MODULE
ASSEMBLY
Figure 1-2. Display Unit Components
Power Supply
The power supply furnishes all necessary voltages for the display unit from either
115 V ac or 220/240 V ac (nominal), 50- or 60-Hz power input sources.
Video Display Assembly
,
__
The video display assembly uses a 12-inch (diagonal measurement) crt, having a
P4 white-phosphor coating and a nonglare faceplate. Nominal raster area on the
display screen is an area approximately 7.8 in by 5 in (198 mm by 127 mm). This
area can display 24 lines of up to 80 characters per line, with each character displayed in a 7- by 9-dot matrix. Character display is accomplished by selectively
blanking and unblanking the dots within this matrix. A display character refresh
memory holds all the characters for display and refreshes the display screen at a rate
equal to the frequency of the ac input power (50 or 60 Hz).
62957400 A
1-3
logic Module Assembly
The display recognizes and generates 128 character codes; the 95 alphanumeric
character codes recommended by American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
standard X3.4-1968, and the 33 control codes recommended by ANSI standard
X3.1973. During actual operation, the unit displays all 95 alphanumeric characters
and responds to 13 of the 33 control codes as they are received. This leaves 20
control codes for use in specific functions or operations (refer to appendix of this
manual for transmit/receive code set). All 128 codes can be transmitted during
normal online operation of the terminal.
Character entries onto the display screen occur upon code reception or are made
via the keyboard. To ensure entry at the desired screen location, a blinking cursor
underscores the location of the next character entry. During consecutive character
entries, the cursor progresses across a display line through all 80 character positions.
At character position 73, a beeper signal sounds to warn the operator that the end
of a line is approaching. This line-by-line manner of cursor advance continues
unti I the last character position of the Jast line is reached. As that character
is keyed in, the cursor resets to its home position (upper left corner of display
area) or causes the display to scroll; that is, the cursor returns to the beginning of
the last line while all lines already entered scroll up one line (the first line is
lost as it scrolls off the screen).
Construction of the display unit is modular as indicated in figure 1-2. All circuits
are solid-state, and with the exception of some of the power supply and high
voltage circuits, all use integrated circuit technology. Both the display unit and
the keyboard enclosures are made of heavy-gauge, molded, expanded-plastic,
foam material covered with a durable vinyl paint. The overall design of the display
unit lends itself to reliability, and the modular construction facilitates maintenance
procedures.
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
The keyboard assembly, hereafter referred to as keyboard, serves as both a termi na I
control and data input unit for the display terminal operator. The terminal control
function of the keyboard is discussed briefly in the following portion of this section
and more thoroughly in the operation section of the associated Operators Guide/
Reference Manual (see preface). This portion of the text deals principally with
the keyboard as a data input unit. The keyboard uses a rna in key c I uster of 67 keys
similar in appearance to a standard teletypewriter keyboard. It also has a 13-key
numeric-entry cluster, to facilitate making numeric entries, located just to the
right of the main key cluster.
-)
1-4
62957400 A
All keycaps are wear-resistant plastic with molded-in characters ta ensure legibility
even after long usage, and all have a matte-finish surface to minimize glare. The
layout of the keys on the keyboard is shown in figure 1-3.
01499-6
Figure 1-3. Keyboard Layout
The keyboard is a modular unit that attaches to the display unit via an interconnecting cable approximately 32 in (813 mm) long. All power required by the keyboard
comes from the display unit power supply via this cable, and all data control codes
generated by the keyboard are passed on to the logic circuits of the display unit
via this same cable.
The keyboard features trilevel operation; that is, it operates in lowercase mode,
uppercase mode (SHIFT key actuated), and in control mode (CONTROL and character keys actuated; or SHIFT, CONTROL, and character keys actuated). In this
manner, the keyboard can be used to generate a full 128-character, ANSIcompatible code set. The complete character and code sets used in the display
terminal are included in the appendix of this manual.
Data entry from the keyboard is accomplished by typing in the desired control codes
and/or alphanumeric characters on the keyboard. During online operation, transmission occurs as each key is pressed regardless of the state of any other keys on
the keyboard. As a message is typed out and sent in the half-duplex mode of
terminal operation, it displays on the screen of the display unit to permit visual
verification of proper message format and content. Additional message verification
is provided in full-duplex mode operation, which permits only received data to be
displayed (such as transmitted data echoed back from the receiving station).
Regardless of the transmission mode selected, where the data is displayed on the
screen depends on the operating mode selected (page or scroll) and on the position
of the cursor as data entry begins.
62957400 A
1-5
OPERATOR CONTROLS
The display terminal has operator controls located on the keyboard and on the
front and rear panels of the display unit. The controls most commonly used by the
operator during display terminal operation are located on the keyboard assembly.
Following is a list of these keyboard controls; their functions are described more
thoroughly in the associated Operators Guide/Reference Manual (see preface).
•
CO indicator - on terminals having a voltage level interface, this
indicator lights to indicate the data set (modem) is ready and a carrier
frequency signal is being received from the distant station.
•
ODD PAR/NO/EVEN PAR switch - selects odd, even, or no parity
check/generate functions of the terminal.
•
FULLDUP/HALF DUP switch - directs transmit data to either the
communication interface only (FULL DUP) or to both the communication
interface and the display/printer interface.
•
ON LINE/LOCAL switch term ina I operation.
•
HIGH RA TE/300/LOW RATE switch rate for the term ina I.
•
96/64 switch
transmission.
selects 96- or 64- character code set for data
•
PAGE switch -
selects page or scroll mode of display operation.
selects online or offline mode of display
selects transmit/receive baud
Just to the right of the display screen on the front panel is a single control knob.
This is the INTENSITY control knob, used to adjust the intensity of the crt display
to suit ambient lighting conditions in the area of display terminal installation.
The display terminal rear panel, shown in figure 1-4, has the data set and peripheral
connectors, a test switch, the ac power cord, and circuit breaker CB1. CB1 serves
as the terminal on/off switch, and is used to apply or remove ac power to the terminal. The test switch is for use when testing or checking display term ina I operation.
~
0
0
PRIMARY CIRCUIT BREAKER
COUP CIRCUIT PRIMAIRE
TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT FROM POWER
SOURCE BEFORE SERVICING
0
0
® ~. ~--- ..
?jj]<§)
PERIPHERAL CONNECTOR
0
®\Fg;gj]®
DATA SET CONNECTOR
AFIN D'EVITER TOUT DANGER,
DEBRANCHEZ L.'EQUIPEMENT
AVANT DE REPARER
®
TEST
ii
NORMAL
G)
0
~
@
CBI
0
0
02143
Figure 1-4. Display Terminal Rear Panel
1-6
62957400 A
SYSTEM/DISPLAY TERMINAL INTERFACE
The display terminal has two interface connectors on the rear panel. The PERIPHERAL
CONNECTOR is used to connect either the impact printer or the nonimpact printer
to the terminal. The DATA SET CONNECTOR is used to connect the terminal to
the communication facility. Connector pin assignments for the peripheral connector
are shown in table 1-2. Pin assignments for the data set connector vary with the
type of communication facility being interfaced, either current loop or voltage
level. Pin assignments for voltage level channel connections are shown in table 1-3.
Pin assignments for current loop channe Is are much simpler and are described a
little later in this portion of the text.
The printer interface is compatible with RS-232-C and CCITT V .24 recommendations
for full- or half-duplex, asynchronous communication facilities. The purpose of
the printer interface is to enable hardcopy records of communications to be produced
via a peripheral printer. In a manner similar to the display, only received information is routed to the printer during full-duplex, online operation of the terminal;
while both received and transmitted information is routed to the printer during
half-duplex, online operation. Both the printer and the communication channel
baud rate selectors must be set for the same transfer rates.
TABLE 1-2. PERIPHERAL CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS
PIN
NUMBER
CCITT
EIA
I
101
AA
Protective Ground
Printer/Terminal
2
-
-
Not Used
-
3
104
BB
Received Data
Terminal
4
-
Not Used
-
5
-
-
Not Used
-
6
107
cc
Data Set Ready (DSR)
Terminal
102
AB
Signal Ground
Printer/Terminal
8
109
CF
Received Line Signal Detector (CO)
Terminal
9
-
-
Not Used
-
7
j
25
62957400 A
·.
j
-
-
J
SIGNAL NAME
J
Not Used
ORIGIN
J
1-7
TABLE 1-3. VOLTAGE LEVEL CHANNEL INTERFACE
CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS
PIN
NUMBER
ORIGIN
CCITT
EIA
SIGNAL NAME
1
101
AA
Protective Ground
Modem/Terminal
2
103
BA
Transmitted Data
Terminal
3
104
BB
Received Data
Modem
4
105
CA
Request ta Send (RTS)
Terminal
5
106
CB
Clear to Send (CTS)
Modem
6
107
cc
Data Set Ready (DSR)
Modem
7
102
AB
Signal Ground
Modem/Terminal
8
109
CF
Received Line Signal Detector (CO)
Modem
9
11
-
-
Not Used
10
-
Secondary Request to Send (SRTS)*
-
12
122
SCF
Secondary Received Line Signal Detector (SCO)
Not Used
13
121
SCB
Secondary Clear to Send (SCTS)
Not Used
14
118
SBA
Secondary Transmitted Data
Not Used
15
114
DB
Transmission Signal Element Timing
Not Used
16
119
SBB
Secondary Received Data
Not Used
17
115
DO
Receiver Signal Element Timing
Not Used
18
-
-
Not Used
-
19
120
SCA
Secondary Request to Send (SRTS)
Terminal
20
108.2
CD
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Terminal
21
110
CG
Signal Quality Detector
Not Used
22
125
CE
Ring Indicator
Not Used
23
111
CH
Data Signal Rate Selector
Terminal
24
113
DA
Transmit Signal Element Timing
Not Used
25
-
-
Not Used
-
Not Used
* Data set connector has pin 11 jumpered to pin 19.
·'
1-8
62957400A
In local mode operation of the display terminal, keyed-in data is directed to both
the display screen and to the peripheral printer, regardless of the setting of the
half-duplex/full-duplex switch. Selection of local mode always disconnects the
transmit interface of the display terminal, while the receive interface may be
either maintained or disabled via switch conditioning within the terminal; see
CONSTANT DTR Switch description in the associated Operators Guide/Reference
Manua I (see preface) or refer to section 5 of this manua I.
The rear panel data set connector is used to interface voltage level terminals to a
voltage level communication facility, and current loop terminals to a current loop
communication foci lity. As indicated in table 1-3, terminals interfacing voltage
level communication facilities use RS-232-C/CCITT V .24-compatible signals to
and from the data set connector. Current loop terminals use receive and transmit
circuits designed to interface a 20-milliampere current loop communication facility.
The data set connector pins used on current loop terminals vary with the type of
current loop facility being connected. Unipolar, half-duplex facilities use pin 2
for transmit data and pin 3 for receive data; unipolar, full-duplex facilities use
pin 2 for transmit data, pin 3 for receive data, and pin 7 as a common receive/
transmit channel ground.* Although all current loop terminals use the same transmit and receive circuits, internal conditioning of terminals used on a half-duplex
current loop facility differs slightly from that of terminals used on a full-duplex
current loop facility (refer to facing-page description for Current loop Transmit
and Receive Diagram in section 5).
With the exception of their different communication facility interfaces, voltage
level and current loop terminals operate in an identical manner.
NONIMPACT PRINTER
The nonimpact printer, see figure 1-5, operates as an output peripheral device in
conjunction with the display terminal. It prints a maximum of 30 characters per
second (300 baud) in serial order, and checks for even character parity. A full
print line is 80 characters maximum.
The printer cabinet contains the following major functional components; a print
mechanism, interface and control logic cards, and a power supply. The position
of these components within the printer cabinet is shown in figure 1-6.
J
*Where only 4-wire, full-duplex, current-loop communication facilities are
available, the separate receive and transmit channel grounds are tied together
for connection to pin 7 of the data set connector.
62957400 A
1-9
p.
Figure 1-5. N on1mpact
.
rmter
CONTROL
LOGIC CARD
.,..j
02203
p.
Figure 1-6. N on•mpact
.
rmter Components
1-10
62957400 A
Print Mechanism
The print mechanism consists of the electromechanical elements necessary to print
characters and to advance the roll-type heat-sensitive paper on which characters
are printed. Printing is done by a single printhead that consists of a set of heater
elements arranged in a 5- by 7-dot matrix. A character is printed by bringing the
printhead into contact with the heat-sensitive paper and quickly heating the matrix
elements necessary to reproduce the desired character. Multi copy records cannot
be made on this type of printer. The printer is capable of reproducing the 95
(including space) uppercase and lowercase characters and symbols listed in appendix A
of this manual. It responds to the following ASCII control codes: backspace, line
feed, and carriage return.
Interface and Control Logic Cards
The interface and control logic cards contain circuits for interfacing the printer to
the display terminal and for controlling printer operation. The interface card
accepts serial outputs from the display terminal, assembles and decodes these outputs,
and directs them to the appropriate circuits (data outputs to the printhead and control outputs to the control logic). The control card provides timing and control
signals for all printer operations.
Power Supply
The nonimpact printer power supply is a single, removable assembly that provides
four regulated de voltages: +5 for all logic circuits, + 16 for the print mechanism,
+24 for the print mechanism, and -24 for the printer/terminal interface circuits.
All outputs have over current and overvoltage protection.
IMPACT PRINTER
The impact printer, shown in figure 1-7, operates as a peripheral device for the
display terminal in lieu of the nonimpact printer. It prints characters in serial
order at speeds of up to 173 characters per second in a 60-Hz version or 180 characters per second in a 50-Hz version. It includes internal switches for selecting
150, 300, 600, or 1200 baud data reception rates and for selecting either odd or
even parity checking of received codes. Although the impact printer has a print
line capacity of 132 characters, the use of line feed and carriage return control
codes can format a print line to match the display line format of 80 characters.
The printer cabinet contains a print mechanism, interface and control logic cards,
and a power supply. Figure 1-8 shows the location of these components within the
printer cabinet, and the following text briefly describes each component.
62957400A
1-11
Figure 1-7. Impact Printer
PRINTHEAD
DRIVER BOARD
02202
Figure 1-8. lmpac t Printer C0 mponents
1-12
62957400 A
Print Mechanism
r
'
The print mechanism consists of all electromechanical components necessary to print
characters and to move the paper forms on which characters are printed. The
mechanism uses standard, fan-folded, single or multicopy (up to five parts) paper
forms. The printhead of the mechanism consists of a set of impact pin elements
arranged in a vertical 1- by 7-dot matrix. This printhead prints one vertical column
at a time within a 7- by 7-dot character matrix. Printing is accomplished by
bringing the required pins into contact with an inked ribbon, which in turn transfers
the dot pattern to a paper form. Electric solenoids actuate the particular pins for
printing each portion of a desired character, which is determined by decoding the
signals received via the terminal-to-printer interface. The printer is capable of
reproducing the 95 (including space) uppercase and lowercase characters and
symbols listed in the appendix of this manual, and it responds to the following
ANSI control codes: carriage return, line feed, vertical tabulation, and form
feed. Other device control codes cause the printhead to space a character
position.
Interface and Control Logic Cards
With the exception of the printhead driver board, which is mounted on the print
mechanism, the logic chassis contains all the interface and control logic cards.
Each card is a separate module that is removable by releasing the holding cams at
each end of the card and withdrawing it from the logic chassis. Replacement is
done in a reverse manner, slide the cards into the proper position in the chassis
and set it to its connector via the holding cam levers. logic circuits on these
cards perform terminal-to-printer interface, control and timing, character code
decoding and print mechanism control functions for the printer.
Power Supply
The power supply in the printer consists of an ac input power transformer, a backplane rectifier board, and a de regulator/power supply board. These components
are physically separated from one another, as shown in figure 1-8. The transformer
converts either 60-Hz or 50-Hz ac input power to the following voltages: 13, 16,
24, and 28 V ac. The backplane board contains rectifiers for producing+ 12- and
+36-V de power. The power supply board supplies regulated +5 V de for the logic
circuits, and it also contains a -12-V de rectifier/regulator to produce power for
use by the controller, character decoder, and interface circuits of the printer.
62957400 A
1-13
FEATURES SUMMARY
Following is a summary listing of display terminal features; some features listed have
been described earlier in this section and some are given here for the first time.
•
Self-contained display unit with interface for connecting removable
keyboard module.
•
12-inch crt screen using an approximate 7 .S-in by 5-in (198-m by 127-m)
raster area.
•
Nonglare crt screen.
•
24 display lines of 80 characters per line.
•
Character refresh memory capable of holding all character codes recognizable by the terminal.
•
Display character refresh rate of either 50 or 60 Hz (power line input
frequency) for flicker-free viewing.
•
Blinking cursor to mark position of next character entry.
•
Highlight feature, permitting operator to display selected data fields
either at reduced intensity or blinking.
•
Capability of positioning cursor anywhere on display area via keyboard
inputs.
•
Audible notification at 73rd character position that end of line is
approaching.
•
Capability of recognizing and generating 128 discrete codes: 95 alphanumeric codes and 33 control codes.
•
Alphanumeric and control character codes that correspond with those
recommended by ANSI.
•
Modular keyboard assembly interconnected to display unit via single
-interface cable.
•
80-key keyboard with 67-key main cluster and 13-key numeric entry
cluster.
•
Nonglare keycaps on all keyboard keys.
•
Keyboard access to all 33 ANSI control codes.
•
Keyboard carries all controls and indicators normally used by the operator
during display terminal operation.
•
3-character buffer for keyed-in data to prevent typing-burst errors.
)
1-14
62957400A
•
['
Operator selection of the following via the keyboard:
Online or local mode (offline) operation of the display terminal.
Choice of routing keyed-in data to the communication channel only,
to the display and printer only, or to the display, printer, and
communication channel.
Choice of any two of the following communication line baud rates
in addition to a preset 300 baud rate: 110, 150, 200, 600, 1200,
1800, 2400, 4800, or 9600.
Odd, even, or no word parity.
Page or scroll made operation of displayed data entered via the
keyboard.
Use of either 96- or 64-character, alphanumeric, ANSI code sets
for keyed-in data.
•
Keyboard control of display functions including cursor positioning, reset
cursor, clear screen, line clear, or highlight.
•
Display terminal available with either voltage level communication
facility interface, or with current loop interface.
•
50-Hz terminals with FTZ-approved shielding.
•
Rear panel connector for attaching either nonimpact printer for quiet
terminal operation, or impact printer for producing up to 5-part multicopy forms.,
•
Rear panel tests for facilitating display terminal test and checkout
procedures.
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS
The following paragraphs describe the environmental, electrical, and physical
characteristics for the display terminal, the nonimpact printer, and the impact
printer.
62957400 A
1-15
ENVIRON MENTAL REBU IREMENTS
All of the display terminal equipments have the following environmental requirements.
•
Operating
Temperature: SOOF to 104°F (10°C to +400C)
Temperature Change: lSOF/h (HfC/h)
Relative Humidity: 20 to 80'/o - no condensation
Humidity Change: 100k/h
Altitude from Sea Level: -980 to +9850 ft (-300 to +3000 m)
•
Nonoperating
Temperature: - 14°F to + 122°F (-1 fPC to + SOOC)
Temperature Change: 270F/h (1 SOC/h)
Relative Humidity: 10 to 90% - no condensation
Humidity Change: 100/o/h
Altitude from Sea Level: -980 to +9850 ft (-300 to +3000 m)
DISPLAY TERMINAL-ELECTRICAL
The display terminal has the following electrical power requirements.
•
120 V ac, 60Hz, at 1.0 A, nominal
•
220/240 V ac, 50 Hz, at 0.55 A, nominal
The display terminal requires 90 W of power. Heat dissiplation is approximately
332 Btu/h.
NONIMPACT PRINTER-ELECTRICAL
The nonimpact printer has the following electrical power requirements.
104 to 127 V ac single-phase, 59.0 to 60.6 Hz, 2.0 A
or
198 to 242 V ac single-phase, 49.0 to 50.5 Hz, 1.3 A
216 to 264 V ac single-phase, 49.0 to 50.5 Hz, 1.3 A
The nonimpact printer requires 100 W of power. Heat dissipation is approximately
341 Btu/H.
1-16
62957400 A
IMPACT PRINTER-ELECTRICAL
The impact printer has the following electrical power requirements.
104 to 127 V ac single-phase, 59.0 to 60.6 Hz, 4.2 A
or
198 to 268 V ac single-phase, 49.0 to 50.5 Hz, 2.1 A
Power use of this printer is 250 Wand heat dissipation is 854 Btu/h.
DISPLAY TERMIIAL-PHYSICAL
The display terminal has the following dimensions and mass with the keyboard
attached, see figure 1-9.
Height: 15.2 in (386. 1 mm)
Width: 21.7 in (551.2 mm)
Depth: 20.5 in (520.7 mm)
Mass: 51 lb (23. 1 kg)
NONIMPACT PRINTER-PHYSICAL
The nonimpact printer has the following dimensions and mass, see figure 1-10.
Height: 5.9 in (149.9 mm)
Width: 17.6 in (447. 1 mm)
Depth: 15.9 in (403.9 mm)
Mass: 30 lb (13.6 kg) approximately
IMPACT PRINTER-PHYSICAL
The impact printer has the following dimensions and mass, see figure 1-11.
Height: 14.8 in (375. 9 mm)
Width: 27.6 in (701 mm)
Depth: 15 in (381 mm)
Mass: 77 lb (35 kg) approximately
62957400A
1-17
20.5in
520.7mm
TOTAL DEPTH WITH
KEYBOARD ATTACHED
13.9in
353.1 mm
21.4in
.._.__ _ _ 543.6 mm
r
9.3in
236.2mm
15.2 in
386.1mm
~n[
12.7mm
FOOTSPACE
0.5jn
12.7mm
3.7in
FOOTSPACE
94mm
VALUES GIVEN ARE
MAXIMUM DIMENSIONS
1741-12
FigU..e 1-9. Display Terminal Dimensions
1-18
62957400A
\
~ r=<~
15.9 in
403.9mm
I
17.6in
44f.iiiiiii
VALUES GIVEN ARE
MAXIMUM DIMENSIONS
01848•S
Figure 1-10. Nonimpact Printer Dimensions
27.6in
"77Tiftin
VALUES GIVEN ARE
MAXIMUM DIMENSIONS
011'59·1
Figure 1-11. Impact Printer Dimensions
62957400A
1-19
ll
'
OPERATION
r
2
This section title page is included to maintain format continuity and compatibility
with other manuals of this type. See the Operators Guide/Reference Manual
referred to in the preface of this manual for information on operating the terminal.
62957400 A
2-1
ll
\
l
INSTALLATION AND CHECKOUT
3
This section title page is included to maintain format continuity and compatibility
with other manuals of this type. The appendix of the associated Operators Guide/
Reference Manual (see preface) contains installation information for this terminal,
and section 6, Maintenance, of this manual contains checkout information for the
terminal.
62957400 A
3-1
8
4
THEORY OF OPERATION
It
The schematic, logic and timing diagrams in section 5 of this manual provide
sufficient information for a technician with proper test equipment to identify and
correct problems arising from individual circuit or component malfunctions.
Section 4 describes the functional theory of the modular assemblies comprising the
keyboard display terminal. Additionally, it provides an overview of each assembly
comprising the terminal to assist in diagnosing a malfunction to a particular component
or part.
The display terminal consists of five functional assemblies: 1) keyboard assembly,
2) video display assembly, 3) logic module assembly, 4) rear panel assembly,
and 5) power supply assembly. Figure 4-1 is a functiona I block diagram of the
display terminal. In addition to describing the functional theory of the five
principal assemblies of the display terminal, this section also provides descriptions
for miscellaneous components that are field-replaceable and a description of the
nonimpact printer. The functional theory of the impact printer is described in the
reference and field-service manual for the impact printer (see preface for publication number and ordering information).
---·-·---------------coNrRoLLOG~-
VIDEO
REFRESH 1---P_C_B_O_A_R_D_---i
MEMORY
DISPLAY
REFRESH
LOGIC
I
KEYBOARD
ASSEMBLY
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
TIMING
AND
CONTROL
LOGIC
---<>----
RS-232-C/
CCITT V.24
INTERFACE
OR
'---
CURRENT
LOOP
INTERFACE ·I:
'----
PERIPHERAL
CHANNEL
HIGHLIGHT
LOGIC 1'
I
I
I
TO/FROM
COMMUNICATION
FACILITY
I
'--------------
,:, IF INSTALLED
POWER
SUPPLY
REAR
PANEL
TO
PERIPHERAL
PRINTER
02250
Figure 4-1. Functional Block Diagram of Display Term ina I
62957400 A
4-1
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
Figure 4-2 shows the component parts of the keyboord module. As noted previously,
the keyboord provides the terminal operator/display terminal interface, and consequently, the interface to the system of which the terminal is a port. Via the
keyboard, the operator controls the operating modes and parameters of the terminal
and keys in data for transmission to the central processing unit (CPU).
I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I ,
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
\ I
I I
I I II
\ I 11
I I II
017t5-3
I
I
I
I
Figure 4-2. Keyboard Module
4-2
62957400 A
''
With the exception of the SHIFT, SHIFT LOCK, CONTROL, REPEAT and BREAK
keys, pressing any key on the keyboard enables a seven-bit code to pass to the keyboard interface.* This code then transfers to the control-logic PC board where it is
identified and acted upon accordingly (for example, transmit and display, transmit
only, control). All code-encoding keys on the keyboard feature N-key rollover,
which means that pressing a key enables the transfer of its code to the keyboard
interface, regardless of the state of other keys on the keyboard. For example, even
if two keys are pressed and held down, pressing a third key will pass the code associated with the third key to the interface.
The SHIFT, SHIFT LOCK, and CONTROL keys do not generate a code, they
modify key codes. The SHIFT and the SHIFT LOCK keys modify key codes in the
same manner by permitting access to the second (or uppercase) level of keyboard
codes. The CONTROL key allows access to the third (or control level) of keyboard
codes. Figures and tables in the appendix of this manual list the codes and symbols
associated with each key. Pressing the REPEAT key and holding it down while a
data key is pressed and held, permits the code associated with the data key to repeat
approximately 15 times per second until the REPEAT key is released. The BREAK
key, while not a code-generating key, does pass a signal to the keyboard interface.
Pressing the BREAK key causes the Break signal line to remain high {logical l) for
as long as the key is held down.
Table 4-1 shows the keyboard interface signal line assignments. A high level
(logical 1) signal on the interface is defined as being between +2.4 and +5.25 V de.
A low level (logical 0) signal on the interface is defined as being between -0.5
and +0.4 V de. All signals from the keyboard interface, except those coming in
from the keyboard toggle switches, are electronically buffered and are not subject
to switch-contact bounce. All keyboard power comes from the power supply
assembly via the keyboard/display interface cable. The voltages supplied are
+5.0 ± 0.25 V de and -12 ± 0.60 V de. The following paragraphs describe the on/
off states of the interface signal lines.
The CO signal line carries a Carrier On signal from the terminal communication
channel interface to the keyboard CO indicator. When this line is low, the indicator lights; when high, the indicator is extinguished.
The Page signa I goes high when the PAGE key on the keyboard is pressed. This
enables the page mode operation of the display screen. When this signal is low
(PAGE key up), scroll mode operation of the display screen is enabled.
*The 96/64 and PAGE keys are actually switches and the CO key is actually an
indicator.
62957400 A
4-3
TABLE 4-1. KEYBOARD INTERFACE SIGNAL LINES
SIGNAL
PIN
PIN
SIGNAL
1
co
14
High Rate
2
Page
15
Low Rate
3
Data 26
16
Odd Parity
4
Data 25
17
Even Parity
5
Data 24
18
Signal Ground
6
Data 23
19
Open
7
Data 22
20
Frame Ground
8
Data 21
21
Open
9
Data 20
22
Open
10
Data Ready
23
+5 V de
11
Online/Local
24
Signal Ground
12
Full/Half Duplex
25
-12 V de
13
Break
Shell
Frame Ground
A high level on a Data 2x signal line equals a sef bit, while a low level on a Data
2x signal line equals the absence of a bit, or logical 0.
The Data Ready signal line switches from a normally high-level condition to a lowlevel condition for between 8 to 20 microseconds to inform the display logic that
new data is on the Data 2x signal lines and is ready to be read.
The Online/Local signal line goes high when the ON LINE/LOCAL keyboard switch
is in the ON LINE position; it goes low when the switch is in the LOCAL position.
The Full Duplex/Half Duplex signal line goes high when the FULL DUP/HALF DUP
keyboard switch is in the FULL DUP position; it goes low when the switch is in the
HALF DUP position.
The Break signal line goes high when the BREAK keyboard key is pressed and it
remains high unti I the key is released, at which time it goes low.
The High Rate signal line goes low when the HIGH RATE/300/LOW RATE keyboard
switch is in the HIGH RATE position; it goes high when the switch is in either the
300 or the LOW RATE position.
4-4
62957400 A
•
The Low Rate signal goes low when the HIGH RATE/300/LOW RATE keyboard
switch is in the LOW RATE position; it goes high when the switch is in either the
300 or the HIGH RATE position.
The Odd Parity signal line goes low when the ODD PAR/NO/EVEN PAR keyboard
switch is in the ODD PAR position; it goes high when the switch is in either the
NO or the EVEN PAR position.
The Even Parity signal line goes low when the ODD PAR/NO/EVEN PAR keyboard
switch is in the EVEN PAR position; it goes high when the switch is in either the
NO or the ODD PAR position.
VIDEO DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
The video display assembly (monitor) enables monitoring of electronically encoded
information. The monitor receives fixed-rate horizontal and vertical sync inputs
from the control logic counters, and the video (blank and unblank) signals are not
modulated onto the sync pulses. The video signal inputs to the monitor come from
the symbol generator and read/write memory (refresh memory) circuits on the logic
module PC board. This method of separating the video and sync signals to the
monitor nearly eliminates vertical roll and horizontal tearing of displayed images.
The monitor receives only an unregulated +23-V de input from the power supply
module. From this voltage input, the monitor produces all of the other voltages,
including the 12-kV anode voltage necessary for operation of the crt. The principal
subassemblies of the video display assembly are shown in figure 4-3. These subassemblies are the crt, the vertical choke, the monitor PC board, the + 15-V
regulator assembly, the crt yoke assembly and crt cap, and the high-voltage transformer. Following are brief descriptions of each of these subassemblies.
CATHODE-RAY TUBE (CRT)
The crt is a standard 12-inch display tube which uses a P4 white phosphor screen
and a bonded, nonglare faceplate. The crt is a replaceable item and procedures
for removing and replacing it are included in section 6.
VERTICAL CHOKE
The vertical choke is connected in series with the vertical yoke coil; it suppresses
oscillations in the vertical output circuit to provide a linear vertical sweep motion
of the crt electron beam. Procedures for replacing the vertical choke are included
in section 6.
62957400
4-5
HIGH-VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMER
Figure 4-3. Location of Video Display Subassemblies
MONITOR PC BOARD
The monitor PC board contains the horizontal and vertical sync and amplifier
circuits for controlling the sweep of the electron beam across and up and down the
crt screen. It also carries the video amplifier circuits that control blanking and
unblanking of the beam. The sync circuits incorporate a feature that shuts off the
high voltage (12 kV) upon loss of either the horizontal or vertical sync pulses.
Adjustment procedures for vertical height and linearity, and for contrast and focus
controls mounted on the monitor PC board are included in section 6 of this manual,
as are procedures for removing and replacing the PC board. A schematic of this
PC board is included in section 5. The PC board also has a +5-V de regulator
circuit on it for producing a regulated +5 V de from the+ 15-V de output of the
+ 15-V regulator assembly.
4-6
62957400 A
-
+15-V DC REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
The+ 15-V de regulator assembly is the large heat sink and regulator circuits
mounted on the left rear side of the display unit. The regulator circuit consists of
a +15-V de regulator and a pass transistor, each mounted in a~round metal package
(T0-3 type). Figure 4-4 shows the mounting location of the regulator assembly on
the video monitor chassis and the location of the pass transistor and regulator circuit
on the heat sink.
The regulator assembly accepts an unregulated +23-V de input from the power supply
module and converts it to a regulated+ 15-V de output for use by the monitor PC
board. The +15-Voutput splits to furnish power to two locations on the monitor
PC board. One output furnishes +15 V to circuits using thjs power level directly,
while the second supplies a +5-V de regulator circuit to produce a regulated
+5-V de output. Refer to the Noncomposite Video Display Electronics Schematic
Diagram and the+ 15-V Regulator Assembly Schematic Diagram in section 5 of this
manual for circuit details. Section 6 of this manual contains the procedures for
checking the regulator assembly and for replacing it if necessary.
PASS TRANSISTOR
REGULATOR7
JJL-~-·
orl
i
~
01964-1
Figure 4-4. + 15-V de Regulator Assembly
62957400 A
4-7
CRT YOKE AND CRT CAP
The crt yoke provides horizontal and vertical deflection of the crt electron beam
so that the beam sweeps the screen properly. This is accomplished by applying the
horizontal and vertical amplifier outputs to the horizontal and vertical deflection
coils in the yoke assembly. The yoke assembly is not expected to fail unless
physically damaged but since that possibility does exist, replacement and adjustment procedures for the yoke assembly are included in section 6. The yoke also
has some small permanent magnets affixed to it. These magnets are used to minimize
geometric distortion of the video display. Section 6 also contains procedures for
installing these magnets on a new yoke assembly to minimize the effects of geometric
distortion.
HIGH-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
The high-voltage transformer produces all high de voltages (-190, +45, +465, and
+ 12 kV de) used within the video display assembly by boosting the output of the
horizontal amplifier. The secondary of the transformer is tapped at various points
so that outputs can be rectified and used in the high voltage portions of the monitor
PC board electronics.
WARNING
Never touch or attempt to replace the high voltage transformer while power is a p pI i ed to the
terminal.
LOGIC MODULE ASSEMBLY
The logic module assembly is the heart of the display terminal in that it carries the
bulk of the electronic circuits for the terminal. Figure 4-5 shows the location of
the PC board within the terminal and figure 4-6 is a detailed block diagram of the
circuits mounted on the PC board. The following text describes the general functions
of the circuits on the logic PC board. Logic and timing diagrams for these circuits
are included in section 5.
The function of the phase-lock loop circuit is to lock vertical sync timing for the
video display to the frequency of the ac input power. The circuit accomplishes this
by comparing the output of the vertical sync circuit with the frequency of the ac
input power, and then adjusting the output of a 14.5962-MHz oscillator slightly
upward or downward, as necessary, to maintain optimal synchronization.
4-8
62957400 A
!
LOGIC MODULE ASSEMBLY
PC BOARD
Figure 4-5. Location of logic Module Assembly PC Board in Display Terminal
The output of the 14.5962-MHz oscillator is a 68.51-ns clock pulse (center frequency), which corresponds to one display dot time. Each character space consists
of nine horizontal dot times; seven are displayable and two are used for spacing
between characters. Because a display line can consist of 80 characters, there are
9 x 80 (720) dot times per horizontal display line (49.331-'s) During this 49.33 !JS
time period, the electron beam of the crt moves from the left side of the screen to
the right side. To begin a new dot line, the beam must move back to the left side
of the screen. This movement of the beam takes 198 dot times, or 13.56 !JS since
nothing has to display during this horizontal retrace time. One complete cycle of
the beam from left to right and back is called a scan line ood this scan line
takes 49.33 !JS plus 13.56!Js, or 62.891-'s to complete.
Vertically, a character has ten dot positions, nine are displayable and one is used
for spacing between horizonta I scan lines and for cursor display. This means that
it requires 240 scan lines to complete a page of 24 character lines. This, in turn,
takes 15.09 ms, or 240 scan lines times 62.891-'s per scan line. To complete an
entire display frame cycle, the electron beam of the crt must move from its final
display position at the bottom of the display screen up to the upper left corner of
the screen. The time allotted for this movement of the beam to occur in a 60-Hz
62957400 A
4-9
50 60 HI I INT SIJ
POWER
SUPPLY
t
{
AC
KEYBOARD
_,
0
1
'"' " l
HORI SYNC
GROUND
GROUND:
CRT
VIDEO
CONNECTOR
PANEL
{~
MR ~"' " "
L_lj
I I I
I I
MUX
ENABLE SCI'
C.D. LIGHT
r. ,.
..
fUll HALF DUPLEX SW1 TCH
LOCH ON LINE SWITCH
KEYBOARD
INTER
BREAK KEY
CONNECTOR
PAN a
I
- I
~
MUX CURSOR
Sl CON$1 OTR
1
INT SW
SW CONS! RTS
- { TEST SWITCH
1
INT SW,
EN AUTO L.F
{
I•JT
C''"
HCE
GROUND(2J
PROTECTIVE
GROUND
SCROLL ADO
KEYBOARD
READ
OR liE
WR liE
CONTROL
r---_,-...
HIGH BA"n
Ju
HYBOARO
{
LOW BAI'"u
<'WITf'u
""" ""
OW-'""
""' • vn
~OOP\INTSW,
"'"
r····
.:UNO
DATA
SET
CONNECTOR
•I
BAUD
CLOCK +
CLOCK
SELECT
-
-------..l
I I
11
cuLR;~:r
I
r++-------.liNTERFACE
r.,
I P:~;;;R
INTERFACE
:::u~~
PTR osR
} 6~~~;~;::L
PTR RCV DATA
r-=:j
1
L------+-+--~
1
r':-1 I
.f
RS232
:JI NTERF ACEr:::==::J
IX DATA
R S
OTR
}
DATA SET
CONNECTOR
~
_lQ_
DC"
'"
Figure 4-6. Logic tv\odule Assembly PC Board Block Diagram
02633
terminal is 1.57 ms. Total cycle time for one complete display frame on a 60-Hz
terminal is, therefore, 15.09 ms plus 1.57 ms, or 16.66 ms. Timing for 50-Hz
terminals is essentially the same, except that time allotted for moving the beam of
the crt from its final display position up to the upper left corner of the screen is
4. 91 ms. This means that a 50-Hz terminal has a display frame time of 20 ms,
rather than the 16.66-ms frame time of the 60-Hz terminal.
During the time that the electron beam is scanning a display screen, its position
must be tracked so that it can be determined what the beam is supposed to be doing
at any given dot position on the screen. The circuits shown in figure 4-6 track the
motion of the beam via the horizontal and vertical scan counters, and control the
presentation of character information on the screen by presenting the crt with video
blank and unblank signals at the appropriate dot positions.
Other circuits shown in figure 4-6 are used to control where, when, and how video
information is displayed on the crt screen. Since display information may originate
from either the keyboard or the communication channel, control circuits are provided to multiplex display information into the refresh memory. Information from
the memory must be converted into video blank and unblank signals for each dot
position on the screen, and cursor-positioning control inputs from either the keyboard or the communication channel must be monitored and acted upon to move the
cursor to any desired character position on the screen. All keyboard and internal
control switch positions are monitored by the control logic so that the display reacts
in accordance with the selected operating parameters of the terminal.
In addition, the logic module PC board has UART (universal asynchronous receiver/
transmitter) circuitry to assemble serial communication channei data into parallel
words for use within the terminal, and to serialize keyboard data from the terminal
for transmission on the communication channel. Circuits are also provided for
either a current loop or an RS-232-C communication channel interface and for an
RS-232-C peripheral printer interface.
REAR PANEL ASSEMBLY
Figure 4-7 indicates the location of the rear panel assembly on the display terminal
and shows the external layout. The panel mounts the peripheral printer and communication facility interface connectors, the TEST/NORMAL switch, and the ac
entry panel housing. The ac entry panel housing is the entry point for ac power to
the terminal, and it contains circuit breaker CB1 and a radio frequency interference
(RFI) filter. On 50-Hz, 220-/240-V ac terminals, connector CP2 (coming out of
the ac entry panel housing internally), is the connector having the LOW and
NORMAL wire connectors for matching the ac input power (nominal 220 V or
240 V) to the power requirements of the display terminal (see AC/DC Power Interconnect Diagram in section 5 for details).
62957400 A
4-11
0
®(t.-=·.-:---
+ilP
PERIPHERAL CONNECTOR
..(~)''"
=
~
0
o----o
'tP
DATA SET CONNECTOR
0
0
0
0
0
Te{
NO~Al
0
02143
01801-1
Figure 4-7. Terminal Rear Panel Location and Layout
Circuit breaker CB1 and the RFI filter are the only field replaceable components on
the rear panel assembly. Procedures for replacing these two items are included in
section 6 of this manual.
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
Figure 4-8 shows the top and front views (relative to front of display) of the power
supply and figure 4-9 shows its mounting location within the display unit. The
power supply receives its ac input power via CP2 and distributes de voltages to the
keyboard, video assembly, and logic module assembly via HJ2. Output voltages
from HJ2 are as follows:
Output
HJ2 Pin No.
1
19 V ac at 0.1 A, maximum
2
Not used
3
+23 V de at 1.5 A, maximum
4 through 6
4-12
Ground
62957400A
7
(
8 and 9
10
11 and 12
+ 12 V de at 0.2 A, maximum
Ground
-12 V de at 0.2 A, maximum
+5 Vat 6.0 A combined, maximum
An ac input circuit breaker, CB1, is located on the rear panel of the display terminal and is rated at 3.0 A for 115-V ac terminals or 2.0A for 220/240-V ac
terminals.
SAFETY
oo
0
000
000
000
c 0
02634
(
Figure 4-8. Top and Front Views of Power Supply Module
62957400 A
4-13
l
CP2/CJ2 (ALL TERMINALS)
AND LOW/NORMAL CONNECTORS
(220/240-V ac:, 50-Hz
TERMINALS ONLY)
Figure 4-9. Location of Power Supply in Display Terminal
AC input power enters the ac entry panel ot the rear of the display terminal and is
coupled to the power supply via cable connectors CJ2/CP2. Jumper connections
on CJ2 ore used to match input line voltage to the primary of the power supply
transformer.
AC Input Voltage
Line Input to CJ2
Jumpers on CJ2
115
Pins 1 and 2
Pins 1 to 3 and 2 to 5
220 (Low)
Pins 1 and 4*
Pin 2 to 3
240 (Norma I)
Pins 1 and
Pin 2 to 3
6~
*Check AC/DC Power Interconnect Diagram in section 5 for internal connection
of 220 V ac (low) or 240 V (norma I) inputs.
4-14
62957400 A
)
NONIMPACT PRINTER
(
The nonimpact printer is a serial-input, RS-232-C-compatible, thermal printing
device capable of printing at speeds up to 30 characters per second. A single
printhead, containing a 5- by 7-dot matrix, is used to print one character at a
time over an 80-character print line. Characters are formed by bringing the printhead into contact with heat-sensitive paper and heating selected elements of the
matrix. The printer is capable of performing the following operations in response
to input data commands.
•
Character Print printhead moves down, contacts the paper, and
printhead elements heat to print the selected character. After printing,
the printhead moves back off the paper to the next column for printing
(see appendix A for characters and control code listing).
•
Backspace -
•
Line Feed paper advances either one or two lines, depending on
setting of Line Spacing switch.
•
Carriage Return printhead returns to left margin of paper. Printer
does an automatic carriage return and line feed after reaching print
column 80.
printhead moves one column to the left.
Figure 4-10 shows the various subassemblies of the nonimpact printer. Maintenance
philosophy for the printer power supply is to replace it entirely upon failure; the
four regulated outputs of the printer power supply {+5, + 16, +24, and -24 V de)
should measure within ±5 percent of their nominal output level. The following
paragraphs discuss the functional theory of the logic and interface circuits of the
printer as related to operation of the print mechanism.
POWER SUPPLY
/ \ W I T H SHIELD/COVER)
~~c._,
l
J,
Figure 4-10. Nonimpact Printer Subassemblies
62957400A
4-15
Interface connectors, power connectors, fuse holder wiring, and internal cable
routing for the nonimpact printer are identified in figure 4-11. The replaceable
power supply is shown in relation to the connectors near the rear panel of the printer
cabinet. For the pin assignments of the RS-232-C interface connector, refer to
section 1 and the table for the Peripheral Connector Pin Assignments. The J5 connector shown in the diagram is not used in this subsystem application.
POWER SUPPLY
TO 115-V ac
FUSE HOLDER
J4 CONNECTOR
P3 CONNECTOR
TO 115-V ac
LINE CORD
(RS-232-C)
PRINTER
INTERFACE
JS CONNECTOR
(IC, CURRENT LOOP)
PRINTER
INTERFACE
02635
Figure 4-11. Nonimpact Printer Wiring Harness
Figure 4-12 is a functional block diagram of the printer components and figure 4-13
shows the location of various print mechanism components. Refer to this latter
figure to locate components as they are described in the following text. As shown
in figure 4-12, serial input data enters a serial-to-parallel converter. When the
converter receives the Stop bit of an input word, the word shifts to decoder/encoder
logic and a Start pulse starts the command logic. Parity error checking is also done
during the Stop bit time, and if an error is detected, an error code goes to the
decoder/encoder in lieu of the data word code and the Start pulse starts the command
4-16
62957400A
)
SERIALPARALLEL
TOPARALLEL
DATA
CONVERTER
SERIAL
DATA
DECODER
ENCODER
CHARACTER CODE
(35 LINES)
TYPE
OF
OPERATION
PRINTELEMENT
DRIVERS
PRINT DRIVE
(35 LINES)
PRINTHEAD
COMPENSATING 1--CIRCUIT
PRINT TIME
START-OF-LINE
PHOTOEND-OF-LINE TRANSISTORS
START
COUNTER ENABLE
COMMAND
LOGIC
BUSY
CR BSY
RESET
ACKNOWLEDGE
TIMING
LOGIC
PLATEN
DRIVE
PLATEN
SOLENOID
1--- PRINTHEAD
I
MOVE
TIME
CARRIAGE RETURN
BACK SPACE
LINE FEED
02656
PRINTHEAC
MOTOR
CONTROL
LOGIC
LINEFEED
MOTOR
CONTROL
LOGIC
I
I
PRINT HEAD
MOTOR DRIVE
LINE-FEED
MOTOR DRIVE
LINEFEED
STEPPING
MOTOR
PRINTHEAD
STEPPING
MOTOR
PAPER
-----DRIVE
ROLLS
Figure 4-12. Nonimpact Printer Block Diagram
SLOWDOWN
PHOTOTRANSISTOR
BLOCK
START-OF-LINE
PHOTOTRANSISTOR
BLOCK
PRINTHEAO
CABLE
ADJUSTABLE
PULLEY
CABLE
DRUM
STOP
ECCENTRIC
BRAKE
PHOTOTRA-NSISTOR
BLOCK
SLEW
PHOTOTRANSISTOR
BLOCK
02637
Figure 4-13. Nonimpact Printer Print-Mechanism Assembly
62957400 A
4-17
logic. The decoder/encoder indicates the type of operation (print or control) to be
performed to the command logic. Once an operation starts, the Busy signal rises
and remains high until the operation is complete (about 32 ms).
A character-print operation activates the timing logic via a Counter Enable signal;
the timing logic, in turn, first energizes the platen solenoid with a Platen Drive
signal and then begins moving the printhead down toward the platen. Figure 4-14
shows the timing for a character print operation. As the printhead contacts the
paper and moves it against the platen, the timing logic turns on the Print Time line,
which in turn enables the decoder/encoder to pass character code information to
the print element driver circuits. The printhead compensating circuit also energizes
at this time to complete the printhead element circuit. The printhead compensating
circuit controls the heating of the printhead heater elements relative to the printing
speed. The elements specified by the input character code then heat up to transfer
a dot-motrix representation of the desired character to the heat-sensitive paper.
Timing logic then terminates the Print Time and Platen Drive signals, and the printhead moves back from the platen as the platen solenoid spring is released. As an
DATA
(INPUT)
START
------------~11~--------~n~---
PLATEN
DRIVE
l----15-16 ms
PRINT
TIME
-j
I
I
1-ro ms ~
MOVE
TIME
1- 4
ms
------------------------~-----------:r-1-~~-4--m_s_________
HEAD LATERAL
MOVEMENT
~30-31 ms------~
RESET
I
02654
(
Figure 4-14. Nonimpact Printer Character Print Timing
4-18
62957400 A
indication that printing is complete, timing logic causes the Acknowledge signal
line to go low. During the time the printhead is returning to its start position, the
timing logic generates a Move Time pulse. The Move Time pulse activates the
printhead motor-control logic, which in turn causes the printhead stepping motor to
move the printhead to the next character position. When this operation is complete,
the timing logic issues a Reset pulse to the command logic to reset the command
logic in preparation for the next operation. As the command logic resets, the Busy
signal drops.
A backspace operation is much the same as a character-print operation, except that
a backspace code does not enable the heating of any print elements and causes
printhead motor-control logic and the printhead stepping motor to move the printhead back one space.
Line feed operations are also simi Jar to the preceding two operations, but differ in
the following manner. The I ine-feed operation blocks both printing and printhead
movement by inhibiting all outputs from the timing logic except the Reset and
Acknowledge signals. The line-feed code raises a Line Feed signal from the command
logic to activate the line-feed motor-control logic and line-feed stepping motor in
Iieu of the printhead control circuits. The I ine-feed stepping motor advances paper
either one or two I ines, depending upon the setting of the line-spacing switch.
Figure 4-16 shows the timing for a I ine-feed operation. The end-of-1 ine phototransistor initiates a line-feed/carriage-return operation if the printhead attempts
to move past the 80th character position of a print I ine. The start-of- Iine phototransistor is used to terminate either the automatic line-feed/carriage-return operation
or a code- input- initiated carriage-return operation.
A receive carriage-return code, performs only a carriage-return operation and does
not automatically line-feed the print mechanism; this occurs in the following manner.
The decoder decodes a carriage-return operation and specifies that type of operation
to the command logic, which started as the carriage-return code shifted into the
decoder. The command logic, in turn, generates a Carriage Return signal to the
printhead motor-control logic, which moves the printhead in reverse via the printhead stepping motor until the start-of-line phototransistor senses the printhead and
stops the carriage-return operation. The command logic holds the Busy signal high
for a short time after the printhead has returned to the left margin (column 1 or
start-of-line) to ensure that the printhead is stable and ready to accept the next
print-character command. Figure 4-16 shows the timing for a carriage-return operation.
62957400 A
4-19
DATA
(INPUT)
1------
LJ
33.3 ms MINIMUM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1
__jl----------------------------------------~nL_
START
(INPUT)
LINE
FEED
I
__Jr---------------------.L_j
BUSY
(OUTPUT)
1'""- - - - - - 31-32 ms
ACKNOWLEDGE
(OUTPUT)
__j
I
'-----15-16 ms
PAPER
MOVEMENT
------------~
~--------~-~r
I
!-'SINGLE LINE FEED - - 1
DOUBLE LINE FEED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - L - - - - 1
I
:~---------30-31ms------------jrl=l
RESET
ms
02060-2
Figure 4-15.
Nonimpact Printer Line Feed Operation Timing
,___ _ _ _ _ _ 200 ms M A X I M U M - - - - - - - - - - . . !
l
DATA
(INPUT)
J
START
(INPUT)
__fl
BUSY
(OUTPUT)
_j
CARRIAGE
RETURN
_j
u
fL
LJ
I
l2
I
I
n
START OF LINE
02060-1
Figure 4-16. Nonimpact Printer Carriage Return Operation Timing
4-20
62957400 A
IMPACT PRINTER
Functional theory of the impact printer is included in the Matrix Printer Reference
and Field Service Manual, so theory of operation information for the impact printer
is not repeated in this manual. Refer to preface of this manual for the publication
number of the Matrix Printer Reference and Field Service Manual and for ordering
i nforma ti on.
MISCELLANEOUS TERMINAL COMPONENTS
Miscellaneous field-replaceable components of the display terminal include the
following items: the Sonalert (audible alarm), the intensity control and cable
assembly, the intensity control knob, and a small, plastic support post for the
keyboard display logic module assembly. Section 6 of this manual includes procedures for removing and replacing all of the items within the crt portion of that
section.
I
--
62957400A
4-21
!::.
5
DIAGRAMS
Section 5 contains logic diagrams, timing diagrams, schematics, ac/dc power
distribution diagrams, signal interconnection diagrams, and block diagrams for the
display terminal. Diagrams of a similar nature for the impact and nonimpact printers
are included in their respective maintenance manuals (see preface). Information on
how to interpret the logic diagrams precedes, and is part of, the logic diagram set.
Information on the operation of individual logic chips may be found in the Key to
Logic Symbology for Terminal Equipment Manual (see preface). Additionally, the
logic set includes facing-page logic descriptions that describe the functions of the
circuits depicted on each logic diagram.
The title block of each logic diagram contains the following information:
LOGIC DRAWING SET1------t
CONTROL DATA
CODE IDENT
------~---
<
'""'"'
READ/WRITE GATES
'"
15920
c
DWG NO
REV
62191400
SHEET
2
DIAGRAM
01784
In the diagrams that follow, the logic drawing set number refers to the entire set of
diagrams while the diagram cross-reference number identifies the specific diagram.
The cross-reference number is the only reference term that can appear on the inputs
and outputs of the circuitry to indicate that the source or destination of the signal
is found internally on another diagram of this logic set. Lack of a cross-reference
number on an input or an output line indicates that this line comes from or goes to
an external location (one that is not part of this logic set).
The logic module assembly PC board of the display terminal has a number of test
points that have been brought to the board edge for ease of access. These test points
are grouped as TPl (near the upper front edge of the insta lied PC board) and TP2
(near the lower rear edge of the installed PC board). Test signa Is available at these
two test points are shown on the logic module assembly PC board logic diagrams and
are also listed here for easy reference. Table 5-1 gives the test point pin number,
the diagram on which the test point is depicted in parentheses, the test signal name,
and a brief description of the test signal.
62957400 A
5-1
TABLE 5-l. LOGIC MODULE ASSEMBLY TEST POINT DATA
TEST POINT
TP1-1
TP1-2
TP1-3
TP1-4
TP1-5
5-2
(115)
(115)
(115)
(100)
SIGNAL NAME
+BAUD SEL 3
+BAUD SEL 2
+BAUD SEL 1
Not Used
-DISABLE MAIN OSC
TP1-6
TP1-7 (115)
TP1-8 (110)
Not used
+BAUD SEL 4
+BAUD CLOCK
TP1-9 (100)
+MAIN OSC
TP1-10 (110)
-DISABLE BAUD OSC
TP1-11 (110)
-DISABLE BAUD CLOCK
TP1-12 (110)
+BAUD OSC
TP2-1 (105)
+COMP
TP2-2
TP2-3
TP2-4 (102)
Not Used
Not Used
+CHARACTER DOTS
TP2-5
TP2-6 (100)
Not Used
-HORZ LOAD
TP2-7 (100)
-(TB+ T2)
TP2-8 (105)
+CURSOR COMP
TP2-9 (100)
-VERT LOAD
TP2-10 (100)
+ENABLE SCAN
TP2-ll (105)
+X COMP
TP2-12 (112)
+LST LN COMP
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
Used in conjunction with TP1-2, TP1-3 and TP1-7
to externally select an operating baud rate. See
facing page description for diagram 115.
Grounding (logical 0) this test point disables the
main asci llator.
See TP1-1, TP1-2, and TP1-3, preceding.
Square wave clock signal equal to 16 times the
selected baud rote.
Nominal 14.5962-MHz oscillator signal on which
main timing is based.
Grounding (logical 0) this test point disables the
baud asci II a tor.
Grounding (logical 0) this test point disables the
baud clock.
Square-wave-output asci II a tor operating at
6.745 MHz and used to derive communication
baud rates.
A positive pulse indicating coincidence of the
23 through 20 counts of the cursor and horizontal counters; the signa I is a component of
the +X COMP signal.
Positive 70-ns pulses corresponding with unblank
signals from the logic module assembly to the
video display assembly.
Negative 600-ns pulse that occurs every 63 J-ISi
used for horizontal control,
Negative 70-ns pulse occurring at either T8
(read memory operations) or T2 (write memory
or cursor movement operations).
Positive 630-fls pulse occurring every 16.66 ms
(60-Hz terminals) or 20 ms (50-Hz terminals);
indicates match of horizontal and vertical
counters with X andY cursor counters.
Negative 63-fls pulse occurring every 16.66 ms
(60-Hz terminals) or 20 ms (50-Hz terminals);
used for verti co I control.
Positive 63-ns pulse occurring every 63 J-IS
for timing control,
Positive 600-ns pulse indicating match of horizontal and X cursor counters and occurring
every 63 J-IS.
Positive signal indicating match of last-line and
Y cursor counters when in scroll mode,
62957400 A
SHEET
NO
CROSS
REFERENCE
NUMBER
MODULE
LOCAl I ON
REV
LOGIC DlA GRAM TITLE
c
LOGIC DIAGRAM CONTENTS SHEET
c
KEY TO DIAGRAMS-PHYSICAL LOCATION COOES
;!
HY TO SYMBOLS
I 00
c
MAIN TIMING, HORIZONTAL. SCAN, ANO VERTICAL COJNTER
101
c
102
c
IOJ
c
"Y" CURSOR COUNTER ANO MUI. VIOEO ORIVER CIRCUIT
104
c
CURSOR FUNCTION OECOOE. CURSOR POSIT I ON OECOOE, LIST LINE COUNTER
105
c
UART, "I" COMPARE, CURSOR COMPARE
10
I 06
c
MEMORY BANK "A''
II
107
(
MEMORY BANK "B"
12
lOB
c
CLEAR CONTROL, RECEIVE ANO KEYBOIRO CONTROL
13
109
c
MEMORY ADDRESS CONVERSION, 0111 DECODE
14
liD
(
BIUO COUNTER. MOO EM CONTROL
15
Ill
(
PHASE LOCK OSCILLATOR CURRENT LOOP RECEIVE INO TRANSMIT
16
112
c
INTERNAL SWITCHES, BREAK INO ALARM LIST LINE COMPARE
17
Ill
c
I CURSOR CONTROL, Y CURSOR CONTROL, X CURSOR COUNTER
18
114
c
MODEM INTERFACE. RTS CONTROL
19
115
(_
BAUD SELECT. X Y POSITION CONTROL
20
c
TIIIMG DIAGRAM
21
II
TIIIMG OIAGRII
22
ii
23
c
HORIZONTAL ANO VERTICAL CONTROL, VERTICIL IOORESS COUNTER.
REIO IR 1TE CONTROL
MEMORY OUTPUT LATCH. CHARACTER GENERATOR, VIOEO SERIALIIER,
BLINK COUNTER. DISPLAY CURSOR F F
TIMING OIAGRAI
BLOCK 0 IIGRAI
z
0
}
62957400 A
5-3
PHYSICAL LOCATION CODES OF Ti-f[ 156 PACKAGE fiiODULE
~ 0
AJ 2
QN
o-
8~
~
4
(f)
w
0
~8
<(Z
a::O
<.!)-
<(I_<(
ou
0
O...J
1-...J
>-<(
wu
~-
(f)
>-
:I:
Q._
AJI
!PI
POWER AND GROUND PINS
+12V
AJ3{
+5V
AJ3AJ3AJ2-22
AJ 1-22
!PI
-12V
GNC
MODULE
CONNECTOR
BLOC!S
a
{'JJAJJ-19
r
AJ3AJ2-21
AJ 2-18
AJ 1-21
AJJ-20
NOTCH INDICATES
PIN I AND 14 END
PIN 1
PIN 14
I:
1
12
1.3
II
10
PIN 7
TYPICAL
PIN
9
8
PIN
NUMBERING
FOR 14 PIN I.C.
L
5-4
62957400 A
GENERAL P. C. BOARD INFORMATION
GENERAL LOGIC SYMBOL INFORMATION
rn
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT LOGIC SYMBOL
4---
LOGIC FUNCTION IDENTIFIER
------
ELEMENT TYPE
PACKAGELOCATIONONBOARD
1PHYSICAL LOCATION CODE!
EACH PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD UNDER IDEAL CONDITIONS WOULD BE
REPRESENTED ON ONE SHEET
HOWEVER OU~ TO THE LARGE NUMBER Of
CIRCUITS LOCATED ON SOME BOARDS MULTIPLE SHEETS MAY BE REQUIRED
THE BOAFlO TYPE IS LISTED AT THE BOTTOM OF EACH DIAGRAM SHEET THE
BOARD LOCATION WITHIN THt LOGIC CHASSIS MAY ALSO ACCOMPANY THE
BOARD TYPE
EACH SYMBOL ON THE DIAGRAM REPRESENTS A PORTION Of
AN INTEGRATED CIRCUIT THE ENTIRE INTEGRATED CiRCUIT OR A DISCRETE
COMPONENT
EACH SYMBOL REFLECTS iHE LOGIC fUNCTION IDENTIFIER
ELEMENT OR COMPONENT TYPE AND THE ELEMENT OR COMPONENT LOCATION
ON THE BOARD
COMPONENT LOCATION IS DEFINED BY AN ALPHANUMERIC
MATRIX DEPEND 1NG ON THE TYPE Of PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD USED
fOR
INFORMATION Oil THE COMPONENT 0' ELEMENT TYPES USED IN THIS LOGIC
SET REFER TO KEY TO LOGIC SYMBOLOGY MANUAL CDC PUBLICATION
NUMBER B2172400
TAGGING INFORMATION
POLARITY INDICATOR
r
SIGNALOEFINifiON
/ /
/
/
BOARD CONNECTOR
PIN NUMBER
QUALIFYING SYMBOLS
000
-"-> ""'"
333 A l 3 - 3 L '
~""
-READ
)--1L-
34B AB-lO
"""
~"""'"
I = AND
1 = OR
1
= INVERTER
(/)
K-•Y = X1 INPUTS 1 DECODED OR
ENCODED TO Y1 OUTPUTS,
X Y
....1
0
= X1 I ~PUT
CD
LEVEll CONVERTED
TO Y1 OUTPUT LEVEl!
~
>-
(/)
BOARD CONNECTOR PIN NUMBER
BOARD CONNECTOR PIN NUMBER
BOARD LOCATION IN LOGIC CHASSIS
BOARD LOCATION IN LOGIC CHASSIS
CROSS REFERENCE SHEET NUMBER
CROSS REfERENCE SHEET NUMBER
g
>::.::
w
ELEMENT IDENTIFIERS
ON BOARD, OFF SHEET TAGGING
IN A LOGIC DIAGRAM SET HAYING MORE THAN ONE SHEET A HEXAGON IS USED TO INDICATE THAT THE SIGNAL
IS COMING FROM. OR GOING TO ANOTHER SHEET OF THE SAME BOARD
1NOTE
EACH SIGNAL NAME IN THIS
LOGIC SET HAS BEEN PRECEDED BY A
+. !INDICATING AN ACTIVE Hl1 OR A
!INDICATING AN ACTIVE LD»
0:::
+READ
J
181!£
CR
SHT
0
004
+READ
f
004
004
Q)noB
C R SHT
004
006
ON SHEET TAGGING
THE SMALL CIRCLES liTH ALPHA CHARACTERS INSIDE ARE USED TO
SHOI A SIGNAL PATH WITHOUT ACTUALLY RUNNING A LINE fROI ONE
PO I NT TO ANOTHER
A CIRCLE II TH AN ARROW PO I NT I NG AllY FROM
IT IS THE SIGNAL ORIGIN IN DIRECT LINE WITH Hk ORIGIN ARROW
ANOTHER CIRCLE IS DRAIN WITH AN ARROI POINTINL TOIARO IT THIS
IS THE SIGNAL DESTINATION
0
0
C R SHT
CDC
VENDOR
140
7400
141
7410
143
7440
146
7404
+READ
14B
149
7402
-WR 1TE
189
74157
200
7406
201
740B
218
7432
240
9024
507
7442
5DB
74153
008
VOLTAGE LEVELS
527
ANALOG OR NON-LOGIC LEVELS
7486
74164
547
74165
901
MC14B9
94j
7414
NON STANDARD LOGIC LEVEL
INTERVENING
LOGIC
LOGIC LEVELS
DTL LOGIC OPERATION
HIGH , LOGICAL I •
LOt •LOGICAL Q,
SWITCHING POINT
= •2 6 TO +5 0
= 0 0 TO +0 45
= •I 1 TO +I 9
VOLTS
YOLTS
VOLTS
TTL LOGIC OPERATION
HIGH I LOGICAL 1 I
LOt •LOGICAL Q,
SIITCHING POINT
RESISTOR MODULES
lr rREFERENCE
~ lr
1 ENTIRE
J
REFERENCE DESIGNATION NO
iiNOIVIOUAL RESISTOR1
+5Y
=
TO +5 0 VOlTS
TQ +0 45 VOLTS
+ 85V TO +I 9 VOLTS
SWITCH MODULES
DESIGNATION NO
MODULE
= +2 8
= 0 OV
VALUE
LOCATION OF RES IS TOR
MODULE ON THE BOARD
~oS2 1 B4
1t
LOCAT10N Of SOITCH
MODUlE ON THE BOARD
Sll TC!1 POSIT I ON ON MODULE
REFERENCE OESIGNA110N NO
ENTIRE MODULE
R4B.47K AI 0
2-MOOULE PIN NO
J
62957400 A
5-5
DIAGRAM 100
MAIN TIMING, HORIZONTAL SCAN, AND VERTICAL COUNTERS
This dic.gram, from bottom to top, shows the main timing, horizontal scan, and vertical counters. Reference the timing
diagram on sheet 20 of this logic set during the following description of the logic on diagram 100.
MAIN TIMING COUNTER When power is turned on, the -PWR RST signal goes low, which resets all of the
counters and sets Main Timing start flip-flop (LSB ). As the -PWR RST signal returns high, the 14.596-MHz +MAl N
OSC clock pulses begin toggling LSB and MS. The set output of LSB (+Tpl) loads the M5 shift register, and then LSB
clears as the +MAIN OSC clock pulses shift the main timing pulse through the shift register to produce main timing
clock pulses +Tl through +T8. These clock pulses are each 68.51 ns in duration, and it takes 616.6 ns for one complete pass through the counter. The + T8 output of MS reenables LSB for setting and the sequence repeats, providing
continuous+ Tpj through+ T8 main timing pulses. These main timing pulses each correspond with a dot time on the
display screen \see Timing Diagram, sheet 20 of this logic set).
HORIZONTAL COUNTER The horizontal counter consists of counter circuits L4 and L3. A -(T8 + T2) clock
signal toggles the horizontal counter. This clock signal is used because refresh memory write operations take longer
than read operations. The normal Tpl through T8 clock cycle is therefore extended from Tpj through T2 of the next
clock cycle for write (key-in or receive) operations. Although the horizontal counter is a divide-by-256 counter, it
never reaches a full count. A horizontal control ROM, shown on diagram 101, monitors the- HORZ 27 through 20
outputs of the horizontal counter and causes a -HORZ LOAD pulse to reload the horizontal counter on count 101
(+ HORZ 26•25 •22 •20 = 1 ). Each count of the horizonta I counter corresponds with one 9-dot horizonta I character
scan lime. Eighty of the 102 counts (2 through 81) correspond with the display of character dots as the crt electron
beam sweeps from left to right across the screen, and 22 of the counts (82 through 101, and 0 and 1) correspond with
horizontal retrace and settling time for the beam before it begins a new horizontal scan. Gate N3C out of the horizontal counter NANOs the+ HORZ 26, + HORZ 24 and +T4 clock signals to produce a -(HORZ 26.24) signal. This
signal sets a write disable flip-flop to prevent write access to refresh memory during horizontal retrace time
(diagram 101 ).
SCAN COUNTER The scan counter is a 4-bit decade counter (L2) that is enabled by the +ENABLE SCAN signal
(count 84 of horizontal counter via horizontal control ROM), and is toggled by the -(T8 + T2) clock signal. The
+SCAN 23 through 20 outputs of the counter provide timing for the vertical control ROM (diagram 101) and for the
character generator ROM (diagram 102), The scan counter counts 10 scan lines (counts 0 through 9), and then outputs an enable to the vertical counter via pin 15 to increment the vertical (display line) counter. The scan counter
also produces a +SCAN 10 signal by ANDing its +SCAN 23 and 20 outputs. This signal is used to increment the
vertica I address counter (diagram 101) and to control cursor displays (diagram 102 ).
Upon completion of an entire raster scan, including vertical retrace time, the vertical control ROM (diagram 101)
drops the -VERT LOAD signal line low for 62.89 f!S• This enables the VERT LOAD signal to NAND with the ENABLE
SCAN signal and reload the scan the vertical counters simultaneously (see timing diagroms on sheets 20, 2l, and 22
of this logic set).
VERTICAL COUNTER The vertical counter consists of counter circuit L1 and flip-flop LSA. The tenth count of
the scan counter enables the vertical counter while the -(T8 + T2) clock signals advance it. The vertical counter
increments once for every ten counts of the scan counter, and thereby tracks the display line count. Completion of
a vertical scan count occurs when the -VERT 23•2 4 signal line goes low to indicate the 24th display line has just
been completed. The -VERT 23.24 signal enables the vertical control ROM (diagram 101 ), which in turn provides
vertica I retrace control signa Is.
In addition to going to the vertical control ROM, outputs from the vertical counter go to the vertical address counter
(diagram 101) and the request to send (RTS) control logic (diagram 114). See the timing diagrams on sheets 20, 21,
and 22 of this logic set.
{
5-6
62957400 A
c
I
+
0
co
<(
I
+SVt R6, IK
l PUll __liP_L
·,4'
VERT CTR
~11)
4 G
r
R4N,56.K2 13
R4P,~6_.K2
14
:
R4F, 56, K2
6
R4E:?~·K2
5
R4D, 56. K2
-VERT LOAD
@-
5tJ
1 ~6
P3C
I
I2L..,
f&
I
9
, 56. K2
IO
_.
@;=:J
l
l~ ..f'
Gl
I 2
l
c
c
-( 18+12
~
I0
1X'"7;Yj
_e;
9
M~:~A~~i.
T~-5
IIIII'
·-····
12 eT4
158
l4
+HOR
L
-rn2
A
I I
~Jci
240
GK
l5B
101,105,106,107
101 '105, 106,107
101,105,106,107
101,105,106,111
22
-HORZ 2 O
('I)
I 07
+TO
ClO.
l
I0
9_
l!o ,a
Kl OC
SR-8
52 7
M5
J
+II
14
l----15
+12
t±J&
r--r--r--f----
f----
--.u
T4
T5
---;-j6
I
12
+iT
~!a
'----
•BA
-~A
62957400 A
I 01
-
I 08
L_
~'
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOIEO All CIRCUITS ARE PART
OF A 6ABO. GACO 6AOO. 6CUO. GCVO ANO 6AEO BOARDS
c
r ,.
I 05
I Oo, I 09
I 05, I 09
I 05,109
i
RB•. .'K
+OSC
111
I 01.
I 01.
I 01,
I 01,
,L & c
~ 2+1
Pt
+5V
t
N
+HORZ 23
Gl
I
+MAIN OSC
w
~>
t-Z
+HORZ 27
II
1-
ll:
zo
J
-HORZ LOAO
~
ew "'
o0
.,.,
8-
HORZ CTR
J
---
..
II:
x--:-:1
6
I
I~
..Jt-
16 CNTR
158
101
~
2•1
\-;:
II
R4G,~s. K2
"'"
+VER
c
9
18
~
I 01
101
I 01,114
& Gl
)L &
P4B
R4J, ~~· K2
+VERT 22
CNTRl
158
ll
)1
~6
!
~(!)
kr-
61'-u I
~
"
C\J
!i1C\J
5 co
4
3
Is
R4l '56: K2
TP_l-6
Cl)
1~
SCAN. TR
l
101~
101
! 9.
!,-
+ENABLE SCAN
TPl:-9
2
~ 16
\-; rRl
4
R4C, 56, K2
N
~
I 01
C\J
co
~
=
I PULL UP
TPHO
-VERT 2 3 •~
0
0
I co
I
R40;~~.K2 15
-
3
l5A
I'"';U
~~~.K2
@
&
140
P4A
hJ
101' 104,
I 05
~
...
101
2
240
GK
-P!R RS T
I 08
6
I
0
t
co
I
'It
108
1
l
=
101 I 02, I 08. I 09
103
108
108
I 01
I 01, I 04
I 09
~;~~ 108jLoc
2.103~Jo
~
5-7
loo
DIAGRAM 101
HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL CONTROL, VERTICAL
ADDRESS COUNTER. AND READ/WRITE CONTROL
This diagram depicts the horizontal and vertical control logic (ROMs M2 and M3 and register M4), the vertical
address counter (counter Ml, flip-flop P2B flip-flop P5B and other associated gates), and the read/write control logic
(flip-flops P5A, N5A and N5B, and other associated gates).
VERTICAL CONTROL ROM The vertical control ROM monitors outputs from the vertical and scan counters and
from the +50/-60-Hz switch (diagram 112) to produce vertical retrace timing signals. The ROM is enabled during
vertical retrace time by the -VERT 23•24 signal from the vertical counter (diagram 100). Since vertical retrace
timing for 50- and 60-Hz terminals vary, the +50/-60-Hz signal determines which retrace timing signals are accessed.
Basically, the sequence is as follows: 1) the ROM is enabled as -VERT 23.2 4 goes low, 2) this immediately drops
the +VERT UNBLK signal to blank the display screen during vertical retrace, 3) the vertical sync pulse occurs,
4) the -VERT LOAD signal drops low to reload the vertical and scan counters (diagram 100), and 5) this latter action
disables the vertical control ROM because the -VERT 23•24 signal returns high as the counters reload. The -(T8 + T2)
clock signal toggles register M4 to ensure proper timing of the horizontal and vertical sync and unblank signals. See
the timing diagrams on sheets 21 and 22 of this logic set for timing details.
HORIZONTAL CONTROL ROM This ROM is always enabled to track the output of the horizontal counter
(diagram 100). It provides control of the +HORZ UNBLK (+MEMORY ACCESS), +HORZ SYNC, -HORZ LOAD, and
+ENABLE SCAN signals as shown on the horizonta I refresh and memory timing diagram (sheet 20 of this logic set).
The + HORZ UNBLK (+MEMORY ACCESS) signal is high from counts 2 through 81 of the counter; the +ENABLE SCAN
signal pulses high at count 84; the +HORZ SYNC signal pulses high for counts 85 and 86; and the -HORZ LOAD signal
drops low to restart the horizontal counter clock cycle at count 101.
VERTICAL ADDRESS COUNTER The vertical address counter, P2B, tracks the vertical position of the electron
beam on the crt screen and provides information for displaying the cursor in the correct position for addressing refresh
memory. This counter normally (page mode) counts, along with the vertical counter L5A (diagram 100), up through
count 23. The -(T8 + T2) clock signal toggles both counters, and both are enabled for counting by essentially the
same signals (+ENABLf SCAN and +SCAN 10). At count 23, gates N1A and R1B enable the vertical address counter
to reload via gates P1B, and P3A and R1B the next time gate N3A from the horizontal control ROM is made. At the
same time this occurs, the -VERT 23.24 signal line goes low disabling gate N3A while vertical retrace occurs. When
vertical retrace is complete, the vertical counter (diagram 100) resets, reenabling the circuit to the vertical address
counter via gate N3A and the horizontal control ROM.
The vertical address counter may also be advanced via gate N3B when the display is operating in scroll mode. When
scroll mode is selected, the+ LST LN COMP signal comes up to enable gate N3B whenever the cursor moves into the
display line designated as the last line. Initially, the last line is display line 24; however, each time the display is
scrolled, the last line count wraps around. That is, display line 24 moves to position 23 and display line 1 wraps
around to position 24 as a blank line awaiting data entry. Gate N3B is enabled when the cursor is in the last line
(+LST LN COMP = 1 ), a scroll command causes+ INC Y to go high, and the horizontal position of the beam is one
position past the X cursor compare point [+(X COMP + 1) = 1]. Incrementing the vertical position count when the
cursor is in the lost display line in scroll made also advances the vertical ac:ldress counter (memory address control)
count ahead of the vertical counter (electron beam position control). This occurs when the vertical address
counter is advanced once via gate N3B and then once via gate N3A. This double advance effectively wraps addressing of the display lines around so that the vertical address counter follows the last line counter; display line 1 now
becomes display line 24, line 24 becomes line 23, etc. Each time the display is scrolled, this double advance
takes place until the original 24th display line becomes the 1st display line. The next advance scrolls line 24 off
the screen at the top and moves the 1st line back into its original 1st line position. The original line 24 then appears
in display position 24 as a blank line awaiting further data entries and scroll commands.
READ/WRITE CONTROL - Read/write control logic controls the reading of information from and the writing of
information into refresh memory. The write and read memory timing diagrams on sheets 21 and 22 of this logic set
indicate the signal sequences for the read/write control logic. Basically, memory is always enabled for reading
because the +READj-WRITE signal line is normally high. Write memory can only occur when:
1) Data is received or keyed in -
+ (RCV ACT+ KYBD ACT) signal is high, and
2) A horizontal retrace is not occurring -
5-8
flip-flop P5A is clear.
62957400 A
c
m
0
'o"
>-t
>r
rc
~
>t
>r
1 12B
1~n
2 64
+~0/-&0HZ
+VERT
+VERT
+VERT
+SCAN
+SCAN
+SCAN
+SCAN
2
21
20
2'
22
21
2"
32
3 16
A2~~
AT
_4_
B
7 4
·~v
6 2
13~
'""-
R1~J.4.7K,L7
9
R1~A.4.7K,l7
1.
~~
MEM
R1, 4. 7K
11~603
12
AGAGAG
AG10B
ED
100
100
100
100
100
1DO
100
100
'T
>t
>t
>t
>t
rr
>t
~
N3
'0
1
+HORZ
+HDRZ
+HOA:
+HORZ
+JIOR
+HORZ
+HORZ
+HDR
1~
x-Y
HD
rr.l
27
26
75
24
23
2
21
7D
1 12B
2 64
32
6 2
1
rH!
R4B, 56 2
___ll ~
+HORZ UNBLK
R2B,3. 3K,l4
,--11. ~
_.
1DB
lOB
oz
ID
-VERT 23 e 24
+SCAN 10
.1
+MEMORY ACCESS
-HORZ LOAD
+ENABLE SCAN
12
~
+t
Rl .I K
+PWR RST
(\')
TB + 12
112
103
~
+LST LN COMP
+INC Y
10B
®
+LINE CLEAR
12
+X COIP
11
CD
100
@
100
y
10B
lOB
lilt
~
ox
100
AC
100
AF
11~
10
141
(
HP
11~
HS
240
P2B
~GK
I~
R
....___
10
+VERT ADD 24
9
-VERT ADO 24
1 2~
&
218
RIB
6
+VERT
+VERT
+VERT
+VERT
11
12
13
~~
116 CNTR
~
15B
Ml
7 G
& Gl
9
l
14
ADD
ADO
ADO
ADD
23
2
71
2D
103,105
102,103
Al
lOB
BE
102
A
AP
100
100
100,102,
103.104
AD
109
105
AT
~
{W
105,109
105,109
105,109
105,109
~
c
SCROLL ADD
~
+17
-(HORZ 26 e 24 )
1
14B
R3D
15
P4l
rR
e T4
~
+T2
1
-MR
-LN CLR
s
12
+lA
131
14
&
ITf
11
140
P4D
13
3
1
146
D48
4
&
201
4 N4B
6
~
~
103,108,109
s
G~
GK
240
P~A
R
7 10
~J
9
&
140
P4C
B
+REAO
-IR 11E
BA
106,107
B8
102,109
G 240
GK N~8
R
-
~J
~~
u
@
-
2
4 G 240
N5A
3 GK
+(RCY ACT + KY80 ACT
62957400 A
I~
+(XCOIP+IJ
9
GJ
G 240
GK P~B
R
1-b,,- 10
+T6
104
AY
13
~
11
PULL UP
-lEI RED
AJ1-9
~
~
2l...l> &
B
~
115
1D2,10B,
111
~ ~1.2+1
R
EJ
®
i2s
~
4
109
~GJ
§co
co
5
100
VERT ADD
CTR
s
11
x--;a
Lffi2
DB
(PULL UP)
6
=@
10~
AJ
l1
~ ~1
-CLR SET
100
+HORZ SYNC
~
HORZ SYNc'
AM
1~
14
1
I0
UNLESS DTHERII SE NOTED All
CIRCUITS ARE PART OF &ABO.
&ACD. &ADO. &CUD. &CVO AND
BAED BOARDS.
109
10
AH
R34. 3.3K,M4
~~I
AGAG-
+VERT SYNC
R29,3.3K, N5
IM~603
N
7
6
+VERT UNBLK
c_____
lMEMi
-VERT SYNC
~~ 2
& G
K2
RGTR
520
14
L-..:.. co
R56,3.3K,l3
:~·
R
5
+5V
M3
ffi
-VERT LOAD
10
11
1
-PIR RST
~
100
100
..
1
m
6
+lUX CUR
7
·-MUX CUR
/WI'\
~
102
I(
5-9
~ 0
2 N
§~
0..
...J
rno
...Jrna::
...JO<(O::
zu3:
_a::_
DIAGRAM 102
MEMORY OUTPUT LATCH, CHARACTER GENERATOR, VIDEO SERIALIZER,
BLINK COUNTER, DISPLAY CURSOR FLIP-FLOP
Diagram 102 depicts the logic for the following items: 1) memory output latch E3 and F3, 2) character generator G6,
3) video serializer E6, 4) blink counter A7, 5) display cursor flip-flop P2A, 6) inhibit display flip-flops A6B and A6A,
and 7) highlight control circuit ElO, and flip-flops ClOA and ClOB.
The 4-bit latches, E3 and F3, receive seven bits (+MEM 26 through 2°) of character
MEMORY OUTPUT LATCH code information from memory bank A (diagram 106) or memory bank B (diagram 107). Each memory is accessed by
alternating HORZ 2° clock signals: +HORZ 20 accesses memory A and -HORZ 20 accesses memory B. The -(TB + T2)
clock signal loads the latches with character code information from the appropriate memory (memory A= characters 1,
3, 5 ••• 79 and memory B =characters 2, 4, 6 ••• BO) once every character-line clock cycle (see memory timing,
sheet 22). The character information loaded into the latches is then applied to character generator G6 and highlight
control ROM ElO circuits. Latch F3 also latches the +CUR COMP signal. This signal occurs when the count of the
horizontal counter (diagram 100) matches that of the X cursor counter (diagram 113) and the count of the vertical
address counter (diagram 101) matches that of theY cursor counter (diagram 103).
CHARACTER GENERATOR The character generator is a ROM that converts character code and scan line inputs into
7 bits of dot information. This enables formation of dot pattern characters on a 7- by 9-dot character matrix during
successive, vertically incremented horizontal scans of a display line. The combination of a scan I ine and a character
code input generates the 7 dots required for composing one horizontal character scan. Nine scans are then required
to compose an entire character area; the 1Oth scan Iine is used for displaying the cursor. The dot patterns generated
by the character generator pass to a video serializer, which serializes' the dot codes before sending them to the video
display circuits.
VIDEO SERIALIZER The video serializer accepts 7-bit inputs from the character generator each -(TB + T2) clock
cycle. Loaded with each 7 bits of dot information are a leading and a trailing blank bit (logical 0). These blank bits
enable 2-dot spacing between adjacent horizontal character displays. Once loaded, the serializer shifts out a character
dot on each -f/1A clock pulse. The +f/1A clock pulses AND with the output of the serializer to produce either a blank or
an unblank signal to the video driver (diagram 103). Notice that the -(TB + T2) clock signal, which loads the video
serializer, can be blocked by Inhibit Display flip-flops A6A and A6B.
BLINK COUNTER AND DISPLAY CURSOR FLIP-FLOP The blink counter divides the frequency of the -VERT SYNC
signal by 16 to provide blink capabilities for the cursor display and for the blink highlight feature of the display. The
blink counter alternately enables and disables the Display Cursor flip-flop forB display pages. The +CUR COMPand
+SCAN 10 signals coincide every raster scan to provide a set input to the Display Cursor flip-flop. If the flip-flop is
enabled by the blink counter, it sets on the next -(TB + T2) clock pulse. As it sets, the -DISPLAY CURSOR FF
signal line goes low to enable the cursor display. The integrity of cursor display timing and character display timing is
maintained in the following manner: on the 1st -(TB + T2) clock signal the +CUR COMP rises; the next -(TB + T2) clock
signal latches the +CUR COMP signal just before it drops; the 3rd -(TB + T2) clock pulses sets the Display Cursor flip-flop
and enables display of the cursor at the same time a new character code is being latched (+CUR COMP from F3-15 goes
to 0); the 4th -(TB + T2) clock signal clears the Display Cursor flip-flop so that the cursor display only lasts one character
scan time.
INHIBIT DISPLAY FLIP-FLOPS Flip-flops A6A and A6B are both Inhibit Display flip-flops. When data is being
written into refresh memory (+MUX CUR goes high), both A6B ond A6A direct set as the -MUX CUR signal drops low on
a T2 clock pulse. Two T2 clock pulses after the Mux Cursor flip-flop sets (diagram 101) flip-flop A6B clears and permits
A6A to clear on the next T2 clock pulse. When either A6B or A6A is set, it blocks the shifting of character dots out of
the video serializer. This is done for a few character times to prevent spurious dot patterns from appearing on the display
screen when the cursor is multiplexed to a new location in memory (write memory operation).
During highlight commands (keyboard control key functions), flip-flop A6A sets for one character time as the control
character is decoded to prevent the display of the control code symbol associated with the control code.
1j
5-10
62957400 A
DIAGRAM 102 (CONTD)
HIGHLIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT - The 4- by 256-bit ROM at location E10 implements the highlight features of the
display by decoding the following control codes: initiate low intensity (SO or 016s), initiate blink (ETB or 027s), and
end highlight (SI or 017s). To do this, the E10 ROM monitors all of the codes out of memory (+MEM 26 through 20).
In addition, it also monitors the output of Blink Control flip-flop C10A. The output of blink counter A7 toggles the
Blink Control flip-flop so that the flip-flop cycles on and off about twice a second.
The Blink Control flip-flop is only used in conjunction with the initiate blink control code (ETB or 027s). While this
code is applied to the input of memory E1 0 and the Blink Contro I flip-flop is set, output pins 10 and 11 of E10 go low:
10 to inhibit the display of the symbol for the ETB code and 11 to initiate reduced intensity (set flip-flop C10B). C10B
remains set either until the end of the scan line when the +MEMORY ACCESS and +HORZ UNBLK drop to reset it, or
until the highlight control memory detects an end highlight code (SI or 0178 ) within the same scan line. Detection of
the end highlight code causes pin 12 of E10 to go low and enable flip-flop C10B for clearing on the next +T2 clock
pulse. The Blink Control flip-flop (C10A) remains set for 16 pages and then clears for 16 pages so that input pin 15 to
memory E10 goes low. During the 16 pages when E10-15 is low, output pin 11 remains high, C10B does not set, and
display dots appear at normal brightness, Alternately enabling and disabling low intensity scans approximately once
every 16 pages causes displayed characters within the highlight field to appear as blink characters.
The initiate reduced intensity code (SO or 016s) has a similar effect, with the exception that the state of the Blink
Control flip-flop is disregarded. The highlight field appears as a steady reduced intensity field rather than as a
blinking field.
Either the occurrence of the cursor display scan (SCAN 10 = 1), or the selection of internal test mode (TEST= 1)
disables the highlight control memory. This enables normal cursor display throughout a highlight field, and in the
case of test-mode selection, it permits display of the symbols associated with the highlight control codes.
(
62957400 A
5-11/5-12
c
100
100
AF
AG
co
0
+BA
BA
&
+5V
100
100
100
100
109
101
106
107
106
107
106
I 07
106
107
§j
w
EJ
AQ
+SCAN
+SCAN
+SCAN
+SCAN
-(T8 + T2)
(PULL UP J
~)--
& +MEl 26
~)--
& +MEM 25
OK>-- 0
VU:>--o
~)-- & +MEM 24
oM>-- o
& +MEM 23
®--
~l-----0
+12V
~t2
23
2'
21
2u
~
R
4
2;
24
RGTR
520
co
512
256
128
9
11
12
16
32
1:
: f-s4
23
22
~
21
5Tn--- ._I-
A2047
ioooo
- I
rHKITEN
MEM
12To---- 10
5~~
L__
105
11 C1 0
_llm--
13ffi-14m---
6
~m=
19
A
~0
:
5 f..!.L___
Ht--
,___!.
1
-=
+CHARACTER DOTS
9
~1-7'----++-H-+_.
~}-~
13To---~
-It
Irt---
~rrr~i'By
Ll-++-1-H-1-~ 64
1
I ·yR62H. 1K
1
L-
L.J.--1--l-1---+-...:.2
32
L-l-++-++-----'-3 16 A255
N
~w:iooo
5
) -____:J+T~E~STc______.jl-l------------l-----------4--d.~~~3>r.l
FW
-
I
lu--
13~
)----~=:!!_~--+-1---------jc
,1
~wCRGTR
106
107
106
I 07
I 06
I OT
2~
4
2
1
~
I 03
f3
" '"" .J
2
23
22
21
201 1-'3'---___;+..::.CHc::;A: :_R-"U"-'N8"'-LK"-{ BO
N8A
240
Cl 08
I
-REDUCED
INTENSITY
9
-~---J
3 62C I K
JF
I 03
:y
89
+5V
R620
11
I~
INHIBIT
0 ISPLAY
89
4
s
14 GJ
r§!>G
GK
240
A68
~
12
9
13
I
140
860
61
BLINK COUNTER
X"15Yl
R4H,56,K2
1-,1-
I 01
108
IJ
8
1 2
II
1r
5
2
4 G 240
ABA
GK
___!...t R
'-----
~~
--c::I!
1£
GJ 240
G P2A
~GK
L__
1-m
7
-0 I SPLAY CURSOR F f
BF
I 03
-VERT SYNC
L,-~ 2+1
EGT---~~~R________________~---------t--~1~R----_j
L----------------------------------------------------~~~P~UL~l~U~P~)~C!)
108,110
()
62957400A
5-13
DIAGRAM 103
Y CURSOR COUNTER AND MUX. AND VIDEO DRIVER CIRCUIT
Diagram 103 depicts the logic for theY cursor multiplexer (mux-G3, G2 and H2), theY cursor counter (J2 and flip-flop
R28), and the video driver circuit (QI/87), neor the bottom of the diagram.
Y CURSOR COUNTER AND MUX TheY cursor counter tracks the vertical position of the cursor on the display screen.
To doth is, the counter can either increment or decrement its count to follow keyboard or receive codes that increment or
decrement the vertical position of the cursor within the range of display lines 1 through 24 (counter counts 0 through 23).
Additionally, the counter can be loaded from theY cursor mux. This permits it to load the count of the last-line counter
for the reset-to-home operation when the display is operating in scroll mode, or to load theY position portion of X/Y
positioning commands when the display is operating in page mode.
The -EN Y CUR CTR and the -LOAD CUR CTR signals from theY cursor control memory determine whether the counter
is enabled for counting (increment or decrement) or for loading from the mux. The enable and load counter signals
cannot occur simultaneously, although the same clock time (+(X COMP + 1) and T3] clocks either occurrence. During
enable counter operations, the state of the -INC Y signal determines whether the counter increments (-INC Y = 0) or
decrements (-INC Y = 1). During enable counter operations, theY mux becomes part of the counter when the carry
from counter J2, pin 15, goes high: J2 increments at the maximum count or decrements at the minimum count. This
permits flip-flop R28 to set or clear, as appropriate, when tracking the cursor position during enable counter operations.
During load counter operations, the'-LOAD Y CUR CTR signal (from diagram 113) goes low to enable loading the
counter, while the +PAGE/-SCROLL, -RST Y, and -Y POS signals determine what information muxes into the counter.
Although the mux is a 4-input type, only three sets of inputs normally poss through the mux: the write inputs (pins 5
and 11), the last-line inputs (pins 4 and 12), and the clear cursor/set cursor and increment/decrement Y inputs (pins 6
and 10). Input pins 3 and 13 (both grounded) should not be muxed because the aii-Os combination of +PAGE/-SCROLL,
-RST Y and-Y POS signals necessary to mux pins 3 and 13 is illegal; that is, Y positioning commands are blocked in
scroll mode (see diagram 115). The loading of write inputs from the mux into the counter is associated with Y positioning
commands (-Y POS = 0), while the loading of last-line inputs is associated with reset Y and scroll mode commands
(-RST Y and +PAGE/-SCROLL = 0). Other combinations of mux control inputs gate either -CLR CUR 212 and
+(INC Y +DEC Y) signals or -SET CUR 212 and +(INC Y +DEC Y) signals from the mux to the counter. Operations
like increment Y at maximum Y cause the -CLR CUR 212 signal to go low, while decrement Y at minimum Y cause the
-SET CUR 212 signal to go low,
VIDEO DRIVER CIRCUIT Video driver Q1 turns on momentarily as +CHAR UNBLK signals (dot pulses) enable NAND
gate 85A during horizontal and vertical unblank times. The video output signal then posses to the video amplifier circuit
on the video display assembly where it blanks or unblanks the electron beam as necessary to produce dot pattern characters
on the crt screen. The video driver also receives Display Cursor signal inputs, via NAND gate C6A, to implement display
of the cursor on the crt screen.
The -REDUCED INTENSITY signal to Q1 comes from the highlight control logic (diagram 102). It shifts the base bias of
Q1 when it goes low, producing a smaller output signal from the video driver circuit. This, in turn, decreases the
intensity of the characters displayed on the crt screen.
5-14
62957400 A
u
Q
101
112
104
'
..
I 04
109
113
@
c
(PULL UP)
+PAGEI-SCROLL
2
(if\ -RST Y
3
J
148
06A
I
2 2x-Y ~
14 I
t
'"-J
teE\
+LSI LN 24
+I
74
{jffi\ -SET CUR 212
9
I
~1401 8
~
r--ir----4-5 2I
(GH')+2,4,5+1
~1.3,5-1
I
146
04E
II
-(1 COIP+I
e 13
113,112, I !4
+INC Y .(BQ) 101
10
=
r -+sV - - - - ---+iV-- - ,
102
101
101
10
AL
AK
I
I
I
I
+CHAR UNILK
+HORZ UNBLK
+VERT UNILK
I
I
I
I
----,
102
JF
R58
680
-REDUCED INTENSITY
I RIB
I ~~ 0
N~~B~SED &ON I
~4
+GND
~
L-------------.J
LJI!.!.. - - - _j':£! -
-SPARES-
)
+VIDEO
~:10
100
102
ELEIENT
146
200
943
900
LOCATION
E5
LID
NB
R4
_J.,..
1llll'IJT Pll«
8,10
10
6.8.11
UNLESS DTHERIISE NOTED ALL CIRCUITS ARE PART OF 6ABD. 6ACD. 6100. &CUD. 6CVD AND 6AEO BOARDS.
u
62957400 A
...
'JB
2
+LSI LN 21
+IRIH 21
+(I COlli' + I
104, I 05,
109,112
~0
~
104
109
113
101
-Y POS
9
-CUR 212
9
-
8H
.:!V
II
ID
N
@)
Ll.U
G 240
GK R2B
R
~'------
Hll
IU
f-.#.lo
2
I
10 0
3
+LSI LN 23
12
12
f---jt
+CUR 212
~GJ
T
>+IT
~~
.....ill.....
~II
109
..J.J
2
"Y" CURSOR
COUNTER 10
II
6 0
~
113
MUX
508
G3
5-15
N
DIAGRAM 104
CURSOR FUNCTION DECODE. CURSOR POSITION DECODE. LAST LINE COUNTER
Diagram 104 depicts the logic for the cursor function decode circuit (memory G4), the cursor position decode circuit
(coders J1 and J5, register G5 and associated gates), and the last-line counter circuit (counter H1, flip-flop R2A
and associated gates).
CURSOR FUNCTION DECODE CIRCUIT The data decode circuit on diagram 109 monitors keyboard and receive
data inputs, and if it detects a display control character code, it gates the cursor function decode circuit by causing
the -EN DECODE signal to go low, The cursor function decode circuit monitors 4 write bits (+WRITE z4 and 22
through ~)and the +EN AUTO LF signal to determine what control code is being received and what outputs to enable.
Input codes to which the cursor function decode circuit responds are as follows (the auto I ine feed bit only affects the
carriage return function):
ANSI Mnemonic
Memory Input
+WRITE
-
CONTROL plus G
~
22
Sound audible alarm
BEL
0
BS
0
0
LINE FEED
LF
0
0
CARRIAGE RETURN
CR
0
CONTROL plus U or -
NAK
CONTROL plus V
SYN
CONTROL plus X or CLEAR
CAN
0
0
CONTROL plus Y or RESET
EM
0
0
SUB
0
CONTROL plus Z or
f
Function Output
2 1 2°
0
0
Decrement X
0
Increment Y
0
Reset X, or Reset X and increment Y
if auto line feed bit is set
0
Increment X
0
Line clear
0
Clear, reset X, and reset Y
Reset X and reset Y
0
Decrement Y
Because there are nine function outputs possible and only eight outputs available from the cursor function decode circuit,
the bell, clear, and line clear outputs require further decoding via gates NBC and M9C on this diagram and gates JlOB
and PBC on diagram 108.
CURSOR POSITION DECODE CIRCUIT The cursor position decode circuit uses two BCD-to-decimal decoders
(J1 and J5) to track the outputs of the X andY cursor counters (diagrams 113 and 103). Decoding the outputs of
these two counters enables monitoring of the minimum and maximum counts. Clock pulse +T7 loads the resulting
-Min/-Max X/Y signals into register G5, which passes them to their respective X or Y cursor control memory circuits
(diagram 113), The cursor position decode circuit also enables a +BEEP signal (audible alarm) as the cursor moves from
character position 72 to character position 73 on the display screen.
LAST-LINE COUNTER CIRCUIT The last-line counter circuit tracks the display line designated as the last line
when the terminal is operating in scroll mode, A clear operation sets the Clear 1 flip-flop (diagram 108), causing
the -CLR 1 signal to go low and the +C LR I signal to go high. These two signals load the last-line counter with a
count of 23 (display line 24), which is always the display line designated as the last line when initializing the logic
(power-on clear or CLEAR Key). Each time the display screen is scrolled, the -SCROLL ADD signal goes low to
advance the last-line counter, and the last display line acquires a new designation (0, I, 2 ••• 23), When count 23
of the last-line counter is reached, a complete scroll cycle has occurred and gate NIB enables the counter for
resetting to 0 the next time the -SCROLL ADD signal goes low. Outputs from the last-line counter circuit go to the
last- I ine comparator circuit (diagram 112) and to the Y cursor mux and counter circuits (diagram 103).
5-16
62957400 A
c
I 08
J
0
9
+(BELL + CLR
I0
CUR FUNC
112
I 09
I 09
I 09
109
I 09
~
~
g
EY
"'T
~
+EN AUTO lf
+WR I 1 74
+WR TE
+WR 1TE I
0
+WRIT
1
13 4
I IT
12
II
10
-EN DECODE
15
~~~
:
2
10 -~
1-J
ADO
lin
R14Q
4 .JK
F4
0
~
~
~
AG~
RI4B
4. 7K
F4
15
R14P
4. 7K
F4
12
13
14
2
RI4M
4. 7K
F4
RI4N
4. 7K
F4
RI4J
4. 7K
F4
RI4K
4. 7K
F4
I0
R14l
4. 7K
F4
II
~a
c
___!§_
----.!2::..
I 00
I 03
AD
BJ
I 03
I 03
I 03
I 03
"'K'
ffif
BM
\!!!)
+CLEAR
JA
108
-MEM REO
-BELL
BR
112
9
9
7
6
5
4
-(BEll + LN CLR
-(BtLL + LR)
R T
DEC
-INC
-RST
-DEC
-INC
AG
HP
a
+5V
4
115
&
201
NBC
I
2~1 ka
~
I0
N4C
9
+Tl
-CUR 212
&
218
K5C
a
I
146
D4D
a
Y
Y
Y
X
X
X
+BEEP
'TB
~
Tf
~
~
>f.'
>fx'
!!
I 08
I 08
I 03,113
113
113
113
113
113
w
ow a::
BZ
112
a
N
+CUR 212
I 03
~zu
-ow
u __
1-j::z
s
5
4
Z(f)....J
2
a:: a::~
~~~--
J
gg . . .
0~
a:: a::
:::>:::>
218
K5A
2
(.)(.)
~
X CUR POS
113
G
113
(GN).
113
113
113
~
®
+CUR 25
13~T-+i
&
II
CODER 9
+CUR 24
12
218
K50
507
12 8 15
13 4
14
15 2
I
+CUR 22
+CUR 71
+CIIR 0
8
1
6
5
4
3
2
~
~>.!._
~
113
113
GP
®
+L:UII 2"
13
+CUR 26
17
~ID
E
108
~
+CUR 2 11
+CUR 210
+CUR 2'
+CUR 28
0
N
5-17
N
DIAGRAM 105
UART, X COMPARE, CURSOR COMPARE
Diagram 105 shows the logic for the UART, the X compare, and the cursor compare circuits.
UART The UART is a universal, asynchronous, receiver/transmitter LSI circuit. It can simultaneously receive
parallel data inputs, disassemble them, and transmit them as asynchronous serial data outputs, and receive asynchronous
serial data inputs, assemble them, and gate them out as parallel data words. Additionally, it can add start, parity
(even or odd), and stop bits to its transmit, serial-data outputs, and can check received serial data for word format and
parity errors. Following is a list of the UART pin assignments for this application.
Pins 1 through 3 provide the required power and signal ground inputs to the UART.
Pin 4 (Enbl Rcvr Rgtr) is normally low to gate outputs from Rcvr Rgtr pins 6 through 12, but goes high to block the
receiver register outputs when either a word format error (framing error indicated by missing stop bit) or a parity error
occurs in a received word.
Pins 6 through 12 (Rcvr Rgtr) are the receiver register output pins; they pass received words to the write-memory
multiplexer and data-decode circuits (diagram 109).
Pin 13 (Parity Err) goes high to indicate a parity error in a received data word.
Pin 14 (Frame Err) goes high to indicate a framing error (format error) if a received word does not end with a stop bit
(mark or logical 1 bit).
Pin 16 (Enbl Status Rgtrs) is tied low to enable status outputs from pins 13, 14, 19, and 22 (parity error, framing error,
receiver register full, and transmit holding register empty).
Pin 17 (Rcvr Clk ..;- 16) accepts a receive clock signal that is 16 times the actual bit rate of received data inputs.
Pin 18 (Reset Rcvr Rgtr Full) goes low to reset pin 19 (Rcvr Rgtr Full) when the receive register is not full; pin 19 goes
high when the receive register is full.
Pin 20 (Ser Rcvr Data) receives serial data inputs; reception starts with a high-to-low (marking to spacing) transition
on this I ine •
Pin 21 (Reset) goes high to reset the UART when a master reset occurs.
Pin 22 (Bfr Rgtr Empty) goes high when transmit holding register is empty.
Pin 23 (Load Bfr Rgtr) goes low to load data on pins 26 through 33 into the UART transmit buffer register.
Pin 24 (Xmtr Shf-Rgtr Empty) goes high to indicate transmit shift register is empty.
Pin 25 (Ser Xmtr Data) is the output pin for serial transmit data; it is high when no data is being transmitted and shifts
low (start bit) to indicate the start of transmission.
Pins 26 through 33 receive porallel data inputs from the keyboard (7 bits) and the mark or space select bit, which is
active when even or odd parity bit generation is not selected.
Pin 34 (Load Mode Rgtr) is tied high to permit addition of control and pority bits to the parallel, transmit data inputs.
Pin 35 (Enbl Parity) is low to enable parity bit generation and checking, and is high to disable these functions.
Pin 36 (Sel Stop Bit) goes high when the display terminal is operating at 110 baud transmission rate to enable two stop
bits to be added to transmitted words; it is low to enable only one stop bit at all other baud rates.
5-18
62957400 A
DIAGRAM 105 (CONTD)
Pins 37 and 38 (Sel Wd Lg) are connected so as to enable eight data bits per transmitted word when no parity is selected
(see pin 33, preceding) or to enable seven data bits and a parity bit per transmitted word when parity check/generation
is enabled (see pin 35, preceding).
Pin 39 (Sel Parity Even/Odd) is high to select even parity checking and generation when these functions are enabled
(see pin 35, preceding), and low to select odd parity checking and generation.
Pin 40 (Xmtr Clk) receives a clock signal that is 16 times the actual bit rate of transmitted data (see also pin 17,
preceding).
X COMPARE The X compare circuit issues a +X COMP signal when the counts of the horizontal counter
(diagram 100) and the X cursor counter (diagram 113) are equal to one another. This equality indicates that the
horizontal position of the electron beam as it sweeps the crt screen matches the horizontal location of the cursor on
the crt screen.
CURSOR COMPARE The cursor compare circuit consists of the X compare circuit described preceding and of a
circuit that issues a +CURSOR COMP signal when the counts of the vertical address counter (diagram 101) and the
Y cursor counter (diagram 103) ore equal to one another. The +X COMP signal ANDs with the +CURSOR COMP
signal to produce a +CUR COMP signal each time the crt beam sweeps the actual position of the character immediately
at the cursor position on the display screen.
62957400 A
5-19/5-20
u
Q
+5V
t
(
Rl2, IK,R9
JI-B
-EVEN PAR I TY
Jl-6
-DOD PARITY
101
'""'
'=/
115
@
.
6 4201
m
51 NSB
I-:!:.
+5V
C4
lui
RB
ENBL STATUS RGTRS
RESET
J4
LOAD MODE RGTR
6 SEL STOP BIT 1.5,2 f
SEl 10 LG B. 7 6.5
SELIO LG 1.6 7,5
39 SEL PARITY EVEN iiOii
~.....& ENBL PARITY
+II BITS
tAll, IK
liD
114
FJ
G
110
®
110
114
941
N7
~0
QN
RCVR
CJ, .Jut
R9
DT
LSI
~ART
-i=-yt
+5V
IDB
f,
~
+MR
17 RCVR CLK+ 16
STATUS RGTR
PARITY ERR
FRAME ERR
OVERRUN ERR
RCVR RGTR FULL
Rf1
II
-RCV ACT
RESET RCVR RGTR FULL
4,. ENBL ACVA RGTR
20 SEA RCVA DATA
+(FE+ PE)
+RI
+BAUD CLOCK
®
+EN XIII
12
@
+LOCAL -ON LINE
13
I
2:8
PBD
~
III
~
201
NBO
II
XMTR
~
N
lOB
112
FS
AJI-IIJ~
1-13
AJ 1-I
1q
::~
f:l.H)
_,
I:
AJ 1-17
AJI
103
103
103
103
103
.,
>ii
~
+CUR II
+OUR ?'
29
+CUR 71
+OUR ?12
AT
Ill
101
Ill
Ill
~
+VERT ADD 3
+VFIT ADD
+VFAT 100 2
+
101
®
113
~
113
113
100
100
100
100
113
113
113
Ill
100
100
100
100
100
!}
"""
15 I
!i,
13 4
524
12 2 1 •1 8
+cui
>
~II
PID
3
.b
2101
l Gl
~m
-
•••
15
12 4 A
•=a
~r4
A=B
~
•"""' 6
+HDA 25
+W017 4
14 :
1(1
II 2 8
9 I
~
+CUR 23
+CUI 72
+CUR ?I
+CUR 2•
15
13 :
5¥4
122••t>s
10 I
2
& Gl
CD
~
to
Pill
UP
.
+HORI 23
+HDAZ 22
3
-:!.:~
.
~
1=8
& G3
I
8
14
I ; 8 1(8
9 I
+W017 70
22
+THRE
-@
24
+IRE
109
109
109
109
109
109
109
~
~
~
~
101,114
114
CY
+TRO
25
+KYSD 26
+KYBD ~
..... 4
+KYIO
+KYBD
+KYBD 2
+KYID
c
114
'iii'
109
109
109
109
109
109
109
7ii
~
~
~
~
-!!!
I
rq
L1
+CURSOR CDIP
6
TP2-
G2
~·
+CUR CDIP
102
DA
8
I
3
I
A
3
~
G2 6
I
+X COIP
IP )!.!1:!1
~
101' lOB
I
M
6
L:F
3
+COMP
TP
)ill=.'
I
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED All CIRCUITS ARE PART OF &ABO. &lCD. &ADO, &CUD. 6CVD AND BAED BOARDS.
u
62957400 A
8-
101
I
+HORI 27
~
I.!Y
'C'
CP
1(8
4 &G3
I
{D
+RR7
+RR&
+AA5
+AR4
+RAJ
+AA
+AAI
f
-12V
A>B
~tl::
RCVA RGTA 8 .
7 6
6 7
5 I
4 9
310
2 II
1 12
SER XMTR DATA
;o: ~
~&GI
~I
-:1
+OR
liD
II 0,112
ILl ILl
a: a:
a... a...
""""
:::'E::E
oo
oo
=x a:
= .o
I-
(f)
a: a:
Cl::::>
:::>0
N
+VERT UNBLK
+CUR 27
+
+CUR 25
+OIIR ?4
19
~
I
Gl
4 &
I
14 :
II
2
9 I
+PE
+FE
XMTR SHF -RGTR EMPTY
-:¥
101
M
23 LOAD BFR RGTR
33 I
7
31 6
30 5
29 4
28 3
27 2
26 I
..... ,o
-VERT ADD 74
113
•
-
m;
ACT
-SPACE
26
,5
24
2'
•UID Z2
+KYaD21
13
14
STATUS RGTA
8FR RGTR EMPTY
...__!! XITR CLK
-KYBO
+MARK
+KYID
•••••
+KYRD
+KYID
~o.
0 ...,
5-21
DIAGRAMS 108 AND 107
MEMORY BANK A AND MEMORY BANK B
Memory bank A ond 8 each consist of seven 1024- by 1-bit random-access, read/write memory circuits connected in
parallel to produce a 1024- by 7-bit memory. The two banks therefore have a capacity of 2048 seven-bit words. Both
banks use common address, read/write select {+READ/-WRITE), and write-data {+WRITE 26 through 20) signal input
lines. Each bank, however, uses a separate bank select signal (A= +HORZ 20 and 8 = -HORZ 20) and separate read
data lines (+MEM 26 through 20), which are ORed into the 7-bit, memory output latch register (diagram 102).
The common address bits to each bank simultaneously address the same memory locations; however, the bank select
signals alternately enable each memory bank so that bank A receives (write) or furnishes (read) all even characters
(0, 2, 4, ••• 78) and bank 8 receives or furnishes all odd characters (1, 3, 5, ••• 79) in a display line.
The combination of horizontal counter signals (diagram 100) and address signals from the memory address converter
(diagram 109) enables binary addressing of 960 of the 1024 possible memory locations in each memory bank. The two
banks, therefore, provide a total of 1920 seven-bit memory locations that corresponds with the 192Q-character capacity
of the display screen (24 Iines of 80 characters per I ine).
Reading or writing from or into memory is determined by the state of the +READ/-WRITE signal Iine from the read/write
control circuit (diagram 101). When the read/write signal line is high, the memory is enabled for reading information,
and when the read/write signal Iine is low, the memory is enabled for receiving write information. The read/write
signal line is normally high and only goes low when a write operation (keyboard entries or receive information) occurs.
5-22
62957400 A
c
u
+5V
109
@
109
109
109
109
109
109
109
100
100
100
101
100
'fK
+IR 1TE 16
,.--.
I
~
~
rr
To
TR
>f
7"
>f"
>Bi
>f
"-
109
E
109
'~::!/
nr1'\
19
16
17
1
15
14
73
+H23
+H2
+H11
+R/-1
+H2D
+ADO 19
+ADO 1'
+ADO 17
+ADD 16
+ADD 1>
+ADO 14
+ADD 23
+HORZ 2'
+HORZ 72
+HDRZ 71
+REAOI-IRITE
+HORZ 1D
+WRITE 15
II
14
15
16
I
2
7
6
5
4
+H2l
+H2
+RI-1
+H 0
x-v
511
156
116
64 AI013
32 Aoooo
16
6
4
1
I
v:
v:
v
14
15
16
3
"'
14
15
16
I
2
7
6
5
4
38
13
x-v
10
512
156
128
64 AI013
31
16
loooo
v
v
v:
19
2•
2
14
Af 11
+MEM 16
+MEM 25
tr
DC
!02
00
102
a!
>-
0:::
0
2
11..1
2
w
N
C
f MEM
771
02
x-v
11
+MEM 24
+MEM 13
-@)
102
f
102
0
102
OH
102
-®
102
10
t;fC
8
4
2
I
Lt
1:1 c
II
772
82
CO
AF 12
f MEM
771
C2
11
ACO
Af
9
-=
n
26
1>
14
ioooii
~
+H1J
+H 2
+H
+R/-1
+H2•
13
U
kJc
f MEM
772
A2
12
II
ACO
Af
9
+IRITE zD
+MEM 21
14
15
16
I 64 AI023
1 31
7 16
6 8
5 4
4 1
_j_l
3 CrT-
2
/
+MEM 21
y
19
11
-
+MEM 20
UNLESS OTHERIISE NOTED All CIRCUITS ARE PART Of &ABO, &CUD, 6ACO, 6CV0,6AOO AND BAED BOARDS.
c
62957400 A
:<(
z<(
~
y
moo
-=
®
9
512
15
256
16
118
I
1!
64 AI023
2>
2
32
7
24
16
2•
6 8
+Hl!
5 4
+H1l
4 2
!lfll
__ll
+BL,W
3
+H2U 13
' C
9
109
~
+5V
wru
II
AC~ 1
II~
-=
+5V
29
21
71
26
15
24
23
+M73
+H7:
+H71
•R ··I
+H2D
0.
I 64 Al023
~ 31 Aoooo
16
6 8
5 4
4 2
8 I
U
771
C0-2
ACD
Af 11
9
+IR ITE 21
+WRITE 21
/.
/.
Ltiir
II
1\:
1'\.
1'\.
£Y
0
19
26
17
1'
15
24
1'
+H23
+H2
+H21
+R-W
+H2" 13
13 3 ~
+WRITE 13
1'\.
109
J
0
N
-=
11
-=
+WRITE 14
64 AI013
31 ioooo
16
8
4
1
I
wyf l
II
771
E1
ACD Af
9
~
y
14
15
16
I
1
7
6
5
4
8
3
MEM
771
LJ, f MEM
N
I
l:Jc
13
6
5
4
13
+H23
109
/
/.
/
/
/.
/
: 64 AI013
31i0Qoo
7 16
6 8
54
4 1
8 I
3 .,...__
19
8
109
fr
/.
y
14
15
16
19
16
1
6
1•
1•
1
+H13
+H1
+H2
+R/-1
+H2 13
u
5-23/5-24
u
Q
109
@
+5V
n
+WRITE 26
5V
v
0
:::
109
~
>lj
~
+ADD 29
•Ao• ,a
+ADD 27
::~~ ~:
109
I D9
109
109
IUD
100
100
IOI
(};!!QQ)-...:+:!!H~DR~Z~
,,_ _ _...../
IUD
J!..
109
I 09
>=;:
Jg
+Ann 24
+ADO 1'
ER
>j-
>r
m
}ii'
+HDRZ 2'
+HORZ 2'
+READ/-IRITE
-HORZ 20
29
y
1'..'~:~28~:::::::~:~
~~)-~+~IR~I~TE~15~--------I~----...:I~I
~~1~1
~
~9
______
13
+H2J
+H22
•••I
+R/ I
-H2D 13
I
64 AI023
~ ~~ ioooo
6
5
4
B
3
8
4
1
I
tJc
& C
T •
I
~~19.----7,14;,-lrr
ioooii
64 AI023
32
16
13
."--'.~HI2"'23.---l6LJ B
5 4
+H2
4 2
~ i! :~
v
V
~:
~
23
+H23
6
5
4
B
I09
9
+H22
+H?I
+R I w
-H1D 13
J
,-:
uc
29
18
'----<;'-----;..164
"'-~~:~---'~~31
23
+H 3
+N?2
+N?I
AifF1--C1C!.2 -¢---::!•M~E!CMC!.24--~(lll)
11
+IEM 13
AMF~~-----~~-------..-.V,----¢---~~~--{DN
5
14 512
15 256
1'..'·"--~71 ~;---~1 ~H 118
N
C
~9
10
x-v
~_!1:,.9_ __cl~4-l512
'r--'2T~--l-i15~ 256
',--'2!.;7---~16H 118
6 --~1 -164
·~_!2~
•,...---'2'<;-._ _~1'-l 31
',...~2~4f---'7~ Is
23
+H23
+H?1
+H1
ioooo
AI023
6 16
5 8
4 ~
8 I
+RI-1
-Hflf 13
6 8
5 4
4 2
8 I
3
I 02
102
10
moo
11023
t:F
C
&
UF
l~1-'-''---<>--_.;.:::;:._:_~-@):DDPP)
~~~ r'
••u
101
-@
102
11
22
-
1
L - - - - - - 1 1 - - - - - -1'-'-1
9
109
(lO
+WAITE 11
~
+5V
x-v
10
V·~::j~~::::::j::j :~~
'r--'1~--.!.16H 118
.~--'1;_B_ __!I-I64 AI 013
5 _ _~2 31 ioooo
v-~~1;v,...~1;4_ _--+~7 16
V
2
6 B
+H23
5 4
::/
4 1
-ltZD
·~9
+WRITE 20
13
U
kf-c
F MEl
772
AI
+MEl 1D
1 -~-:__~~~-aDR
E~__:~~~-------------------------------~1 L1 ~A~CiD-7AF~1 ~
~
ID2
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED All CIRCUITS ARE PlAT OF A 6180. 6ACD. &ADD. &CUD. 6CYD AND 6AED BOARDS.
62957400 A
i:D
=
4
2
I
~ 71
1!.1
1 1ico I
L-----11--------'-
u}-.C+:!I!!JAIC!_TEL£22:__ _ _ _ _ _ _-11-----------,~,----,
·~v
x-v
101
64 AI023
31 iiiiiiiii
186
Fml
+WRITE 23
II
~~E~I}-~~~---------11------~ CD
~--~·M~E~M~1~5 --{DL
'-'I JMEM
ijf
U
109
____
9
v
15
16
+N?I
8 I
+R,-1
J ~
'--'-:!!Hc0,___1,.3+-"i ' c
-I-------~~"9
ID2
n·5V
EU}-_:+~WA!.!I~TE~l4:___ _ _ _ _ _ _- l f - - - - - - - - - = , - - - - - ,
1
"'---~6 ---~
"'-2'~:---~~,...~
2&
V
'-'ID
MEMF
772
fl
L__ _ _ __ ._ _ _ _ _ __,l-'-/1 ACD
AFJ-!.!12c_-<>---•c.::M;:;EM:....:,_16_-{DK
1
18
16
V
V
V
V
=
'--',:3,;.-------;6,-116
5 4B
+H 73
+H?2
4 2
·~·I
B I
+R -1
3 f::-r---:1
-li10
13
C
U F
21
~ ~
"'-..£2~7---!116H
"-..£~;.6 ---..c:'-1~~ ~!m
I'..'"--<;
ADODO
24 - - - - '7'-l
5
::~
::
5-25
DIAGRAM 108
CLEAR CONTROL, RECEIVE, AND
KEYBOARD CONTROL
The upper third of this diagram shows the receive and keyboard control logic; the middle third shows the clear control
logic, and the lower third shows the power-on reset logic.
RECEIVE AND KEYBOARD CONTROL LOGIC The receive and keyboard control logic consists of flip-flops GSA
(receive active), H9B (strobe) and H9A (keyboard active), and of the gates associated with these flip-flops. The
following text describes how these flip-flops interact to enable gating of receive data or keyboard data inputs.
The Receive Active flip-flop, direct sets via GSA-1 as the display terminal is powered up. It then clears at time T4
of the +(X COMP + 1) pulse. At time T4, any time that there is receive data ready (+DR= 1), and there is neither a
clear 1 nor a scroll clear in progress (K9B and J9B are both clear), and it is neither an +X COMP nor +(X COMP + 1)
time, the Receive Active f1 ip-flop sets. As it sets, the resulting +RCV ACT and -RCV ACT signals go to various
portions of the control logic to enable checking of the received character to determine what action the display terminal
is to take: for example, either store a character in memory or perform a control action. The -RCV ACT signal resets
the +DR signal from the UART, enabling the UART for reception of the next receive character. The -RCV ACT signal
also disables NAND gate G9B.
NAND gate G9B is the control gate for the Keyboard Active flip-flop. The Keyboard Active flip-flop is enabled for
setting on the next T5 clock pulse when: 1) the Receive Active flip-flop is clear, 2) the transmit holding register of
the UART is empty (+THRE = 1), 3) the scan timing indicates that neither an +X COMP nor +(X COMP + 1) is occurring,
4) flip-flops K9B and J9B are clear to indicate that neither a clear 1 nor a scroll clear is occurring, and 5) the Strobe
flip-flop (H9B) sets to indicate keyboard data is awaiting loading into the UART. Notice that the timing of the Receive
Active and Keyboard Active flip-flops gives the Receive Active f1 ip-flop priority by virtue of its earlier clock pulse
(T 4 versus T5). As the Keyboard Active flip-flop sets, it distributes +KYBD ACT and -KYBD ACT signals to various
portions of the logic to enable loading and checking of the keyed-in character to determine what action the display
terminal is to take: for example, transmit and control, transmit and display, or transmit only.
CLEAR CONTROL LOGIC Clear control logic consists of Line Clear flip-flop J9A, Clear flip-flop K9A, Scroll
Clear flip-flop J9B, Clear 1 flip-flop K9B, and the gates associated with these flip-flops. These four flip-flops provide
control for three functions of the display terminal: 1) a clear operation, 2) a line clear operation, and 3) a scroll clear
operation.
A clear operation occurs as the result of either a received or keyboard input clear command, as decoded by the cursor
function decode circuit (diagram 104). The resulting +CLR signal enables Clear 1 flip-flop K9B to set as the next T1
clock pulse occurs. +CLR 1 then enables Clear flip-flop K9A for setting on the next -VERT SYNC pulse. When the
Clear flip-flop sets, its +CLR ACT signal inhibits the data decode mux (diagram 109), while its -CLR SET signal resets
the vertical address counter and sets the Read,/Write Control flip-flop to enable muxing the new cursor position into
memory (diagram 101). The Clear flip-flop remains set until the next -VERT SYNC pulse toggles it clear; as it resets,
it completes the clear operation by toggling the Clear 1 flip-flop clear.
A line clear operation also occurs as the result of a keyboard input or a received command. In this case, the cursor
function decode circuit causes the -(BELL+ CLR) signal to go high while the -(BELL+ LN CLR) signal goes low. These
signals gate Line Clear flip-flop J9A for setting on the next T2 clock signal. When the I ine clear flip-flop sets, its
outputs enable the clearing of refresh memory from the current cursor location to the end of the associated display line
without moving the cursor position. The line clear flip-flop resets on the next -HORZ SYNC pulse to terminate the
line clear operation at the end of the display line in which the operation began.
A scroll clear operation is similar to a line clear operation with the exception that it only occurs during scroll mode
operation of the display. When the display is scrolled, the +SCROLL ADD signal enables the Scroll Clear flip-flop
for setting at the next T1 clock pulse. The Scroll Clear flip-flop, in turn, enables the line clear flip-flop for setting
on the next -HORZ SYNC pulse. This approach ensures that the display line moving into the last-line position (scroll
position or 24th line of screen) is clear. The Line Clear flip-flop clears on the second -HORZ SYNC pulse following
initiation of the scroll clear operation and terminates the operation by enabling the Scroll Clear flip-flop for clearing.
Notice that both the scroll clear and the clear operations (Clear 1 set) inhibit either keyboard or receive functions from
occurring until the clear operation is complete. This is because the duration of these operations is such that timing
conflicts could occur.
5-26
62957400 A
DIAGRAM 108 (CDNTD)
POWER-ON RESET LOGIC - The power-on reset logic consists of flip-flops C7A and C7B. Power-on Reset flipflop C7B is normally clear as display terminal power comes on. When clear, C7B resets the horizontal and vertical
counters (diagrams 100 and 101) and sets the Master Reset flip-flop (C7A), which clears the remainder of terminal
logic. After display terminal power has been on a short time, capacitor C10 charges through resistor R27 and enables
flip-flop C7B for setting, which it does on the next ~A clock transition. C7B then remains set as long as the +5-V de
logic power remains on. As ClB sets and the -1¥/R RST signal goes high, it enables Master Reset flip-flop C7A for
clearing, which it does on the next +TO clock transition. The power-on clear operation is then complete, and all
logic circuits are initialized for operation.
62957400 A
5-27/5-28
u
Q
115
105
N}-~(P~U~ll~UP~)
______________________________________________,
CP'}----'-+O:.:R:._____________________________________+i3 &
r------:4;...J 141
r---+~1t>fSs----"'l-!._7--------------------___:•!1!R£CV~ACfss---'1-'7c_.J.-________________:+~K~!B!!!O~A~C!...T---{DV
+THRE
·T·
L1f GJ
®}-~~~·~---------------~~----------f-~----------4-~--~G
@
~
+er r.noP +
B
ID5
104
DB
Bs
240
:K H9A
-K!BD ACT
~
I 05
~
4
+X-CDIP
--
IDI
I I6
218
19B
+CLR ACT
@
109
-CLR SET
-®
IOI
I
7
3
5lf"""ilil
~~:A ~~-f-------f+-jf!JI:~4f's5-""}!I.!Dj..~.,__;
_ 'f2
~
+CLR
5 1 140
JA,}-...;,:=-------------'""-1 KIOB
G~
24D
~ GK J9B
~----------+---¥j~~H
'-"----
~
10
____gJ 2DI "JI!.8 --~-.J.....j!.!ll!.lifs5-t!!..I~--------------------.:!•~Cl~R'-.I!.......(EA
ID4
240
!1J.GK K9B
9
15.
-CLR I
t---f"'""'.!__P..:.-----------=:....:...-..;<
R60E,3.3K,f1
1~
10
11
+ADD 2 9
+ADD 28
+Ann ''
a:
~
~
I 06,107
I 06,107
106, I 07
a:
ot-
>-Cl
~r.r
1 64
1 32
3 16
a:
3
N
R60C,3.3K,fl
R60H,3.3K,f1
9
81
+ADD
+ADD
+ADD
+ADD
~1D
II
4
w
:::E
R60G,3.3K,fl
7
I
A3
R60f.3.3K,f1
6
ioo
125
-m
0
:::E
·~v
~sc
~GD
5
+(PE+RCV BRK+TEST)
+TEST
<[
z w
0 Cl
u 0
Q<[
~ a
'ill
w
cnu
cnw
wo
9
+HDRZ 16
+HnA; 7~
+HOR; 74
@)
'ftl
R60D, 3. 3K, f1
-+IT~
+T1
114
110
112
10~
4
7
':'
100
100
1DO
EJ
·~v
~11
1
L___! 0
-( T8+T2)
R608,3.3K,f1
2
6 2
~ 1
AGAGAG-
~L-N
;Q
-~
ill
+CUR 28
t
A2~~
83
8
103
1 128
64
2 32
3 16
~~':EM
~
+(X COMP + I)
87
1~rr
4
1
1
12
200
BH
ADO #2
~11
-
16
2~
24
2'
106,107
106, I 07
106, I 07
106,107
EN
EP
EQ
ER
113. 106, 107
10~
+WR liE 25
10~
10~
115
11
10~
103,104,106,
107.113
10~
12
13
I
21 B
K8D
+WRITE 15
11
EV
113,106,107
C")
+WRITE 13
10~
10~
10~
+WR liE 12
105
+WR liE 2 1
10~
105
+WRITE 1°
11
10~
I 03, 106, 107, 113
103,104,106,107,113
103,104,106,107 ,Ill
I 03, I 04, I 06, I 0 7, 113
10~
·~v
RI~M.4.7K,l7
R1~Q.4.
7K,l7
Rl58.4 7K
12
RI4C,4. 7K
I~
f4
R14f ,4 7K
RI~0.4
7K
4
l7
I0
II
12
108
II~
I 04
114
II~
115. I 08
OS}-~+~R~CV~AC~T----------------~~
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED All CIRCUITS ARE PART Of &ABO. 6ACD. 6100. SCUD. 6CVD AND 6AED BOARDS
u
62957400 A
5-31
DIAGRAM 110
BAUD COUNTER, MODEM CONTROL
Diagram 110 depicts the logic for the baud counter (counters E9, D9 and E10, flip-flop FBA, and oscillator D8) near the
top of the diagram, and it shows the modem control logic (ROM L8) near the bottom.
BAUD COUNTER The baud counter receives a 6.745-MHz clock signal from oscillator D8 and load inputs +BIT 8
through 4 Btl 1 from the Baud Select switches (diagram 115) to enable selection of one of the following transmit/receive
baud rates: 110, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 4800, or 9600. The transmit/receive circuits of the UART
divide the input transmit/receive clock frequencies by 16 to obtain the desired baud rate. In addition, flip-flop F8A
at the output of the c<>unter circuit provides a constant divide-by-two factor. The following tabular listing shows the
relationship between the desired transmit/receive baud rate and the preload input to the baud counter.
Baud Rate
Clock Hertz to UART
(Output of F8A)
Clock Hertz from Counter
(Output of E7D)
Counter
+
B8
Counter Preload (E9 and D9)
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
110
1760
3520
1936
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
150
2400
4800
1408
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
200
3200
6400
1056
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
300
4800
9600
704
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
600
9600
19,200
352
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1200
19,200
38,400
176
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1800
28,800
57,600
117
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
2400
38,400
76,800
88
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
4800
76,800
153,600
44
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
9600
153,600
307,200
22
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Only the preload values for counters E9 and D9 are included in the listing because the preload for counter D10 is normally
fixed at 0101, except at 1800 baud. At 1800 baud, the preload for counter D10 is 0111.
MODEM CONTROL LOGIC Just above the modem control ROM, the +TEST, +FE (format error) and +PE (parity error)
signals pass through OR gates P8A and P8B to produce a +(PE + RCV BRK + TEST) signal and a +(FE + PE) signal. The parity
error, receive break or test signal goes to the data decode mux and memory (diagram 109) to enable loading, decoding
and display of the appropriate symbol: parity error or receive break= error symbol ( 1), and test mode provides display
of all symbols but no control functions. The format error or parity error signal goes to the UART (diagram 105) to block
loading of an erroneous code in memory and attempting to decode it.
Modem control ROM L8 receives input signals from the modem interface logic (diagram 114) and provides modem control
output signals to the logic circuits within the display terminal. As examples, the data set ready (-DSR) and data terminal
ready (-DTR) signals into the ROM cause an enable request to send (-EN RTS) signal out of the ROM, and the carrier on
(-CO) signal into the ROM enables the -CO LIGHT signal out of the ROM. Selection of current loop mode of display
terminal operation (+EN CUR LOOP= 1) forces all of the ROM outputs high inhibiting the modem control signals that
are not necessary for current loop mode operation. The +EN XMIT and +EN RCV signals remain high in current loop mode.
5-32
62957400 A
u
Q
+5V
tRJ~.IK
1
C9
+BAUD
TP~)-~+D~I~SA~B~LE~BA~U!DSC~LO~C~K____________________________________________________~~~~~~~~~~~~~2~SSGJ----~6___,CL~D~CK~~B
~ 10~
r-
II~
~
, - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - , : ' 4 ' - i > G 240
GK FBI
,...------+--+---""'1"'3'"'1
HN}-~~PU~LL~L~U~P~--------------------t-t--------r-----i~l'"'l~
BAlli
~
0
N
o-
8v ~
II~
liS
II~
II~
·...J
o:::o
I&Jo:::
1-j-
Zz
lOB
E
=>o
ou
(,)
PULL UP
a
::::IE
:::>I&J
~c
mO
::::IE
II~
II~
II~
N
II~
102
~
00.
·>BIT
+BIT
+81'
+BLT
4
J
2
I
N
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~~~
I}-~(P~U~LL~UP~)
+>I
RJ6
IK
EB
TP!.:!_4 r--D-""'1S;;;,A;;;,BL;:,:E'-B"'-A""UD;;;,;;;,OS;,:C'----.
~:GI
TP!:!.4
+BAUD OSC
'-'
2
c
~~1.2+1
R
112
10~
Fl
CN
+TEST
+ PE + RCV BRK + TEST J
+(FE + PE)
+PE
I 0~
109
+FE
FJ
10~
141fT
IODU CONTROl
114
114
114
114
114
....
112
'iiC
'IT
g.
~
~
FY
-RTS
-CTS
-OTR
-DSR
-CD
+EN CUR LOOP
1J
12
11
16
S
4
ioo
AJI
+51
IOU
15
G MEM
6
I M5600
lB
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED All CIRCUITS ARE PART OF &ABO. 6ACO
&ADO. &CUD. 6CiD ANO &lEO BOARDS.
AG-
--...!i=.
----#;.
-lL
Q
62957400 A
R15F.4.7K,l7
7 RI5G,4. ll.ll
~
~
~
IG-
RI~E.4.7K.l7
~
RI5H,4. 7K,L7
B
4
J
2
I
-EN RTS
-CD Ll GHT
+EN IMI T
+EN RCi
114
FK
}---AJI-4
FL 10~
FM
.------1
114
u
5-33
DIAGRAM 111
PHASE LOCK OSCILLATOR, CURRENT LOOP RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Diagram 111 shows the phase lock and the current loop transmit/receive circuits of the display terminal.
PHASE LOCK CIRCUIT Phase lock circuit P9 synchronizes the vertical sync pulse of the vertical control circuit
(diagram 101) with the frequency of the ac input power. The phase-shift detector portion of P9 receives its reference
input via N98-4 and compares it with the -VERT SYNC signal. If the -VERT SYNC signal lags the reference signal,
output pin 13 of P9 goes high while pin 2 goes low. These outputs feed around and into the charge pump section of
P9 on pins 4 and 11 causing output pin 5 to go high while output pin 10 goes low. As a result, 03 conducts less,
P9-8 goes high increasing the voltage input to voltage-controlled multivibrator M2, and the multivibrator speeds up.
If the -VERT SYNC signal leads the reference signal, output pin 13 of P9 goes low while pin 2 goes high. The charge
pump outputs then reverse; pin 5 goes low and 10 goes high causing 03 to increase conduction. The amplifier portion
of P9, in turn, conducts more causing pin 8 of P9 to go low. Voltage input to the voltage-controller multivibrator
decreases, and the multivibrator decreases its speed until it matches that of the reference signal. The phase lock
circuit uses power from its own +5-V de regulator, which in turn uses the +12-V de as a power source.
CURRENT LOOP TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE CIRCUITS Current loop circuits are present only on display terminals
having that option installed; however, all display terminals have the jumper connectors installed for conditioning the
display terminal for use on either a current loop or voltage level communication interface. When used on a voltage
level interface, the following jumper connections are used in the display terminal: A to B, L toM, G toE and K to H.
Full-duplex current loop operation of the display terminal requires the following connections: A to D, M to L, E to G
and J to H. Half-duplex current loop operation requires the following jumper connections: A to C, N to L, J to H,
and complete removal of the E/F/G jumper. The following text describes the operation of the current loop transmit and
receive circuits when connected for a full-duplex current loop channel. Operation of the circuits on a half-duplex
current loop channel is similar to that of the circuits on a full-duplex channel.
The current loop transmit circuit normally receives high -TRO•ON LN and -XMIT BREAK signals via N2C and a pulsing
+HORZ 20 signal via gate R3. The signals to 2NC block R3 so that its output stays low. The low output from R3 holds
07 of the pulse transformer off so that the pulse transformer does not produce an output. The external system battery
passes current to the transmit circuit via AJ2-17 and biases 06 and 02 to turn on. When 02 is on, it bypasses R33 and
provides a return path for the battery current via jumper J-H and AJ2-16. With current flowing in the loop in this
manner, the transmit loop is in a quiescent marking condition (idle loop). When data is transmitted, the -TRO•ON LN
signal line pulses high (mark) and low (space) to reflect the state of the data bits composing a transmit word. As
- TRO •ON LN goes low to signify a space bit, it causes N2C-8 to go low and enable gate R3. R3 in turn passes the
+HORZ 20 pulses to the pulse transformer, causing it to produce bias voltage that turns off 06 and 02. The use of the
+HORZ 2D pulses provide efficient energy transfer across the pulse transformer. As 06 and 02 turn off, current flow
in the transmit loop drops to about 0.2 mA because R33 now provides the only return path for current to the system
battery. The alternating mark and space bits of a transmit word turn the pulse transformer off and on and turn 06
and 02 on and off to reproduce the bits as current flow marks and no current flow spaces on the transmit loop.
In full-duplex mode, current flows through the receive circuit loop via AJ2-17, jumpers F and E, jumpers Land M,
the MCT -4 diode, jumpers D and A, and back to the system battery via AJ2-14. With current flowing through the
MCT -4 diode, MCT -4 turns on and lowers the collector voltage of 05 so that 05 and 04 turn off.
When 04 is off, the -CURRENT RCV signal line is high (marking). When current flow in the loop drops, MCT -4
turns off causing 05, and consequently 04, to turn on. As 04 turns on, the -CURRENT RCV signal line goes low (spacing).
5-34
62957400 A
ID
Q
+5¥
+12¥
CR2
+5¥
sa
A~
19 VAC
+SVA
A37,4.1K
SB
..
Cl
A41
IK
NIO
A38
510
N9
io
S!N
il~
u-
C27
39pl
MID
Q3,P9
a::w
0>
~Cli&J
100
R45
I. OK
P9
...JO~
...JI&J(ja:::::E
(J)Q..(/)
ooz
~o<
o...Ja::
0~~
...Jzo
wwz
(1)11::<
9
I
~
I
4
AtOP, tK,B9
~
I
I
14
I
RIOB, IK,B9
I
z
I
I
-
_h
FU
114
FV
114
900
R4
Fit
~0
®
!!N
@
110
I
,!.___
I
I
r!L
I
-3
SEE RTS
7
I
5
zso msoc
108
103
®
®
J1-10
~
9
11 10 &
-IR
lltR
-(X CDBP + 1 • T3J
+BREAK
RZS.toO
R9
l
I
.,..
13~
943
943
C9
.033
R9
N9F
I
,-
"""
-BELL
108
.llW\._
-RCV ACT
9
4&
140
5
B&
1
1.1_
9
~
=--
104
®
+BEEP
114
105
lOB
(iii)
+KYIO ACT
+F
+RCV ACT
N
®
~~
200
mst~c
ZIB
esc
G~~r
A5
1
z
-
1
141
85C
-XIIT BREAK
t
+5V
All
5.&K
X 'Y
zoo BlA
z
-R lNG BELL
~
-®
Ill' 114
AJZ-
_f
B9
A4
IZ
-RCV IRK
-
114
104
104
104
104
104
~~~~------------•~L~ST~LN~COfi~P~·~z
103
101
103
103
103
103
+5V
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ALL CIRCUITS ARE PART OF SAID. SACO, SADD. &CUD. &CVD AND &AEO BOARDS
(
u
62957400 A
a:<( ....
N
+5V
RtOE,IK
Z:~~:...J
I
-- ----------I
1
1
ct<~
1-a:fv>-_:~;.~,~~~INC...._...,...._ _ _ _-1-+---3'!-1 16
:~: ~
=:;~ :••
104~
-···.
9
4
J!:
h
+(INC "Y" +DEC ' T '
I
..(GH)
:::
103
103
....J.....ID::
001&.1
D::D::I1-1-Z
103
zz::>
ooo
I
-INC y .(Gj}
201
84C
ooo
a::a::a::
000
rnrnrn
a::a::a::
I 03
~
A255
::>::>::>
I
I~Bc
x>-x
;:
000
ioro
104 }ijji)-...;-::!!M.,Ax.._,x_ _ _-1--1-+---&::-12
-m
+5V
R578.3.3K,C5f
R57G,3.3K,C51
~
·--i[.l"'"hAG-
+5V
6
II
R57F,3.3K.,C5_f
R618,3.3K,D9+r
I
146
04C
]~
I_ Ts1 ',uBx9/
IJ""
H3
2
II~
'------'1'!.2 ~
109@
109@
+IR liE 26
p~
6 0
12
I
13
+IR liE 25
l
201
E4D
11
'='
+IRITE 24
I 09 (!!!>
~·
rsl'
~
.----.--'4~
®
2
+IRITE 2 I
••Rm
H4
~
I 10 o
O
rs
13
'-------..!9:111
-
t:
Gi
J
I' I'~~;
3
m•• ~2, ~-®~sr§
~~~Pl~lL-J.l!-1
u.~~.ct~.~~~~~E~~~~·ciuiR
7
I I 13
9
I
I~
0
CO
CD
CO
.•
2&
•.·~~~~ ~I
3
+CUR 20
-tGOl
~
~
J.I&CNTRl
512
J4
4
,!a t=s'---L_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_---_-_-_-It-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-It-_ff--_-_}-._-_~5'!..,..:.,_'..1.~::
.L~
rn
G2
l1
103
J3
t-4'--+t--t--,
~ ~ 12
+IRITE 20
109@
G5
f>2.4,5+1
1,3,5-1
I~UJG~
~~~
'='
,u c
BP~_;-~.X~C~~~P~+~I~e~T~3~)------------------------~---------~-~14~~GI
t
l>2,4,5+1
1,3,5-1
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED All CIRCUITS ARE PART OF &ABO, 6ACO, 6100, &CUD. &CVD AND BAED BOARDS.
Q
62957400 A
u
N
105
104,105
104,105
IC4,105
. L..t c
14
~
'-----------------H--Tl2 I
+ R
+r.no 75
+CUR 4
2
3
16 CNTRil
512
n.=~
p..:1.:..1--.---H-':..:1..--1 &2
EI)-.....::;•I.,R..,ll!.!E~2._3_ _--II----------+----------++-;'-l+--
09
(ffi
,
109 2,.
-
J
12
r--f+.....C'-LL_
i
-ill)
CD
I CO
15 CD
9
0
m--
109
~~u41
I
5 ~~~~;::::;~~~j
'---Tii9 co
k~1~3~~+---------l~-~
jj~i(~3~1ll7~~~~~+~C~UR~2 7~lil
~1-j'---.---+-+--:-'
;.~D
I
.........!!rr--~
IDD66i00 II
1!8
rm~·2
-
X CURSOR
COUNTER
4
ID
5-39
S
104,105
104,105
104,105
104,105
DIAGRAM 114
MODEM INTERFACE, RTS CONTROL
The upper half of diagram 114 depicts the modem interface logic, and the lower half depicts the request to send logic of
the display terminal.
.
MODEM INTERFACE LOGIC Receiver circuit M8 receives the clear to send (-tCTS), data set ready (+DSR), and
carrier on (-tCO) signals directly from the modem and passes them on to the modem control logic (diagram 110). The
receive data signal (+RCV DATA) also comes from the modem, but it first passes through the voltage level/current loop
jumper connectors (diagram 111 ). The +RCV DATA line, receiver circuit M5, and jumper connectors P and Q are used
for voltage level communication facilities, while the -CURRENT RCV line and jumper connectors Rand Q are used for
current loop communication facilities. The +EN RCV signal comes from the modem control logic (diagram 110), and
it is required to enable either current loop or voltage level receive data into the display terminal logic via gate R8B.
Receive data from either source then passes to the UART (diagram 105) via the +R1 signal line.
Gate R8C enables receive data to a peripheral printer via transmitter circuit R5 and the +PTR XMIT DATA line, if the
display terminal is operating online; if local mode operation of the display terminal is selected, gate RBC blocks the
passage of receive data to the peripheral printer. R5 also passes keyboard, or transmit data (+TRO) to a peripheral
printer via gate R8D and the +PTR XMIT DATA line. Gate RBD is conditioned by gate L9C, which allows transmit
data to pass to the printer only if the display terminal is operating either in local mode or in half-duplex and on Iine
modes. Selection of on Iine and full-duplex modes of display terminal operation causes gate L9C to inhibit the transfer
of keyed-in data to the printer or refresh memory by blocking gates R8D and CBA. This restricts the printing or
displaying of information during online, full-duplex operation to received data.
Transmit data (+TRO) also passes through gate R8A, which is the control gate for passing transmit data to the
communication facility. Selection of local mode _operation blocks gate RBA, but when online mode operation
is selected (+LOCAL/-ONLINE = 0) gate RBA passes transmit data to both the -TRO·ON LN and the +XMIT DATA
signal lines. Both signal lines return to the current loop interface logic where jumper connectors determine which
transmit data signal I ine is selected:
1) Current loop display terminals pass the -TRO·ON LN signal into the current transmitter circuit and then
onto the +XMIT signal line via jumper connectors J and H (diagram 111).
2) Voltage level display terminals pass the +X/v\IT DATA signal through jumper connectors K and H onto the
+XMIT signal line (diagram 111).
REQUEST TO SEND CONTROL LOGIC The request to send signal is dependent on a number of variables with the
display terminal. These variables are monitored by the modem control ROM (diagram 11 0) and by the RTS control logic
shown on this diagram (diagram 114). A principal control signal for the RTS control logic is the -EN RTS signal, which
originates at the modem control ROM; another principal control signal is the +SW/-CONST RTS signal from the internal
control switches (diagram 112). Unless the -EN RTS signal is low, the RTS control circuit is disabled. The -EN RTS
signal is not low when:
1) The display terminal is a current loop type and has the internal current loop enable switch (diagram 112)
in the enable position (+EN CUR LOOP signal = 1).
2) The display terminal is a voltage level type and is enabled for a voltage level interface (+EN CUR LOOP
signal = 0), but is operating using the switched position of the switched-or-constant DTR switch (diagram 112)
and has the front panel ON LINE/LOCAL switch in the LOCAL position. This mode of operation disables the
-DTR signal into the modem control ROM, which in turn causes the -EN RTS signal to go high.
3) The display terminal is a voltage level type and the data set ready signal from the modem drops for any reason.
This condition causes the -DSR signal to the modem control ROM to go high, causing the -EN RTS signal to
ga high.
5-40
62957400 A
DIAGRAM 114 (COITD)
Other signals affecting RTS control logic are the -HALF/+FULL DUP signal from the front panel FULL DUP/
HALF DUP switch; the +LOCAL/-ON LINE signal from the front panel ON LINE/LOCAL switch; the -RCV BRK
signal from the break control logic (diagram 112); and the -CLR RTS signal from the data decode ROM
(diagram 109). Following is a tabular listing of combinations of signals that affect RTS control logic and the
effect that each combination has on the control logic.
-HALF/ -RCV BRK/ +LOCAL/
+SW/
+FULL DUP -CLR RTS -ON LINE -CONSTR RTS -EN RTS
X
X
X
1
X
0
0
0
1
1
0
X
X
0
0
0
0
EFFECT
0
-RTS goes low and remains low.
0
0
-RTS goes low following the first keyboard
entry and remains low until one of the
following occurs.
0
0
Switching to local mode during either halfor full-duplex operation causes the -RTS
signal to go high on second +VERT 20 pulse
after UART transmit and transmit holding
registers empty (+TRE and +THRE signals
both go high).
0
-RTS signal goes high on second +VERT ~
pulse after UART transmit and transmit
holding registers empty if either:
a) a break signal or a character with a framing
error is received (-RCV BRK signal goes low)
b) or the -CLR RTS signal goes low due to
detection of one of the following by the data
decode ROM: a carriage return, an end of
text, an end of transmission, or a line feed
code.
62957400 A
5-41/5-42
Q
Ill
Ill
110
2-13
AJ~
+CIS
AJ 2-15
AJ 2-1 2
+DSR
+CD
+RCV DATA
®
~
0
,/
13
/
10
I
4
,/
.II
::I
X/
-CIS
-DSR
-CO
~..__
-CURRENT RCV
@
II
8
3
0
R
.
JUMPERS CONNECTED FOR RS232/CCITT V.24 INTERFACE .
JUMPER ,
PJ
+RI
I
146
EJB
+EN RCV
fM
Q
GU
GV
..
105
GW
~
0
N
8v ~
+5V
0.
C5
rl·'
Aa
112
112
fZ
u.i
+12V
0
-XII BREAK
FV
+DTR
+PTR XIII DATA
I 05
Ill
GX
-SW/+CONST OTR
cz
+TAO
+RTS
-DTR
-(TAO e ON LN)
N
I0
+KYBO
ACT
<....I
"-o
0::0::
WI-
1-z
)ill:J.D
~0
0
)lli:2
~
:!:en
WIgo:
Gl
110
GZ
Ill
HA
I 09, 112
:::!:
N
I 08
R31,2. JK,R4
+PTA CO
I
Cl4
R4
R32,2.7K.P4
I
112
.,
109
GA
FC
-RCV BRK
~19
.lut
Cl5
.lut
P4
+PTA OSR ~20
+LOCAL
-ON LINE
HB
I 05,112
I0
-CLR RTS
-(X COIP+I e 13)
I 03
AJ~
+LOCAL/-ON LINE
108
••R
112
+SW/-CDNST RTS
I 08
115
110
:::s
...
I 05
H
"'
CY
+THRF
+IRE
+VERT 20
I DO
I 08
-EN RTS
Ef
-MR-
II 0
UNLESS OTHERIISE NOTED All CIRCUITS ARE PART OF 6180. 6ACO. 6100. SCUD. 6CVO AND SlED BOARDS
u
62957400A
Ill
5-43
DIAGRAM 115
BAUD SELECT, XIY POSITION CONTROL
The upper half of diagram 115 depicts the logic for selecting the transmit/receive baud rate of the display terminal while
the lower half of the diagram shows the X/Y position control logic.
BAUD SELEO LOGIC The -HIGH BAUD and -LOW BAUD signals originate at the front panel HIGH RATE/300/
LOW RATE switch. Moving the switch to the HIGH RATE position causes the -HIGH BAUD signal to go low. With
the -HIGH BAUD signal low, J10A-3 goes low to enable mux G10, while the high -LOW BAUD signal causes the
high-rate switches to be muxed (mux input pins 3, 6, 10, and 13). Moving the front ponel switch to the LOW RATE
position causes the -LOW BAUD signal to go low. With the -LOW BAUDsignal low, J10-3 goes low to enable mux
G 10, while the low -LOW BAUD signal enables multiplexing of the low-rate switches (mux input pins 2, 5, 11 and
14). If the front ponel switch is moved to the 300 position, both the -HIGH BAUD and -LOW BAUD signals remain
high. This, in turn, disables the mux and forces all outputs to go low. Following is a tabular listing that gives the
relationship between the desired baud rate, the high rate/low rate switch settings, the input to baud select ROM
G10, and the output from the ROM (baud counter preload).
Baud Rate
Desired
Switch SettinSS
23 throuah 2
ROM Input O
24 throuah 2
ROM Output
Bit 8 throuah Bit 1
110
1111
01111
0101
0000
150
1110
01110
1000
0000
200
1101
01101
1010
0000
300
11 00 or 0000*
01100 or 00000
1100
0000
600
1011
01011
1110
0000
1200
1010
01010
1111
0000
1800
1001
01001
1111
0011
2400
1000
01000
1111
1000
4800
0111
00111
1111
1100
9600
0110
00110
1111
1110
X/Y POSITION CONTROL LOGIC The X/Y position control logic provides the display terminal with the capability of detecting X/Y cursor positioning inputs. To do this, the internal X/Y positioning switch must be in its enable
position and the display terminal must be operating in page mode (+EN X/Y = 1 and +PAGE/-SCROLL = 1). Detection
of an escape code (0338) and 061 8 sequence then can activate the X/Y position control logic. The escape code is
detected by the data decode ROM (diagram 109); this causes the -(ESC+ 0618) signal to go low. Since the +WRITE~
bit is also low when the escape code is detected, flip-flop H8B clears, and as it does so, it blocks memory request
gate K8C and enables X position flip-flop H8A. The 061 8 input then sets flip-flop H8A, which pro~ides a -X POS
signal to the X cursor control ROM (diagram 113) and conditions theY position flip-flop G8B for setting. The next
character input is interpreted as the X cursor positioning input. As this input ends, it sets flip-flop H8B, clears
flip-flop H8A, and sets Y position flip-flop G8B. As flip-flop G8B sets, it provides a -Y POS signal to theY cursor
control ROM and to theY cursor counter and mux circuit (diagrams 113 and 103). The next character input is
interpreted as theY cursor positioning input; and as this input ends, it clears flip-flop G8B to complete the X/Y
positioning operation and enables the memory request gate (K8C).
* 300 baud can be either switch-selected via internal switches and high or low position of front panel switch, or via
300 position of front panel switch only.
5-44
62957400 A
u
0
+5V
'tR9A,IK,HIO
I
IR9J,1K,H10
9
C2\~
~·~
K10
AJ~
AJ~
HIGH -BAUO
2
,I
-LOW BAUD
&
201
J1 OA
lti
15
3
~~~23
LOW
BAUD
RATE
BAUO
RATE
1b2:
rT""'
~-
~~--
~
....
MUX
I B9
1
" "1 '" ,
BIUD Sll TC ES
fD
2
I
I
4
5~7
6 1
0
11 lj"-10 D
14 lj"--
"'''
15121
.1 2D
16
~0
.___
...!!..._
r-lL-
(>.
§ !!2
R61C,3.3K,D9
3
11 1 22
...J
0
R61G,3.3K.D9
7
a::
G
~- 1D~2 1
~--:-
~ 0
EN
+5V
R61H, 3.3!,09
B
R62F,IK
1-
. B9
"Z
1-0
~(,)
R62E, I K . B9
5
...lz
9I2D
':' Lt2.'i.U..OJ
~~
a!::
R61D.3.3K,09
4
+5V
R9B,IK,HID
R9N,IK,H10
BAn
~x--v
13 6
R9E,IK,Hi0
N
R9G,IK,HIO
R9F, IK,HIO
R9K,IK,H10
R9C,1K,HIO
R90, IK,HIO
T~
T~
T~:~
T~
109
+BAUO
+BAUO
+BAUD
+BAUO
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
12 4
13
~
AJI
R61F,3.3K,D9
F MEM
IM5600
F9
AG
':'
7
6
AG
AG-
~
AG-
4
t------AG:
2
I
4
5
4
3
2
I
&
143
G9A
X
N
~
3
>.....
6
+BIT 8 l'iiPr
!a! 7
+BIT S
+BIT 5
+BIT 4
+BIT 3
+BIT 2
~ 1
9
~
8
CODE IOENT
TIMING DIAGRAM
4
3
2
15920
1
4
...
3
I
2
VERT UNBLANK TIMING (50'60 HZ)
15.09 mset
SCAN CTR TiliNG
g;
~
~
ENABLE SCAN
D
SCAN 2D
SCAN 21
8
SCAN 22
)>
SCAN 23
1111111111
=}
_s-t_
SCAN T. C.
Mil1lJU1Il.JlJU
VERT 21
..Jl..1LS1.IUl.
VERT 22
___f(___rL_jl
VERT 23
~
616.6 ns•c
~
=
~
~
A
n
=%
~=
=~
=
~~
~=
~=
~~
CODE IDENT
=~
TIMING DIAGRAM
4
3
2
15920
.
4
~0/&0
~
s
INT Si)
1•
-
POIER
SUPPLY
HZ
VERT LOAD
AC
GROUND
MAIN
TIMING
~
PAGE/S~RDLL
KEYBOARD
.
3
I
2
I
.,,
1
I
1-TB
Sll TCH
l :::J~
D
0
>
D
=}CRT
VIDEO
-
CONNECTOR
PANEL
{
1-
MR Sl N,C
1111 Sl N,O
C.D. LIGHT
GROUND (2)
PROTECTIVE
GROUND
c
c
SCROLL ADD
KEYBOARD
DATA READY
FULL/HALF DUPLEX SWITCH
LOCAL/ON LINE SIITCH
-+
· BREAK
SI/CDNST
DTR
KEY RTS
SI/CDNST
•••~ Sll TCH
CONNECTOR
PANEL
B
GROUND
:
_
r
-JZV
'
l--------~~~----------~~-=======:===t---------~~-~C~OM~PA~RE~------~
EN AUTO L.F. (INT Sl)
TEST
-
GROUND
:l
~ .~::
NT Sl
Sl)
IINT
,._
·~v •
f
KEYBOARD
.i
•
SUPPLy
POIER
B
INT Sl)
RING BEll
MARK/SPACE (I NT Sl)
EVEN PARITY SIITCH
000 PAR 1TY Sll TCH
- '}
ALARM
·~v •
f
KEYBOARD
1-
KEYBOARD DATA ( 7)
EN x·y (!NT Sl)
RCV OAT
CAI1UND
0'1
I
~
A
I 11
-o
r
DATA
SET
CONIIECTOR
II
-
RCV DATA
GROUND
1 I
-
TX
RTS
DTR
RS232
INTERFACE~
~~s
-------o
OSR
4
I
3
~
IWII!1illl'll'olloW
•
cODE '"""'
'1
BLOCK DIAGRAM
2
T
om
15920
IC
,
oWG NO
622
CROSS
REf NO
A
}
DATA SET
CONNECTOR
3
4
01
I
01
o
D
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TRANSFORI!R
OliN 11 GA
20V AC
BlUE 1B GA
BIN 18 GA
IHT 1B GA
120¥ AC
CP2
CJ;--,
~--
16 GA BlK/GRY
I& GA RED
16 GA
BlK/REO
16 GA REO
~~--
I"
I
I
NEUT
n1
B
I
I
/
::::l
I
I50ASSEftlY
HZ
1
____
m
1. CONlON CONNECTED TO NORMAl FOR INPUT VOl !AGE
RANGE 21&V TO 2&8.
2. COMMON CONNECTED TO lOI FOR INPUT VOlTAGE
RANGE 19BV TO 246.
3. FACTORY SETTING COMMON CONNECTEn TO NORMAl.
CABlE ASSEIIlY
DC PIR
61402400
c
HP1
CRI
1
unuunu
Q CE4
AC
AC +
~-----------
....
~anuun
1
1
BP5
I
"
"
"
"
"
-
•
•
~
VIDEO
ION I TOR
ASSY
I
lOGIC CARD
B
I• •
lOGIc MODUlE ASSY
n
I BP~aJ4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ______ _ I
~-r.--J
CJ2
-----1
II +15 VOlT REGUlATOR I
~
1
I
I
I
I
THERM.!.!!E'!_ _
L---1------.--T--.----.-'
H
ASSEIBl Y
lOGIC IOOUlE ASSY
VIDEO IONITOR ASSY
REAR PANEl ASSY
PIR SUPPlY ASSY
NOTE:
I
I
I
I
I
PlATE
I II
I _______
I
''"'' n.uu
c
PC CARD
I
~
Q-ill.,
I
D
REFERENCE INFORIATION
lETTER DESIGNATION
A
B
-~1---- ...!!!..1
I
I CE2
~
CB1
I:
/
I.
0
POIER SUP'L Y ASSEIIIl Y
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
16 GA GRY
I
I
I
REAR
PANEl
ASSEMBlY
60 HZ
jl-·
16 GA GRY
J
"'""'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IOOV AC
i
c
2
P.C. ASSEMBlY
o-
~
~
mLE
A
)>
4
3
AC/DC POWER
INTERCONNECT
DIAGRAM
A
4
J3
,
3
2
-4-
-·
J4
a-.
!'.)
CR5
~
~
J5
-
I
I
I
1
CR4
15151402
R17
I
1.5«
8
11
)>
I
Rl& +
+
c5 1 •
C4
1.5l
7,500 7,500
II
'
Rl
50
Cll
2.2
51~
,.
01-B
+
Rl5
200
11
'{'
OJ
.....
A"
02-E
Of-C
-
- - -
HJf-2GATE
R5, fO
RB, 1.5K
.,.
--
----
.... l-' CRI
~ ~5::1109
Rl4
47
HJf-l CATHODE
ON CARD T!PE &AF0-0
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'=
4
"
Rl3,13l
HJ2 -5
c
l
GNU
HJ2·-4
I
GNU
HJ2·-&
GNU
HJ2
NOTE:
GND
HJ2
&
&
I
&
+
C14
150
lOY
1.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ALL DIDOES TO BE 51&10800.
TO SET OUTPUT TO +5 ,0 VOLTS !.25 VOLTS REIDY£ Rl3 FOR
A DECREASE Or , 5 VOLT AND/OR Rl2 FOR A DECREASE OF
.25 VOLTS.
R9,3.16l,tU
B
RJ
27
R6
27
R3
.3
51
R2
.3
51
I
I
01-E
--------1
- -
GND
HJ2·-1
SiAl
R12, 28.7K,tl>
Cl3
!10"!.
I
I
I
I
I
HJ2 -3
u2
XIYR
N ;;.._
332
Rl1, 1.78,!1 •;
4Jpf
IOOY
I
I
I
l
"+
C3, 14000, 15Y
- -
1
C9
2.2
+12
I~!_
I
I
C2, 14000,15¥
ltJf-3 ANODE
4~~: ~
I
.\I
J8 .,.
.,.
+23.8
I
RIO, 100, II
I
I
1
+
100Y
tiD' ~N
03-1 I
C1, 14000,15¥
+
922BA-12A I
I
2
T
+
-- ---- -
B
C7
2.2
I
I
.,.
YR1
+12
3570
1
I
D
I
I
I
I
-
~
I
Hl2·-10
I
I
HEAT SINK ASS!
&1405700
-12
I
C10
2.2
I
03-E
I
2
CB
2.2
CR3
c
922BA-12A 1
T
-----------------
!!cal
+ 7,500
I
.,.
CR2
3
YR2
-12
35BC
HJ2-1
R4
68
r
+5
REFERENCE DRAWING
DETAIL 90436&00
ASS!
90436700
ASS!
90460538
HJ2 11
HJ2 12
(5CKD-0)
(6AFO~)
'""'
A
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM,
ME'T PWR SUPPLY
4
t
3
I
2
1
I
REVISION RECORD
N.STATUS
I I I l••v
AJ2 LOGIC IOOULE ASSEIBLY
l2o 111 111916146 131\1210
I
OJ
r
- ICJ4
I
OJ
IV
-
_REAR _PANEL_ CARITsSY -
-
PRINTER CO
~- ..
8
ITR
I
I
I
I I
I I
I
I
121 11 9 4 5
I
I I I
I I
22 3
I
I
J
CJI CP;
0
o n
:;:g
d
~
-·-·
~
;;:
~ ~~~ ~;
I
JA l!o.653-77171'E~~ .. seo
~~"~ ..!NU
I
c
....
I I
I I
1---
I I
I I
I I
I I
~Ill
L-L-J }-,
3
12
BPIIBJI
u...
VIDEO
ELECTRONICS
PC ASSEIBL Y
I
I I
0
a-
tv
~
~
8
•
~
~
A
)>
...
j
I I
~
I
c
1OOK
2
3
4
5
6
7
I
9
IO
II
12
13
14
15
16
17
1B
23
24
25
V
t8 20
PROTECTIVE A '--~TO tOIINECTOII Sllfll
AE1
POT
INTENSITY
CONTROl
ASSY
I I6
7
ro==1 •
1
BJBIBPB
I I
I~J
Plf'Ll. : - --- =-------'
--L_ _ _
_ _ _j
lA
TIIU
}-,
3
...
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
SIGNAL
USB>"" CC555
OWN
....,..,
t:CirMP'CifrreofTS, EXCEPT AS NOTfO
TOUON«:f
VAWf
l1-
12 2
7&
;..,:/_;,
;
:2j6j7<,
•
t,/7b
fl.- 10 7(
ICA&I
T';;9;; Icls22oo946
,.
r.,..,
I
ClOSS
1
It&T
I
•
(J
Q
0
0
16
SEND DATA
Ia
It]
I
I
~
CJ~)
118
CJ~)
~
ClJ.:4)
~13
12
~10
CJ~)
3
Cl.J.::4
'IN
c~
CJ~)
IS)
RECEIVE DATA
)~
C{
REQUEST TD SEND
)~4
.....
~
~
CJ~)
u
)~
l
CLEAR TO SEND
)~
DATA SET RUDY
)~
CARRIER DETECT
)ill=.!
OATI TERI RUDY
)~0
PROTECTIVE GROUND
~
i3
u
~
~
w
:r
u
lfl
~
:~
PROTECT lYE GROUND
)-W=I
N
CJ~
Ol
SIGNAL GROUND )
r£!1:1
PRINTER GROUND )~1
CJ~)
l
~11
:~19
~15
RECEIVE CLOCK )~11
CJ!.:.!.4
CJ~
RING INDICATOR
)~22
CJ!.:!4
DATI RATE SELECT
) ~23
CJ~
CLOCK TO IDOEI
~24
Cl!..:J.4)
CJ
62957400 A
SEC REQUEST TO SEND
1111 CLOCK
CJ~
Q
SEC REQUEST TO SEND
l
!..:.!.4
PRINTER DSR
PRINTER CD
PRINTER RCV DATA
:~
~·
)~3
CJ1=!4
PATH ONLY
SECONDARY CD
~12
CJ.!::!4
PATH ONLY
PRINTER SEC RTS
r£!..!::19
CJ~)
PATH ONLY
PRINTER OTR
~20
(J
5-53
4
I
- I T REV- ITA1
T
I
l
I
REV
'6 !. IS
CXI
-
~
-~·ft
JM ~
RE.LE.ASE.D C.LASS''C"
/b'B-'7 Jeue.,.sE.I::J a.ttss
bll1~"'1 'WI•'W'l~L €(.0
~E..'III':>EI:I "~'~>R. E..CJ:I
c. c c cwucn
Y'
~
f 1'A. /
~.,
fw'l\1.
~y{~IIAJ.\ ~p
I~
kvu-1
&..M
/
"
Ill
0 IPS
•
VID£0 OUI
+NOIIZ
OIIVl
IP2 @I
c
!PI 0
NOIIZ
OUT
NOI@IN
g;
~
2
- AlA A
[iF
•
Ill
fOCUS
ARC GND
~·
8
>
4
VUI OUI
om
~~
I
D
["'"1't
SPARK GAP
~
~1'814-11
8
.T
I
1
~
1 OOK
8P4-12
-=
Rl OA. I K •
BRIGHTNESS
814-12
I
'··
CR5A
-190Y
:o::
CIBA
I
I
114-1
51908000
51908000
RIA.ISOK
BP3-I
<..n
~
_L
------
~-------------
SPARK GAP
-=
o~
2
3
4
D
21EG
Cl
814-2
I 21
+15V
1
&:. ~
m-
oor.
--u ,----l
VIDEO SIG
--1
c
f.-1..J
50 us
us
-.j
I LINE OF
HORZ INFORM
I
I
....1... 35V •2o·
·-
-
·-
+45Y
CR4A
.
814-16
814-13
95631305
c
814-14
I 21
~~~
I
I
35V •20"
*
I: ~
.
I
+5V
I
I
+465Y
68
SOY
-1 0%+1 00%
R36A
6 8K
II
TP5
'"II
814-4
51908000
-------l
1
>,r·
~--'B'-'I"-'4--"15~~~P4-15_
C19A
I
f.
f-Wl1
2.2.K
Cl
814-20
1112A
4 TK
I 21
4A
R4A
fA
+15Y
II
SPARK GAP
R3~. 1
8JI-12
~.8P4-5
95631305
VV\,.--4-....!o~RBA
:!:5
)>
814-21
) 1)1P4-1
+46!3V
I
I
II
-~~
OY
-::-
1
4
95637305
~!il2~-~ E_KT_-J.5!li~D__ J
I
i':> >IDLT
CI2A.IO
~~
e'JJ'LJl
IW5
~~
~-'2.. 3f ;.~
I
~·)'>~
""'='
I
&JI-b
B
~
~ORIL
£.
I I I '•
t Lf:'..
" ·h ~,.. H""
R26A
~
l"fjR GND
8!1-5
VERT GNO
35ms
<..n
I
~
<..n
<..n
, - -IU
bl
ms
• L
r
n
J L__j
~10
Cl
IBP4-19
t
\(J-I2~~~~~..
-t;J;;J!\OV
V
&,.l
REO
+!SV 1~---114-7
814-9
T
- _ - _ - _- _ - _ - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1
)I~
.
)
R28A
VERT SIG
1
GRN
VERT
YOKE
TP3
YEl
K29A 4 7K
I
II
0. 47
I OOY
!I 0
1
'
-= I I
I PHi
CR31
51001239
L 21
5. 6
I.
All CAPACITORS AR£ IN Uf
EICEPT CU.
2.
II& AND 8!1 ARE CONTACT
POSTS ON CIRCUIT BOARD
II
3.
4.
C.
DIAG~AM
'/IDEO DISPLA't' ELECTRONIC.S
NOt.l C.OMP0511E VIDEO
4
3
VERT CHOKE
NOTES - - - - - - - - I
R34A
-137-.j-uS
• 50 HZ = 20. Oos
60HZ= 16.67os
B
- - -- - -- --
I
ARC GND
nBJI-10
L)
BP4-7
,v 8P4-9
811-13 VIDEO GNO
BH)
HORZ
YOKE
8P4-I 7
+14±1V
I
I 0 TJ.ERf"1151'ER.
1 1IOK21
CISA
BLU
3 LINEARITY
2
+15V£
---.
Bll-~4 CHASSIS GNO
l
-:-
2K
HORIZ GNO
1'
I
l2A.7-42uH
51907500
~ ~
+\SV
I
Bll-5
I
~8 uS~
I
I
b)ilJ4-~
'
':>IG.
+15Yt
+15V
1 BP4-H.))r.J4-1'2.
IOOV~-
'
HV
FlYBACK
I
I
CRIA
5190d200
)
--11)) f>J4·8
...J
HOR IZ
IIOTH
&&
TIO SEPARATE
+15Y REGULATORS
ELECTRONICS OUTSIDE Of THE DlSitfO
ASS! IS THE 9305 CIRCUIT.
A
•
a
2
crCJ1
o-
D
c
c
NOTES
I.
IJNLESS OTHERIISE SPECIFIED
.;NTEGRATED CIRCUITS ARE AS
14 PIN INTEGRATED CKTS·
16 PIN INTEGRATED CKTS
POIER AND GROUND PINS Of
LISTED BELOI·
PIN 14 =+IV, PIN 1 = GNO
PIN 16 =+IV, PIN 8 = GND
B
8
o-
~
~
8A
'"" 5CH£MATIC.
>
DIAGRAM bBND-0
(NON (OMI'0511E VIDE.O BOARD)
4
3
A
c
0
BJ4~
BRIGHTNESS CONTROl ''CCI''
A
BJ4~
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL "C"
c
BJ4~
BRIGHTNESS CONTROl "CI"
ARC GNO
9305
CIRCUIT
AJ
~
0
AH
) BJ4-2
B
AG
)-!lL
T
s
BJ~
~~
) 8J4-20
)-lli:.15
5~
u-
H
CHASSIS GNO
0
AF
Q
z
) BJ4-4
dl
-9
i
~
~
IJ~
VIDEO
E
BJ~
VERT SIG
N
BJ~
HORZ SIG
AC
c
rlli=ll
a
~
'~<
uJ
%
v
~
Ct
10.1
N
814~ +ISV
en
G
N
BJ4-14
AI
>--
AA
)-lli:.16
z
) BJ4-5
I
~3
!IE
~9
J
Q
114~ •15¥
1
A
9221A-5P
CIRCUIT
..
tE-0
B
u
K
•>---<
BJ~
R
BJt~
•
•>-Bll~
•>-Ill~
p
GNO
v
•
rlli:J.D
F
I
0
62957400 A
0
c(
5-57
u
0
RIOA.IK
~~~~~----------~~-----------1~~.1R~C~P~R~OT"E~C1r-----~----------------------------------------------~AH
1 21
I
C2A
;;r;o.01ut
20 . •~oov
,A.
T l
ARC GND
II ·~v GND
IR I GNTNESS
I on•tont
"''-""
R11.1SOK
:q·~
PROTECT
llf
~lEG
.2 3
I
I
+l ~~~
0 ·~0~1 "~'~-------o_._o1_u_t._2o
~~--R-9~1·v·7~K_____.~
·~._~
___
1~_oo_v____~--------------......lAJ
T__
t 20
1~00V
RBA
1 21
l
R12A .• 7K
cw~
••nv
121
I CNASS Is GNO
&20K
1 21
;:D~33ut
•oov
7 ~K
1
RtJI
1K
!
1,~ 2~us
1
1
..!!ill!!.!....ll!!!~-.:..._+---+--...,..--'·~ .L
3
T
't
~
1-"-
193
Lt3
I
Ri7A.m
~
,
~).021
\.!:::::
Ull~
2 D--<
2
&V
3
89us
R1•1. 39~
l
~~~~TIA ~-:~ ~1~
.T CBA
21
~~70u!
+
1'2~V -10
NDul
1
•1DD
,____ _,.
R291 .• 7K
C9A
~ov
-10
+1~
w!
w
~100-
u2s
f?
R2U
r
I~)
2.2K
r---
CI:
6
v
I
J
7-.211HY
l
51907~00
1
R281 ~ Cl
IOK
UR2A
ll__jfj,~ ·~ ~
L21
3
r-+-4r-1241-3~--~~~~)
R25A. 2 2K
IJ)
_.,·~ ·c_,:_~:_20-IDT.J ~~i!3ut I
Ci21.1Dul
R18A I 2
D.D1ul
:t
Q
llt
~
~
u.l
:::t
...
~1907900
Ri9A .82. 31
o:£l
-9
~---------ILo
r?
R21A
z
·-------------------1 IC
~CIDA.:~v'~~~"'
~1908100
0
I
... ___
I\,
1'
y~A
9
rB
~ ~::"'
t-----'
8~
..,-
9~63730~
J CSI
Rt~l
C7[1,0. Diut
I
-N
~c~t7ai~------------------------------~~R~3~8~~----------------~~--IM.----~~~
I
r-
io
lu
CR~I
-190V
I
lcl&l ~
o .• l
ul
R321
~
I~D
~1906900
L)
V1
IE
L
l
1239-
>---
OU
R 3 7A~I0030~9 ~
I~K
R27A
~1
0
R26' rCI~I
2K
0.• 7
Ul
R30A
130K
I
R&l
, - Cl
1-WII.IUJJIIIII.___ _~,.,.,.J..._....J
R21•t2
~ Ctl
~
RJA.U
(
J-"
~DO L-----..:JII\il;.:......-+-1
I~Dpl
20
1DOV
)
Oil
R3&1 .._ Ci91
u&8ut
&DV
ID
+100
Rill. 1&
I
II
~ ~1907&00
1 21
L1
I
RIA 220
bl
~~=-----4--~~--~---------------------------------~
IG
·~IIHY
I
S.233926
.n
R~91
10011.
uu.at<
-
I
CR. I
J
I
"63730~
.,
5-58
62957400 A
N
u
Q
~A-~--
---VR1-B
15151500
('
+5VR
357A
3. c
C1B
2 2ut
35V
±20'
-,
m
+ 2
I
...
I
_ _j
.
f
u
62957400 A
4
5-59
4
3
2
01
E>'
~
D
>.
lz"
f<::
f
~·
ljJ~
.
~~-
~0~
c
c
'=
0~0
'-~
w~
~
0
~
i
B
...
B
~
0
~
''1~
0
~
lj,
~
IN
~
~
1
~~ ~~'
N
~
~
§A
TITLE
A
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
REGULATOR ASSY
)>
4
3
2
_.,
6
MAINTENANCE
This section describes field maintenance procedures for the display terminal, which
in this section is referred to as the terminal subsystem, or just terminal. This terminology is used because the display terminal operates, and is tested with, either an
impact or non impact character printer. The section begins by suggesting an approach
to emergency maintenance (field maintenance). It then lists special tools required
for maintaining the terminal under the Maintenance Aids heading, and describes the
preventive maintenance tasks and procedures under the Preventive Maintenance
heading. These tasks and procedures are often done immediately following emergency
maintenance of the terminal subsystem. The last part of this section describes diagnostic and corrective maintenance procedures, which are those procedures actually
used to diagnose and correct a malfunction during an emergency maintenance call to
the terminal subsystem site.
Field maintenance for this terminal subsystem uses a logical process of elimination
to trace a malfunction to a field replaceable part. Once the malfunctioning part
is determined, the part is replaced. The key to speedy, efficient field maintenance
is the diagnostic decision logic table (DOLT). This type of table is described in
greater detail later in this section.
SUGGESTED EMERGENCY MAINTENAN:CE PROCEDURE
The following text provides a procedure for customer engineers to follow when
responding to customer complaints or request for service. Before leaving for the
customer site, the customer engineer (CE) should obtain all of the information
possible from the customer. This can be done by calling the customer and talking
to the terminal operator or the person operating the terminal at the time the malfunction occurred. The CE should determine:
•
The type of terminal that he is being called on to repair.
•
The specific configuration of the terminal; for example, does it use a
printer or other type of peripheral (s).
•
The type of symptoms the terminal exhibited to indicate a malfunction
occurred.
•
Whether the terminal is operating at all at this time, and what symptoms,
if any, it has when an attempt is made to operate it.
62957400 A
6-1
With notes that he has taken during the conversation with the terminal operator, the
CE can decide what course of action to take.
•
Go to the installation site and begin troubleshooting.
•
Deduce that the terminal itself is probably not at fault and that the mast
I ikely cause of the problem is either the communication lines or a power
reduction or loss. In either case, the CE can notify the responsible party
(common carrier or power company) of the problem.
•
Decide that an error in operating procedure and not an equipment failure
is probably the cause of the malfunction, and notify the customer of the
correct operating procedure.
Assuming that the CE must go to the terminal site to troubleshoot, the CE can also
determine a probable cause of the failure and gather the tools, manuals, and spare
parts that w iII be needed.
Upon arriving at the customer site, the CE finds the appropriate supervisory personnel,
is shown to the malfunctioning terminal, again interviews the operator or otherwise
verifies the phone notes taken concerning the malfunction. The CE visually inspects
the terminal to ensure proper input/output cable and power connections, verifies that
a malfunction does exist, and then begins to troubleshoot the terminal equipment.
Based on what is learned during conversations with customer personnel and what is
observed after arriving at the customer site, the CE normally has two courses of
action: 1) begin the troubleshooting procedures from the beginning, 2) begin troubleshooting only the equipment that is suspected of having a malfunction. Once the
source of a malfunction is discovered and corrected, the CE should:
•
Run through the terminal subsystem checkout procedure furnished later in
this section to ensure that the terminal is fully operational.
•
Check the preventive maintenance task tables in this section and perform
any required preventive maintenance task procedures.
•
Demonstrate to the customer's satisfaction that the terminal is now
operating properly and is fully operational.
CAUTION
Because many of the circuits used in this system
are of the MOS integrated circuit type, always
observe the rules for handling MOS type circuits
as described in appendix B of this manual. Failure to do so can result in these circuits being
destroyed by an e'xcess ive discharge of static
electricity.
6-2
62957400 A
(
MAINTENANCE AIDS
In addition to the normal complement of hand tools and test equipment carried by
the field CE, maintenance of this terminal requires a 3/32-inch nonmetallic hex
driver (CRT Tuning Wand, CDC part no. 12263299). Maintenance of the impact
printer may also require some special tools and equipment; these, however, are
described in the Reference and Field Service Manual for the impact printer (see
preface).
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Preventive maintenance describes those tasks that are performed immediately following and as _part of an emergency maintenance call. Preventive maintenance task
tables (PMT) and preventive maintenance task procedures (PMTP) define the particular tasks to be performed for a terminal, indicate the schedule for performing these
tasks, and describe how to do these tasks.* Both PMTs and PMTPs for each equipment
that can be used to configure this terminal subsystem are included in this section.
While a CE is performing the PMTs and PMTPs, they should verify that the terminal
operator has been performing their assigned preventive maintenance tasks. Normally,
a terminal operator is only responsible for routine cleaning of equipment exterior;
however, in some instances, the operator may be responsible for more complex
preventive maintenance procedures. This is often determined on a per-installation
basis and on the type of operator personnel used at a given installation.
KEYBOARD DISPLAY PMTs
The Iist ing of the PMTs in table 6-1 defines the items to be performed or checked
at the keyboard display each time the terminal requires repair. Do these tasks for
best equipment performance and to minimize the amount of emergency maintenance
calls.
CAUTION
Do not use solvents to clean the keyboard of the
display terminal. Solvents can cause keyswitches
to become defective.
*Some ofthe PMTPs refer to the diagnostic/corrective-maintenance procedures
found later in this section. These latter procedures are designated TS1, TS2, etc.
for terminal subsystem procedures; CRTl, CRT2, etc. for keyboard display procedures; NIP1, Nl P2, etc. for nonimpact printer procedures; and IMP1, IMP2, etc.
for impact printer procedures.
62957400 A
6-3
TABLE 6-1. KEYBOARD DISPLAY PMTs
ITEM
PROCEDURE
APPROXIMATE
TIME (MINUTES)
1
Clean keyboard
2
2
Clean exterior surface
2
3
Clean viewing screen
2
4
Visually inspect all cables and wires for insulation
breakdown or other damage
5
5
Check keycaps for signs of wear or breakage
1
6
Check for foreign objects inside cabinet
5
KEYBOARD DISPLAY PIITPs
The following text describes the PMTPs which support the preceding PMT table for
the keyboard display.
CAUTION
Before working inside of the cabinet for these
PMTPs, turn power off and remove ac input from
site power outlet.
1) Remove dust from keyboard with a soft-bristled brush.
CAUTION
Do not use s o I v e n ts o r c I e a n i n g f I u i d s •
2) Clean exterior surfaces of cabinet with a damp, I int-free cloth. Mild
detergent may be used.
3) Clean face of viewing screen with a clean, soft cloth and a mild glasscleaning solution. If a spray is used, do not allow liquid to flow off
screen (it is preferable to spray cloth rather than screen).
)
6-4
62957400A
4) Remove cabinet hood (procedure CRT5) and visually inspect all cables and
wires for evidence of insulation breakdown and wear. Replace damaged
wires if possible. Check electrical connections to ensure they are not
loose. Check electronic components for signs of deterioration, such as
overheating or aging.
5) Check keycaps for signs of wear or breakage and replace keyboard if
necessary (procedure CRT 4).
6) Check for foreign objects such as bits of wire or solder.
NONIMPACT PRINTER PMTs
The PMTs I isted in table 6-2 are the tasks to be done at the nonimpact printer (if
part of the subsystem) at the intervals specified in the table. Do these tasks for
best equipment performance and to reduce repairs.
TABLE 6-2. NONIMPACT PRINTER PMTs
APPROXIMATE TIME
(See Note 2)
LEVEL
(See Note 1)
ITEM
1
1. 1
Clean exterior surface
2
1
1.2
Inspect cabinet interior for possible loose parts
3
1
1.3
Clean cabinet interior
5
1
1.4
Inspect all cables and wires for insulation
breakdown or other damage
2
1
1.5
Inspect all mechanisms for signs of excess wear
3
1
1.6
Check carefully for foreign objects inside
cabinet and mechanism
2
2
2.1
Clean printhead
15
2
2.2
Clean guidebar
5
2
2.3
Lubricate platen solenoid plunger
5
PROCEDURE
Notes:
1) Level 1 tasks are those to be done each time the terminal subsystem requires repoir. Level 2
tasks are required' every 20 million printed characters, 500,000 line feeds, or one year,
whichever occurs first. However, if foreign material is suspected on the guidebar at any time,
it should be cleaned to prevent excessive carriage return time (over 200 milliseconds). Also,
if printhead contamination is suspected before the normal cleaning time, it should be cleaned.
2) Approximate time given is in minutes, and is for tasks listed here only., This does not include
troubleshooting/c:arrective maintenance procedures, which may be seen as necessary from
these PMTs.
62957400 A
6-5
NONIMPACT PRINTER PMTPs
Following text describes the PMTPs which support the preceding PMT table for the
nonimpact printer.
CAUTION
Before work in g inside of the cabinet for these
PMTPs, turn power off and remove ac input cord
from site power outlet.
The following steps describe the level 1 tasks listed in the PMT table.
1.1) Clean exterior surfaces of cabinet with damp, lint-free cloth. Mild
detergent may be used. Do not use cloth so wet that water runs down
into printer.
1.2) Turn the two hood-locking screws at cabinet rear 1/4-turn counterclockwise and pull these screws back. Lift hood up from back until it
will slide forward off its front holding tab. Placing the hood aside,
inspect interior of cabinet for possible parts which may have worked
loose from mechanism. Replace parts, or mechanism, depending on
whether loose parts are reusable, replaceable, etc.
1.3) Using a soft, long-bristled brush and vacuum cleaner with a crevice
tool, carefully and thoroughly clean cabinet interior of any/all paper
particles, dust, etc.
1.4) Inspect all cables, wires, and connections (including input/output
connector pins) for evidence of insulation breakdown or wear. Repair/
replace damaged wires if possible. Check electronic components for
signs of deterioration such as overheating or aging.
1.5) Look carefully at all mechanisms for signs of wear. Repair/replace
worn parts if possible (use replacement procedures provided later in
this section).
1.6) Inspect for foreign objects possibly lodged in crevices within the
mechanism or other portions of cabinet.
6-6
62957400A
(
The following steps describe the level 2 procedures I istecl in the PMT table. However, perform all level 1 tasks before doing level 2.
2. 1) Clean printhead as follows:
a) Remove printhead and cable assembly from printer (procedure NIP13).
b) Using a clean, dry, stiff-bristle toothbrush, brush 10 to 15 times
across printhead elements in both vertical and horizontal directions.
CAUTION
Do not use so I v e n t s o r c 1. e a n i n g f I u i d s •
c) Replace printhead and cable assembly in printer (procedure NIP13).
2.2) Clean guidebar as follows:
a) Using a clean, dry, I int-free cloth, wipe all four sides of the head
guidebar until clean. Move carriage as necessary to access bar along
entire length.
CAUTION
Do not use so I v e n t s o r c I e a n i n g f I u i d s •
b) Exercise printer for a few minutes; that is, do offline tests for nonimpact printer as described in Terminal Subsystem Checkout procedure
(TS6) later in this section.
2.3) Lubricate platen solenoid plunger (figure Nl P7) as follows:
a) Apply three drops of lubricant, CDC part no. 62148158 or equivalent,
around plunger working surface.
b) Operate plunger in and out of housing to distribute lubricant.
f
62957400 A
6-7
IMPACT PRINTER PMTs
The PMTs listed in table 6-3 are the tasks to be done at the impact printer (if a
part of the subsystem) at the intervals specified in the table. Do these tasks for
best equipment performance and to reduce repairs.
TABLE 6-3. IMPACT PRINTER PMTs
LEVEL
(See Note 1)
ITEM
1
1.1
Cleon exterior surface
3
1
1.2
Inspect cabinet interior far possible loose parts
5
1
1.3
Cleon cabinet interior
5
1
1.4
Inspect all cables and wires for insulation
breakdown or other damage
4
1
1.5
Inspect all mechanisms for signs of excess wear
5
1
1.6
Check carefully far foreign objects inside
cabinet and mechanism
4
2
2.1
Oil drive mechanism
2
2
2.2
Greose bevel geors
2
2
2.3
Examine/replace return reel cord
2 to 10
2
2.4
Cleon printhead-slide shafts
2
2
2.5
Oil farmat tape and forms motion motor
1
2
2.6
Use printer Test Print switch and exercise
5
2
2.7
Replace cabinet and pack tools/materials
10
3
3.1
Remove and wash printheod and then check
print pins
30
3
3.2
Reinstall printhead
10
3
3.3
Use printer Test Printer switch and exercise
3
3.4
Replace cabinet and pack tools/materials
PROCEDURE
APPROXIMATE TIME
(See Note 2)
5
15
Notes:
1) Level 1 tasks are those to be done eoch time the terminal subsystem requires repair.
Level 2 tasks are required every 13.2 million printed characters, 500 hours of power-on
time, or 3 months - whichever comes first. Level 3 tasks are required every
79.2 million characters, 3000 hours of power-on time, or 18 months - whichever
comes first. However, if inspection shows the level 2 or 3 tasks should be done ahead
of schedule, do such tasks as seem necessary to help prevent equipment wear/
misperfarmance.
2) Approximate time given is in minutes, and is for tasks listed here only. This does not
include troubleshooting corrective maintenance procedures which may be seen as
necessary from these PMTs.
6-8
62957400A
1
IMPACT PRINTER PMTPs
The following text describes the PMTPs which support the preceding PMT table for
the impact printer.
CAUTION
Before work i n g ins ide of the cabinet for these
PMTPs, tum power off and remove ac input cord
from site power outlet.
The following steps describe the level 1 tasks listed in the PMT table.
1.1) Clean exterior surfaces of cabinet with damp, lint-free cloth. Mild
detergent may be used. Do not use cloth so wet that water runs down
into printer.
1.2) Remove cabinet (procedure IMP6). With cabinet placed aside, inspect
interior cabinet base and horizontal surfaces for parts which may have
worked loose from mechanism. Replace parts, or mechanism, depending
on whether loose parts are reusable, replaceable, etc.
1.3) Using a soft, long-bristled brush and vacuum cleaner with a crevice
tool, carefully and thoroughly clean cabinet interior of any/all paper
particles, dust, etc.
1.4) Inspect all cables, wires, and connections (including input/output
connector pins) for evidence of insulation breakdown or wear. Repair/
replace damaged wires if possible. Check electronic components for
signs of deterioration caused by overheating or aging.
1.5) Look carefully at all mechanisms for signs of wear. Repair/replace
worn parts if possible (use replacement procedures provided later in
this section).
1.6) Inspect for foreign objects possibly lodged in crevices within the
mechanism or other portions of the equipment.
62957400 A
6-9
The following steps describe the level 2 tasks listed in the PMT table. However,
perform all level 1 tasks before doing level 2.
2.1) Oil drive mechanism as follows:
a) Put three drops of oil, CDC part no. 95011200, in oil hole in motor
support casting, figure tMP10.
b) Put one drop same type oil in oil hole in each support bearing (two)
of drive shaft.
CAUTION
Do not allow any oil on the c I ut ch mechanism.
2.2) Grease bevel gears as follows:
a) Smear molygrease, CDC part no. 12210957, on bevel gears of
ribbon drive (figure IMP10) as required.
2.3) Inspect return reel cord for fraying and, if frayed, replace
(procedure IMP17).
2.4) Clean printhead-slide shafts as follows:
a) Using a clean, dry, lint-free cloth, wipe shafts until clean.
Move printhead carriage as necessary to access shafts along entire
length.
CAUTION
Do not use s o I v e n t s o r cl e a n i n g f I u i d s •
b) Apply four drops oil, CDC part no. 95011200, to each felt washer
which rides on shafts.
c) Move printhead carriage from end-to-end of shafts several times,
then wipe shafts clean again.
2.5) Oil format tape and forms motion motor as follows:
a) Apply one drop oil, CDC part no. 95011200, to oil hole for felt
lubricating pad, figure IMP10.
6-10
62957400A
2.6) Do Test Print exercise as follows:
a) See that paper is loaded (procedure IMP3) and ribbon is ready.
b) With power cord plugged into site power outlet, press ON/OFF
switch to turn printer on.
c) Pull safety switch up (figure IMP10).
d) With printer offline {START/STOP switch not lit), activate Test
Mode switch. Printer should continuously print alternating sets of
the character "B" fo Ilowed by an equa I number of space characters.
This should occur for a line, the paper should advance one line,
and the process should continuously repeat until Test Switch is
deactivated.
CAUTION
Do not a II ow the printer to constant I y print
continuous adjacent columns for more than 5 minutes maximum at at i me, or solenoid assemblies
will overheat and be damaged.
e) Examine printout for print quality {light or missing dots or improper
character width). If any problem exists, refer to table IMP1, DDLT
for Impact Printer.
2.7) If not doing level 3 tasks, or any other maintenance at this time,
replace printer cabinet {procedure IMP6) and pack tools/materials.
The following steps describe the level 3 tasks listed in the PMT table. However,
perform all level 1 tasks and the first five level 2 tasks before doing level 3.
3.1) Remove and wash printhead and check print pins as follows:
a) Remove printhead from printer {procedure IMP17).
b) Wash residue from printhead using standard isopropyl alcohol
normally used for cleaning.
c) Use a magnifying device such as an eye-loupe and inspect print
pins for being flush with surface of ruby guide. If not flush, return
printhead to repair facility and use a replacement in the printer.
3.2) Reinstall printhead in printer {procedure IMP17).
3 .3) Do Test Print exercise as described in level 2, step 2. 6.
3.4) If no other maintenance is to be performed at this time, replace printer
cabinet (procedure IMP6) and pack tools and materials.
62957400 A
6-11
DIAGNOSTIC AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
Maintenance activity for a terminal subsystem falls into three general categories:
preventive, diagnostic, and corrective. Preventive maintenance has already been
_discussed earlier in this section. This portion of the text concentrates on diagnostic
and corrective maintenance. Diagnostic maintenance provides an organized means
of diagnosing a malfunction and of identifying its source. Corrective maintenance
consists of the procedures for correcting a diagnosed malfunction and of those procedures used to verify that the malfunction has been corrected. This terminal subsystem
uses the checkout tests of procedure TS6 (Terminal Subsystem Checkout) both as a
means of verifying that a malfunction exists and that a malfunction has been corrected. It uses the diagnostic decision logic tables and the procedures in this section
to efficiently diagnose and correct a malfunction.
CAUTION
Because many of the circuits used in this system
are of the MOS integrated circuit type, always
observe the rules for handling MOS type circuits
as described in appendix 8 of this manual. Failure to do so can result in these circuits being
destroyed by an ex cess i v e discharge of static
electricity.
DIAGNOSTIC TABLES
The key for isolating a subsystem malfunction to its probable cause is proper use of
the cookbook-type diagnostic tables that follow. These tables, termed diagnostic
decision logic tables {DDLTs), or simply decision tables, identify and isolate a
malfunction in an equipment to a replaceable module, or where equipment design
does not permit this approach, to a replaceable part or component. The tables
present test setup and resulting symptom information in a logical, organized manner,
and where necessary, they refer to procedures for testing, adjusting, or replacing a
suspect component. References to procedures are also made in a sequenced manner
so that they refer to the easiest procedure or most I ikely cause first and progress to
the most difficult procedure or least likely cause. To further facilitate use of the
decision tables and their associated procedures, they are grouped in the following
manner:
6-12
•
Terminal subsystem {TS) tables and procedures
•
Keyboard display terminal (CRT) tables and procedures
•
Nonimpact printer (NIP) tables and procedures
•
Impact printer (IMP) tables and procedures
62957400A
(
The following paragraphs describe the decision tables in greater detail. Anyone
not familiar with the format and structure of diagnostic decision logic tables should
read the following paragraphs and study the sample table in figure 6-1 carefully
before attempting to use the decision tables later in this section. Also, anyone
using decision tables for the first time should always start at the beginning of the
tables and continue through to the end.
The diagnostic decision logic table is a specialized format for displaying logic in a
way that is superior to the conventional logic flowchart because the logic is more
visible. The DOLT analyzes a situation down to a set of specific conditions and then
directs the customer engineer to those actions that will correct the situation. Basically, the table is arranged in four sections, or quadrants: the Conditions quadrant,
the Situations quadrant, the Sequence quadrant, and the Actions quadrant. Figure 6-1 illustrates the layout of a diagnostic decision logic table; the sample table
is for purposes of illustration only and is not a table from this terminal subsystem.
Starting from the top, each table has a title. The title for the DOLT in figure 6-1
for example would be, Table CR1. DOLT for Card Reader {Sheet 1 of 1). Next the
table has an entry (Visual Checks in sample table) indicating the kind of test that
the table covers. Next the table has an Assume block. This block contains setup
information or information that is prerequisite to performing the rest of the test contained in the table. The remainder of the table consists of the quadrants noted previously; these quadrants are used in a clockwise direction, starting from the conditions
quadrant.
Conditions Quadrant
The conditions quadrant of a DOLT contains test conditions and questions that can
be answered with either a yes or a no. The CE should read and answer all of the
questions in the conditions quadrant and write the answers to each question (Y or N)
in a vertical column before proceeding to the situations column.
Situations Quadrant
The Situations quadrant of the example table contains 10 vertical columns of Ys and/
or Ns, and one column with the word Other in it. Each of the first 10 columns
(
62957400 A
6-13
VISUAL CHECKS
ASSUME
Card-reader power cord is connected to ac outlet.
Power is on. If power is not on, see procedure I.
CONDITIONS
Press and release RESET indicator/switch.
illuminated?
Is RESET indicator
y
Do all three motors start when RESET indicator/switch is pressed
(observe card-feed drum and coils of stacker motors)?
IY
>
Did motor power drop within 10 to 30 seconds after releasing RESET
indicator/switch?
IY
1- 1- 1- 1- :- 1- 1-
Q
ACTIO
IX
IN
SEQUENCE
1-1-1-1-
1-1-1-
1-1-1-1-
1-1-1-
1-1-1-1-
1-1-1--
1-1-1-1-
1-1-1-
11-121212131-1-1-iii:
<
114/4/314/5 /3/3/3
Check +17-volt power supply (procedure 36).
1-/11-1-1-
1-1-1--
Check for+ 17 V de between ground and control-board connector P2,
pins 2 and 3 and between ground and switch board connector, pins 2
and 3 (two pins joined by foil).
1-1-121-1-1-
1-1-1--
Check cable betwee
1-1- 13 1- 1- 1-1- 1- 1- 1-
'·
Replace lamp in failing indicator (procedure 41).
1- 1- 1-
I 1-
I
1- 1- 1-
!3 -
3
- 1- -
-
I
-
- 1-
-
1-
-
-
I
- 1-
- 1-
-
-
2 - 1-
- 1-
- i-
-
- /4
Check failing indicator and/or switch (procedure 40) and replace,
if required (procedure 4 I).
-
Check READ CHECK indicator/switch (procedure 40) and replace,
if required (procedure 4 I).
- 1- 1- 1-
Check +5-volt power supply (procedure 35).
-
Check RESET indicator/switch (procedure 40) and replace, if
required (procedure 4 1).
Repl•
,j board (prnr<>rl"r" 44).
k for ac power
'-V"""'"'v' .(procedure 37).
1- 1-
1-
-
-1--1---
Check failing motor. Replace motor, if required (procedure 46 for
card-feed motor, or procedure 47 for card-stacker motor).
1- 1-
- 1-
- 1-
Check common cable connections to motors.
,- 1- - 1-
- ;-
Check that TO switch (control board) has labeled side, TO, up.
1- 1-
- 1- i- 1-
Call Regional Tech Support.
1- 1-
- 1-
-
1-
-
- 1- -
- 12
-
-
2
11--
12 1- 1-
:- 11-
-
I 1I
- 1- 1-
X
figure 6-1. Example of a Diagnostic Decision Logic Table
6-14
62957400 A
represents a unique set of answers to the questions asked in the conditions quadrant.
A dash (-) in a column indicates that the answer to the associated condition is
irrelevant; that is, the answer may be either a yes or a no without affecting the
result. In using the tables, the CE should look for a match between theY and N
column written down while answering the questions posed in the conditions quadrant
and the Y and N answers listed in a column of the situations quadrant.
As an example, refer to the shaded area of the sample figure and assume that each
question in the conditions quadrant was answered no (N) as it was tested. The full
column of N answers to the conditions questions would actually match situations
column 2 even though situations column 2 contains three dashes. This is true because
the dashes indicate that their respective conditions questions are irrelevant. As can
be seen by examining the conditions questions, it is indeed irrelevant to ask which
indicators light or which motors run if it is already known that no indicators Iight
and no motors run.
When using the tables, look for a match between the conditions answers and the
situations columns starting from the left situations column and moving toward the
right one. Do this because overriding situations are normally listed first (on the
left) within the situations quadrant. Overriding situations are those that move you
out of the table and on the next test, table, or action.
Sequence Quadrant
The sequence quadrant contains numbers that indicate the sequence in which corrective actions are to be taken. The sequence of actions for a particular set of conditions appears in the same vertical column as the situations column that matches the
conditions. For example, the sample figure shows the sequence 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
directly under the situations 2 column. These sequence numbers indicate that the
first action to-be taken is to, Check that toggle switch 51 (rear panel) is up; the next
action to be taken is to, Check that removable power cord is connected securely to
card reader; and the last action to be taken (5) is to, Refer to CB 1OX manua I. The
sequence of actions normally selects either the easiest procedure or most likely cause
first and progresses to the most difficult procedure or least likely cause.
In the sample figure, also notice that some of the sequence columns contain only
an X. The X indicates that there is onl-y one possible action to take. As an example,
the X in the situation 11, or Other column of the sample table, indicates that the
62957400 A
6-15
only action available is to call for assistance. The Other term
in the situation 11
column indicates that none of the previous situations match the answer written down
for the conditions questions.
Actians Quadrant
The actions quadrant Iists specific actions that the CE is to take in the process of
troubleshooting an equipment. The actions I isted are taken in the order I isted in
the sequence quadrant.
Notice that either the conditions or the actions quadrants can direct the CE to
perform specific procedures. A condition, for example, could direct the CE to run
a particular checkout procedure before asking a question about the results (yes or no
answer) of the checkout procedure. An action, on the other hand, could direct a
CE to perform a checkout procedure, perform an adjustment or remove-and-replace
procedure, exit this table and go to another table, or to call for assistance in
troubleshooting the malfunction.
To facilitate locating the corrective action procedures that are part of this section,
an index at the end of this section lists all of the corrective action procedures and
their respective page numbers.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
If you are unfamiliar with this terminal or with the use of the DDLT as a troubleshooting tool, go back and read the material under the preceding Diagnostic and
Corrective Maintenance heading carefully. Then, start at the beginning of the
tables and work through to the end of the section, ensuring that all malfunctions
detected are corrected. If a table pertains to equipments or functions not present
in a particular terminal configuration, skip to the following table or tables and
continue in this manner until all applicable tables are completed.
DOLTs AND PROCEDURES
Figure 6-2 shows the arrangement of the diagnostic and corrective maintenance
information throughout the remainder of this section.
6-16
62957400A
....__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
~01642-1
figure 6-2. Arrangement of Diagnostic and Corrective Maintenance Information
62957400 A
6-17/6-18
-
(
NOTE
If you are u n fa m iIi a r with diagnostic decision
I o g i c tables, read the explanation of their use
described earlier in this section. Then, start at
the beginning of the next page and work yourway
through to the end of this section until you correct
any fault.
START TROUBLESHOOTING AT
BEGINNING OF NEXT PAGE.
NOTE
Because the diagnostic decision logic tables
(DOLTs) require much time, money, and effort you, the user, determine whether they wi II continue in future manuals as a diagnostic aid.
Please use the comment sheet at the back of this
manual to let us know the following: 1) Did you
actually use these tables? 2) Do you think they
ore va I uab I e and why or why not? 3) Do you
feel this is the best approach to a "cookbook"
troubleshooting manual that you have seen, considering that the DOLTs tie everything together;
that is, d i agnostics, procedures, figures, and
tab I es? 4) To you, what is their most serious
shortcoming? 5) How would you improve the
DOLT s? Remember, the comment sheet is your
direct link with the writer.
l.
62957400 A
6-19,/6-20
TABLE TSl. DDLT FOR TERMINAL SUBSYSTEM
OPERATIONAL CHECKS FOR TERMINAL SUBSYSTEM
ASSUME
Subsystem equipments installed per instructions in appendix of associated Operators Guide/Reference Manual (see
preface). Proper subsystem cabling verified per figure TSI. If printer is part of subsystem, it has paper loaded
properly (procedure NIPI or IMP3), and if an impact printer, it has ribbon and format tape installed properly
(procedures IMP4 and IMP5).
CONDITIONS
Apply subsystem power per procedure TSI. Do all equipments appear to have
power?
'
Does any equipment have power?
Run through offline portion of subsystem checkout procedure (procedure TS6).
Does procedure complete without errors?
Run through online portion of subsystem checkout procedure (procedure TS6).
Does procedure complete without errors?
SITUATIONS
I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
y y y y y y YN N
---- -
- -
y
y y y y y
N N
--
0
-- N - -
H
y
N N NN
If errors are occurring, are they restricted to one equipment?
- - -
Original problem does not recur. Could error have been random error external
to terminal subsystem?
y
Contact communication facility customer service personnel. Do they
acknowledge communication line problems?
Contact system CPU operating and/or technical support personnel. Do they
acknowledge system problems?
-- -
NY
-
NN
-- --
N -
y
N N-
-
X -
Inform terminal operator and site supervisor of communication Iine problems and
of approximate time until problems are cleared.
-
Inform terminal operator and site supervisor of system problems and of
approximate time until problems are cleared.
--
Turn off subsystem power per procedure TS2 and remove ac line cords for
equipments from outlets. Check subsystem cab Iing per procedure T$4.
-----
Go to DOLTs for equipment indicating fault and begin troubleshooting.
Check site power. If not OK, notify site electrician or power company
personnel as appropriate.
Call for assistance.
Note: After completing any repairs, verify that subsystem is operational by
rerunning procedure TS6, and check PMT tables, found earlier in this section,
for any required preventive maintenance and do PMTPs as required.
62957400 A
-
--
T
E
R
--
SEQUENCE
Check PMT tables and do any required PMPTs. Have terminal operator operate
terminal and observe to ensure no further errors occur.
Repeat procedure TS6. If offline still OK and online fails, notify
communication line supplier and/or CPU system personnel of suspected
communication I ine or system fault. Try to get verification before leaving
site; if unable to verify, call for assistance.
NY y
- -
ACTIONS
Go to DOLTs for CRT and begin troubleshooting.
-
N
- - -
X -
-
X -
-
--- - -
- - - -
-- - - - -
I 3 3 I
2 2 2 2
--- 2 -
-- 3 -- -- - - - - - I I - X- -
-
- - --- --- I - - - 4 4 4 3 - - X
6A-1
Procedure TS1 - Turning On Sullayste• Power
\)
Before turning on subsystem power, verify that required subsystem cables are
connected. These include the following:
•
Keyboard-to-display module cable
•
Keyboard display-to-communication system cable {data set or current loop)
•
Keyboard display-to-peripheral printer cable (if printer is included)
Also ensure that all of the units have input power cables plugged into an appropriate
site outlet; this includes modem if data set communication system is used.
Turn on subsystem power as follows:
At the site modem cabinet:
1) If modem is used and has a power on/off switch, turn modem power on.
Modems without power switches go on when plugged in.
At the printer {as per procedure NIPl or IMPl):
2) If printer is present, check that ac power cord is connected to site
power outlet.
3) Press power-on switch to turn printer power on.
4) If impact printer, wait 5 seconds after turning power on and then press
START/STOP switch/indicator to light indicator.
At the keyboard display {as per procedure CRTl ):
5) Check that keyboard display ac power cord is connected to site power
outlet.
6) Move CBl on rear panel of terminal to on position (up). Within about
30 seconds a blinking cursor should appear on the display screen in upper
left or lower left corner; if not, turn up INTENSITY control on display
front panel until cursor appears.
The preceding steps should turn power on at a properly operating subsystem. If
trouble occurs in applying power to a terminal equipment, refer to the DOLT for
that equipment and begin troubleshooting.
6A-2
62957400A
Procedure TS2 - Turning Off Subsystem Power
'
'
To turn off subsystem power, do the following:
At the printer (as per procedure NIP2 or IMP2):
1) If impact type printer, bring printer offline by pressing START/STOP
switch/indicator to extinguish indicator.
2) Move printer on/off switch to off position.
At the keyboard display (as per procedure CRT2):
3) Move CBl on terminal rear panel to off position (down).
The preceding steps turn power off for each equipment that may be present in a
terminal installation. If a modem is used for the communication line interface, it
also must be switched off or its power cord removed from the ac outlet. As noted
in the preceding steps, the individual equipment procedures also give a power-on
and a power-off procedure.
·
Procedure TS3 -
Removing/Replacing Subsystem Cables
NOTE
If keyboard cable is to be removed and checked,
reference procedure CRT 4 in next subsection for
keyboard cable removal.
To remove any other interconnecting cable within the subsystem at either or both
ends, proceed as follows:
1) Turn power off to subsystem cabinets interconnected by cable to be
removed (refer to appropriate power-off procedure).
2) Loosen both retaining screws on each connector to be removed.
3) Pull cable connector straight back and off of its mating connector on
equipment.
Replace any interconnecting cable within the subsystem at either or both ends as
follows:
4) Verify cable/connector is correct (refer to figure TSl ).
5) Slide cable connector straight onto its mating connector on equipment.
6) Tighten both retaining screws on each connector replaced.
7) Reapply power to appropriate equipments if required at this time (see
appropriate power-on procedures).
62957400 A
6A-3
Procedure TS4 - Checking Subsyste• Cables
To check any interconnecting cables within the subsystem proceed as follows:
1) Refer to procedure TS3 and do steps 1 through 3 to remove cables to be
inspected.
2) Carefully inspect connector pins on both ends for possible damage. If
damage is found on connector attached to cable, discard cable and
replace with a new one. If damage is found on equipment connector,
remove and replace either connector or panel mounting connector (depends
on parts spared for field replacement) per appropriate equipment procedure.
In either case, after correcting problem, replace cable per procedure TS3.
3) Use information from appropriate Keyboard Interface or Interface Connector
Pin Assignments tables (tables TS2, TS3, and TS4), or from current-loop
interface figures (figures TS2 and TS3) to do a pin-to-pin continuity check
using an ohmmeter or continuity-check test Iight.
4) If fault (short or open circuit) is found, repair if possible and replace
cable per procedure TS3. If fault is not repairable, replace cable per
procedure TS3.
Procedure TS5 - Re•oving/Replacing Subsyste• Equip•ents
To remove any equipment within the subsystem, proceed as follows:
1) Turn off subsystem power per procedure TS2.
2) Remove ac power cord from site outlet for equipment to be removed.
3) Remove input/output cables from equipment to be removed (procedure TS3).
4) Remove equipment from subsystem.
To reinstall any equipment in the subsystem, do the following:
5) Refer to installation procedures in appendix of associated Operators
Guide/Reference Manual (see preface}: uncrate and install equipment
per instructions.
6) After replacing any equipment, verify equipment and subsystem operation
by performing procedure T56.
6A-4
62957400A
Procedure TS& - Terminal Subsystem Checkout
The following procedure provides both offline and online checks for the terminal
subsystem.
NOTE
If, in doing any of the following checkout steps,
an error is found, use p e n c i I and paper to note
the error condition and the con d it ions under
which it occurred {keyboard control or rear panel
switch settings, etc.). Then try to complete the
entire checkout procedure if possible. This will
facilitate using the equipment DOLTs to troubleshoot errors, and will permit you to describe the
error and test conditions accurately if the error
cannot be rectified via the DOLTs and it becomes
necessary to call for assistance.
To check offline operation of the display terminal, proceed as follows:
1) Make a quick visual inspection of the input/output cable connections
between the terminal equipments, and check to ensure that the ac power
cords for each terminal equipment is plugged into an appropriate outlet.
2) Move TEST/NORMAL switch on rear panel of display terminal to TEST
position.
3) Move keyboard display ON LINE/LOCAL and FULL DUP/HALF DUP
switches to LOCAL and HAlF DUP positions.
4) Press PAGE key on the keyboard down to select page mode operation.
5) Ensure that 96/64 key on keyboard is up to select 96-character code set.
The on condition of a voltage level terminal can easily be noted in the following
step if the CO indicator lights as CB 1 is turned on. If the indicator fails to come
on, however, it does not necessarily indicate that the terminal does not have power
because either the indicator Iight may be burned out or the particular modem used
on the terminal may require an internal switch setting (CURRENT LOOP switch is
enabled) that blocks the action of the CO indicator (holds it off).
6) Move circuit breaker CB 1 on display terminal rear panel to up position
{on).
7) Wait about 30 seconds after performing preceding step and then adjust
INTENSITY control on display front panel until a raster appears on the
display screen {see figure TS4). Then turn INTENSITY control counterclockwise until only the cursor (blinking dash) is clearly visible in upper
left corner of screen,
62957400 A
6A-5
The following two steps are video quality checks.
8) Fill display screen with uppercase H pattern in the following manner:
a) Press SHIFT LOCK key on keyboard.
b) Press and hold REPEAT and H keys. Display begins automatically
filling with H characters. Near the end of each display line (73rd
character position), a beeper signal sounds to indicate the end of a
line is approaching. Display screen continues to fill with Hs until
REPEAT key is released. A full screen (24 display lines) is indicated
as the cursor moves from the lower right corner of the screen back to
the upper left corner; Hs will continue to be written over the previous
Hs. When this occurs, release the REPEAT key and then the H character
key.
c) Press SHIFT LOCK key on keyboard to release shift lock action.
9) Check the H display pattern entered in the preceding step to ensure that:
a) Nominal size is about 7.8 inches (198 mm) wide by 5 inches (127 mm)
high.
b) Characters are of about uniform height and width throughout the pattern.
c) Characters display clearly and crisply throughout the pattern.
d) Side, top, and bottom edges dre neither bowed out (barreled) nor
curved inward (pincushioned).
10) Clear display screen by pressing CLEAR key on keyboard.
11) Move FULL DUP/HALF DUP switch on keyboard to FULL DUP position
and then key in a few characters on the keyboard. Each character appears
on the screen as it is keyed in.
12) Move ON LINE/LOCAL switch on keyboard to ON LINE position and
then key in a few characters on the keyboard. Each character appears
on the screen as it is keyed in.
13) Move FULL DUP/HALF DUP switch on keyboard to HALF DUP position
and then key in a few characters on the keyboard. Two characters will
display as each key is pressed.
14) Return FULL DUP/HALF DUP switch on keyboard to FULL DUP position.
15) Press CONTROL and then G key; audible alarm will sound for about
200 ms.
6A-6
62957400A
.•
'
16) Manually check X/Y positioning function of the keyboard display in the
following manner:
a) Remove display cabinet hood (refer to procedure CRT5 later in this
section if necessary).
b) Ensure that internal X/Y POSITION switch is in enable position
(refer to figure CRT 1).
c) Press the following keys one at a time in sequence: ESC, 1, space bar,
and 7. Cursor moves to lower left corner of screen.
d) Press the following keys one at a time in sequence: ESC, 1, o, and 7.
Cursor moves to lower right corner of screen.
e) Press the following keys one at a time in sequence: ESC, 1, space bar,
and space bar. Cursor moves to upper left corner of screen.
f) Ensure X/Y POSITION switch is in normal operating position (enabled
or disabled) for this terminal installation, but do not replace cabinet
hood unti I checkout procedures are complete.
17) Press skip key (-)a few times; each time key is pressed, cursor moves
ahead a character position without affecting displayed data.
18) Press backspace key (-)a few times; each time key is pressed, cursor
moves back a character position without affecting displayed data.
19) Press CONTROL key and then U key on keyboard; cursor will move
ahead a character position without affecting displayed data.
20) Press Ll NE FEED key on keyboard; cursor will move down a line from
present position without affecting displayed data.
21) Press CARRIAGE RETURN key on keyboard; cursor will move to left
margin of display screen and may or may not line feed, depending on
setting of internal AUTO Ll NE FEED switch.
22) Press cursor-up key (f) on keyboard; cursor will move up a line from
present position without affecting displayed data.
23) Press CONTROL and Z keys on keyboard; cursor will move up a line
from present position without affecting displayed data.
24) Press RESET key on keyboard; cursor will reset to upper left corner of
display screen without affecting displayed data.
62957400 A
6A-7
25) Press skip key (-)a few times to move cursor off of left margin and
into a field of displayed characters, and then press the CONTROL and
V keys. The display line containing the cursor will clear from the character position immediately above the cursor to the end of the line; the
cursor does not move.
26) Press the CONTROL and W keys and then key in a few characters on the
keyboard; characters keyed in will blink on and off approximately twice
a second.
27) Press the CONTROL and N keys and then key in a few characters on the
keyboard; characters keyed in following the blink field of the preceding
step will display at reduced intensity.
28) Press the CONTROL and 0 keys and then key in a few characters on the
keyboard; characters keyed in following this entry will display at normal
character intensity and will not blink. Display line should now consist
of: 1) normal brightness characters, 2) a field of blinking characters,
3) a field of reduced intensity characters, and 4) a field of normal
brightness characters.
29) Press CONTROL and X keys; this key combination is the same as pressing
the CLEAR key. Display screen will clear of all displayed data and cursor
will reset to upper left corner of display screen.
30) Go to procedure CRT3, Checking the Keyboard, and perform the checks
I isted there.
31) By using appropriate numeric keys and CARRIAGE RETURN key (also
LINE FEED if display does not auto line feed on carriage return), enter
numbers 01 in first two character positions of first display Iine, numbers 02
in first two character positions of second display line, and so on until
numbers 24 are entered in first two character positions of 24th display I ine.
32) Press PAGE key on keyboard and release it to up position so that scroll
mode operation of display is now selected.
33) Press 96/64 key on keyboard to select 64-character ASCII subset.
34) Press and hold REPEAT key and any alpha character key on the keyboard
without actuating either SHIFT or SHIFT LOCK keys. Twenty-fourth
display line will fill with uppercase version of character key pressed.
As 24th I ine fills, it and each line above it scrolls up one line position
(line 01 scrolls off screen at top), cursor resets to left margin of the now
clear 24th line, and character being entered begins filling 24th line again.
This manner of scrolling continues as long as REPEAT and character keys
are held down. To stop process, release REPEAT key and then character key.
6A-8
62957400A
This completes the offline checks for the display terminal. The following are offline
checks for the peripheral printers that may be part of the terminal subsystem. If these
checks are to be run now 1 continue; if not 1 return keyboard display control switches
(on keyboard) and the rear panel TEST/NORMAL switch to their normal operating
positions.
35) Press PAGE key on keyboard down to reselect page mode operation of
display.
36) Press 96/64 key on keyboard to release it (up) and select 96-character
code set.
NOTE
The CLEAR key on the display keyboard should
be used to clear the display logic whenever the
PAGE switch is moved from its up (scroll mode)
to its down (page mode) position. Failure to do
so may result in page mode operation with a
random home position for the cursor (position
other than upper left corner of screen).
37) Press CLEAR key on keyboard to clear display and reset cursor to upper
Ieft corner of screen.
38) Move ON Ll NE/LOCAL switch on keyboard display to LOCAL position.
The following steps (39 through 44) relate to terminals configured with nonimpact
printer peripherals, while steps 45 through the end of the offline checks are for
terminals with impact printer peripherals. The non impact printer formats full print
I ines in SO-character I ines and then performs an automatic I ine feed and carriage
return. To feed a line and return the carriage before the end of a full display/print
Iine 1 press the Ll NE FEED key and then the CARRIAGE RETURN key on the keyboard
display.·
39) Push ON switch on control panel of non impact printer down to turn on
printer power.
During the following checks and during normal operation of the terminal, it is
essential that the keyboard display and printer baud rates match one another to
transfer data properly. The nonimpact printer has a maximum baud rate of 300.
Verify keyboard display baud rate settings by referring to figure CRT 1. The middle
position of the HIGH RATE/300/LOW RATE switch on the keyboard display is factory
preset to a data transfer rate of 300 baud.
62957400 A
6A-9
.40) Key to a few uppercase characters using SHIH or SHIH LOCK key, and
then release SHIFT or SHIFT LOCK key and key in a few lowercase characters. As each character is keyed, the character keyed displays on the
CRT screen and prints on the printer.
41) Press LINE FEED key and the CARRIAGE RETURN key. Both display and
printer perform a I ine feed and then a carriage return operation.
42) Repeat steps 40 and 41 a few times to ensure printer prints, spaces, I ine
feeds and carriage returns properly.
43) Press the backspace key (-)on the keyboard display to ensure printer
backspaces properly.
44) Key in a few characters on the keyboard display, and then press printer
LF (line feed) and CR (carriage return) keys to ensure they operate
properly. If printer fails to perform correctly in any of the preceding
steps or if it does not print properly, turn to the Nonimpact Printer
portion (NIP) of this section and troubleshoot the printer. This completes
offline testing of a terminal using a nonimpact printer peripheral; go to
the online checkout procedures to complete checkout of the terminal
subsystem.
Steps 45 through 57 following are only for terminals configured with an impact printer
peripheral. The impact printer normally formats print I ines to correspond with its
132-character print buffer. That is, it prints a I ine only after its 132-character
buffer is filled or after it receives an acceptable printer control code (carriage
return, line feed, form feed, or vertical tabulation). In the case of either a full
print buffer or a carriage return control code, the printer prints out the contents
of the print buffer and does a carriage return. In the case of the other control codes,
the printer prints out the contents of the print buffer, does a carriage return, and
then does the action indicated by the particular control code used (line feed, vertical
tabulation, or form feed). The best way to match the printer format to the display
format therefore is to terminate a display line with two control key inputs on the
keyboard - LINE FEED and CARRIAGE RETURN, form feed and CARRIAGE RETURN,
or vertical tabulation and CARRIAGE RETURN for example.
To check operation of the impact printer, perform the following:
45) Verify that ac power cord is plugged into appropriate power outlet, and
that input/output cable between printer and display terminal is securely
connected.
During the following checks and during normal operation of the terminal, it is
essential that the keyboard display and printer baud rates match one another to ·
transfer data properly. Refer to figures CRTl and IMP7 and procedure IMPS later
in this section to ensure proper settings of baud rate switches in both display and
printer. While checking baud rate switch settings, also ensure that settings of
printer and display parity btt selection match.
6A-10
62957400 A
46) Verify that paper, ribbon and format tape are all properly installed in
printer (procedures IMP3, IMP4 and IMPS, respectively).
47) Move power ON/OFF rocker switch on front panel to ON position.
NOTE
If cabinet or front access panel is removed,
printer will only operate with the interlock
switch pulled up (interlock switch is white button
just behind control panel). Also note that FORM
FEED and Test Print switches only function when
printer is offline, that is when START/ S T 0 P
indicator on control panel is extinguished.
48) Activate Test Print switch, which may be located either on control
panel or on circuit card 1A02 inside printer cabinet. If switch is not
on control panel, identify its location via figure IMP6 later in this
section. When switch is activated, printer will print alternating Bs and
blanks across a full horizonta I print I ine of 132 characters, do a I ine
feed, and print another I ine of Bs and blanks. This process continues
until the Test Print switch is pressed again. Allow several lines to print
and then stop test print process (see figure TS5).
CAUTION
Do not p e r m i t the printer to p r i n t in the preceding manner for more than a few minutes
because excessive printing of this type may
overheat and damage the print solenoids.
49) Use the printed pattern from the preceding step to check the vertical
and horizontal alignment of the characters and print lines and columns.
If any alignment problems are encountered, go to sheet 3 of table IMPl,
the Diagnostic Decision Logic Table (DDLT) for the Impact Printer and
begin troubleshooting the printer.
CAUTION
If forms runaway occurs when FORM FEED switch
is tested, stop runaway by moving ON/OFF
power switch to OFF position; go to impact
printer troubleshooting procedures (IM Pl,
sheet 1) to diagnose cause of runaway.
62957400 A
6A-11
50) Press FORM FEED switch. Forms should advance to top-of-forms posit:on;
if not, see procedure IMP3.
51) Press START/STOP switch on printer control panel; indicator in switch
I ights to indicate printer is ready to print.
52) Key in a few uppercase characters on the keyboard display, and then
key in a few lowercase characters.
53) Press LINE FEED and then CARRIAGE RETURN keys on keyboard display.
As keys are pressed, printer wi II print out characters entered on keyboard
in preceding step, and when printing is complete, the printer will perform
the Iine feed and carriage return operations.
54) Repeat steps 52 and 53 a few times to ensure printer prints, spaces, line
feeds, and carriage returns properly.
55) Press CONTROL and K keys on the keyboard display; printer will vertical
tab if format tape in printer has tab stops or will do a form feed.
56) Press CONTROL and L keys on the keyboard display; printer will do a
form feed operation and stop at top of next form. If printer fails to
perform correctly in any of the preceding steps or if it does not print
properly, turn to the impact printer portion (IMP) of this section and
troubleshoot the printer. This completes offline testing of a terminal
using an impact printer peripheral; go to Online Checkout procedures,
following, to complete checkout of the terminal subsystem.
57) If troubleshooting of the impact printer is not required, close rear access
panel and front access panels, if removed or opened during checkout
precedures; ensure that interlock switch is down before replacing front
access panel.
This completes offline checkout procedures for the impact printer and for the terminal
subsystem. If terminal is being returned to operation or if online checks are to be
performed at this time, leave printer controls as they are. If terminal is being shut
down or impact printer will not be used for a time, press the START/STOP switch on
the printer control panel to extinguish the indicator in the switch. If returning to
on I ine operation at this time, be sure to return all of the keyboard display controls,
including rear panel TEST/NORMAL switch, to the norma I operating positions.
To check out the on I ine operation of the terminal subsystem, perform the following
steps.
58) Ensure power to all terminal equipments is off: circuit breaker CBl at
rear of display terminal is down and printer power switch is off.
59) Moke a quick visual inspection of the input/output cable connections
between the terminal equipments, and check to ensure that the ac power
cords for each terminal equipment is plugged into an appropriate outlet.
6A-12
62957400 A
Prior to doing step 60, remove modem power.
60) Connect display terminal to the communication facility (modem or current
loop). Turn on power for the communication facility (switch on loop
battery for current loop terminals or switch or plug into ac outlet on
modem).
61) Move FULL DUP/HALF DUP switch on keyboard display to normal operating position for this terminal installation.
62) Move TEST/NORMAL switch on keyboard display to NORMAL.
63) Ensure ON LINE/LOCAL switch on keyboard display is in ON LINE,
and baud rate and parity select switches on keyboard are set to positions
appropriate for this system installation.
64) Ensure PAGE switch on keyboard display is in desired operating position:
switch down selects page mode and switch up selects scroll mode.
65) Ensure 96/64 switch on keyboard display is in desired position. Down
selects 64-character code set; up selects 96-character code set.
66) Move circuit breaker CB1 on rear panel of keyboard display up to
turn on terminal power.
67) Turn on printer power: press nonimpact printer ON switch down, or
move impact printer ON/OFF rocker switch to ON position and press
START/STOP switch to I ight indicator in switch.
68) Wait 30 seconds after performing two preceding steps, adjust INTENSITY
knob for proper cursor brightness, and press CLEAR key. If operating in
scroll mode, cursor is located at left margin of line 24; if page mode,
cursor is located in upper left corner of display screen.
69) On the keyboard of the display terminal, key in a system log-in or
sign-in message and verify that system responds correctly. This completes
online checkout of the terminal subsystem.
70) Key in the system log-out message on the keyboard, and turn terminal
equipment off if they are not to be used shortly. If terminal fails to
perform any of the preceding steps correctly, return to the beginning
of the DOLTs (table TSl) and begin troubleshooting procedures, using
the notes taken during this procedure as a guide.
71) Replace display cabinet hood and any printer panels that may have been
removed during checkout procedures.
62957400 A
6A-13
DATAS:J
CABLE
TO DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
~
)
PRINTER CABLE
(50FT MAX)
019~9
NOTE: DATA SET AND PERIPHERAL CABLES USE ITT CANNON DBC-25P CONNECTORS ON EACH END.
STANDARD TERMINAL CABLE PART NUMBERS (CDC) ARE: 61406100 (10.5 FT), 61406101 (20.5 FT),
61406102 (30FT), 61406103 (40FT), AND 61406104 (50FT). HZ-SHIELDED TERMINAL CABLE PART
NUMBERS (CDC) ARE: 61406110 (10.5 FT), 61406111 (20.5 FT), 61406112 (30FT), 61406113 (40FT), AND
61406114 (50FT).
Figure TSl, Terminal Cabling
6A-14
62957400 A
DATA SET
CONNECTOR
SEND
CONTACTS
NC
I
I PIN 3
~~------~~~
1
I
NO
I
I
I
I
I
I
SYSTEM
BAT;·ERY
jq-_j
RECEIVE
COIL
I PIN 7
r~>----<
I
I
I
I PIN 2
~--~~--~~>--<
H
VOLTAGE INTERFACE
TRANSMIT
CIRCUIT
CURRENT
LIMITER
J
02010
DISTANT STATION
DISPLAY TERMINAL
Figure TS2. Data Set Connector Pin Assignments for Unipolar, Full-Duplex,
Current loop Communication Channel*
DATA SET
CONNECTOR
I
I
PIN 3
~~------~~~
c
RECEIVE
CIRCUIT
oL
I
I
SEND
CONTACTS
VOLTAGE INTERFACE
~B
A
J
I
I
I
I
I
M
I
I PIN
7
E
!~>----< ~
RECEIVE
COIL
I PIN 2
~--------~~>--<
H
,..,F
+
CURRENT LOOP
-
RECEIVE
CIRCUIT
+
CURRENT LOOP
-
TRANSMIT
CIRCUIT
~
RMINAL
OGIC
'_;N
A
L
G
1p
J
:::K
VOLTAGE INTERFACE
TRANSMIT
CIRCUIT
J
02011
DISTANT STATION
DISPLAY TERMINAL
figure TS3. Data Set Connector Pin Assignments for Unipolar, Half-Duplex,
Current loop Communication Channel*
*Current loop circuits are only available in terminals with that feature installed.
System battery is 24 V de and current limiters are selected for 20-mA flow.
62957400 A
6A-15
02057
Figure TS4. Raster Display
6A-16
62957400 A
/
g;
"'()
OJ
~
0
0
)>
-n
(Q
c..,
CD
-I
V)
OJ
-"
--"
.,3c
0
..,
:;·
CD
..,
-I
CD
Cll
:::p
::s
c
..,
CD
::s
~
.....I
.......
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BEIBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BEIBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBEI
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
EtBBB
BBBll
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBI:l
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBft
BBBB
BBBB
EtBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBlt
BBBB
i)BBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
EtBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBEtll
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBllB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBllB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
EtBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
ftBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBBB
BBEIB
BBBB
BBI'
m
n
0
p
q
?
a
'
s
....,
@
A
B
c
D
E
F
G
H
R
s
T
u
v
w
X
y
z
[
2
I
0
b
c
d
e
u
v
w
X
J
K
L
\
]
1\
These characters and symbols should appear on display screen just as they
are keyed in.
7) Remove cabinet hood of display assembly per procedure CRT5.
8) Set Internal Test switch on control logic PC board to enable position
(refer to figure CRT 1).
9) Press LINE FEED and then CARRIAGE RETURN keys on keyboard to move
cursor to the beginning of a new line.
10) Key in the following control codes in sequence. Use the CONTROL key
plus alpha key for the symbol I isted, except when a specific control key
name or symbol is listed. In these latter cases, the key entry only (without
CONTROL) is sufficient. Positioning of the SHIFT or SHIFT LOCK keys
during these entries has no effect.
B
@
A
F
G
L
CARRIAGE RETURN
N
R
s
T
X
y
J
c
D
E
LINE FEED
K
0
p
Q
u
v
w
ESC
M
H
ETX
RUBOUT
Compare the symbols generated for these entries with the control code
symbols shown in figure CRT2.
11) Check action of REPEAT key by pressing and holding it and then any
character key; character entry should repeat until REPEAT key is
released.
62957400A
68-7
12) Return Internal Test switch todisable position; refer to figure CRTl for
switch location if necessary.
13) Return all keyboard control switches to their normal operating positions.
14) If keyboard fails on any of the preceding tests, replace keyboard per
procedure CRT4. Then rerun this procedure and go to table CRT1 or to
procedure TS6, depending on which one directed you to this procedure.
Procedure CRT4 - · Replacing the Keyboard
To replace the display terminal keyboard, do the following:
1) Turn terminal power off per procedure CRT1.
2) If keyboard is mounted under front edge of display assembly, I ift lower
front edge of display just enough to slide keyboard out from under it.
CAUTION
If necessary to remove keyboard by lifting display a s s e m b I y be c a r e f u I not to a I I o w the
assembly to tip over backwards.
3) Disconnect keyboard display interconnecting cable per procedure TS3.
4) Turn keyboard assembly over and remove six screws holding keyboard
cover to keyboard chassis (see figure CRT3).
5) Return keyboard to upright position and Iift off cover (see figure CRT3).
6) Remove cable connector from edge of keyboard PC board.
7) Remove two screws that hold PC board and mask to chassis on one end,
and loosen two screws on other slotted end. lift PC board and mask out
of chassis.
8) Install new keyboard by sliding it under two screws sti II in chassis and
position it properly over remaining two mounting-screw holes.
9) Insert two screws removed in step 7 and tighten all four screws to secure
PC board and mask to chassis •
10) Attach connector to PC board.
68-8
62957400A
11) Place cover over assembly, positioning cover so that keys do not bind.
12) Hold cover in place, turn assembly over and insert six screws in bottom
of chassis. Tighten screws to secure chassis to cover.
13) Complete installation of new keyboard by doing steps 2 and 3 in reverse
action and sequence.
14) Check operation of replacement keyboard per procedure CRT3. Whether
or not replacement keyboard corrects malfunctions, return to DOLT for
further tests or directions.
Procedure CRTS -
Removing the Display Cabinet Hood
To remove the display cabinet hood, proceed as follows:
WARNING
Rough handling or abuse of the display assembly
can cause the crt to implode with t rem end o us
force, thereby presenting a hazard to persons in
the immediate area. Always exercise care when
working on or near the crt. Also be careful not
to nick or scratch the crt since this can weaken
it. Wear safety goggles and heavy gloves when
handling the crt.
WARNING
With the cabinet hood removed and power on,
shock hazards exist in the areas of the highvoltage transformer, the crt anode lead, and
portions of the monitor PC board. Try to avoid
t o u c h i n g areas of the c r t b e yo n d the yoke
ass em b I y and keep tools away from the highvoltage transformer and crt unless terminal power
is off and the crt has been discharged.
1) Remove two hood-retaining screws at rear of cabinet (figure CRT4).
2) Move cabinet hood slightly back and then lift up and off cabinet base.
To install cabinet hood, do the following:
3) Position cabinet hood on track cit rear of base and slide hood forward
into place.
4) Secure hood to base with two retaining screws at rear of cabinet.
62957400 A
68-9
Procedure CRT& - Check/Replace Rear Panel Components
The panel on the rear of the display terminal carries the peripheral connector, the
data set connector, the ac line cord, the TEST/NORMAL switch, the RFI line filter
(internally), and circuit breaker CB1 (terminal on/off switch). Of these components,
the RFI Iine filter and CB 1 are replaceable items. The following procedure describes
how to troubleshoot these two items and how to replace them if necessary. Normally,
the line filter or CB 1 is only suspect for a malfunction if either CB 1 trips repeatedly
upon successive attempts to set it, or display terminal does not appear to have power
(even through CB 1 remains set when switched on).
To check the line filter and CB1, do the following:
1) Set multi meter for measuring ac input power and set range switch for
measuring anticipated voltage (120 or 220/240 V ac).
2) Withdraw display terminal power plug slightly from outlet so that voltage
can be checked directly at that point. Check line voltage by placing
one probe of meter on hot prong of plug and by placing other probe of
meter on neutral prong of plug. Readings should be from 104 to 127 V ac
for a 120-V terminal, from 195 to 246 V ac for a 220/240-V low-line terminal, and from 216 to 268 V ac for a 220/240-V normal-line terminal.
If voltage reading is not within proper range, notify power company of
problem; if readings are within tolerance, continue with following steps.
3) Remove display terminal hood per procedure CRT5.
4) If circuit breaker CBl will not remain set when turned on (up), go to
step 8 of this procedure; if CB1 remains set when turned on, continue
with the following steps.
5) Leaving display terminal power on, locate connector CP2/CJ2 and
carefully move it to a position so that voltage readings can be taken
from the back side of CJ2 (see figures CRT5 and CRT 6).
WARNING
If LOW/NORMAL connector in following step
requires correction, be sure to turn display terminal power off and unplug line cord from outlet
before attempting to alter the connection. Failure to u n pI u g the Iine cord presents a shock
hazard that could result in serious injury or death.
6) On 220/240-V display terminals, check to ensure that connection of
neutral line is to the proper LOW or NORty\AL connector going to CJ2.
The LOW connector is used on display terminals having a Iine voltage
input in the 195 to 246 V ac range, and the NORMAL connector is used
for display terminals having a line voltage input in the 216 to 268 V ac
range (see figure CRT6).
6B-10
62957400A
7) Leaving multimeter with settings used for readings in step 2, make the
appropriate following voltage measurement(s) at the rear of CJ2. If
power is off, turn power on per procedure CRT 1.
120-V Terminals
220-V Terminals
240-V Terminals
CJ2-l to CJ2-2
CJ2-l to CJ2-4
CJ2-l to CJ2-6
If proper voltage is measured at CJ2, rear panel assembly is OK; return
to DDLT for further tests or directions. If no voltage is measured at CJ2,
continue procedure by doing the following steps.
8) Ensure that display terminal power is off (procedure CRT2) and unplug
ac I ine cord from outlet.
CAUTION
If display terminal uses a modem communication
facility interface, ensure that modem power is
off and/or modem ac I ine cord is u n pI u g g e d
before performing the following step. Peripheral
printer power should also be off i.f printer is part
of display term in a I configuration (see procedure T 52 if necessary).
9) Remove data set cable and peripheral equipment cable (if present) from
display terminal rear panel per procedure TS3.
10) Disconnect CJ2/CP2, which connects ac entry panel to power transformer
primary (see figure CRT5),
11) Disconnect CJ 1/CPl from inside of rear panel (just behind the external
data set and peripheral connectors on rear panel).
12) Remove six rear-panel retaining screws (see figure CRT6), and withdraw
rear panel from display chassis just far enough to remove ground wire
connections on back side of rear panel,
13) Remove ground wires from E2, E3, and E4 inside of terminal rear panel,
just above data set and peripheral connectors.
14) Remove entire rear panel assembly from display chassis,
15) Remove ac entry panel cover by removing two retaining screws near
center of cover (see figure CRT 6) and Iifting cover off rear panel assembly.
62957400 A
6B-11
16) Use ohmmeter on a low-resistance setting (RXl) and on a higher resistance
setting (RX100) to make the following checks on the RFI line filter (Fll),
Attach Probe To
Check with 2nd Probe
Reading
Fll-1
Fll-4
Fll-2
FL1-3
FL1-5
Continuity (0 ohm)
No continuity
No continuity
No continuity
FL1-3
FL1-5
Fll-2
Continuity (0 ohm)
No continuity
If the preceding readings cannot be obtained, the line filter is faulty and
must be replaced; however, continue with the following steps to check
the circuit breaker (CB1) at this time.
17) Use ohmmeter to check continuity of CB1 across CB1-1 and CB1-2 terminals (on back of circuit breaker). Make this check with circuit breaker
switched to off position to ensure that no continuity exists when CB1 if
off; then make check with CB1 on to ensure that continuity (0 ohm) exists
when CB1 is on. If both of these readings cannot be obtained, CB1
requires replacement.
Steps 18 through 21, following, describe how to replace CB1, and following these
steps are instructions for replacing line filter Fll. To remove CB1, proceed as follows:
18) Remove wires from CB1-2 and CB1-1; wire on CB1-1 comes from Fll-4,
while wire on CB1-2 comes from TB 1-1.
19) Remove two screws (on outside of rear panel) that hold CB1 to rear panel,
and then remove CB 1 from rear panel .
To install CB1, do the following:
20) Position CB1 in rear panel from inside so that the mounting holes align
with mounting holes in rear panel, and then secure CB1 to rear panel
with two screws removed in step 19.
21) Connect wire from FL 1-4 to terminal CB 1-1, and then connect wire from
TB1-1 to terminal CBl-2 (see figure CRT6).
To remove line filter Fll, do the following:
22) Remove two hex standoffs (for ac entry panel cover) that secure FL 1 to
rear panel.
23) Remove wire running from Fll-4 to CB1-1 by removing connector on
term ina I CB 1- 1 •
24) Unsolder wires from Fll-1, -2, -3, -4, and -5, and then remove Fll
from rear panel assembly.
68-12
62957400 A
To install line filter FL1, do the following:
25) On 120-V ac terminals make the following solder connections:
•
Connect black (hot) ac input wire to Fll-1
•
Connect white (neutral) ac input wire to Fll-3
•
Connect green (chassis ground) wire from ground lug E1 to Fll-2
•
Connect short yellow wire, removed in steps 23 and 24, to Fll-4,
and then connect other end (fast-on connector) to CB 1-1
•
Connect yellow wire from CJ2-2 to Fll-5
On 220/240-V ac terminals make the following solder connections:
•
Connect brown (hot) ac input wire to Fll-1
•
Connect blue (neutral) ac input wire to Fll-3
•
Connect green/yellow (chassis ground) wire from ground lug E1 to
Fll-2
•
Connect short yellow wire, removed in steps 23 and 24, to Fll-4,
and then connect other end (fast-on connector) to CB 1-1
•
Connect yellow wire from CJ2 LOW/NORMAL connector to FL 1-5
26) Position line filter FL 1 on rear panel mounting lugs and secure with hex
standoffs.
To reinstall rear panel assembly in display chassis, do the following:
27) Replace ac entry panel cover and secure with two retaining screws.
28) Position rear panel assembly near rear of display chassis so that ground
wires, removed in step 13, can be fastened to lugs E2, E3, and E4 with
hex retaining nuts.
29) Position rear panel assembly so that it can be secured with six retaining
screws removed in step 12, secure panel with screws, and then reconnect
CJ 1/C P1 (refer to step 11 ) •
30) Reconnect CJ2/CP2 connector from rear panel to power transformer
primary.
31) Reconnect display terminal signal cables per procedure TS3, and then
return to DDLT to determine if there are any further tests or directions
to be done before replacing cabinet hood and turning display terminal
power on per procedure TS1.
62957400 A
68-13
Procedure CRT7 - Check/Replace Power Supply Assembly
This procedure describes how to check power supply operation and how to replace
either faulty power supply components or the entire power supply assembly.
Procedure CRT 6 should be done prior to this one to ensure that the proper ac input
to the power supply is available via connector CJ2/CP2. Also, before beginning
this procedure, be sure there is sufficient space available for removing the monitor
from the display chassis and setting it beside the display chassis while the two units
remain interconnected.
To check power supply operation, do the following:
1) Turn power off per procedure CRT2 and unplug ac line cord from outlet.
2) Remove display terminal cabinet hood per procedure CRT5.
3) Discharge crt {see step 2 of procedure CRT13 if necessary).
4) Remove two upper screws holding monitor chassis to bezel of display
chassis.
5) Loosen two lower screws holding monitor chassis to bezel of display chassis
but do not remove these two screws. They should be just loose enough to
slip lower front legs of monitor chassis up and off of them later in this
procedure (refer to figure CRT7).
6) Remove two hex screws from rear two chassis legs of monitor assembly,
and ensure that any ground wires attached to the monitor chassis at either
of these two points are free of the display chassis.
Before doing next step, ensure there is enough room to set monitor chassis on bench
or desktop just to left {side away from logic module) of display chassis base.
WARNING
Use extreme care in touching or hand I in g the
.monitor chassis be c a use rough hand I i n g can
cause the crt to implode with tremendous force,
which could result in serious injury. Do not
nick or scratch glass or subject crt to undue force
while handling display assembly. Wear protective gloves and safety go gg I e s during this next
step as a precaution.
68-14
• 62957400 A
7) Grasp display assembly by the chassis support brackets, lift it up and
back, and pivot it slightly clockwise. Place it on a surface just to the
left of display chassis (side away from logic module assembly). As this
is being done, check to ensure that interconnecting cables are free enough
to enable monitor to clear display chassis without stress on cables or
component parts of either assembly.
8) Visually check both assemblies to ensure that no interconnecting cabling
has pulled loose during the preceding step.
9) Plug ac power cord into appropriate outlet and turn display terminal power
on per procedure CRT 1.
10) Using a multimeter set to measure about 25 to 50 V ac and, with one lead
connected to a good ground (E2, E3, or E4 on rear panel), check for ac
voltage readings at J4 and J5 on power supply PC board and at ac inputs
to CR1 (see figure CRT8). Reading should be about 20 V ac (RMS) each
at J4 and J5 and about 8.6 V ac (RMS) at each CR1 input.
11) If any of the check points in the preceding step fail to indicate an ac
voltage, turn display terminal power off (procedure CRT2), remove
connector from any one of the test points that failed to show a reading,
connect meter Iead to that connector, and then, reapply power (procedure CRTl) to see if reading is now obtainable. If no ac reading can be
obtained in this manner, power transformer is faulty and requires replacement; go to step 13 of this procedure.
If measurements in step 10 indicated ac voltage was present or if the check
in this step gives an ac re6ding, turn terminal power off (procedure CRT2),
disconnect meter lead from tested connector, return connector to proper
location on power supply, turn terminal power back on (procedure CRTl),
and continue with next step.
12) Check and record voltage readings at connector HJ2/HP2 per I isting for
that connector on figure CRT8; make each check twice, once with HP2/
HJ2 connected and once at HJ2 on power supply PC board with HP2
removed from HJ2. Notice that there are both ac and de, and negative
and positive outputs from this connector; be sure to set meter properly for
output to be measured.
The following I ists possible results from these two readings, and indicates
the possible actions for each result.
a) All outputs measure as indicated in figure CRT8; return to DOLT for
further tests or directions.
b) 19 V ac measures too high or too low during both checks; replace
power supply transformer.
62957400 A
6B-15
c) 19 V ac is low with HP2/HJ2 connected and OK with HP2 removed;
possible short in load (check circuits beyond HP2 connector).
d) -12, +12, or +5 V de is too high with or without HP2/HJ2 connected;
replace power supply PC board.
e) -12, + 12, or +5 V de is low with HP2/HJ2 connected and OK with
HP2 removed; troubleshoot for shorts in load (circuits beyond HP2).
f) -12, or +12 V de has no output or low output with or without HP2/HJ2
connected; replace power supply PC board.
g) +5 V de has no output or low output with or without HP2/HJ2
connected; replace power supply PC board first, and if fault is not
corrected, replace CR1.
h) +23 V de too high with or without HP2/HJ2 connected; replace power
supply transformer.
i) +23 V de low with HJ2/HP2 connected and OK with HP2 removed;
check for short in load (circuits beyond connector HP2).
j) +23 V de low or no output with or without HP2/HJ2 connected; replace
power supply PC board first, and if fault is not corrected, replace
power supply transformer.
k) A power supply fault exists, but none of the above actions correct it;
replace power supply assembly.
To remove the power transformer from the display assembly chassis, do the following:
13) Power-off terminal per procedure CRT2 and remove ac power plug from
site outlet.
14) Tag wires from power transformer to J3, J4, and J5 on power supply
PC board, and tag wires from power transformer to AC terminals on CR1.
Remove the wires just tagged from their respective connectors.
15} Disconnect CJ2/CP2 and HJ2/HP2 {see figure CRT8).
16) Remove hex nut holding transformer safety ground wire to display chassis
and then remove ground wire from lug.
17) Remove four hex nuts holding power transformer to power supply chassis,
and remove power transformer.
To install power transformer in the display assembly chassis, do the following:
18) Position power transformer over mounting lugs on power supply chassis.
See figure CRT8 for proper transformer positioning.
19) Do steps 14 through 17 preceding in reverse order and sequence of action.
If new transformer, use tagged wires of old one as a guide.
68-16
62957400 A
To remove rectifier CR1 from the power supply assembly, do the following:
I
I
I
20) Power-off terminal per procedure CRT2 and remove ac power plug from
site out Iet.
21) Tag wires connecting to CR 1 for later identification and then remove
wires from CR1.
22) Remove two hex nuts holding CR1 to power supply chassis, and then
remove CR1 from chassis.
To install CR1, do the following:
23) Apply thermal compound to bottom of CR 1 mounting bracket and to power
supply chassis where CR1 mounts.
24) Position CR1 on power supply chassis mounting lugs and secure CR 1 with
two hex nuts removed in step 22.
25) Connect wires to CR1 that were removed in step 21, preceding.
To remove power supply PC board, do the following:
26) Turn off terminal power per procedure CRT2 and remove ac plug from
out I et.
27) Tag wires going to connectors J3, J4, J5, and J6 on power supply PC
board, and then remove these wires from board connectors.
28) Remove four screws (one at each corner of PC board) holding power
supply PC board to power supply chassis, and then remove the PC board.
To install power supply PC board, do the following:
29) Position power supply PC board over four mounting holes in power supply
chassis as shown in figure CRT8, and then secure PC board to chassis with
four screws removed in step 28, preceding.
30) Replace wires removed in step 27, preceding.
To remove power supply assembly, proceed as follows:
31) Turn off term ina I power per procedure CRT2 and remove ac pi ug from
outlet.
32) Remove hex nut that secures power transformer safety ground wire, and
then remove ground wire.
33) Disconnect connectors CJ2/CP2 and HJ2/HP2 (see figure CRT8).
34) Remove four hex nuts that secure power supply chassis cabinet base: one
screw is in front and one screw is behind the power supply transformer,
and one screw is at each corner of the chassis opposite the transformer.
35) Lift power supply assembly up and out of display cabinet base.
62957400 A
6B-17
To install the power supply assembly, do the following:
36) Position power supply assembly over mounting lugs in display cabinet
base, set assembly down on lugs, and then secure assembly in place with
four hex nuts removed in step 34, preceding.
37) Reconnect connectors CJ2/CP2 and HJ2/HP2, and then connect and
secure safety ground wire between power transformer and display chassis
with hex nut.
38) Return to beginning of this procedure and repeat appropriate steps for
testing power supply operation before returning to the DOLTs for further
tests or directions.
To install the monitor assembly, do the following:
39) Do steps 4 through 7 of this procedure in reverse order and sequence of
action to install the monitor assembly on the display chassis base. Ensure
that terminal power is off (procedure CRT2) and ac I ine cord is unplugged
before doing these steps.
Procedure CRTB - Check/Replace 15-V Regulator Components
This procedure describes how to check operation of the 15-V de regulator, and how
to replace faulty components if necessary. This procedure should normally not be
done without first doing procedures CRT 6 (Check/Replace Rear Panel Components)
and CRT? (Check/Replace Power Supply Assembly).
To check operation of the 15-V de regulator, do the following:
NOTE
Some regulators have an input fuse on them (see
figure CRTlO). If regulator has no output, as
determined during the following procedure, check
fuse before replacing any other components •
1) Remove cabinet hood per procedure CRT5.
2) If terminal power is not already on, turn power on per procedure CRT1.
3) Set multi meter for measuring + 15 volts de.
4) Test output of regulator by measuring voltage on pins 8 and 22 of BP4
with respect to pin 3 (ground) of BP4 (see figure CRT9), and record the
voltages measured.
6B-18
62957400 A
5) Turn terminal power off per procedure CRT2.
(
6) Disconnect connector BP5 (from the 15-V regulator to the monitor PC
board via BP4), turn terminal power back on per procedure CRT1, and
then measure and record outputs from BP5-1 and BP5-3 with respect to
BP5-2 (ground). Refer to figures CRT9 and CRT10.
7) Readings in both steps 4 and 6 should be +15 ±0.75 V de. If readings
are OK, return to the DDLTs for further tests or directions; if not, examine
the following I ist and take the appropriate action.
a) If both readings are too high, check/replace diodes or replace pass
transistor and regulator circuits (see following steps of this procedure).
b) If reading is low in step 4, and OK in step 6, check for shorts in load
(monitor PC board), or replace pass transistor and regulator circuits
(see following steps in this procedure).
c) If readings are too low in both steps 4 and 6, replace pass transistor
and regulator circuits (see following steps of this procedure).
If any of the actions in the preceding list are taken, return to steps 2
through 7 of this procedure to retest regulator operation after completing
the action and before returning to the DDLTs for further instructions.
To check regulator diodes, proceed as follows:
8) Turn terminal power off per procedure CRT2 and remove ac plug from
outlet.
9) Set ohmmeter for making resistance checks on RX1 scale.
It may be necessary to remove the regulator assembly to make the following resistance
checks. If so, skip to step 13 to remove the regulator and then return to complete
the following checks.
10) Measure the forward resistance of each diode by placing the + meter lead
on the anode of the diode and the - meter lead on the cathode (banded
end of diode; see figure CRT10). The resistance measured in this direction
should be about 1 or 2 ohms. If higher resistance is measured, diode
should be replaced.
11) Set ohmmeter for making high resistance checks (RX1 000 scale).
(
12) Measure the reverse resistance of each diode by placing the- meter lead
on the anode of the diode and the +meter lead on the cathode (banded
end of diode; see figure CRT10). The resistance measured in this direction
should be greater than 1 kilohm. If not, diode should be replaced. If
diode checks are 0 K, skip to steps of this procedure for removing and
replacing the pass transistor and regulator circuits. If diode checks are
not OK, proceed with the following steps for removing and replacing
a diode.
62957400 A
68-19
To remove regulator assembly and replace faulty diode, do the following:
13) Ensure that terminal power is off and ac plug is removed from outlet (see
step 8, preceding).
14) Disconnect BP2, from power supply to regulator, and BPS, from regulator
to monitor PC board (see figure CRT9).
15) Remove two screws securing regulator heat sink to monitor chassis, and
withdraw regulator assembly from rear of monitor chassis.
16) Place heat sink clips around diode to be removed to protect adjacent
components from heat damage.
17) Unsolder faulty diode and remove from circuit.
18) Check new diode per steps 9 through 12, preceding, before installing
it in circuit.
19) Solder new diode in circuit using heat sink clips to protect both the new
diode and the adjacent components from heat damage.
20) Recheck all diodes per steps 9 through 12, preceding, to ensure none
have been damaged during soldering.
21) Install regulator assembly in monitor chassis by performing steps 14 and
15 in reverse order and sequence of action.
To remove and replace pass transistor and regulator circuits, do the following:
22) Ensure that terminal power is off and ac line cord removed from outlet
(see step 8, preceding).
23) Remove the two screws holding each of the circuits to the regulator heat
sink, and then, pull each circuit out of its respective socket.
24) Clean surface of heat sink where circuits make contact with it, ensure
that old mica insulating washers do not remain stuck to heat sink, and
then apply thermal compound (CDC 51003962) to area of heat sink where
·
circuits are mounted.
25) Remove mica insulating washers from new circuits and apply thermal
compound to back side of each circuit. Then, install mica washer on
each circuit.
26) Install circuits in heat sink socket and secure in place with screws
(2 each) removed in step 23. When installing new circuits, ensure that
pass transistor is installed in upper socket and regulator circuit in lower
socket (refer to figure CRT9).
27) After replacing circuits, retest regulator operation per steps 2 through 7
of this procedure before returning to the DD LT s for further direct ions.
68-20
62957400 A
)
Procedure CRT9 -
Measuring Voltages on Monitor PC Board
This procedure describes how to measure +15, +5, -190, +45, and +465 V de on
the monitor PC board. This procedure should follow procedure CRT8 since all of
the voltages on the monitor PC board are derived from the +15-V de output of the
regulator circuit. Refer to figure CRT11 to locate the points on the PC board for
making the following measurements.
To measure +5 and +15 V de on the monitor PC board, do the following:
1) Set voltmeter to measure + 15 V de.
2) Remove display cabinet hood per procedure CRT5.
3) Ensure that terminal power is on (see procedure CRTl ).
4) Connect- lead of voltmeter to ground (E1 on monitor chassis).
5) Connect + lead of voltmeter to pin 8 of BP4, and check that meter reads
+ 15 ±0.75 V de.
6) Move+ lead of voltmeter to pin 22 of BP4, and check that meter again
reads +15 ±0.75 V de.
7) Move+ lead of voltmeter to +side of capacitor C5A, and check that
meter reads +5 ±0. 25 V d c •
To measure -190 V de, do the following:
8) Set voltmeter to measure -190 V de.
NOTE
If meter has polarity r e v e r s i n g switch, reverse
meter lead connections given in the f o II owing
steps (9 and 10) and use reversing switch instead.
9) Connect+ meter lead to ground (E1 on monitor chassis).
10) Connect- meter lead to R1A as shown in figure CRT11, and check that
meter reads -190 ±25 V de.
To measure +45 V de, do the following:
11) Set voltmeter to measure +45 V de.
12) Connect - lead of meter to ground (E1 on monitor chassis).
13) Connect+ lead of meter to diode CR4A as shown in figure CRTll, and
check that meter reads +45 ±4.5 V de.
62957400 A
6B-21
To measure +465 V de, do the following:
14) Set voltmeter to measure +465 V de.
15) Connect- lead of meter to ground (E1 on monitor chassis).
16) Connect+ lead of voltmeter to pin 16 of BP4, and check that meter
reads +465 ±47 V de.
17) Check that all measured voltages fall within the indicated tolerances.
Failure of any voltage to be within tolerance normally indicates a fault
either in the source voltage (+15 V de from the 15-volt regulator), in
the monitor PC board, or in the high-voltage transformer. Whether or
not a fault is indicated, return to the DOLT for further tests or directions.
Procedure CRT10 - Video Monitor Adjustments
To adjust the video monitor for correct video display, do the following. Refer to
figures CRT12, CRT13, and CRT14 to locate adjustment controls noted in the following
steps.
1) If adjustment is required because of yoke replacement or crt replacement,
check that high voltage lead is connected, video PC board connectors
are all in place, and BPS and AP4 from +15-V de regulator are connected.
2) Connect power cord to ac outlet and turn power on per procedure CRT 1 •
WARNING
With power applied, high voltage is present at
high-voltage transformer and crt anode lead.
Exercise caution when working in these areas
so as to avoid a severe shock.
3) Move TEST/NORMAL switch on terminal rear panel to TEST position,
and move keyboard FULL DUP/HALF DUP and ON LINE/LOCAL switches
to FULL DUP and LOCAL positions.
4) Ensure that PAGE key on keyboard is down to select page mode of operation.
5) Ensure that 96/64 key on keyboard is up to select 96-character code set.
6) Press CLEAR key on keyboard.
7) Adjust INTENSITY control on terminal front panel until blinking cursor
is clearly visible on screen but raster cannot be seen.
68-22
62957400 A
NOTE
Before making centering and tilt adjustments,
attach clear plastic overlay that precedes figure CRT16 to c en t e r of d i s p I a y s c r e e n with
masking tape.
To make tilt adjustments, do the following:
8) Fill display area of screen with uppercase Hs in the following manner:
a) Press SHIFT LOCK key on keyboard down.
b) Press and hold REPEAT and then H keys. If display I ine feeds and
carriage returns at end of first I ine, continue holding REPEAT and
H keys until screen fills with Hs. If display does not automatically
line feed at end of first line, release REPEAT and H keys, press LINE
FEED key and then CARRIAGE RETURN key. This will move cursor
to left margin of second display line. Continue process of filling one
line at a time with Hs until all 24 lines of display are filled.
9) Check to see if video display of Hs appears tilted on the screen.
do steps 9a, 9b, and 9c.
If so,
a) Loosen yoke clamp screws until yoke can be rotated on neck, but
will remain in position to which it is moved.
b) Rotate yoke back and forth on neck unti I H pattern display is no
longer tilted.
c) Hold yoke in position to keep display pattern straight on screen and
tighten clamp screw on yoke.
To center the display pattern on the screen, do the following:
10) Check to see if display pattern is centered on display screen. If not,
adjust centering tabs on yoke (see figure CRT13) until display is centered.
Initial setting for centering tabs should be 180 degrees apart.
To make I inearity adjustments, do the following:
11) Observe that H patterns on the left and right sides of the screen are
same height as those in center of screen. If not, adjust vertical I inearity
pot on monitor PC board until height is uniform (see figure CRT14).
12) Observe H characters on screen to make certain that left or right side of
display is not distorted. If distortion is present, loosen yoke and ring
magnet clamps slightly and slide shielding sleeve back and forth on neck
gently until minimum distortion is obtained.
62957400 A
68-23
Adjustment of shielding sleeve (horizontal Iinearity) affects horizontal width. Refer
to size adjustments later in this procedure and perform horizontal linearity and horizontal width adjustments alternately until best overall results are obtained.
13) After yoke and shielding sleeve are correctly adjusted and crt ground
clip is properly under sleeve, tighten yoke and ring magnet clamp screws
until they are snug (do not use force).
To adjust the height and width of the display pattern, do the following:
14) Adjust vertical height by tu~ning adjustment screw (figure CRT14) until
height of display pattern is about 5.25 in (133 mm).
15) Adjust horizontal width of display pattern to 8.0 in (203 mm) by turning
width adjustment (figure CRT14) until proper width is obtained. Use a
nonmetallic 3/32-inch hex driver for making this adjustment.
To make focus adjustments, do the following:
16) Press the CLEAR key on the keyboard to clear the display screen of the
Hs display.
17) Enter a display screen of lowercase m's; refer back to step 8b of this
procedure if necessary. Ensure that SHIFT LOCK key is released before
attempting to enter lowercase m's.
18) Turn front panel INTENSITY control all of the way up (clockwise) and
then back it off about 1/4 turn.
19) Turn Contrast control (figure CRT14) to full clockwise position.
20) Adjust the Intensity Range control (figure CRT14) so that raster (background
scan I ines) just disappears but the m characters on the screen remain clearly
visible. To check for proper adjustment, turn up front panel INTENSITY
control to ensure that raster can still be seen, and then turn front panel
INTENSITY control back down to normal viewing brightness.
21) Adjust the Focus control (figure CRT14) to obtain the best resolution of
m characters on entire display area.
22) Adjust the magnet ring tabs (figure CRT13) to minimize any tails or halos
visible on the displayed characters, especially those characters at corners
of display area.
23) If necessary, repeat steps 20 through 22 to obtain best possible character
display and resolution across the entire display area. Refer to figure CRT15
for characteristics to be looked for in the display.
68-24
62957400 A
The following steps check the display area for barreling and pincushion distortion.
If the check indicates that correction is required, the following items are needed
to make adjustments.
•
1/4-inch diameter wooden dowel approximately 12 inches long
•
1/4-inch masking tape
•
Cutting tool or scissors
•
CRT plastic overlay to fit a 12-inch crt screen. A plastic overlay precedes
figure CRT16 that has an ideal rectangle marked on surface to help align
raster.
•
Adhesive, CDC part number 51004063
•
2.0-gauss correction magnet (yellow code), CDC part number 51917051
•
3.0-gauss correction magnet (silver code), CDC part number 51917052
•
4.0-gauss correction magnet (red code), CDC part number 51917053
•
5.7-gauss correction magnet (green code), CDC part number 51917054
To check and make adjustments for geometric distortion, do the following:
24) Press CLEAR key on keyboard to clear the display.
25) Enter a full display screen of uppercase Hs; refer to step 8 of this procedure
if necessary. Ensure that SHIFT LOCK key is pressed before entering the
Hs.
26) Check for geometric distortion (barreling and pincushioning) of the display
pattern. Attach overlay noted previously to crt screen with masking tape
so that center rectangle of overlay fits over display pattern on screen. If
display pattern edges balloon out of double overlay lines at sides, barreling
distortion is present. If edges of display pattern squeeze in past inner
double line at center of sides, pincushioning distortion is present. Refer
to figures CRT17 and CRT18.
27) To correct barreling or pincushioning distortion, first fasten the 2.0-gauss
magnet (yellow code) to one end of the wooden dowel with masking tape.
Use enough tape to hold magnet securely to dowel (see figure CRT 18).
28) While using mirror to watch display pattern, move magnet back and forth
around yoke coil toward side of pattern requiring correction. Note the
effects on the display pattern as the magnet is moved to various positions.
Also note that the direction in which the magnet is facing affects the
display: a magnet with the colored end facing in one direction across
the yoke coils has the effect of pulling the display edges out, while
reversing the colored end of the magnet has the effect of squeezing the
display edges in. Refer to figure CRT19.
62957400 A
68-25
29) If in doing step 28 the display pattern overreacts, break the 2.0-gauss
magnet in half with a pliers and repeat the process. If the display pattern
does not react enough, use progressively larger magnets (3. 0, 4. 0, or
5 .7) or more than one magnet to achieve the desired results.
30) When desired or best possible correction is achieved, note the position
of the magnet relative to the yoke coils. Then turn crt power off, remove
magnet from dowel, and fasten magnet into position on yoke with adhesive.
It may be necessary to hold magnet in place with masking tape while
adhesive cures.
31) If necessary to correct distortion on other perimeter edges of display
pattern, apply power to the terminal and repeat this process from step 24.
32) When all necessary corrections have been made, remove masking tape
from correction magnets mounted on yoke and remove overlay from face
of crt. Replace cabinet hood and prepare terminal for use or return to
DD LT for further tests and checks if necessary.
Procedure CRT11 - Check/Replace Front-Panel INTENSITY Control
To check the INTENSITY control on the front panel of the display terminal, proceed
as follows:
1) Turn off power per procedure CRT2 and remove ac plug from outlet.
2) Remove terminal cabinet hood per procedure CRT5.
3) Set ohmmeter to RX1000 scale.
4) Disconnect cable connector BP3/BJ3 leading from monitor assembly to
INTENSITY control on terminal front panel. See figure CRT20.
5) Attach one lead of ohmmeter to BJ3-2 (center terminal of connector
leading to INTENSITY control), and connect the other ohmmeter lead
to one of the outer terminals of BJ3.
6) Check to see that ohmmeter reads 0 when INTENSITY control is turned
fully in one1 direction and reads 100 kilohms when the control is turned
fully in the opposite direction.
7) Remove ohmmeter lead from first outer terminal of BJ3 (as attached in
step 5) and attach lead to second outer terminal. Check for 0 ohms and
100 kilohms again at opposite extremes of INTENSITY control rotation.
8) If either check in step 6 or 7 fails, replace INTENSITY control.
68-26
62957400 A
To replace INTENSITY control, do the following:
9) Test new control per steps 5 through 7 of this procedure to ensure that
new control is OK.
10) Pull knob off front of control to gain access to hex retaining nut on front
side of terminal.
11) Remove retaining nut using 1/2-inch socket.
'
12) Withdraw old control from rear side of front panel.
13) Insert new control in front panel, secure with retaining nut, and slide
knob on front of control.
14) Move cable BJ3 from rear of control to proper position in chassis and
reconnect BJ3 to BP3 cable that goes to monitor assembly.
15) Turn on terminal power per procedure CRTl.
16) Wait 30 seconds for terminal to warm up and then adjust INTENSITY
control for proper viewing.
17) Replace cabinet hood per procedure CRT5 and return the DOLTs for
directions.
Procedure CRT12 - Replacing Monitor PC Board
To remove the monitor PC board, do the following:
1) Turn off power per procedure CRT2 and remove ac plug from outlet.
2) Disconnect connector BP1 (see figure CRT21).
3) Disconnect ground wire BP7 from BJ7 on monitor board.
4) Disconnect crt lead BP6 from location BJ6 and disconnect ground wire
BPS from location BJ8.
5) Disconnect connector BP4 (see figure CRT21).
CAUTION
To avoid breaking the plastic retainer clips, be
careful when compressing the clips to remove the
PC board. Make sure that all four clips are
compressed before attempting to I ift PC board off
of chassis. If board is not free of all four clips,
either the clips or the PC board may break when
attempting to remove the board.
r
62957400 A
68-27
6) To remove PC board from four plastic mounting pegs, carefully compress
retainer clip on peg, and at same time, I ift that portion of the board near
peg gently until board moves up over retainer clip; then stop I ifting (see
figures CRT21 and CRT22). Do the same for all four clips and pegs. When
board is free of all clips, lift board up and off of pegs.
7) Install new PC board by positioning board over mounting pegs to match
holes in board with pegs, and then gently press the board down on pegs
until board slides over retainer clips on pegs and is securely in place.
If any difficulty is encountered as board goes over clips, gently press
board down over one clip at a time until it is secure.
8) Replace connectors BPl, BP4, BP6 and ground wires BP7 and BPS per
figure CRT21 •
9) Refer to procedure CRTlO if required to adjust monitor for proper video
display.
Procedure CRT13 - Replacing High-Voltage Transformer
To remove the high-voltage transformer, do the following:
1) Turn power off per procedure CRT2 and disconnect ac I ine cord.
WARNING
Be carefu I not to n i c k or s c r a t c h s u r fa c e of
cathode-ray tube when discharging tube. Nicks
and scratches weaken the glass and can cause
tube to implode with t rem end o us force. Wear
safety gogg Ies and protective g I o v e s when hand I ing or working on the crt.
2) Connect a heavily insulated wire to ground, then carefully slide other
end of wire under rubber anode cover on top of crt. It may be necessary
to raise anode cover slightly to start wire under it. Slide wire far enough
under cover to discharge tube.
3) Remove high-voltage lead by raising rubber cover and compressing spring-
loaded anode lead; then remove high-voltage lead from paper insulator
attached to standoff on monitor chassis.
4) Remove transformer primary wires from connector BP4 by removing BP4
and inserting end of paper clip into top of connector to release flagterminal spring; withdraw flag terminal from bottom of BP4.
68-28
62957400 A
5) Remove screw attaching high-voltage lead insulator to hexagonal standoff and remove insulator. Remove standoff, and then nut and washers
from screw securing transformer to monitor chassis. Remove transformer
from monitor chassis (see figure CRT23).
To replace the high-voltage transformer, do the following:
6) Connect transformer to chassis as shown in figure CRT23.
7) Connect high-voltage lead through paper isulator and to anode hole
crt; then slide rubber anode cover into position over anode lead and
If compressing anode lead spring is difficult, use a pi iers with tapetubing-covered jaws to compress spring while anode lead is inserted
crt hole.
in
hole.
or
in
8) Connect flag-type terminals on primary wires to BP4 by inserting them
into bottom of BP4 connector (see figure CRT23 for proper connections}.
9) Replace connector BP4 on monitor PC board.
Procedure CRT14 -
Replacing the Vertical Choke
To replace the vertical choke on the monitor chassis, do the following:
1) Turn power off per procedure CRT2 and unplug the terminal line cord.
2) Disconnect BP4 (largest connector at rear of monitor PC board). Wires
from BP4, pins 6 and 7 go to the vertical choke (see figure CRT5).
3) Remove flag terminals from BP4-6 and BP4-7 by inserting small end of
paper clip in space between flag terminal and insulation at top of connector. This compresses wedge-shaped spring clip on terminal so that it
can be withdrawn from bottom of connector.
4) Remove nuts from two screws holding choke to monitor chassis, and then
I ift grounding wire off of rear screw, but do not remove wire from PC
board connector.
5) Lift vertical choke up and off mounting screws.
6) Position new choke on monitor chassis so that wires from choke are toward
monitor PC board.
7) Place ground wire removed in step 4 on rear mounting screw and secure
ground wire and choke to chassis by replacing and tightening nuts removed
in step 4.
8) Push flag terminals removed in step 3 into connectors BP4-6 and BP4-7 by
pushing them up into connector from bottom until they lock in place.
Arrange the choke wires so that they are not twisted or crossed over
before inserting them.
9) Reconnect BP4 to rear" of monitor PC board.
10) Go to procedure CRTlO and check for any required video adjustments.
62957400 A
68-29
Procedure CRT1!i - Check/Raplaea CRT Cap
To check the crt cap, do the following:
1) Turn off power per procedure CRT2 and unplug ac line cord from outlet.
2) Remove terminal cabinet hood per procedure CRT5.
3) Disconnect connector BP4 (large connector) from rear of monitor PC board.
4) Disconnect connectors BP6/BJ6 and BP8/BJ8 from monitor PC board (see
figure CRT21).
5) Carefully remove crt cap from rear of crt neck (see figure CRT24)_
6) Using an ohmmeter, make continuity checks between the following BP4
connector pins and crt cap sockets:
BP4 Pin Number
CRT Cap Socket Number
1
2
4
15
20
7
1
6
4
3
7) Using an ohmmeter, make a continuity check between BP6 wire (black
wire) and crt cap socket 2. All checks in steps 6 and 7 should indicate
continuity (0 ohms); if not, cap requires replacement.
To remove the crt cap, do the following:
8) Do steps 1 through 5 preceding.
9) Remove flag terminals from BP4 as indicated in the BP4 pin number I ist
of step 6 preceding. Do this by inserting small end of paper clip into
top of BP4 connector to release wedge-shaped spring clip on flag terminal,
and then withdrawing flag terminal from bottom of connector.
To install the crt cap, do the following:
10) Insert wires coming from crt cap into connector BP4 as per listings in
step 6 preceding. To install flag terminals in BP4, push them into bottom
of BP4 connector until they lock in place.
11) Connect black wire coming from crt cap socket 2 to BJ6 on monitor PC
board, and then connect green wire attached to black wire to BJ8 on
monitor PC board (see figure CRT21).
12) Align keyslot in crt cap with keyguide on rear of crt, and then carefully
push cap onto guide and crt pins until cap is seated on rear of crt.
68-30
62957400 A
Procedure CRT16 -: Replacing Monitor CRT
To remove the monitor crt, perform the following:
1) Turn off power per procedure CRT2 and remove ac power cord from outlet.
2) Remove terminal cabinet hood per procedure CRT5.
3) Refer to procedure CRT13 and discharge/disconnect high-voltage lead per
step 2.
4) Remove monitor module from cabinet per procedure CRT18.
5) Pull crt cap carefully from end of crt neck (see figure CRT24). Do not
remove the vinyl keyguide, which helps to protect end of tube when crt
cap is removed. During installation, keyguide also ensures that cap goes
on end of new tube properly.
6) Disconnect crt ground clip assembly from El on monitor chassis.
WARNING
Use ext r e m e c a r e when w o r k i n g around crt
because rough hand I in g , nicks or scratches, or
undue pressure on neck can cause crt to implode.
This in turn can present a serious hazard from
flying glass to personnel working in the area.
7) Loosen clamps on yoke and ring-magnet assembly on neck of tube
(figure CRT25).
8) Remove crt ground clip from underneath shielding sleeve. Slide ringmagnet assembly back and off end of crt neck. Gently slide yoke and
shielding sleeve (between neck and yoke) back on crt neck to ensure
that it is loose enough for later removal.
9) Remove four screws holding crt mounting plate to monitor chassis at front;
be careful that crt does not slip and fall as these screws are removed.
Also remove static discharge spring as these screws are removed (see
figure CRT26).
WARNING
Never allow weight of crt to rest only on neck
of tube while front of tube is unsupported.
j
62957400 A
68-31
10) Support crt neck with one hand and carefully remove yoke and shielding
sleeve with other hand.
11) Withdraw crt carefully from wire chassis of monitor module. Place crt
facedown on stable, flat surface that has been covered with a clean,
soft cloth.
12) Remove replacement crt from shipping carton and place facedown on
stable, flat surface that has been covered with a clean, soft cloth.
Then place old tube in empty shipping carton.
To install crt in monitor assembly, do the following:
13) Being careful not to let weight of crt rest on neck, pass crt neck through
front of monitor chassis until neck is back in area of yoke and front mounting plate can be fastened to chassis struts.
14) Install front mounting plate and static discharge spring on front of monitor
chassis and over front of crt screen (see figure CRT 26). Secure plate and
·
spring with four screws and nuts removed in step 9.
15) Position shielding sleeve on neck with one hand and slip yoke over neck
and sleeve. Slide yoke forward into position (see figure CRT25). Sleeve
should extend out from back of yoke as yoke moves up against flare at
rear of tube (see figure CRT27).
16) Slip clamp over back tabs of yoke and tighten screws slightly until yoke
remains in place, but can still be moved easily.
17) Slide ring-magnet assembly over shielding sleeve until it contacts rear
of yoke assembly.
18) Slip crt ground clip under shielding sleeve (figure CRT27). It may be
necessary to loosen yoke clamp slightly to get ground clip into position.
Once ground clip is in position, tighten both yoke and ring-magnet
clamp slightly to hold entire assembly in position.
19) Ensure that keyguide is in place over pins at rear of crt (see figure CRT24).
20) Carefully position tube cap over end of crt and gently push cap onto pins,
ensuring that slot in cap aligns with keyguide.
21) Install monitor assembly in cabinet per procedure CRT18.
22) Install high-voltage lead into anode hole on crt; refer to step 7 of
procedure CRT13 if necessary.
23) Reconnect crt ground clip assembly to E1 on monitor chassis.
24) Ensure that connectors BP1 and BP4 are securely connected at rear of
monitor PC board, and visually inspect installation to make certain that
all other wires are properly connected.
25) Perform monitor adjustment procedures per procedure CRTlO if necessary.
68-32
62957400A
(
Procedure CRn7 - Repl1cing CRT Yoke
To remove the yoke assembly from crt neck, do the following:
1) Turn off terminal power per procedure CRT2 and remove ac line cord
from site outlet.
2) Remove cabinet hood per procedure CRT5.
WARNING
Use e x t r e m e c a r e when w o r k i n g around crt
because rough hand I in g, nicks or scratches, or
undue pressure on neck can cause crt to implode.
This in turn can present a serious hazard from
flying glass to person n e I working in the area.
3) Connect heavily insulated wire to ground and, while carefully lifting
rubber cover, discharge crt anode by sliding other end ofgrounded wire
under cover and into anode hole in crt.
4) Disconnect ground clip ring lug from E1 on monitor chassis.
5) Pull connector BP4 off rear edge of monitor PC board. BP4 is largest of
PC board connectors and has wires leading from it to yoke assembly.
6) Dis connect flag terminals 9, 10, 18, and 19 from 8 P4 connector; these are
four wires leading from yoke to BP4. To do this insert small end of paper
clip into top of connector in space between flag terminal and insulation
and pull gently on wire until wedge-shaped, spring clip comes out bottom
of connector. The paper clip must compress the spring clip enough to
withdraw it from connector.
7) Pull crt tube cap carefully off end of crt (see figure CRT24). Do not
remove the vinyl keyguide from end of tube.
8) Loosen clamp screws for ring-magnet and yoke clamps (see figure CRT25).
9) Remove ground clip from under shielding sleeve. Gently slide shielding
sleeve, ring-magnet and yoke assemblies back and off neck of crt.
To install yoke, do the following:
10) Position shielding sleeve approximately as shown in figure CRT27, but
with opening straight down and aligned with pin 7 of crt tube, and then
slide sleeve up onto neck of crt.
11) Position yoke with wires hanging downward (red and green wires to left
and blue and yellow wires to right from rear), and then slide yoke onto
neck of crt over shielding sleeve.
62957400 A
68-33
WARNING·
Never tighten yoke or ring-magnet clamps more
than enough to hold yoke and ring magnet in place
on crt neck • If clamps are tightened too much,
it is possible to break neck of crt, which could
result in serious injury to any persons in the area.
12) Move yoke clamp onto neck and over end tabs of yoke; tighten clamp
just enough to hold yoke in place, but not enough to prevent moving
the yoke on the neck of crt.
13) Place ring-magnet assembly on neck and slide it forward until it butts
against rear of yoke.
14) Slip crt ground clip under shielding sleeve and slide clip forward until
rear of clip is past rear of crt tube (it may be necessary to loosen yoke
clamp to do this).
15) Tighten yoke clamp and ring-magnet clamp just enough to hold yoke
and ring magnet in position.
16) Position crt cap at rear of crt tube so that keyslot in cap aligns with
keyguide on neck. Press cap carefully onto pins of crt tube until cap
seats.
17) Insert flag terminals into connector BP4 (larger of two connectors at
rear of monitor PC board). Push terminals in from bottom side of BP4
until spring clips secure them in place.
a) Push green wire from yoke into BP4-9
b) Push yellow wire from yoke into BP4-10
c) Push red wire from yoke into BP4-18
d) Push blue wire from yoke into BP4-19
18) Connect BP4 to rear edge of monitor PC board and connect ground-clip
ring lug to E1 on monitor chassis.
19) Ensure that rear panel circuit breaker CB 1 is off (down) and then plug
terminal Iine cord into appropriate ac outlet.
20) Go to Video Monitor Adjustments procedure (CRT10) and perform
required adjustments.
68-34
62957400 A
Procedure CRT 18 - Replacing Video Monitor Assembly
To remove the video monitor assembly, perform the following:
1) Turn off power per procedure CRT2 and remove ac power cord from out Iet.
2) Remove connector BP1 from rear of monitor PC board (figure CRT21 ).
3) Disconnect flag terminal 14 from BPl by inserting small end of paper clip
into top of connector in space available between flag terminal and insulation and then pulling wire gently out from bottom of connector. Flag
terminals have small wedge-shaped spring clips on end that must be compressed to remove term ina Is from connector.
4) Disconnect connectors BP2 and BP3 (figure CRT20).
5) Disconnect all ground wires from post El on monitor chassis.
6) Loosen bottom two screws holding monitor chassis assembly to bezel.
Remove upper two screws and two screws holding monitor chassis to display
module chassis at rear (see figure CRT28).
WARNING
Use extreme care when hand I ing the video
monitor assembly because rough hand I in g can
cause the crt to implode with tremendous force.
This could result in serious injury. Do not nick
or scratch crt glass or subject it to any undue
pressure during rep I ace men t • When hand I ing
crt, always wear safety goggles and heavy gloves
for protect ion •
7) Grasp monitor assembly by mounting frames with both hands and carefully
lift assembly up and out of display module chassis (see figure CRT28). As
this is done, check that no cab I ing is caught or remains connected to
video monitor assembly. Place monitor on a secure, stable surface.
To install video module, perform the following:
8) Verify left-bottom and right-bottom screws in bezel are partially screwed
in so as to receive slots on lower-front monitor chassis struts (refer to
figure CRT28).
9) Pick up monitor module by wire chassis struts and carefully lower it into
display module cabinet until slots in lower-front struts slip over screws
in bezel.
62957400 A
68-35
10) Steady monitor module with one hand while positioning one of rear support
struts over post in cabinet base, and then start a screw into the post to
hold monitor chassis in place.
11) Insert three remaining screws that hold monitor chassis to cabinet base and
to bezel of display module cabinet. Tighten four screws that hold monitor
assembly to bezel first and two screws that hold monitor assembly to cabinet
base last. Do not overtighten any of these screws; just ensure that they
are securely snugged down.
12) Reconnect all connectors and wires removed in steps 2 through 5 of this
procedure. If monitor assembly is a replacement, it will require adjustment; refer to procedure CRTlO.
Procedure CRT19 - Check/Replace Audible Alarm
To check the alarm, do the following:
1) Turn power off per procedure CRT2 and unplug ac power cord from outlet.
2) Remove terminal cabinet hood per procedure CRT5.
3) Locate alarm near bottom center of control logic PC board chassis (see
figure CRT29).
4) Set ohmmeter to measure resistance on RX1 scale.
5) Touch positive(+) meter probe to terminal marked+ on the alarm. Touch
negative (-)meter probe to remaining alarm terminal.
6) If alarm sounds as probes are touched to terminals, alarm is OK; if it
does not sound, replace it.
To remove alarm, do the following:
7) Remove logic PC board assembly from cabinet chassis per procedure CRT20.
8) Remove faulty alarm from logic chassis by holding alarm with one hand
and then using pliers to rasp or break off retaining teeth that hold alarm
in chassis. When alarm is free of chassis, remove and discard alarm.
To install alarm, do the following:
9) Test new alarm per steps 4 through 6 preceding.
10) Snap new alarm into logic chassis from rear side.
11) Replace logic PC board assembly in cabinet chassis per procedure CRT20.
12) Check that switch settings of switches on logic PC board have not been
altered during this procedure by checking switch settings against settings
marked on decal on logic chassis.
13) Return to DOLTs for further test procedures or directions.
6B-36
62957400 A
Procedure CRT20 - Replacing Control Logic PC Board
To remove the control logic PC board (figure CRT29), do the following:
1) Turn terminal power off per procedure CRT2 and unplug ac line cord
from outlet.
2) Remove cabinet hood per procedure CRT5.
3) Remove chassis ground wires (green) from rear side of logic module chassis
by removing hex nut and wires.
4) Remove logic module retaining screw at each lower end of module chassis.
5) Remove support brace nut from module chassis.
6) Lift module up slightly and remove cable connectors AJ 1, AJ2, and AP3
(power connector) from near bottom of module.
7) Locate audible alarm near bottom center of control logic PC board chassis,
and remove wires leading to alarm terminals: red wire to +terminal on
alarm and white wire to other terminal on alarm.
8) Remove entire logic module assembly from cabinet chassis.
9) Remove two screws holding module cover-plate (side with switch-setting
decal) and I ift cover-plate off module.
NOTE
In performing the following step, do not warp the
PC board when r e m o v i n g it from the p I as t i c
supports. Doing so may damage the foil paths or
components on the PC board, or may even b rea k
the PC board itself.
10) Lay the module down with PC board and components facing up, and begin
easing the board up around each of the six plastic support posts a little at
a time. Continue working around the board and each support post until
the board is free. A needle-nose pliers with the jaw ends taped or covered
with tubing may be used to compress the posts slightly to facilitate raising
the board around each post.
62957400 A
68-37
Should one of the support posts break while removing the logic
it in the following manner:
PC board, replace
11) Use pliers to compress rear side of support post while pulling post out
from front side (inside) of logic module chassis plate.
12) Insert new post from front side (inside) of logic module chassis plate,
and press in until it locks in place.
To replace control logic PC board, do the following:
13) Position PC board over logic module chassis plate so that holes in board
a Iign with support posts on plate, and then lower board onto posts. Work
around board pressing it down around each post a little at a time until
board is secure on all six support posts.
14) Check switch settings on board to ensure that they are set per the SITE
blocks on cover-plate decal (see figure CRTl).
15) Do steps 3 through 9 in reverse order and action to complete installation
of logic PC board and return to DOLT for next test or directions.
68-38
62957400 A
BAUD
RATE
I
150
I 0
0 I
200
FACTORY
SITE
MARK IN SITE
SETTINGS
USED WHEN
TERMINAL IS
INSTALLED
.,.....r
1200
I
1800
2400
X= ENABLE·
I
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(A9)
0 0
300
600
:~~~~~: EBB BB8B~
SPECIAL
110
0
I
I
0 I 0
0 0 I
0 0 0
4800 0
I
9600 0
I 0
I
/
ooo
000
000
AJ3
02094
Figure CRTl. Keyboard Display Internal Switches and Controls
62957400 A
68-39
CONTROL+
@
CONTROL+
A
CONTROL +
B
e<:DeCXX)
e<:X)«)(X)
ETX
CONTROL+
CONTROL+
D
CONTROL+
CONTROL+
F
G
E
oec:x:x:x;o
eoec:x:xxJ
e<:::leCX)(X,
ecxJeOOO MC«XX:: eoecx:xx.;
ecx::x:xx.c
.-coo ec»eooo ec.oooc
eooec:x:::o eooec:x:::o ~
ecx::.eoo oecx:x::.:.
ocx::x::*X> ocx::>OeOC
eo•••••
CleCX*:X)
~
ec.ec>eoo
oecx::>eoo
~
ocx::>OeOC ocx::>OeOC cx:x::x::x::.J
ocx::>OeOC ooc:xJ«X) cx:x:x:x::.c·
~ c:x:xx:eee cx::x:::x:x:;«
CODE -.0..1.l._
CODE 0 12
:oDE{:L1]_
SYMBOL
HT SYMBOL NL
3YMBOL v T
-
CONTROL+
I
LINE
FEED
eMCXXX)
oeo«XX)
oeo«XX)
c::>eoeo«)
c::>eoeo«)
cx::x:::x:x:;«
cx::x:::x:x:;«
.
CONTROL+
021
Q
CONTROL+
L
CARRIAGE
RETURN
CONTROL+
N
eMCXXX)
...o:::x:xJ
eMeM
cxxx:::oeo
c:x:xx:x::x:)e
~
()(X)e()e()
(XX)e(X)e
cx::x:::x:x:;«
::>~ED 2 3
PCJ.
CONTROL+
P
ll
sv~sc.
CONTROL+
K
cx::x:x::>«)e
c:x:x:>cX)e()
3YM8Cc
ocx::>OeOC
::~E 017
CONTROL+
0
oeoeooo oeo«XX) ~ eoecx:xx:J
c::>eoeo«) ~ ec:..::x:x:> e<::xXXXX)
oeceeoe oeoeoM e
SvMB~
DU
CONTROL+ CONTROL+
R
S
cxxx:xx>e
~~~·024
·VB~ 1)(4
::~f
025
cX)e()
:Ji'E
0 2b
s•MB'-.
S YN
CONTROL+
CONTROL+
CONTROL+
CONTROL+
T
U
V
W
...::x:x:>o ~ eMCOCO ~ ~...xno ec:x:::.:yx
ecxx::x::x:>o ecxx::x::x:>o ecxx::x::x:>o ecx:xxx..u ecxx::x::x:>o ecxx::x::x:>o ~ e<:X:*:) )()
ecxx::x::x:>o ecxx::x::x:>o ec:oeeeo ~ ecx:x::oeo ecx:x::oeo ecoeoeo ~
eoocx::x::o MCXX)()() oe<::xJeC)e eecoe.o eec:DeOe ~~ ecx::.eoe
~
ec:xJeOOe ec.ACXX:>e
oeeeeoe eoeeoee
~ eeeoeoe
~
c:x:x::>ecX')e
·n030
~vMBOcC~ N
CONTROL+
X OR CLEAR
C>C:le()(X)e
C>C:le()(X)e
:
:'f
031
:;vMs.~.EM
CONTROL+
Y OR RESET
~
~
ec.oMO e<:X:leOOC
oecxJeOe .-coo
~
ecx:x::oeo ecoeoeo ecoeoeo
~
CXX>eMO
~
~
cx::xxx::>eo
cx::xx::>eoe
'--, 0 32
vMB' SUB
CONTROL+
Z OR t
~f
.... ~
0:33
ESC
ESC
ecxx.:::xJ
cx-x:xxx..
·034
"" FS
OMCXX:le
()()(X)«)e
eoeoe<::X)
oc:x:x::x::oe c:x:xxxx::.
cx::x:x::>«)e
cxxx:::oeo cxxx:::oeo
,035
. .,.~ GS_
~
~
-~f
,.,.s
036__
RS
CONTROL+ CONTROL+ CONTROL+
J
MOR ENTER- H OR ENTER+
~
~
·037
us
. .,.y
CONTROL+
Figure CRT2. Control Code Dot Matrix Formations and Octal Codes*
c
o2oo4
*ASCII delete code (DEL) is listed with alphanumeric code set in appendix (see
code 177g)
6B-40
62957400 A
Figure CRT3. Keyboard Module Components
Figure CRT4. Keyboard Display Cabinet Hood Removal
62957400 A
68-41
BP2/B.I2
RAY
~
ORANGE
+11.4 TO+ 12.6 V de
BLACK DC
17 T021 Vae
BLACK AC GROUND
GROUND~ ~DC
-
-
Q
-
PIN 3 BLUE
-11.4 TO -12.6 V de
PIN 2 BLACK
GROUND
000 0
u
000
~~PINIRED
ll
RED
+ 4.8 TO +5.3 V de
+4.8 TO +5.3 V de
AP3 (REAR VIEW)
Figure CRT5. CP2/CJ2 and Rear Panel Locations
68-42
62957400A
0
0
PRIMARY CIRCUIT BREAICER
COUP CIRCUIT PRtMAIRf
TO
~~~~
,--~ERtPHERAL
CONNECTOR
®1~-::-:D®
0
DATA SET CONIII[CTOR
'I'"'
.
£LECTIUC SHOCK,
A~OtO
DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT FROM POWER
SOURCE BEFORE SERVICING
0
0
'AL
0
0
PI
FRONT VIEW
I,..., I
-?..:;q,
~
"
Af E T y
GROUND
REAR VIEW
L.OW /NORMAL
CONNECTOR
TO CP2/CJ2
4
120 V, 60Hz
220/240 V, 50 Hz
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
02604
Figure CRT6, Rear Panel Removal and Connections
62957400 A
68-43
Figure CRT7. Monitor Assembly ond Bezel Screw Removal
62957400A
HP2
(H.J 2)
()o
~~~~~-=--~()~J_3___________J-i6~~()
0
-z:l2
Rl3
\_sAFETY
~CP2
GROUND
(CJ2)
02634
HJ2 Pin No.
Output
19 V ac at 0.1 A, maximum
Tolerances
±1.9 V ac
2
Not used
3
+23 V de at 1.5 A, maximum
4 through 6
Ground
7
12 V de at 0.2 A, maximum
8 and 9
Ground
10
-12 V de at 0.2 A, maximum
±600 mV de
11 and 12
+5 V de at 6. 0 A, maximum
±250 mV de
Nominal Input
Tolerance Range
CJ2 Pin No.
120 V ac
102 to 128 V ac
1 (hot) and 2 (neutral)
220 V ac
198 to 246 V ac
1 (hot) and 4 (neutral)
240 V ac
216 to 268 V ac
1 (hot) and 6 (neutra I )
-1.5 to +2.3 V de
±600 mV de
figure CRT8. Power Supply Module Layout and Input/Output Voltages
62957400 A
68-45
CRT DISCHARGE STRIP -(NOT USED ON ALL UNITS)
a - - CRT DISCHARGE SPRING
NOT USED ON ALL UNITS
BP4
BP5
, -BP5
I~
I
01964·1
REGLATOR
02
-TOBP2
Figure CRT9. +15-V de Regulator Location
62957400A
+15Vdc PINI
REGULATOR OUTPUT
EMITTER
(QI)
BP2-2 GROUND
BP2-I +23 V de
01964-2
DIODES
CRI, CR2 AND
CR3 (CATHODE
IS BANDED END)
EMITTER
(Q2)
Figure CRT10. +15-V de Regulator Assembly Detail (Rear View)
62957400A
68-47
+45 V de
-190 Vdc
•t~,:--~\:_+~5 ~ ~'
{PIN 22)
a
""\:_
{PIN 16)
~ ,~·~·.;,
•• ,
{PIN 8)
Figure CRT11. Monitor PC Board Voltages
VERTICAL LINEARITY
HORIZONTAL
WIDTH
/
(I
YOKE, RING MAGNET, AND
HORIZONTAL LINEARITY
(ADJUSTMENT SLEEVE IN YOKE)
INTENSITY RANGE
Figure CRT12. location of Video Monitor Adjustments
68-48
62957400A
ASSEMBLY
Figure CRT13. Yoke Adjustments
VERTICAL
HEIGHT
HORIZONTAL
WIDTH
8
L
~
()
0
~
0
C?
'
0
;:)
0
(..
0
(I
0
~..._.____-~
,,
..........
.......... ....
90460619
Figure CRT14. Monitor PC Board Adjustments
62957400 A
68-49
02576-1
NOTE: OBSERVE THE INDICATED POINTS FOR OPTIMUM CHARACTERISTICS OF:
1) DOT SIZE AND SHAPE
2) SPACING BETWEEN VERTICAL STROKES
3) CHARACTER SEPARATION
4) TAILS OR SMEARING
Figure CRT15. Character Resolution
6B..:so·
62957400A
NOTE: THE 8-1/2- BY 11-INCH
PLASTIC OVERLAY IS INCLUDED
ELSEWHERE IN THIS MANUAL.
62957400 A
Video Display Overlay
68-51/ 6B-52
Figure CRT16. Applying Overlay to CRT Screen
BARRELED SIDES
PINCUSHIONING
DASHED LINES SHOW NORMAL UNDISTORTED SHAPE
02575
Figure CRT17. Identifying Display Distortion
02575
Figure CRT18. Attaching Correction Magnet to Dowel
62957400 A
68-53
CORRECTION
MAGNET
COLORED END
CLOCKWISE
YOKE
MAGNET ADDED TO YOKE TO CORRECT PINCUSHIONING (SEE NOTE)
COLORED END
COUNTER CLOCKWISE
iia--
CORRECTION
MAGNET
\_YOKE
MAGNET ADDED TO YOKE TO CORRECT BARRELING (SEE NOTE)
NOTE: IF BOTH BARREL AND PINCUSHION DISTORTION WERE BEING CORRECTED, THE COLORED
END OF THE CORRECTION MAGNETS WOULD BE PLACED ON THEIR RESPECTIVE SIDE OF THE YOKE
AND THE RESULT WOULD BE A MIXTURE OF THE TWO EXAMPLES SHOWN.
Figure CRT19. Magnet Placement and Distortion Correction
68-54
62957400A
INTENSITY
CONTROL
01977-3
Figure CRT20. Intensity Control Assembly Location
62957400 A
68-55
APPROXIMATE LOCATION
OF MOUNTING PEGS
BPS
BP6
Figure CRT21. Monitor PC Board Connections
PRESS
RETAINER
CL.IP
REMOVING PC BOARD
FROM MOUNTING PEG
INSTALLING PC BOARD
OVER MOUNTING PEG
figure CRT22. Monitor PC Board Placement
68-56
62957400 A
t::J
,..,
Tl-8
T1•2
Tl-5
Tl-6
Tl-7
to
to
to
to
to
BP4-16
BP4-17
BP4-13
BP4-5
BP4-14
~
~-
/
01963-1
NOTE: HIGH-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER ALSO COMES IN A VERSION WITH A RECTANGULAR BASE.
CONNECTOR NUMBERING ON BOTH VERSIONS IS THE SAME.
Figure CRT23. High-Voltage Transformer Installation
62957400 A
68-57
PIN NUMBERS
(REFERENCE ONLY)
Oltt2
Figure CRT24. CRT Cap Removal
UNETCHED END
OF SLEEVE
(MYLAR BACKING)
CRT GROUND
CLIP ASSEMBLY
CRT
01961 6
-
W'r·
-~\·
•
CLAMP
KEYGUIOE
SHIELDING SLEEVE
(COPPER-COATED SIDE
AGAINST TUBE NECK)
TUBE SOCKET
Figure CRT25. CRT Yoke Assembly
68-58
62957400A
(
Figure CRT26. Static Discharge Spring location
UNETCHED END OF SLEEVE
(MYLAR BACKING}
SHIELDING
SLEEVE
COPPER COATING
ROTATE SHIELDING SLEEVE
UNTIL OPENING IS ALIGNED
WITH PIN 7 OF CRT
~
~.'
~
/
~ /~\
/.~
,,
/---
~
"-
TO El
CRT GROUND CLIP ASSEMBLY
(INSERT UNDER SHIELDING SLEEVE)
01961·4
CENTERING TABS (2)
INITIAL SETTING OF
THE TABS SHOULD
BEIB0°APART
i ;,[):~ ;-
"
...
~YOKE
"~~CLAMP
~n
JI!!J)
~~SHIELDING
SLEEVE
WITH COPPER SIDE
AGAINST CRT AND
APPROXIMATELY 0.25
INCH FROM PINS
NOTE: RING .MAGNET AND CLAMP NOT SHOWN
FOR CLARITY OF SHIELDING SLEEVE POSITIONING.
Figure CRT27. Position of Shielding Sleeve
(
\
62957400 A
68-59
Figure CRT28. Monitor Assembly Removal
68-60
62957400 A
AUDIBLE ALARM
LOCATION
CONTROL LOGIC
PC BOARD
Figure CRT29. Location of Audible Alarm and Control Logic PC Board
62957400A
TABlE NIPl. bOLT FOR NONIMPACT PRINTER (SHEET 1 OF 2)
POWER ON, SWITCHES, AND SUBSYSTEM TEST SECTION 6 CHECKS
ASSUME
Nonimpact printer is properly installed per procedures in appendix of associated Operators Guide/Reference Manual
(see preface). Printer has paper installed and power turned on per procedure N IP1. Display terminal is operational
and a printer error has either occurred or is suspected. Do nonimpact printer test portion of procedure TS6.
CONDITIONS
SITUATIONS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
y y y y y y N
Is power on at printer?.
Does line feed (LF switch) operate correctly?
y y y y y N-
Does carriage return (CR switch) operate correctly?
y y y y N-
Does printer track keyboard inputs correctly; that is does it print uppercase and
lowercase characters properly, line feed, carriage return, and backspace upon
respective keyboard inputs? If so, key in a few lines of characters for use in print
quality checks in table NIP2.
y y y N
Is printhead movement correct?
y y N -
Do all characters print?
y N-
X
Perform carriage return LED adjustment, procedure Nl P6.
-
Perform printhead actuation adjustment, procedure Nl P7.
-
Remove cabinet top and check internal cable connections.
Check power ON switch (continuity check with ac power card disconnected from
site outlet).
Replace power supply, procedure NIP12.
Check input/output cable connections at printer and other end.
Check serial input clock timing, procedure NIPlO.
Replace print mechanism, procedure NIP11.
Ca II for assistance.
Note: After completing any repairs or maintenance, verify that the printer is
operational by rerunning system checkout (procedure TS6),
E
--- - -
R
- - - -
SEQUENCE
Perform print quality checks, sheet 2 of this DOLT.
Check power available from site outlet.
T
H
ACTIONS
Check fuse at rear of unit,
0
-
- - - - 3 - - - - - 2 - -
-- - - - - -
1 1 1
6 4 4
- - - 1 - - - - - - - 1 - - 2 - - 3 - - - - -
4 2 2 2 X
5 3 3
4
-
5
-- -
- --
X
(
62957400 A
6C-l
TABLE NIPl. DOLT FOR NONIMPAO PRINTER (SHEET 2 OF 2)
PRINT QUALITY CHECKS
ASSUME
Printer operation checks per sheet 1 of this DOLT completed.
CONDITIONS
SITUATIONS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Is horizontal character spacing correct?
y y y y y
Is printing dark enough across entire page?
y y y y
Is print density even across page?
y y y
Is print density even from top to bottom of characters?
y y
Does the printhead move steadily (not oscillate) during print operations?
y
Perform head compensation adjustment, procedure NIPS.
Perform printhead actuation adjustment, procedure Nl P7.
Perform retriggerable OS adjustment, procedure NIP3.
Check 1-kHz oscillator time, procedure NIP2.
Perform brake LED and one-shot adjustment, procedure Nl P4.
Replace print mechanism, procedure NIPII.
Call for assistance.
Note: After completing any repairs or maintenance, verify that the printer is
operational by rerunning system Checkout (procedure TS6).
6C-2
N-
--
- - - - - N
N
T
H
E
R
SEQUENCE
ACTIONS
Nonimpact printer checks OK. Return to table TSI.
N
NO
X -
-
-
-
- - - - - - I - I
I 2
- - - 2 2
I - -
3
-
2 3 3 4
-- -2 I
-- - - -
X
62957400 A
NONIMPACT PRINTER CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES - GENERAL
Following pages contain all of the procedures that are referenced either from table
Nl Pl, DDLT for Nonimpact Printer, or from elsewhere within this manual. In
addition, other procedures which may serve useful (NIPS and 9) are provided.
Parts replacement level for the nonimpact printer is to the printer mechanism
(including circuit cards), power supply assembly, fuse, and printer interface control
board in the display terminal. If a procedure allows a lower level of replacement
than the standard on-site spare parts list, such as complete parts list in printer manual,
or calls for adjustments more detailed than it may be able to perform on site because
of Iimited equipment/or facilities - then it is up to the customer engineer to resolve
a problem by using the lowest level field-replaceable assembly or part available.
WARNING
Any time the Nl P cabinet hood is removed, if it
is necessary to work near the exposed underside
of the power ON switch or near any of the ac
input power lines, a I ways shut power off and
dis connect ac power cord from site power outlet.
Procedure NIP1 - Paper Loading and Power On
Select paper as recommended under the heading Nonimpact Printer Paper at the end
on this procedure, and perform the following steps:
1) See that printer power ON switch is not Iit (press to turn off).
2) Open paper cover by pressing at rear of cover.
3) Remove paper spindle by lifting straight up.
4) Remove old paper core and install new paper roll on spindle.
5) Set paper roll behind printer, lift paper rod and thread paper around
paper rod and between paper guides {see figure Nl P1).
6) Feed paper through printer by turning paper feed roll by hand.
l
7) Roll up slack and replace spindle and paper in the paper roll slot of printer.
8) Close paper cover.
9) Press printer power ON switch so it lights indicating power on.
10) Press the LF (line feed) switch to ensure that the paper is feeding properly.
62957400 A
6C-3
Nonimpact Printer Paper
The nonimpact printer uses continuous-roll, thermal-sensitive paper for printing.
Recommended paper is white background with blue print. This paper is available
in 100-ft (30.5-m) rolls in cartons of 24 rolls (CDC part number 90500521 for a
full carton).
Procedure NIP2 - 1-kHz Oscillator Adjustment
The 1-kHz oscillator clocks the counter which controls the printer operation timing.
Therefore, it is important to ensure that the frequency output is correct. See figure Nl P2 for 1-kHz osci II a tor location and proceed as follows.
l) Connect all power to the printer.
2) Connect oscillator probe to 1-kHz test point at front of control logic board.
3) Check frequency of oscillator. Frequency must be 1kHz ±20Hz (1 ±0.02 ms
per cycle).
4) If adjustment is required, adjust 1-kHz oscillator potentiometer on control
logic board to obtain required frequency.
Procedure NIP3 - Retriggerable One-Shot (ROS) Adjustment
During a carriage advance or backspace operation, ROS time is used to reduce the
stepping motor winding current to a lower hold level after stepping and braking have
occurred. If the ROS time is too short, horizontal print spacing can be affected.
During the slowdown portion of the carriage return time, the ROS time determines
the time between stepping pulses. Therefore, the slowdown of the printhead during
carriage return is affected by ROS timing. See figure Nl P2 for one-shot location
and proceed as follows.
1) Connect oscilloscope probe to ROS test point at front of control logic
board.
2) Connect all power to printer.
3) Use keyboard inputs to advance printer carriage while observing ROS
pulses on oscilloscope.
4) ROS must be a 10-ms pulse for every carriage advance step.
5; Adjust ROS potentiometer on logic control board to obtain the proper
pulse duration.
6C-4
62957400 A
Procedure NIP4 - Brake LED Block: And Brake One-Shot Adjustment
During carriage advance and backspace operations, the printhead is brought into
contact with the paper by the platen solenoid, printing occurs, the printhead is
moved back from the paper, and then the stepping motor moves the head to the next
column position. For proper printing, the printhead must be horizontally stationary
at each column position when printing at maximum speed. Oscillations of the printhead cannot be tolerated since print quality would be affected. Oscillations can be
caused by improper position of the brake LED block or improper setting of the brake
one-shot time. Motor braking is initiated by the brake LED and its duration is controlled by the brake one-shot time. In this procedure, a visual check of the clock
disc is made to determine if oscillations are present. The platen solenoid is disabled
because oscillations would be damped by the head contacting the platen. (See figures Nl P 3 and Nl P5).
1) Disable platen solenoid by holding finger on platen solenoid guide bar
arm to prevent solenoid operation.
2) Connect all power to the printer.
3) Use keyboard of display terminal to cause repetition of carriage
advance for approximately 60 columns followed by backspaces for approximately 60 columns.
4) Observe top of brake LED block in relation to clock disc. Block should
be aligned with a slot in clock disc and disc must appear to stand still
(no oscillating) for both carriage advance and backspace. If adjustment
is required, perform steps 5 through 7.
5) Loosen one (center) slotted-head screw that secures brake and slew LED
brackets.
6) Loosen one socket-head lock screw to permit adjustment of brake LED
block position.
7) Alternately adjust brake LED block position and brake one-shot time,
until conditions of step 4 are obtained. Adjust brake LED block position
by turning slotted-head eccentric. Adjust brake one-shot time by adjusting brake potentiometer at front of control logic board (figure Nl P2).
Tighten screws.
62957400 A
6C-5
NOTE
If difficulty occurs in damping out oscillations,
check oscillation of printhead cable. If cable
oscillates more than 1/4 inch, replace entire
print mechanism (procedure Nl Pll). If oscillation is less than 1/4 inch, recheck ROS time as
outlined in procedure NIP3. If oscillations still
arepresent checkoutputofbrake LED. See
procedure NIP2.
Procedure NIPS - Heed Compensating Circuit Adjustment
The purpose of this circuit is to control the heating time of the printhead elements.
The heating time is automatically varied by the circuit to compensate for different
printing speeds. The purpose of this procedure is to provide an initial setting of the
circuit time when printing at maximum speed. Then, when the printer is operable,
the time may be readjusted to provide desired print quality. See figure Nl P2 and
proceed as follows.
1) Apply all power to printer.
2) Connect oscilloscope probe to test point PRT at front of signal processing
board. Trigger i nterna I (+).
3) Use keyboard REPEAT and character keys to activate printer while
observing test point pulse on oscilloscope.
4) The output transistor must turn on for the time indicated below for the
particular speed at which the printer is to be operated. Adjust head
compensating potentiometer on signal processing board to obtain a pulse
duration of 6.5 ms.
5) Secure potentiometer screw with cement (Loctite, or equivalent).
6) When printer is operable, check print quality. If quality is not acceptable,
refer to procedure Nl P8, Print Quality Adjustments.
6C-6
62957400A
Procedure NIP& -
Carriage Return LED Block Adjustment
This procedure describes adjustments for the positions of the LED blocks associated
with carriage return. These LEDs ore start of line, slowdown, end of line, and
slew. The LEDs ore positioned to provide carriage return operation within the
maximum time permissible (200 ms) and minimize printhead oscillation at column 1.
This procedure should be performed when any of the carriage return components
have been replaced or when any of the LED block positions have been changed.
See figure Nl P2 and proceed as follows.
1) Loosen the LED block clamping screw on each of the start of line,
slowdown, and end of I ine LED blocks.
2) Set the initial positions of the three LED blocks as follows:
a) Position left side of start of line LED block 7/16 inch from left side
frame.
b) Position slowdown LED block until spacing between start of line
block and slowdown block is 5/16 inch.
c) Position right side of end of line LED block 3/16 inch from right side
frame.
3) Connect all power to the printer.
4) Manually move printhead to approximately column 15 and initiate a
dis crete carriage return operation.
NOTE
A d is crete carriage return operation can be
initiated by pressing the CR switch.
5) Measure distance between printhead carriage and left side frame.
Distance should be 3/16 inch (see figure NIPS).
62957400 A
6C-7
6) If adjustment of printhead home position is required, loosen two socket-
head screws in cable drive drum (figure Nl P3) and rotate drum until printhead is 3/16 inch from left side frame. Tighten screws.
7) Move printhead to approximately column 60 and initiate a discrete
carriage return operation. For this step the carriage return command
must be maintained (hold CR switch down).
8) If printhead oscillates at home position, move start of line LED block
left or right in small increments (approximately 0.001 inch) until head
stops oscillating.
9) Release CR switch.
10) Repeat steps 7 through 9, except start with printhead at a column near
column 80 (75 to 79).
11) With keyboard display and printer connected and with display terminal
power on, use the keyboard to cause printhead to step to column two.
Actuate a discrete carriage return. If printhead does not return to
column one, move start of line LED block to the left in small increments
(approximately 0.001 inch) until carriage return from column two is
achieved.
12) If start of Iine LED block was moved in step 11, repeat steps 7 through 10.
If start of line block is again moved to stop oscillations, repeat step 11.
13) Trigger oscilloscope on CR test point at front of control logic board (figure Nl P2) and set trigger to external (+). Connect oscilloscope probe
to SD test point.
14) Use keyboard REPEAT and character keys to cause continuous printing
and automatic carriage return by the end of line LED.
15) Measure time between oscilloscope trigger (rise of CR) and rise of SD.
Time must be 110 ±5 ms.
16) If adjustment is required, loosen one (center) slotted-head screw and
one socket-head screw to permit adjustment of slew LED block {see
figure NIP5). Turn slotted-head eccentric and adjust slew block position
until requirement of step 15 is met. Tighten two screws.
6C-8
62957400 A
NOTE
In the pro cess of adjusting the slew LED block,
the block should not be positioned at the extreme
left. If positioned to the extreme left, the slew
block may be in contact with the eccentric
adjustment of the platen solenoid arm. Repositioning the clock disc will center the adjustment
and provide future adjustment range without
mechanical interference.
To reposition the clock disc, loosen the clock
disc setscrews, and with the motor shaft held
stationary (by holding the printhead), move the
clock disc by a one-half slot separation and then
tighten, ensuring that the disc does not rub the
brake or slew blocks. Read j us t the brake and
slew (step 16) blocks for proper printer operation.
17) Trigger oscilloscope on SD test point on control logic board and set
trigger to external (-). Connect one oscilloscope probe to SD test point.
18) Use keyboard to step printhead from column 1 to column 6. SD should
fall as printhead steps into column 6. Adjust position of slowdown LED
block to meet this condition.
19) Use keyboard REPEAT and character keys to cause continuous printing
and automatic carriage return by end of I ine LED.
20) Trigger on CR test point(+ trigger), and look at SD with the probe.
Recheck the CR time from EOL to SD at step 15. Adjust the slew if this
condition is not met. On printers with adjustable home position (HPOS)
time, HPOS should be set for 40 to 60 ms. Be sure that a slew pulse does
not occur close to the leading edge of the SD phototransistor pulse.
NOTE
The 40 to 60 ms is only a guide and should not be
used as a criterion for rejection. The objective
is to arrive at CR time of 160 to 185 ms when
warmed up and an absolute maximum of 200 ms
when cold.
Final position of slowdown block should be such
that the nominal distance between slowdown and
start of line blocks is 5/16 ±1/16 inch. (This
criterion is included as a guide; note that this is
only a nominal value.)
62957400A
6C-9
21) Insert paper in printer.
22) Trigger oscilloscope on MT test point end set trigger to external(-).
Connect one oscilloscope probe to MT test point and second probe to
EOL test point.
23) Use keyboard REPEAT and character keys to cause continuous printing
and automatic carriage return by end of I ine LED.
24) Adjust position of end of line LED block so that rise of EOL comes within
1 ms after rise of MT for column 80. Make sure column 80 print is
present.
25) Trigger oscilloscope on CR test point and set trigger to external(+).
Connect oscilloscope probe to BSY test point.
26) Use keyboard REPEAT and character keys to cause continuous printing
and automatic carriage return by end of I ine LED.
27) Measure time that BSY stays true after CR trigger. Time should be 150
to 175 ms (200 ms maximum). If this requirement is not met, repeat
steps 13 through 16, and 17 through 20.
28) Tighten all LED block clamping screws.
Procedure NIP7 - Printhead Actuation Adjustment
This procedure contains instructions for adjustment of the printer to obtain proper
printhead actuation and noise control. The platen solenoid housing must be positioned to prevent plunger bottoming and to ensure free pi unger movement. The
upper eccentric stop is adjusted to absorb some of the impact as the printhead
contacts the paper. Uniform print density from top to bottom of a character and
across the entire I ine is obtained by adjustment of the platen assembly. The lower
eccentric stop is adjusted to provide proper guide bar arm travel between the two
stops. The damper pad is adjusted to contact the solenoid plunger and reduce noise
without restricting the plunger movement. (See figures NIP3, 6, and 7.)
1) Disconnect all power and signal inputs to the printer.
2) Remove paper. If switch bracket is in the way, remove two screws and
move bracket out of way.
6C-10
62957400 A
3) Move plunger into platen solenoid housing until printhead just contacts
rubber platen. Check to see that after head contacts platen, plunger
can be pushed approximately 1/32 inch into housing and does not bind.
If adjustment is required, perform steps 4 through 6.
4) loosen two slotted-head screws which mount the platen solenoid housing
to the frame.
5) Manually move printhead down until it just contacts platen and hold it
in this position. Move solenoid housing until plunger bottoms. Mark
solenoid housing position on side frame. Release printhead. Move
solenoid housing back approximately 1/32 inch from mark on frame.
Tighten two screws.
6) Check to see that plunger moves freely in housing and does not bind. If
binding occurs, loosen two screws and skew housing until plunger is free.
Make sure that 1/32-inch dimension obtained in step 4 is maintained.
7) Insert paper. Connect power and signal inputs to the printer and use
keyboard REPEAT and character keys to print several I ines of different
characters (preferably uppercase characters).
8) Check print density from top to bottom of character.
If density varies,
perform step 9. If density is uniform, proceed to step 10.
9) loosen four socket-head screws (two on each side) securing platen assembly
to side plates. Tilt assembly forward or backward to obtain uniform print
density from top to bottom of character. Tighten four screws. Recheck
print density.
10) While printing, place a 0.010-inch feeler gauge between upper eccentric
stop and guide bar arm. If upper eccentric stop is properly adjusted, print
quality should deteriorate significantly when gauge is inserted. If adjustment is required, perform step 11. If adjustment is correct, proceed to
step 12.
11) loosen one socket-head screw to permit rotation of upper eccentric.
Rotate eccentric in counterclockwise direction until print becomes I ight.
Back off eccentric just enough to restore good quality print. Repeat
step 10.
·
12) If print density varies from left to right across the page, it is necessary to
reposition the platen assembly. loosen two socket-head screws securing
side of platen assembly where I ight printing is occurring and move this
side of assembly forward to obtain uniform print density. Tighten screws.
.
Recheck step 10.
NOTE
When moving platen assembly, take care not to
tilt assembly. Tilting will affect print quality.
62957400 A
6C-11
13) Disconnect all power and signal inputs to the printer.
14) Using a feeler gauge, check the clearance between the upper stop
eccentric and the guide bar arm. The clearance must be 0.020 to
0.025 inch (see figure NIP6). If adjustment is required, loosen one
socket-head screw to permit rotation of lower stop eccentric. Place a
0.022-inch gauge between the guide bar arm and upper stop eccentric.
Rotate lower stop eccentric unti I contact is made between guide bar arm,
gauge, and upper eccentric. Tighten screw.
15) Connect all power and signal inputs to the printer and repeat step 7 to
again cause printing.
16) Check print quality. If print has a dark cast or printhead drags on paper
during carriage return, the solenoid plunger damper pad may be adjusted
too tight, restricting solenoid plunger movement. If print quality is good,
but vibration and noise is discernible, the damper pad may be adjusted too
loose. Loosen locknut and turn damper pad adjusting screw to increase
pad pressure until print quality is affected. Then back off screw just
enough to obtain good print quality. Tighten nut (see figure NIP7).
Procedure NIPB -
Print Quality Adjustments
Table NIP2 lists the different types of poor print quality and references the adjustment procedures which can be performed to correct the problem.
Procedure NIP9 -
Out-of-Paper Switch Adjustment
The Out-of-Paper switch must be adjusted to actuate when paper is inserted in the
printer and deactuate when paper is removed. Adjustment is accomplished by positioning the switch. See figure NIPS and proceed as follows.
1) Remove paper from printer.
2) Slowly insert paper into printer while listening for switch to actuate. An
ohmmeter may be used in a noisy environment.
3) After switch actuates, observe actuator arm to ensure that some overtravel is present.
4) Slowly remove paper while listening for switch to deactuate.
5) After switch deactuates, observe actuator arm to ensure that some overtravel is present.
6) If adjustment is required, loosen two switch-mounting screws on left side
frame and position switch to meet requirements of steps 3 and 5. Tighten
screws and repeat steps 2 through 5.
7) Connect power to printer and check ready output I ine at pin 36 of input/
output connector P37. Voltage should be +5 volts with paper inserted
and 0 volt with paper removed.
6C-12
62957400 A
Procedure NIP10 -
Serial Input Clock Adjustment
The serial input clock must be adjusted so that it occurs as close as possible to the
center of each data bit time. This provides tolerance for input signal distortion.
There are two interacting adjustments required to properly position the clock pulses:
(1) delay one-shot time and {2) multivibrator frequency. The delay one-shot time
determines the position of the first clock at data bit one time. The multivibrator
frequency determines the position of the subsequent clock pulses. See figures NIP2
and NIP9 and proceed as follows.
1) Connect all power to the printer.
2) Using a dual trace oscilloscope, trigger the oscilloscope on the falling
edge of DOS {test point OS at front of signal processing board).
3) Set the oscilloscope time base to display one character time.
4) Apply an input signal from a square wave generator set to the baud rate
of the printer or apply an input code consisting of alternating lOls.
5) Connect one probe of the oscilloscope to the DATA test point.
6) Connect the other probe to MV (CK test point).
7) Check the clock position {rise of MV) for data bit one time.
is not centered, adjust the one-shot potentiometer.
8) Check the clock position for the last data bit time.
centered, adjust the multivibrator potentiometer.
If the clock
If the clock is not
9) If the oscilloscope has a 5X magnifier, turn on the magnifier and repeat
step 7.
10) Move the trace to the left and repeat step 8.
NOTE
Steps 7 and 8 should be repeated severe I times
because ofthe interaction ofthetwo adjustments.
62957400 A
6C-13
Procedure NIP11 - Replacing Print Meehanislll
Perform the following steps to replace the print mechanism (see figure NIPlO).
1) Remove ac power cord from site outlet.
2) Disconnect internal connector which is on end of printer mechanism
signal cable and is located at back of power supply just above RS-232-C
input/output connector.
3) Tilt printer cabinet .up on either left or right side and loosen the four,
large, shock-mounting retainer screws which hold the print mechanism
to the chassis base and are accessible through four large, round holes
in the base of the cabinet.
CAUTION
Do not tilt printer cabinet up on its back with an
input/output connector attached to the rear of the
cabinet or serious connector damage will result.
4) While holding print mechanism so it does not fall, remove the four
retainer screws and separate mechanism from cabinet base. Carefully
lower cabinet base and print mechanism to normal resting position.
NOTE
An a I t e rna t e remova I method is to remove the
four hex nuts {and washers) that secure the metal
baseplate under the printer mechanism. Two of
these n u t s are at the front corners of the me chan ism and the other two also hold the power
supply shield. This method then requires removing the mechanism from the baseplate.
5) Replace print mechanism by doing the preceding steps in reverse order
(making sure mechanism is approximately centered in its mounting slots)
and then check operation thoroughly by following table NIPl, DOLT for
Nonimpact Printer.
·
6C-14
62957400A
Procedure NIP12 - Replacing Power Supply
Perform the following steps to replace the power supply (see figure NIPlO).
1) Remove ac power cord from site outlet.
2) Disconnect both quick-disconnect connectors from cable at right side
of power supply.
3) Remove two nuts which hold power supply shield in place (screws are
on cover flange between power supply and print mechanism) and Iift
cover free to provide clearance for power supply removal.
4) Unscrew four large screws (2 each side) from power supply mounting
flanges and slide power supply out from under print mechanism cable.
5) Replace power supply by doing the preceding steps in reverse order and
then check operation thoroughly by following table NIPl, DOLT for
Nonimpact Printer.
Procedure NI P13 -
•
Replacing/ Adjusting Miscellaneous Parts
If required to replace/adjust parts below the on-site spares level (on-site spares
being: power supply, fuses, and printer mechanism) refer to the Nonimpact Printer
Hardware Maintenance Manual {see preface for publication number).
62957400 A
6C-15
0
r
PAPER ROLL
\PAPER FEED ROLL
\
, - - PAPER GUIDE
\l----- ~
LPAPER ROD
PAPER GUIDE
FRONT OF
PRINTER
~PAPER ROD
00846-1
:!-.·.
figure NIPl. Paper Loading, Nonimpact Printer
6C-16
62957400A
START OF LINE
LED BLOCK
PRINT HEAD
CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY
LED BLOCK
CLAMPING SCREW
IGHT SHIELD
PADDLE BOARD
CONNECTOR BRACKET
END OF LINE
LED BLOCK
LOWDOWN
LED BLOCK
PRINT
HEAD
MOTOR
00894-1
BRAKE
POTENTIOMETER
PADDLE
BOARD
CONNECTOR
ANGLE BLOCK
PRINT HEAD
COMPENSATING
POTENTIOMETER
ROS
POTENTIOMETER
R70
l
MULTIVIBRATOR
POTENTIOMETER
SIGNAL PROCESSING BOARD
CONTROL LOGIC BOARD
CARD RETAINER
Figure NIP2.
62957400 A
Printer, Front View
6C-17
0
PLATEN
SOLENOID
HOUSING
UPPER
ECCENTRIC
STOP
GUIDE BAR
ARM
-
PRINTHEAD
MOTOR
VARIABLE
RESISTOR
JUNCTION
BOARD
PRINTHEAD _ / " ' /
CABLE
ADJUSTABLE
PULLEY
PRINT HEAD
MOTOR
CLOCK DISC
CABLE DRIVE
DRUM
,_BEARING HUB
Figure NIP3. Printer, Right Side View
6C-18
62957400A
BRAKE LED
BLOCK
SLEW
ECCENTRIC
SLEW AND BRAKE BRACKET
RETAINING SCREW
BRAKE LOCK
SCREW
Figure NIP4. Printer, Right Front View
1
~INCH
----PRINTHEAD
LEFT SIDE FRAME--.-.
02076
Figure Nl P5. Printhead Home Position
62957400 A
6C-19
.020 TO .025 INCH
PLATEN
'\I------SOLENOID
LOWER STOP
ECCENTRIC
PLUNGER
BAR
ARM
UPPER STOP
ECCENTRIC
02069
Figure NIP6. Guide .Bar Arm Travel
-DAMPER PAD
r
PLATEN SOLENOID PLUNGER
ADJUSTMENT SETSCREW - ·
LOCKNUT
---
OZ090
Figure Nl P7. Damper Pad Adjustment
J
6C-20
62957400A
LINE STEPPING MOTOR
OUT-OF-PAPER SWITCH
CONNECTOR P37
PC BOARD CONNECTORS
PAPER
Figure NIPS. Printer, Rear View
DATA--, START
I
2
3
1
4
1
s
6
7
p
STOPL
•
---u
TRIGGER
DOS
MV
figure Nl P9. Serial Clock Timing
62957400 A
6C-21
CONTROL
LOGIC CARD
PRINT MECHANISM _L..::.------~
MOUNTING SCREWS
(2 UNDER EACH SIDE)
Figure NIPlO.
Location of Major Replaceable Modules
TABLE NIP2. PRINT QUALITY
PROBLEM
I
Too light across entire page
!
'
I
ADJUSTMENT
PROCEDUR~
NIPS, Head Compensating Circuit Adjustment
Nl P7, Printhead Actuation Adjustment
Uneven density across page
Nl P7, Printhead Actuation Adjustment
Uneven density from top to
bottom of character
Nl P7, Printhead Actuation Adjustment
)
6C·22
lJ.
62957400A
TABLE IMP1. DOLT FOR IMPACT PRINTER (SHEET 1 OF 4)
POWER ON AND EXTERNAL SWITCH CHECKS (EXCLUDING TEST PRINT)
ASSUME
Printer installed properly per procedure in appendix of associated Operators Guide/Reference Manual (see preface)
Paper, ribbon, and format tape loaded (procedure IMP3, 4, and 5) and power ON/OFF switch pressed to ON
(procedure IMP1).
CONDITIONS
Is power on at printer (ON/OFF switch on and drive motor running)?
Is ON/OFF switch on but motor not running?
SITUATIONS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
y y y y NN No
- y N
----
--N- - - - --
y y N N
Does FORM FEED operate correctly?
Does forms runaway condition (continuous paper feed) occur?
(Stop runaway by pressing power OFF.)
Does START/STOP switch light/extinguish when pressed/repressed?
-
-
y
y N -
T
H
E
R
SEQUENCE
ACTIONS
-
-
- -
Perform TEST PRJ NT, sheet 2 of this DD LT.
X -
Check that front access panel is in place activating interlock switch (or if front
panel open, interlock switch pulled up).
-
-
Check power available from site outlet (see specifications in section 1 for 60-Hz
and 50-Hz printer input power).
-
- - -
-
-
Check ON/OFF circuit breaker indicator portion for continuity (figures IMP12 and
IMP13); replace ON/OFF switch/indicator if necessary (procedure IMP17).
-
-
--
2
---
Check internal cables/connections (figures IMP11, 12, 13, and 14 and
procedure IMP14).
Disconnect ac power cord and check power cord and ON/OFF switch for continuity;
replace as necessary (procedure IMP17).
-
-
- - - -
- - - -
Check/replace drive motor (procedure IMP17).
Check/replace format tape (procedure IMPS) and format reader (procedures IMP15
and IMP17).
-
Open logic chassis panel (procedure IMP6) and observe printed circuit boards for
proper seating (figure IMP6).
-
-
1 2 2
Check/replace fuse(s) on power supply board (procedure IMPI2); replace power
supply board (procedure IMP7).
- -
Check/replace line filter 3LF01 (procedure IMP17), ·
Check/replace fuse(s) on driver board (procedure IMPJ2); replace driver board if
required (procedure IMP9),
Replace common controller board (procedure IMP7).
Replace RS-232 interface board (procedure IMP7).
Switch power OFF and check subject switch for continuity; replace if required
(procedure IMP17).
Check subject switch cables/wires to/from switch and circuits (procedure IMPI4).
See detailed diagrams/information in field service manual for printer (see preface)
and check/adjust/replace further procedures IMP15, 16, and 17.
Call for assistance.
Note: After completing any repairs or maintenance, verify that the printer is
operational by activating TEST PRJ NT,
62957400 A
---
1 1
3 3
- - - 2 -
---
-
4
5
6
3 4 7
4
-
- 5 5
---
- -
2
-
3
6
5
7
-
-
-
--
-- -
-
-
-
- -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - 9 -
8
-
9
-
-
-
1 1 4
- - - - - - 3 2
- - - - - 3
- - - - -4
Check/replace power transformer 2T01 (procedure IMP17).
1
5 8
-
-
X
--
60-1
TABLE IMPl. DOLT FOR IMPACT PRINTER (SHEET 2 OF 4)
TEST PRINT
ASSUME
Power on and external switch checks of sheet I of this DOLT ran OK and power is still on.
CONDITIONS
SITUATIONS
I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
With START/STOP switch extinguished (offline), activate TEST PRINT switch.
Does printer produce printout of Impact Printer TEST PRINT Pattern exactly as
shown in figure TS5.
y N N NN NN N
Are forms feeding correctly (by not being in runaway condition or otherwise
incorrectly advancing)?
(Stop runaway by pressing power OFF.)
y NN y y y y y
Is printhead movement correct?
y N-
NY y y y
Is there any printout?
y
Are all portions of all characters printed?
y N-
Is each character printed the proper one?
y N-
-
-
-
Is ribbon advancing properly? (Ribbon will advance in either direction depending
on position of reversing levers; check this.)
y N-
-
-
- -
N -
ACTIONS
NY y y
NY y
NY
N
- - - -
I 2
I
I
I
-
2 5 2 2 2
Replace common controller board (procedure IMP7).
-
3 4
Replace LSI equivalent board (procedure IMP7).
-
-
6 3 4
Press power to OFF and check forT EST PRINT switch continuity, replace if
required (procedure IMPI7).
-
4
-
-
Check/replace fuse(s) in power supply board (procedure IMPI2); replace power
supply board if required (procedure IMP9).
--
3
---
-
--- -
I
I
- - - - 3 - -
-
--
- -
-
3
-
-
-
5
See detailed field service manual and parts manual (see preface) and check/
adjust/replace until fault is found (procedures IMPI5, 16, and 17).
-
7 7 6 9 7 4 4
Replace character start board (procedure IMPII).
Call for assistance.
Note: After completing any repairs or maintenance, verify that the printer
is operational by activating TEST PRINT.
60-2
-
- - -
--
-
-
3 3 2
Check/replace switching relay and/or power triacs on logic chassis backplane
(procedure IMPI7).
Replace line start board (procedure IMPIO).
R
-
Check/replace fuse(s) on driver board (procedure IMPI2), replace driver board if
required (procedure IMP9).
Check cables between driver board ond printheod (procedure IMPI4).
E
-
Open logic chassis panel (procedure IMP6) and observe printed circuit boards for
proper seating (figure IMP6).
Check/replace format tape (procedure IMPS) and format reader (procedures
(procedures IMPI5 and IMPI7).
H
-
X -
Check/adjust/replace printhead (procedures IMPI5, 16, and 17).
T
SEQUENCE
Perform print quality checks; sheet 3 of this DOLT.
Check TEST PRINT switch cables/wires to/from switch and circuits
(procedure IMPI4).
0
-
- -
6 5
- 2
--
-
- - I --- - - ----5 4 -- . -6 - 4 7 - -- - - 5 8 6 - - -- ------X
~
62957400 A
TABLE IMPl. DOLT FOR IMPACT PRINTER (SHEET 3 OF 4)
PRINT QUALITY CHECKS
ASSUME
TEST PRINT operation per sheet 2 of this DOLT completed and resulting printout available for print quality analysis.
CONDITIONS
SITUATIONS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Is printing dark enough across entire page?
y y y y y y y y N
Is printing density even for each of the seven vertical dots in the ?-horizontal
by 7-vertical dot matrix of each character?
y y y y y y y N-
Are the dots which compose each character evenly spaced from each other
horizontally?
y y y y y y N
Are adjacent characters uniformly spaced from each other horizontally across
entire page?
y y y y y N-
Is the leftmost column of characters uniformly aligned on the left margin?
y y y y N-
Are the 132 columns of characters uniformly aligned one under the other down
entire page?
y y y N-
Is spacing between I ines of characters even/proper down entire page?
y y N-
Are 132 characters printed in each line?
y N -
-
-
-
- -
--
--- -
0
T
H
E
R
-
SEQUENCE
ACTIONS
Print quality checks OK. Perform remaining printer checks, sheet 4 of
this DOLT.
-
- -
-
--
-
Check/adjust forms density control lever (see paper loading procedure IMP3).
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 1 -
Check for warn out ribbon and replace if necessary (see ribbon changing/
loading procedure IMP4).
-
- - - - - -
2 2
Check format tape for correct punching or for worn format tape; replace if
necessary (procedure IMPS).
-
-
- - -
Check/adjust printhead alignment with platen (procedure IMP15); replace
printhead assembly if necessary (procedure IMP17).
X -
1
- - - -
Check/adjust ribbon tracking (procedure IMP15).
- - - - - - - - - - -
Check/adjust drive belts for clutch and printhead (procedure IMP15); replace
if necessary (procedure IMP17).
-
3
Check/adjust code disc assembly (procedure IMP15); replace parts if
necessary (procedure IMP17).
-
3 3
-
-
4 4
-
-
1 2 1 1
- -
-
- -
-
2 4 2 2
-
- -
Check/adjust line start and character start synchronization (procedure IMP16);
replace parts as necessary (procedure IMP17).
-
2
-
3 3 3 3
-
- -
Check/adjust format reader and paper motion system (procedure IMP15);
replace parts as necessary (procedure IMP17).
- -
2
- - -
Check/adjust dashpot to prevent printhead assembly rebounding on returning
home (procedure IMP15): replace worn out parts as necessary
(procedure IMP17).
- - - -
Check/adjust end-of-line switch (procedure IMP15), replace parts as
necessary (procedure IMP17).
-
1
See detailed field service manual and parts manual (see preface) and check/
adjust/replace until fault is found (procedure IMP15, 16, and 17).
-
4 3 4 4 4 4 5 5
-
- -
X
Call for assistance.
Note: After completing any repairs or maintenance, verify that the printer
is operational by activating TEST PRINT.
62957400 A
1
- - -
- - - - -
- - - -
-- - -
-
- -
- -
- -
60-3
TABLE IMPl. DDLT FOR IMPACT PRINTER (SHEET 4 OF 4)
PRINTER/CRT INTERFACE CHECKS
ASSUME
Power is on at the printer and all printer switch operations (including TEST PRINT) check OK per preceding sheets of
this table. Printer input/output cable connected either to keyboard display PERIPHERAL CONNECTOR and keyboard
display terminal is operational.
CONDITIONS
Do the impact printer test portion of procedure TS6 from the step where the START/STOP switch is
pressed to I ight the switch indicator up to the end of the impact printer test. Assure that keyboard
switches are set per beginning of printer checkout steps and that rear panel TEST/NORMAL switch
of display is in TEST position. After these test steps, use keyboard REPEAT and character key to
print several print lines (132 characters a line). Does printer perform all checks properly?
SITUATIONS
1
2
0
T
y N H
E
Caution: Do not allow a printer to continuously print adjacent columns for more than 5 minutes
maximum at a time or solenoid assemblies will overheat and be damaged.
ACTIONS
Printer works OK. Return to table TS1.
Check input/output cable at printer and at other end.
Open logic chassis panel (procedure IMP6) and observe for proper printed circuit board seating
in the printer logic rack (especially check RS-232 interface board).
R
SEQUENCE
- - 1 X
Observe for proper connections from printer logic module to input/output connector.
-
3
Remove RS-232 interface board (procedure IMP7), and check that all switches/jumpers are
properly set for this subsystem (procedure IMPS). Reinstall RS-232 interface board
(procedure IMP7).
-
4
Replace RS-232 interface board (procedure IMP7) with a new board making sure new board
has proper switch/jump settings for this subsystem (procedure IMPS).
Replace common controller board (procedure IMP7).
-
See detailed field service manual and parts manual (see preface) and check/adjust/replace
until fault found (procedure IMP15, 16, and 17).
-
Replace LSI equivalent board (procedure IMP7).
Call for assistance.
3
-
2
5
6
-
-
s 7
-
9
X
Note: After completing any repairs or maintenance, verify that the subsystem is
operational by rerunning test mode.
60-4
62957400 A
IMPACT PRINTER CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES - GENERAL
The following pages identify procedures referenced either from table IMPl, DOLT
for Impact Printer, or elsewhere within this manual. In addition, other procedures
which may serve useful are identified. This impact printer has two companion
manuals (see preface), which cover the detailed remove/replace procedures, adjustments, and all parts data identification. Whenever such procedures are identified
on the following pages, a reference appears to send the reader to the proper procedural details in the companion field service manual.
For the IMP, information provided in this hardware maintenance manual, plus
detailed data in the companion field service and parts manuals, allows troubleshooting
down to a very detailed level. This is in keeping with the policy of being able to
perform detailed troubleshooting and repair at the customer site for medium and large
printer equipments. This philosophy differs with the modular repair level approach
used for small, lightweight printers such as the NIP.
Generally, it is at the discretion of the customer engineer making a service call to
decide at which level adjustments or remove and replace procedures should be done
for the best overall results at any particular site. This decision must take into
consideration the availability of possible required spare parts, and availability/type
of test equipment and tools which are required for different level adjustment/replacement procedures.
The two companion manuals support maintenance down to the level of internal clutch
parts, PC board components, and complex adjustments which require special tools/
talents. The maintenance philosophy of this hardware maintenance manual is to
I imit the detailed level of maintenance for a printer when used as a peripheral device
with ad isplay terminal. On the site, this means maintaining certain areas of the
printer at a higher level than may be possible by using all information available in
the manuals. Specifically, these limitations are defined as follows.
62957400 A
60-5
•
Do not break the printhead assembly down to the solenoid level, etc.,
nor attempt to adjust extension of the stylus pins (print wire ends). This
means do not loosen solenoid assemblies to adjust their armature position
on the stylus pins. Rather, remove/replace the entire printhead assembly
(procedure IMP7).
•
On the hammer driver circuit board, replace fuses only (procedure IMP12),
otherwise replace the whole board (procedure IMP9).
•
Repair any of the four logic boards in the logic chassis only by replacing
them at the board level (procedure IM P9) except for on-board fuses
(procedure IMP 12) •
•
Any/all I ight sensors should be replaced only at their board level (see
procedures IMPl 0 and IMPll).
Procedure IMP1 - Turning On Impact Printer Power
To turn power on the impact printer, perform the following:
T) Verify ac power cord connected to proper power from site outlet.
2) Verify paper forms installed/aligned (procedure IMP3).
3) Verify ribbon installed (procedure IMP4).
4) Verify format tape installed (procedure IMP5).
60-6
62957400 A
5) Press ON/OFF switch to ON (switch illuminates when power is on),
6) Press START/STOP switch to START (switch illuminates when in start
condition) to place printer online. If offline condition is desired for
testing, leave this switch in stop condition (not illuminated).
If desirable to check printer operating capability, place START/STOP switch to
STOP (not illuminated) and proceed as follows (if a fault should occur 1 start
troubleshooting at table IMPl, DDLT for Impact Printer):
1) Press FORM FEED switch and observe that forms advance one page (as
determined by a page sentinel on the format tape channel one).
NOTE
FORM FEED is inoperable when printer is in on1ine condition (START/STOP switch illuminated).
Also, do not activate FORM FEED switch with
the format reader tape off or read e r mechen ism
open because that causes a forms runaway condition {constant paper feeding). To stop such a
runaway condition, press 0 N /0 F F s w itch to
OFF (extinguished), close the format reader on
a format tape (procedure IMPS) 1 and turn power
switch to ON (lit) again.
2) Press TEST PRINT switch (illuminated) and observe the Impact Printer
TEST PRINT Pattern, shown in figure TSS, prints. Press TEST PRINT
switch again to stop this test (switch extinguished).
NOTE
TEST PRINT switch is operable only when printer
is not on I ine (START/STOP switch extinguished),
the front cover interlock switch is closed, and
when no power supply faults exist. If paper forms
should runout 1 TEST PRINT will still operate.
"'
.
62957400A
6D-7
Procedure IMP2 - Turning Off Impact Printer Power
To turn off printer power 1 perform the following:
1) Press ON/OFF switch on front panel to off -
it should extinguish.
2) If desired to remove all power applied to printer cabinet (such as for
moving power supply components or just to be doubly safe when working
inside cabinet), disconnect ac power cord from site outlet.
Procedure IMP3 - Installing/Aligning Paper Forms in Impact Printer
To install/align paper forms in the impact printer, use the following procedure.
Select paper forms from those recommended under the heading Impact Printer Forms
at the end of this procedure.
1) Turn printer power off (ON/OFF switch), lift front access panel slightly,
slide it to front of printer cabinet, and lower access panel carefully to
its open hanging position at front of cabinet.
2) Place stack of fanfold forms behind printer, directly below forms feed slot.
3) Insert top form into forms feed slot under tension bars (figure IMP1) and
continue to slide form in until it is visible at front of printer.
4) Stand at front of printer and open left tractor flap. Position form on left
tractor feed pins and close tractor flap.
5) Replace front access panel. Using the column guide on panel for forms
position reference, slide left tractor for desired left margin on paper
(tractors have fairly stiff friction clamps which require firm pressure to
release).
·
6) Open right tractor flap, slide right tractor as necessary to left or right
so tractor feed pins fit in right side feed holes of taut, non-skewed paper
form, and close right tractor flap.
7) Set Forms Density Control lever according to forms thickness. Move lever
toward rear of cabinet for thicker, multiple-part forms and toward front
for thin forms. After starting printing, adjust this lever for best print quality.
8) Turn printer on and activate FORM FEED switch to position format tape
reader at top of forms position.
6D-8
62957400 A
9) While pressing Clutch Retractor lever, use Forms Positioning Knob to
advance form to intended first I ine of print (directly under printhead•s
present position).
10) Release Clutch Retractor lever. Forms should be ready for printing.
Impact Printer Forms
Impact printers use fanfolded forms that have sprocket drive holes along each side.
For best print quality and printer operation, the forms and ribbons used in impact
printers should meet the following general requirements.
The printer will handle standard continuous forms paper with feed holes on each edge,
with or without marginal perforations.
The forms may be from 4 to 16.75 in (101.6 to 425 mm) in width including margins,
and 3.5 to 18 in (88.9 to 457 mm) long from fold to fold. When using the output
paper basket, the forms length is limited to 11 in (279 mm) from fold to fold.
The forms must have sprocket holes punched along both margins 0.25 ±0.03 in (6.35
±0.76 mm) from the paper edge to the hole center lines. The distance between hole
centerlines must be 0.50 ±0.005 in (12.7 ±0. 13 mm) nonaccumulative, and the
diameter of the holes should be 0.156 ±0.010 in (3.9 to 0.25 mm). Multiple-part
forms must be suitably fastened with nonmetallic fasteners. The following I ist
specifies the recommended forms in terms of parts and weights.
Parts
White Sulphite Bond Paper
Carbon Paper
15 pound continuous bond (56 g/m2)
24 pound continuous bond (90 g/m 2)
2 and 3
12 pound continuous bond (45 g/m2)
8 pound (14 g/m2)
2 and 3
15 pound continuous bond (56 g/m2)
8 pound (19 g/m 2 )
4 and 5
12 pound continuous bond (45 g/m2)
6 pound (14 g/m 2 )
(
\...
62957400 A
60-9
Procedure IMP4 - Installing Ribbon in Impact Printer
This procedure describes the various operations required for installing ribbon in the
impact printer. Use ribbon and ribbon materials as specified under the heading
Impact Printer Ribbon Materials at the end of this procedure.
If the replacement ribbon for the printer comes supplied on a single spool, unload
used ribbon from one spool for reuse as follows:
1) Press power ON/OFF switch to OFF and open front access panel.
2) Remove ribbon (on spools) from ribbon path in printer (figure IMP2).
3) Place spool with most ribbon on right ribbon mandrel (figure IMP2).
4) Place other spool on stationary rewind mandrel located just behind right
ribbon mandrel.
5) Turn printer on.
6) When ribbon stops turning, remove both spools, pull ribbon leader from
empty spool, and use empty spool for spool loading procedure which
follows.
If the replacement ribbon for the printer comes supplied on a single spool, load it
on an empty spool (unload/emptied per preceding steps) for the required second
spool as follows:
1) Route ribbon from full spool onto empty spool as shown in figure IMP3.
Wrap ribbon leader over one of arrow-shaped holding clamps on empty
spool hub and pull ribbon back into point of arrow of clamp until sol idly
hooked. Do not pull so hard that clamp at hub bends up. A minimum of
6 in (152.4 mm) of ribbon must exist between point of attachment and
reversing eyelet which is imbedded in ribbon end. This is to allow actuating reversing lever next to right mandrel when ribbon is fully unwound
from right spool.
2) Wind 5 to 6 turns of ribbon onto empty spool. Ribbon is ready for loading
in printer.
60-10
62957400 A
To load a ribbon that is already on two spools, refer to figure IMP2 and perform the
following:
1) Place full spool on left ribbon mandrel.
2) Route ribbon around guide rollers making sure it passes through slot in
ribbon-reversing sense lever.
3) Route ribbon between ribbon guide and printhead and around front guide
roller on printhead.
4) Route ribbon behind rear guide roller on printhead and then all the way
right to behind far guide roller.
5) Route ribbon in front of next guide, through slot in ribbon-reversing
sense lever, and behind last guide roller.
6) Place empty spool on right ribbon mandrel.
7) Slide printhead all the way to right and allow it to spring back. This
should route ribbon beneath tip of clamp on printhead and ribbon should
,
now be ready for printing.
Impact Printer Ribbon Materials
The ribbon used in this impact printer is 0.5 in (12.7 mm) wide by 66 feet (20m) long
and runs on an angle across the printing area in order to print on the full width of the
ribbon. The ribbon must have an eyelet located at least 6 in (152 mm) from each end
for automatic ribbon reversal. Nylon or silk ribbons only must be used. A single
spool ribbon must be attached to an empty spool before installation in the printer.
The following are recommended ribbon materials:
Item
62957400 A
CDC Part Number
Ribbon and Spools
95371700
Empty Ribbon Spool
76616500
Cleaning Solvent
Any standard commerical type,
i.e., Brief, Formula 409, etc.
60-11
Procedure IMP5 -
Installing Format Tape in Impact Printer
This procedure describes installing the required format tape in the impact printer.
Without a format tape in place, printer use will result in a forms runaway condition
(no control over forms advance). Use format tape and material as specified under
the heading Impact Printer Format Tape Materials at the end of this procedure.
1) Press power ON/OFF switch to OFF.
2) Remove format reader housing by pulling it, bottom first, away from
printer from left side.
3) Lift brush block tension lever.
4) Thread format tape loop between brush block and drive sprocket making
sure that channel 1 is at the inside (see figure IMP4 and IMPS). Be
certain that tape holes fit neatly over drive sprocket pins.
5) Route the remaining loop of format tape using either path A or path Bas
shown in figure IMP4 depending on tape length. Use path B when tension
arm cannot take up all slack with tape in path A, or if tension arm is so
extended as to touch housing when tape is in path A.
6) Lower brush block tension lever.
7) Replace format reader housing by pressing it, top first, over framework of
format reader from left side. Format tape should be ready for operation.
Impact Printer Format Tape Materials
The format tape used in this impact printer is a standard 1 in (25.4 mm) wide tape
with sprocket holes on 0.1 in (2.54 mm) centers (figure IM P5). The standard format
tape (CDC Part No. 76621000) comes with channel 3 (line feed) already punched.
Channel 1 should be punched to correspond to the top of forms positions. Channel 2
may be punched at any vertical tab desired. The format tape may be any length
from 5.5 to 12.5 in (139.7 to 317.5 mm).
The person servicing the customer site is not normally required to supply format tapes
to the customer. If a person wishes, properly punched spare format tapes may be
brought to the site for test purposes. If, however, tape must be punched at the site,
a special Format Tape Punch (CDC Part No. 76657900) must be used along with
adhesive Format Tape Splice (CDC Part No. 76628200). The proper use of these
items is fully described in the companion field service manual for the impact printer
(see preface). The customer may purchase and have on site whatever format tape
and punching/splicing equipment/materials are necessary.
6D-12
62957400 A
To gain access to interior ports/assemblies of the impact printer, open/remove the
cabinet as described by the following procedures.
Open/remove the front access panel (to gain access to entire ribbon path and I ine
start circuit board) as follows:
1) Raise front edge of access panel slightly up, carefully slide it toward
front of printer until the two retaining tongs (one at the far bock on each
end of access panel) ore fully forward in their slots in upper cabinet, and
gently lower access panel until it hongs at front of printer cabinet.
2) Remove panel from cabinet (if desired; for example, in preparation for
removing entire cabinet) by lifting panel up again, swinging left side
toward back as far as comfortable without jamming it, moving right side
of panel toward front and lifting it so right tong I ifts out from under cabinet
top, and moving entire panel toward the right and front so it I ifts off cabinet.
Open the rear logic chassis panel (to gain access to back interior of cabinet including
logic chassis, input/output connector, driver board, tractor assembly locks/connector,
etc.) as follows:
1) loosen the four twist-lock fasteners located along top and side of backpanel
(which covers entire back of printer cabinet), one quarter turn counterclockwise.
2) Carefully tilt top of panel back and lower it so it hangs on its retaining'
chain.
Interior of cabinet has hazardous voltage.
Exercise extreme caution if power is left on or
turn power off and disconnect oc power cord from
site outlet.
Remove the entire uppP.r cabinet (to gain access to front interior of cabinet including
drive motor, clutch, drive belt, character start assembly, code disc, pulley
assembly, etc.) as follows:
1) Open rear logic chassis panel by preceding two steps.
2) Disconnect tractor assembly cable connector on logic chassis
backplane board (figure IMPlO).
62957400 A
60-13
3) Release tractor assembly by reaching into upper left and right corners of
rear panel opening, pressing the two tractor assembly locks, and lifting
tractor assembly off. Set tractor assembly aside in a safe place.
4) Grasp upper cabinet firmly on each side and lift straight up to release
it from its spring-loaded fasteners. Carefully continue raising cabinet
until it clears interior parts and set it aside in a safe place.
Replace any/all of the items removed in this procedure by reversing the steps which
removed them •
Procedure IMP7 -
Ramovi ../Raplacing Logic Chassis PC Boards
To remove PC boards from the logic chassis, perform the following:
1) Press power ON/OFF switch to OFF.
2) Open rear logic chassis panel (procedure IMP6).
3) Release friction clamp arms holding board (figure IMP6) in place.
4) Withdraw board from card cage.
To replace PC boards in the logic chassis, perform the following:
5) Press power ON/OFF switch to OFF.
6) If board contains switches and/or jumpers, check the settings/placements
(figure IMP7) per terminal subsystem requirements.
7) Place board in correct logication (figure IMP6) and carefully slide board
in track until board touches connector sockets at back.
8) Carefully draw board into connector sockets by evenly and firmly locking
both friction clamps.
60-14
62957400 A
Procedure IMPB - Checking/Setting Internal Switches and Jumpers
To check/set internal switches and jumpers for the impact printer, proceed as follows:
1) Open rear logic chassis panel (procedure IMP6).
2) Remove RS-232-C interface board 1A04 (procedure IMP7).
3) Verify that all switches and jumpers (figure IMP7) conform to the interface
configuration required for correct operation with the keyboard display
logic (refer to impact printer installation procedures in associated Operators
Guide/Reference Manual; see preface).
4) Replace RS-232-C interface board in slot 1A04 (procedure IMP7).
Procedure IMP9 - Removing/Replacing Driver PC Board
1
To remove the drive PC board 2A01 (figure IMP15), perform the following:
1) Press power ON/OFF switch to OFF.
2) Open rear logic chassis panel (procedure IMP6).
NOTE
Before replacing a suspected faulty driver board,
i n s p e c t the four so I en o i d fuses on the board
(procedure IMP12). If replacing a faulty fuse
solves the problem, do not proceed with replacing
the driver board •
3) Reach in through rear panel accessway and remove the two screws from
printhead ribbon-cable rete iner at lower center of driver board.
4) Carefully pull each of the four connectors from driver board (these are
2J01, 2J02, 2J03, and 2J04 as shown on figure IMPS) being careful to
note/mark which is top/bottom of each connector so proper reconnection
is possible.
5) Using a short stubby screwdriver, remove four screws located along bottom
of driver board and lift driver board out of cabinet through rear panel
accessway.
To replace the hammer driver board, perform the preceding removal steps in reverse
order.
62957400 A
60-15
Procedure IMP10 - Re•oving/Replacing Line Start PC Boanl
To remove the line start PC board 3A01 (figure IMP15), perform the following:
1) Press power 0 N/OFF switch to OFF.
2) Open front access panel (procedure IMP6).
3) Slide printhead halfway toward right and block it with some nonmetallic
object between printhead and left chassis endplate (a thin, hardcover
book may be placed, binding down, between printhead guide rods and
between printhead and left endplate).
4) Reach down under left end of printhead guide rods and disconnect connector
3J02 from line start board (figure IMP10).
5) Using a short stubby screwdriver, remove both screws located diagonally
in middle of line start board and Iift board out.
To replace the Iine start PC board, perform the preceding removal steps in reverse
order.
Procedure IMP11 - Re•oving/Replacing Character Start PC Board
To remove the character start PC board 3A02 (figure IMP15), perform the following:
1) Press power ON/OFF switch to OFF.
2) Remove entire upper cabinet (procedure IMP6).
3) Disconnect connector 3J04 from character start board (figure IMP1 0).
4) Remove both screws located diagonally in middle of character start board
and carefully remove board away from code disc assembly.
To replace the character start board, perform the preceding removal steps in reverse
order.
60-16
62957400 A
Procedure IMP12 - C11eck/Replace Fuses
Fuses are located in three different functional areas within the impact printer. These
locations are: hammer driver board 2A01, power supply board 1A01 in the logic
chassis, and (for 50-Hz units only) in each of the four secondary outputs from power
transformer 2T01.
Check/replac~
hammer driver board fuse(s) as follows:
1) Press power ON/OFF switch to OFF.
2) Open rear logic chassis panel (procedure IMP6).
3) Carefully observe suspect fuse (figure IMPS) and replace with n new
fuse if burned out.
Check/replace power supply board fuse(s) as follows:
1) Press power ON/OFF to OFF.
2) Open rear logic chassis panel (procedure IMP6).
I
3) Observe fuses (figure IMP9). Replace if burned out.
Check/replace each fuse in the secondary of 2T01 (figure IMP15) in a 50-Hz unit
as follows:
1) Press power ON/OFF to OFF.
2) Remove entire upper cabinet (procedure IMP6).
3) Observe fuses (figure IMP10). Replace if burned out. Identification
for these power transformer fuses is as follows:
Top fuse (2F01): 10 A (+28 V de)
Second fuse down (2F02): 6.25 A (+13 V de)
Third fuse down (2F03): 1 A (+16 V de)
Bottom fuse (2F04): 1 A (+24 V de)
62957400 A
60-17
Procedure IMP13 - Re•oving/Replacb• Internal Cables
To remove any cable with the printer, on either or both ends, proceed as follows:
1) Press power ON/OFF switch to OFF.
2) Refer to internal cable/connector diagrams (figures IMP11, 12, 13, and
14) for cable general location/routing. See figures IMP11 and IMP16 for
chassis connector locations.
WARNING
For any cable/wiring on the primary side of the
power transformer (2T01), the input power cord
must be disconnected from the site power outlet.
A Iso, whenever working near any portion of
inRut power, whether input lines or various
term in a I blocks/pins, the power cord must be
d is connected • It is good practice to a Iways
disconnect the input power cord when doing any
remove/replace work inside the printer. The
exception to this may be removing the slide-out
logic chassis circuit cards or others i m i I a r I y
simple procedures which may require only the
0 N/0 FF s w itch set to 0 F F • If in doubt,
always disconnect the input power cord from the
site outlet.
3) Open cabinet as required to gain access to cable (procedure IMP6).
4) While carefully noting pin orientation/location to enable proper reconnection (mark/tag if required), carefully disconnect desired cable.
5) Remove any/all cable ties which may hold cable in place. Make it a
point to remember where such ties were placed for proper retying later.
6) Carefully work entire length of cable (and attached connectors) free
from its route and out of printer.
60-18
62957400 A
Replace any cable within the printer as follows:
7) Verify having correct cable (see impact printer parts manual identified
in preface of this manual).
8) Carefully work cable (and attached connectors) into its proper place (see
impact printer parts manual and field service manual, both identified in
pr'3face of this manual).
9) Secure as required with cable ties.
10) Carefully reconnect connections properly.
11) Close cabinet and/or apply power (procedure IMP1) as desired.
Procedure IMP14 - Checking Internal Cables
To check internal cables, perform the following:
1) Open cabinet as required (procedure IMP6) to access cable.
2) Visually inspect connections. If loose or open, secure, and if using
this procedure from a DD.LT, return to the DOLT and check results before
proceeding with following steps of this procedure.
3) Disconnect cable connections from both ends of suspected wire(s)
(procedure IMP13, steps 1 through 4).
4) Carefully inspect connector pins on both ends for possible damage. If
damaged pin(s) found, replace pin(s), connector in which pin(s) reside,
or entire cable (procedure IMP13, steps 4 through 11) - whichever
best meets existing spares availability and immediate customer needs.
Refer to the impact printer parts manual (see preface) for all parts
identification.
5) Using the interconnection diagrams provided in the impact printer field
service manual (see preface), do a pin-to-pin continuity check with an
ohmmeter or continuity-checking idiot- Iight.
6) If open wire(s) found, repair if possible/desired (solder loose connection
at connector or replace broken wire in bundle) or replace faulty cable
with a new one (procedure IM P13, steps 4 through 11).
62957400 A
60-19
Procedure IMP15 - Mechanical Checks/ Adjustments '
A variety of detailed mechanical checks and adjustments may be performed on the
impact printer at the customer site. The field service manual (see preface)
contains the procedures for such tasks in its Maintenance section. The procedures
provided there, which meet the maintenance philosophy for the printer as part of
the terminal subsystem, are as follows:
•
Belt Tens ion
•
Clutch Assembly
•
Ribbon Tracking
•
Printhead (except printwire ends adjustment)
•
Code Disc Assembly
•
Paper Motion System
•
Format Reader Brush
•
Dashpot
•
Ribbon Reversing Switch
•
Out of Paper Switch
•
Clamp Lever (tractor)
•
End of Line Switch
When it appears necessary to perform any of these checks/adjustments, do so using
the tools and materials specified in the procedures and listed at the beginning of
the Maintenance section in the field service manual.
Procedure IMP16 - Electrical Checks/Adjustments
A few electrical checks and adjustments may be performed on the impact
printer at the customer site. The field service manual (see preface) contains the
procedures for such tasks in the Maintenance section. When it appears necessary to
perform any of these checks/adjustments, do so using the tools and materials specified
in the procedures (and listed at the beginning of the Maintenance section in the field
service manual). The electrical check/adjustment procedures provided there, which
meet the maintenance philosophy for the printer as part of a terminal subsystem, are
as follows:
60-20
•
+5-V de Output Voltage Adjustment
•
Line Start and Character Start Synchronization (oscilloscope required)
•
Character Firing Time and Width Adjustment (oscilloscope required)
62957400 A
Procedure IMP17 -
Parts Replacement
The field service manual (see preface) contains the procedures for replacing many
subassembly parts within the impact printer. These are in addition to the remove/
replace procedures given preceding in this section. A list of these parts replacement
procedures follows. When it appears necessary to perform any of these replacements,
do so using the tools and materials specified in the procedures (and listed at the
beginning of the Maintenance section in the field service manual). The replacement
procedures provided there, which meet the maintenance philosophy for the printer as
part of a terminal subsystem, are as follows:
CAUTION
When removing/rep I acing any assembly/part,
always, as a minimum, press power ON/OFF
switch to OFF. This prevents mechanism motion
and also prevents e I e c t ric a I arcing when disconnecting circuits. If working near or replacing/
disconnecting any input power circuits, a I ways
d is connect the input power cord from the site
poweroutlet. It is good practice toalwaysdisconnect the input power cord whenever working
on any of the circuits within the printer.
i
I
•
Drive Motor
•
Intermediate PulleyAssembly
•
Clutch Drive Mechanism
•
Right Ribbon Mechanism
•
Support Shaft Assembly
•
Dash pot Assembly
•
Printhead Disassembly (removal part only, disassembly not recommended
at customer site)
•
Code Disc Pulley Assembly
•
Left Ribbon Assembly
•
Paper Motion System
•
Format Reader Brush
62957400 A
6D-21
•
Format Reader Brush Block
•
Format Reader Disassembly
•
Platen Removal
•
Cooling Fan Assembly
To replace items not included either in the preceding I ist or in the preceding
procedures in this section (ON/OFF circuit breaker switch, power transformer,
various backplane components, etc.) refer to the impact printer parts manual (see
preface) for parts identification and disassembly/assembly drawings. Use the tools
and materials specified at the beginning of the Maintenance section in the field
service manual (see preface) and proceed to disassemble (remove) and replace the
necessary item according to the parts drawings.
60-22
62957400A
FRONT
ACCESS
PANEL
TRACTOR FLAPS--FORMS
POSITIONING
KNOB
~x
0
)
I
NOTE: FOR SINGLE-PART FORMS USE ONLY THE TWO
CENTER TENSION BARS. SWING THE OUTER TWO TENSION
BARS UPAWAY FROMTHEFORMS. FORMULTIPLE-PART
FORMS, ALL FOUR TENS I 0 N BARS ARE NORMALLY USED.
FOR NARROW FORMS, ANY TENSION BAR NOT COVERING
THE FORM WITH AT LEAST HALF OF ITS WIDTH S H0 U LD BE
LIFTED. IF FORMS TEAR AT THE SPROCKET HOLES,
TENSION BAR SHOULD BE LIFTED UNTIL THE TEARING IS
ELIMINATED.
CLUTCH RETRACTOR LEVER
~_~
-(
I
'
FORMS
DENSITY
CONTROL
Figure IMPl. Forms Installing/Aligning in Impact Printer
62957400 A
60-23
REAR
STATIONARY
REWIND
/MANDREL
PRINTHEAD
ASSEMBLY
REVERSING
EYELET
.....,._RIGHT
RIBBON
MANDREL
FRONT
02006
Figure IMP2. Ribbon Path in Impact Printer
FULL
SPOOL
02006
CLAMP
figure IMP3. Ribbon Positioning on Spools
60-24
62957400A
BRUSH BLOCK
TENSION LEVER
02006
Figure IMP4. Format Tape Path in Impact Printer
* 0.01 ....
1-------- 25.4
I.OOO:t .0031n:.___ _ _ _ _---t
9.96:tO.Oim•
~--+---'·'3 .0.05••
.072 z .0021n
2.54zO.Jm•
.100:1. .0041n
TYP. NON. ACCUIII.
2.54 z 0.05 mm._
.IOOz.0021n
5.01:!:0.05mm
.200:t..0021n
_...,_-t
--+------1
7. 6 2 II: 0.05 .... --jooo--------1
.300 .0021n
*
02226
Figure IMP5. Format Tape Characteristics
..
62957400 A
60-25
BACKPLANE
1801.
POWER SUPPLY
IAOI
TEST PRINT
SWITCH
FRICTION CLAMP ARMS
{I EACH SIDE OF BOARD)
Figure IMP6. Logic Chassis Board Locations
60-26
62957400A
. ..
..
r--.....---r--r-="~
::E
.. .
.. ..
a:
u
1&1
.J
.J=>
3=>
z
z
0
;::
u., uon
uon u"'
a:
a:
u ... UN
z0
-""\;
u
"u
u"' "w
o"' u"'
.J"'
.J"' uo
u_
;::
--,--
;::
;::
i=u i=u
U o=>
a:
'UJ
::l!i
::l!i
::l!i
z
...u~
"'.J
"'o "'o
...
u
~
1&1
.J
1&10
u
.J
"'1&10
z
0
;::
u
z
0
;::
u
z
0
;::
u
"'.J
"'.Jo "' ..,o
::lo ~gCD 11)0
.... ....
... ..."'"'
... !i... ... - ........
~=
..."'"'
a::
a::
a::
a::
5 ...a:
"'o "'o
lllO
11)0
~
"'CD
...
0:
0
...:::>
tD
JOI
J02
J03
J04
J05
J06
sw 1-1
SW 1-2
sw 1-3
sw 1-4
SW 1-5
SW 1-6
sw 1-7
sw 1-8
0
0
tD
tD
...:::> ...:::>
0
:::>
~
0
:::>
~
0
...:::>
tD
0
:::>
~
z
"'>
"'
...,..
......
a::
0:
:
0
0
0
0
z
I!!
Ill
tD
tD
!::
...
... ......
on
"'
......
0
0
Ill
!::
tD
~0
...
...
iii
......
Ill
...0
CD
"3...
"'z .J"'z
0:
z
"' ...
.
.J
z
z
::l!i
"'a:
......
~
......
"'>
uo:
"" uu
"...z ......
.. : ......
.J"- ...
...... ...0 "'a: "'"' o,
>
>
:::>
:::>
0:
0
..
Ill
0:
.,
. ...
.,:~;
...
~
a:
..
0:
0:
.Jo.
tDO
~0
X
X
X
X
ON OFF OFF
ON
ON OFF
ON
OFF ON
OFF OFF ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON OFF
ON OFF OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON ON
OFF OFF OFF
ON
OFF
X
X
OFF OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
OFF OFF
OFF ON
ON
ON
SW2·1
SW2·2
SW2·3
SW2-4
SW2-5
SW2-6
J07
...;;: ...,..
,..
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
X
X
X
OFF
OFF
OFF ON OFF OFF
ON OFF ON
ON
...a:: ~ .......
.
~~-'---'
• ..15.
~
R29
~~..!___,
...~
a::
.
...
....
..
.:~
......
NOTES•
I) TO USE THE PRINTER ON OTHER BAUD RATES THAN SHOWN ABOVE, THE FOLLOWING FORMULA CAN BE USED
LOAD VALUE • 256
(
I
)
IN DECIMAL
32 (BAUD RATE) A
WHERE•
A•l X I0- 6 FOR SWITCH 2·5 CLOSED AND 2·6 OPEN
A•0.25 X 10- FOR SWITCH 2·11 CLOSED AND 2-~ OPEN
THE LOAD VALUE IN DECIMAL MUST THEN BE CONVERTED INTO BINARY.
THEN, THAT VALUE IS LOADED INTO THE SWITCHES,
2) SWITCHES 2-5 Al'lD 2·6 CAN NEVER BE CLOSED OR OPEN AT THE SAME TIME.
IF EITHER OF THESE OCCURS, EITHER A WRONG FREQUENCY OR NO FREQUENCY
IS SUPPLIED TO THE BAUD RATE SELECTOR.
02290-1
Figure IMP7. Internal Switches and Jumpers (RS-232-C Interface Board)
62957400 A
60-27
0.
0
I
!'.)
0)
6
~
~..
""L\J1...
9f9 ~' 91r
L-1
02213
.,
r1r
cr
~..
H..
L\J
c·
,
rl·
"
n
r,.
H
·
L'·
n~' ·u·u
~ggggg~qg_gt~
~
F2 3 A
(SOLENOIDS 2 AND 3)
Fl 3A
(CLUTCH AND SOLENOID I)
0.
~
~
8
)>
~:~ .~
Z"OF
n
Z.tOZ
14
:\~g
0~0
oil o
1--~
F3 3A
(SOLENOIDS 4 AND 5)
F4 3A
(SOLENOIDS 6 AND 7)
NOTE: SOLENOID 1 CORRESPONDS TO FIRST (OR TOP) LINE
OF DOTS FOR EACH CHARACTER, SOLENOID 2 IS THE SECOND,
SOLENOID 3 THE THIRD ETC., WITH SOLENOID 7 DRIVING THE
SEVENTH LINE OF DOTS (BOTTOM).
Figure IMPS. Solenoid Driver Board with Fuse Identification
~I'}
~,g
~,,
~19
02214
F2 MTH 5A - - - '
(+12Vdc LINE)
Figure IMP9.
62957400 A
Ft AGC 3/4 A
(-12 V de REGULATOR)
Power Supply Board with Fuse Identification
6D-29
PRINTHEAD
ASSEMBLY
TRACTOR
DRIVE MOTOR
ASSEMBLY
SUPPORT
CASTINGS/
BEARINGS
LINE START
BOARD
NOTE: UPPER CABINET SHOWN
REMOVED (PROCEDURE IMP6) WITH
TRACTOR ASSEMBlY REINSTAllED
INTERMEDIATE
PULLEY ASSEMBLY
BEVEL
GEARS
PA E
p R DRIVE
MOTOR
CLUTCH
PAWL
SOLENOID
LUBRICATING
DRIVER
BOARD
CODE DISC AND
PULLEY ASSEMBLY
TRACTOR ASSEMBLY
CABLE CONNECTOR
(IJ03)
02223
Figure IMP10.
60-30
Impact Printer Major Assemblies
62957400A
"'~
--=~
®
I'V
~
8
,.A~IIt
!AU (Sf'[C. DPTIDNI
IAOI ,.ONEit
)>
~
v
T
I
IJOI
~LT
•••
I
v
IAOZ L5J LOGIC
IAU CDI'I'KJN LOGIC
ADVANCE
i--
r:;;\
IAU ltSUZ LOGIC
¥
5V 8111100[
IIACI(,.LANf:
3TI02
~jl
llfiAD
""u~
~jt-IDl
0
POWEit DltiVEit PC 80
:JTIOl
1 I
-~-~]-·
~
I
l
I
I I---J.o
JQt~l::r.r
:
o xoc• _j
11.I
---JJOl
[_____ . _
-----~
-
-
~ u
~- -~
~--
I
CONT!tOl
PANEL
( ,W~ ~.&lo)
~w
!JECONOAitT
:ICII
TR""i'fr."""R
"'0
I
(,.)
TCP YI[W
02215
Figure IMPll. Impact Printer Internal Connectors
~
I
,..,
(,.)
HEAD OftiV£
110TDR
,+.,
JCIIII
A:f
mi
El
•• I
[
OLU
ljJ
lEI
I
I
I
•I
ILU
'T
'
....
lLrll
I
I
W---fl_) I
2TDI
IZDV ...T
UIY ILK
~
IZIV IlHZ
T~
02216
~
~
~
8
)>
Figure IMP12. 60-Hz AC Distribution
~,
,...,
...
()-.
JCIIII
~
~
.
iittT
0
0
)>
JLFit
a.u
-·
a.u
-
----l _
2TDI
czaovl __
••+-------, I
uv
2iV
1,
~-·
UOl·P2·4G
I
i~
~
~ :
I
liVDC
510
'"
:
(
I
( I
510
5W
i
I
MD
.,
Wn
I 2JU
;-< 2
2f"IIZ-2
2PD2-4
r
I I
:::I
P
jl
2P02-I
•:uv
2PD2-I
GfC)
2P02-3
GNO D«o BO.
GND OR. liDo
2PU·S
OR.
OR.
eo.
ao.
I
!.Ut-P2-7 7 o7lo7loiD
I
UDt·P2-Iol Dolt .12
IADI·P2·1Jol4ol5ol6
JTBDl
vi
I
liED
:f-~
110TOO
:r..:~~[lrr:
""CKI"l.-
10~
(
t_;DIL CONNECTIONS )
uo
~---<< :I
IAOI-,.2-111
liV OltiYDt
INTLK~£.0
L------------------------------------J
~
~
0
0
)>
Figure IMP14. DC Distribution and Ribbon Logic
._...)
02218
3AOI
3A02
Figure IMP15. Configuration Drawing
62957400 A
6D-35
lAD I
POWER SUI'PL Y
00101. 00102. DDI D3
153154DD
COMMON CONTROLLER
DDZDI THRU DOZDi
IAU
7&647100
CONTROLLER - LSI EDUIV
OD3DI THRU D03D4
IAD3
7&6475DD
mn
IA04
15411000
INTER,. ACE
lADS
DD5DI
1110 I
BACKPLANE
953i5fi00
00601. 00&02
D
I J04
IJ07
IJDi
NOT
USED
lAD I-PI
IA01-P2
IA02-Pl
IA02-P2
IAOJ-PI
1AOJ-P2
r---
I A04-P1
J
lAOS-PI
IA04-P2
IAOS-P2
DRIVER BOARD
0 0 7 01
2AO 1
76648000
I
ZJDJ
D
""
I
--------'c:~?L_______~
c___o_4
L1 NE STAI'IT IIOARO
00101
L
lAO 1
CHARACTER START IIOARO
76i412DD
0090 I
3A02
7U42DDD
l~
---'
02224
Figure IMP16. Chassis Map
60-36
A
62957400 A
INDEX
POWER SEQUENCE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
6A-2
Turning On Subsystem Power
Turning Off Subsystem Power ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 6A-3
TERMINAL SUBSYSTEM
Procedure
Page
Procedure
Page
TS1 • • • • • • • 6A-2
TS2 ••••••• 6A-3
TS3 ••••••• 6A-3
TS4 • • • • • • • 6A-4
Figure
Fi~ure
Page
Page
Procedure
Page
TS5 ••••••• 6A-4
TS6 ••••••• 6A-5
Figure
Page
TS1 ••••••• 6A-14
TS2 ••••••• 6A-15
TS3 ••••••• 6A-15
TS4 • • • • • • • 6A-16
TS5 ••••••• 6A-17
Table
Table
Table
Page
TS1 ••••••• 6A-1
TS2 ••••••• 6A-18
Page
Page
TS3 ••••••• 6A-18
TS4 • • • •••• 6A-19
Procedure
Page
Procedure
6B-18
6B-21
6B-22
6B-26
6B-27
6B-28
6B-29
CRT15
CRT16
CRT17
CRT18
CRT19
CRT20
Page
Figure
6B-48
6B-48
6B-49
6B-49
6B-50
6B-53
6B-53
6B-53 '
6B-54
6B-55
CRT21
CRT22
CRT23
CRT24
CRT25
CRT26
CRT27
CRT28
CRT29
KEYBOARD DISPLAY
Procedure
CRTl
CRT2
CRT3
CRT4
CRT5
CRT6
CRT7
...... .... 6B-5
6B-5
••••• 6B-5
......
. . .. 6B-8
6B-9
••••• 6B-l0
.... . 6B-14
Figure
CRTl
CRT2
CRT3
CRT4
CRTS
CRT6
CRT7
CRT8
CRT9
CRTlO
Page
Page
••••• 6B-39
• • • • • 6B-40
6B-41
• • • • • 6B-41
• • • • • 6B-42
6B-43
• • • • • 6B-44
6B-45
6B-46
•••••
6B-47
.....
.....
. . . ..
. . . ..
62957400 A
CRT8
CRT9
CRT10
CRT11
CRT12
CRT13
CRT14
•••••
•••••
•••••
•••••
•••••
• ••••
.....
Figure
CRT11
CRT12
CRT13
CRT14
CRT15
CRT16
CRT17
CRT18
CRT19
CRT20
• ••••
•••••
•••••
•••••
• ••••
• ••••
• ••••
•••••
.• .• .• .• .•
Page
• •••• 6B-30
• •••• 6B-31
6B-33
• •••• 6B-35
• • • • • 6B-36
• • • • • 6B-37
.. . . .
Page
• •••• 6B-56
• • • • • 6B-56
6B-57
• • • • • 6B-58
• •••• 6B-58
• • • • • 6B-59
• •••• 6B-59
• • • • • 6B-60
• • • • • 6B-61
.....
6E-1
KEYBOARD DISPLAY (CONTD)
Tab-le
Page
Table
Page
Table
CRTl
• • • • • 68-1
CRT2
• • • • • 68-2
CRT3
Page
•••••
68-3
NONIMPACT PRINTER
Procedure
NIP1
NIP2
NIP3
NIP4
NIP5
NIP6
NIP7
NIPS
NIP9
NIP10
Page
Figure
••••• 6C-16
• • • • • 6C-17
•••••
•••••
6C-1S
6C-19
.NIP5
NIP6
NIP7
NIPS
Page
Table
• • • • • 6C-1
NIP2
Table
NIP1
Procedure
• • • • • 6C-3
• • • • • 6C-4
6C-4
• 0 • • •
6C-5
•••••
• • • • • 6C-6
Figure
NIP1
NIP2
NIP3
NIP4
Page
Page
• • • • • 6C-7
• • • • • 6C-10
• • • • • 6C-12
• • • • • 6C-12
• • • • • 6C-13
Page
• • • • • 6C-19
• •••• 6C.-20
Procedure
Page
NIP11 • ••••
NIP12 •••••
NIP13 •••••
6C-14
6C-15
6C-15
.Figure
Page
NIP9 • ••••
NIP10 •••••
6C-21
6C-22
Procedure
Page
IMP13 • • • • •
IMP14 • • • • •
IMP15 • • • • •
IMP16
IMP17
6D-1S
6D-19
6D-20
6D-20
6D-21
Figure
Page
IMP13 • ••••
IMP14 • • • • •
IMP15 • • • • •
IMP16 0 • • • •
6D-33
6D-34
6D-35
6D-36
• • • • • 6C-20
• •••• 6C-21
Page
• • • • • 6C-22
IMPACT PRINTER
Procedure
IMP1
IMP2
IMP3
IMP4
IMP5
IMP6
• • • • • 6D-6
•••••
•••••
•••••
•••••
•••••
Figure
IMP1
IMP2
IMP3
IMP4
IMP5
IMP6
Page
•••••
•••••
•••••
•••••
•••••
•••••
6D-S
6D-S
6D-10
6D-12
6D-13
IMP7
IMPS
IMP9
IMP10
IMP11
IMP12
Page
Figure
6D-23
6D-24
6D-24
6D-25
6D-25
6D-26
IMP7
IMPS
IMP9
IMP10
IMP11
IMP12
Table
Page
IMP1
• • • • • 6D-1
6E-2
ll
Page
Procedure
•••
•••
•••
•••
•
•
•
•
• 6D-14
• 6D-15
• 6D-15
• 6D-16
6D-16
••••• 6D-17
... ..
Page
• • • • • 6D-27
••••• 6D-2S
••••• 6D-29
••••• 6D-30
• •••• 6D-31
• • • • • 6D-32
.....
.....
62957400 A
PARTS DATA
7
This section contains a genealogy chart, parts data, and spare parts data for the
display terminal equipment.
GENEALOGY CHART
The genealogy chart for the display terminal equipment provides equipment configuration information for the various display terminals available in this series. The chart
also identifies the subassemblies required to assemble the various terminals.
PARTS DATA
Assembly drawings and related parts I ists clarify the appearance and the location of
each part for only the display terminal equipment. For similar information on the
nonimpact and impact printers, refer to their respective hardware maintenance and
parts identification manuals (see preface).
Parts data shown in the genealogy chart for the display terminal appears in this
section in the following order:
• Terminal top-level assembly
• Power supply
• Logic module
• Rear panel
• Keyboard
• Video display
• Front panel
• Monitor rear panel cable
Use the assembly drawings and parts Iists to identify parts of the terminal in the
following manner. First, locate the assembly drawing showing the part and identifying
it with a Find Number (circled number). Then, use the Find Number to find the
description and eight-digit part number of the part on the parts I ist associated with
the assembly drawing. Table 7-1 explains the column headings found on the computergenerated Assembly Parts List •
-
.
62957400 A
7-1
TABLE 7-1. EXPLANATION OF COLUMN HEADINGS ON ASSEMBLY PARTS LISTS
COLUMN HEADING
EXPlANATION
FIND NO.
Identifies an electrical or mechanical part on an assembly drawing. If more than
one listing appears for a find number, refer toll, WK IN, and WK OUT.
Ll (line Item)
Gives a chronological or historical record of the addition of a new part to a find
number, For example, 01 indicates that the part was the first one used, and 02
indicates the second, etc. See also WK IN and WK OUT.
PART NUMBER
Gives the Control Data Corporation part identification. Use this number when
ordering replacements,
CD (Check Digit)
Gives the information-control system a means of cross-checking the correctness
of a part number.
QUANTITY
Lists the total number of a part required to complete an assembly. The vertical
line near the center of the column acts as a decimal paint. Numbers to the
left of the line are whole numbers. Those to the right of the line are tenths,
hundredths, and thousandths.
U/M (Unit of Measure) Indicates how the information-control system counts or supplies a part,
PART DESCRIPTION
Describes the physical appearance, type, or name of a part.
MC (N\aterial Code)
Supplies additional descriptive data to the information-control system.
YLD {Yield)
A 2-digit number that indicates the usable portion of any quantity of parts
expressed as a percentage.
ECO NO. IN
Engineering Change Order that adds a new part to an assembly. See also WK IN.
ECO NO. OUT
Engineering Change Order that deletes a part from an assembly. See also WK OUT.
S/N (Serial Number)
Used to specify an ECO•s effectivity by serial number.
WK IN ('Neek In)
Lists the date when manufacturing begins using a new part and when it is available
for parts replacement. For example, 7222 means a part is available as of the 22nd
week of 1972.
WK OUT ('Neek Out)
Lists the date when man.ufacturing no longer uses a part in building an assembly.
See also WK IN. Do not order a part after its week-out date.
00643-2
SPARE PARTS DATA
Spare parts data includes only those parts of an equipment that have been approved
for on-site replacement. Each equipment spare parts list is also a recommendation
of parts to have on hand at the service centers for support of on-site maintenancf..
Each Iist includes parts at both the modular and discrete component level.
This section supplies spare parts information for both the display terminal equipment
and the nonimpact printer. For spare parts information for the impact printer, refer
to the Parts Identification Manual for the impact printer (see preface).
7-2
62957400 A
-
y
~ ~
~i/1
:!l:a
IMIIT ,_IYtS10N ITATuS
I I I
.
f.~
OISIGIIAJIIItl
ccm•
I
I
o-
I
~
I
I
I
~
IC
I
I
I
I
I
Ill
11630500,,BJOSDI
151JII50!
1>110503
15131504
15130515
15130110
15130lll
CC5551
CC555C
CC5550
CC5551
15131403
15131MU
CC55U
1513140
tml402
RELEA~!D C.LASS
B
/~?..
&!!!ii"A6Z'- a::D
c
12JJI
t
·~~DIZ.195 Rf.VIS£11
A
R£V/S£0 PCR CCC
IUIIIS'!l>
IZ: 0'1. ~~·sao
DATE
DftfT
4_67~3
P~l2. f'CO
Ptll L(O
PeL E'CD
I/
.v
'~( TO STUD "EI'' ON VIDEO
DISPLAY AS~Y ( F"/N ll).
3. INSTALL METAL C.I.IP UNDER LINEARITY
SHIELD WHIC.H IS UNDEI'l YOKE RIN E> MAGNET
A!:>SV,
.&1F REQUIRED,INSTALL F/N 46, 4~,50,51 ,v,TH
ADHESIVE F/N 5Z PER GOC. SPEC P/N lb04Z739
GEOMETRIC. DISTORTION CORRECTION.
o-
N
~
~
8
)>
752 DISPLA.Y
TERMINAL
o-
1'.)
~
~
47)REF (TO YOKE A55Y)
23'
8
)>
@
~lJ ieEF
TO
-
LCl.~lt.
\
~
"c - E.a"
~t..ID
·-- eowO',<.-At;L[
C..ND
"A- El" f\EF
'--·· ~~'~e
FROM KE
.£.TAIL·f
CABLE A55Y
/5) R[F
~11)(4)
.71('.:)
I
J FIEF
DETAIL
OCU\.IL 1-\
5) REF
SECTION
'1-1
01
-D
SC.O.LE NONE
SCAI..t. NC>\1\0.
COMPRESSION
WASHE-R SUPPLIED
WITH~INO NO. 14
BAC.K VIEW WITH HOOD
C-C
REF
D£TAIL-[
752. D15PLAY
TERMINAL
IOUILU AJI!=
DIY.
so.a I
Ttm-MC
nua~;na :, I
Ll
PAn - ·
001 01
71452801 :7
'
71452900 :,
!04 01
11140iUOI
.,5 01
~J40ol3oo
OWG.
OIIOIPnON
I 752 T£11" ~c IIYBD 60HZ
• I u
CD
f!!l 01
QUAIIffT'f'
U/M
I
N
PAll' DIICWnOJII
PC BEZEL 1Z IN CRT
1
MEL
PC "000 1 T[RNINAL CIOLD
'
1
PC PAN!lo ACCESS C'INISIIe&OLOI
:v
1
PC KUIIOARD ASSY liD II[YI_
N
1
PC CABLE ASSY ICYIID INT[RNAl
A
. . . 01
IIJ40i1140U : •
1
PC CAlLE ASSY DC 11011£11
A
!'!Ill II
!1491930
i•
1
IIC liAS[, TERMINAL
P
,11
01
.
. i•
'
"I
~Jr;lSHI
ClnLD~lNliHI
111401631!•
1
PC CAILEt INTENSITY
A
IIJ3?091Si•
1
PC v ~DI!O DJIPI.AY AllY
II
01
IIJ.0144?:•
1
IIC 11'0111!11 IIIIL Y ASSY
A
lf!J911190ili~
1
PC ALARM AUOJILI! LUll ,Ill it
P
PC STANDD'' MALE,EMALI! ••4V STL P
'!~· 81
01
'145111181 !ill
z
'~" 01
,1? OJ
!IJHIIIOij.t
3
PC SCII!W 1011/Z TYPt A II&A 110
i•
I
IIC -SHR N0o10 EXT TOOTH Lll TYP A II
'~' II
020 01
!IJIIIIS~i•
I
II
~8160]03;~
6
IIC -stR stL,-LICI MIX HO e•llXJ/1 I
021 01
'!ti6UU!•
6
PC MSCII I!L, LKI HEX NO 1S/l2X3/I
~
022 OJ
.1012!1616!.1
2
PC WAIHI!II 'LT NO,I 5TL
I
OJ
·~5
,23
IOIZII•t3
- .:
111391101 :·
2
IIC &NO WillE ASSY ?oil
1012111~
2
PC
oa5 01
!oJIStoSOlill
5
PC SCII[w l/•L SZ IU HI!X
...
IOUILU AM!=
... a
I
T I. . NO
ll
f!Z6 01
!21 01
oze
•.. ...
:,T • l
. ..._,_. :c•
_
01
'"""a!oaa
'"""-·
11512!>301
,.
~~~
u
QUANTITY
AR
.,.
T?!I" TERM
. ,_,..
asc
KYBD
IN
Ill!'
"c
bENULDGV CHAIIT
l"'
4
PC
~UM,F.Rt
z
"c
•ASHF.R 'LT
•SH~
M
'"'
RUIIIEA olOOH
f!30 01
lOIZUOl
131 01
101211401. I
iu
4
"C
032 01
1012110~ il
2
PC NUT H[l '!CH 4•40 STL I>P OR l.P 8
1
PC FRONT PANEL ASSY NOD l
A
p
"'0•• 5TL
-L~•STKG
N0o4 EXT TOOTH Ll\ TYI' A 8
~34
01
1
PC I'A"'EL IILANKt SWITCH
~3!1
01
!l..TIOU J.l
1
PC SPACI'II PIIH SPL Y MT& I'I.ATf
,~,
01
~1419000 il
1
"C SUPPORT LOGIC IIODULE
~31 01
10125105
1
PC .,UT M!X MCH 6•32 STL
f!ll 01
101211401
1
PC wSHR N0o6 EXT TOOTH Ll\ TYP
I
I
~-
!·
t~L•:O.TICI
~P OR
•'"
111.0761!!•
1
~~1 01
~016V309!•
2
PC MICA HlX IIILN SL,•LIII ••JZX11•
~u 01
6139110.
i~
1
PC bNO ~IRE ASSY ••5 1611•
~~4
01
IOJZII402
i•
1
PC wSHA NOel EXT TOOTH
~··
~·?
01
71491949
1
itc
01
!1•9ill11• :.,
1
PC CiiiOUND CLIP CIIT
! ..
01
5191701·!~
.'
1
PC MAINET IAII
1
"c
01
!H9170il [to
KO. NO. IN
KO. NO. OUT
.. ,.
.li!•Z1·~•
""
wt1 OUT
L~
LABEl I'OWI!A INTERCONN
"AINET BAll
i
i
p
039 01
o••
..LI DATI
u-n•76 I
p
PC LO&IC MODULI ISSY
l'
~'!~!o:J•!.
II
8
~~
IIJ.07!iiZ~.I
714918•5 !!>
.
Pal CMANGI NO.
"I
"
!>180!>101
133 OJ
I
lNG. . ..,.
STAtui DAft
PC NUT 11[1 '!CH 10•3i! STL CP OR Z II
!29 01
io
...
STAJUS
_.... ·-
1 u-n--1~
B
DZ LUC TITE SEALANT R!D
116300072:,
'
'"'
PAirf OISCIIf'ftOit
4
.
A
~ta.
11oH~
iv
lOliil!llGII
WIOUT
MACH PH J/••ZOillii! tiiSHC II
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
440
.
S~w
WIIIN
II
C~
024 01
!·
""
P
OJ
I
KO. 110. OUT
P
OJ2 II
0~3
KO. 110, ..
P
1
~oz
7-6
IIV.
!•'
7145i60~
........,.
4•U
1 CD
AI..-Y Jll~l
II
8
•s
G
Tn•
a
fl
"
•
p
p
62957400 A
.,.
t~6o
T INDMO
I:IUILU AHC
AISIMIL'f' IIIUMIH
I
Ll
.....,. .
1~630500
:c•
:..
~.
.... .....
I • I
,.
!•
iJ
OIKI:IPTtOIII
I
QUANTm'
TERM IISC KVBD 60"7
'I;'
I'AIT DIKIIPTION
U/M
~50 OJ
~l9l705Z
O!H Ol
!i>J9l705l i4
~52 01
~1oo•o6l
~53 Ol
160U13'1['1
REP'
054 01
1501U30!i~
1
~55 01
1t2l9'150U: U
REP'
PC A~/OC
~56 01
lt2200BZ~i:
REP'
PC LOGIC DUG LIAT MOO 1
112200946
REP'
PC
OST 01
l
1
1oo
1
I'AGI
Nllllf DATI
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST I IZ-27·7~
440
I
IIATUS
"'
N
•Z-15-/6
"'""
KO. MO. IN
p
PC MAGNET BAR
p
PILl CMANOI NO.
!~~53-~.
~I
FlU DATI
lNG. Hlf'.
STATUS DATI
H
PC MAGNFT BAR
I
I
KO. NO. OUT
.,.
~~-z •ff>
w•'"
WI: OUT
PC AOH£SIVE, AMB£R SYN fLASTOMfH II
PC bEOM OIST CORRECTION
0
PC 10 [MBLEMt PRODUCT OltlllllfO AL
p
P~R
lNTC~NN
INTFRCUNN DlAt.
D
D
OlAG SIGNAL
II
uU50 TOTAL LINES
I
I
'
'
I
I
I
62957400 A
I
I
7-7
IIUTLD ARC
_ , . .n
440
........-· .,.
as..-.,. ..... :c• ....
os•o I IS6:toS•I :31 ' I o l1s:t
....
. -..
.
I'AM'-·
u
.~
·-·
I'MriiiCIII'nOII
PC •U!I
001 Dl
7J491~38~FII
1
PC "000 T!IIMJN&L SMIELD£0
on n
71491939
:~
1
PC
I>&N~t.
004 OJ
614ft?5!9jA
I
•e
Wl''fRnAIIII ASSY "OIA""'L ASSY II!. . 'IOM7
Ill Dl
1
llr. VIDO'Il DUIIL&Y &S!IY
01~
,.,
6J!Tt14fl!lj•
61411?44?
1
IIC ltOIII'.,
014
~~
!iJ90I!'I02 1
1
PC IL&"" &IJDJI!L! LUG I ' l l ~
f'1
,, ...~!101 ~
rm
IOJ6
ion
loll•
I"·
i
OJ
i
!1111'"""'
!3
i'
021 OJ
0011110311
021 OJ
htl!S6n6 il
n
bJ19JlO" :~
"'
'SJII!IIoo;Ol
024
02'1 PI
o86o I
T IMIIIIC
Ll
•I
PC CCIII'w !lfLII' T&P•tNII
1101':
,
IIC
~CIIw
'I
•r.
~CliO'~
:CD
,,.,_,...
l!i61P5ft1 i3l
CD
••n
•..
&
DWG.
.,.
o
oi
•
66)00ft72 7
liEI'
029 PI
5111051101 I
OlD oi
1o!l5603 •
aq
•.,
•
p
I
07 lOC ?TTE S!&LANT R!D
IOC "UT WI!X IICM 10•32 STL CP !lll
PC GENI"aL08Y CM&PT
4
l'
PC •UT
033 n1
fl14t?'5!2 I
I
PC II'RON? P&Oi!L &SSY
034 PI
1!49184!!1 ~
I
PC PANI"I
.mint
714117100 I
I
PC SPACO'R PWII SIIOL Y NT8 IlL& T~
614076!!17
041 nJ
OnM0309
IO!Ol'640I
•·•o !TL
IPC
"UT H!X HCH 6•32 'ITL CP na ZP!
EJT
TOOTH Lk TYD A
I
PC LOGT~ NOnULE &SST
IIIOC "SC" HEX IILOI SL,•LK8 l'•l2XJ/4
PC liND
~o~t•E
&SSY 4 0 !5 168A
PC WSHD OIDoll EXT TOOTH LK TYI> &
046 01
?J491949 5
PC L Alii' I. PO loll! I! J'IT!IICOOIN
04? OJ
1!4921?4 9
PC
048 01
SJ91?n~4
PC "leourT IIIAII
04'1 01
!!IJ~O
p
LOGJC NODULE
PCIWS"'P N0o6
ou nt
o4• n
I
I
I
I
i
i
I
'
!
I
I
I
I
CL 1110 CDT
I I
I
........
1 1?•29•·1'
-t~l CMAMGI NO.
- lo6h-77
lNG. HlP.
SIATVI DAII
t
KO. NO. OUT
~
~
!
i
I
I
12·2'-'"
WI IN
""
Wit~
I
'
I
I
PILl DATI
12-1'1•1fl
KO.IIO. IN
'
'
!
i
!
I
I
i
!
I
I
,II!
!iUPD~•T
I
j
BUNKo 511tTCM oPLA~TICII P,
IPC
:
:
CP 011 ZPI
NOD I
i
I
I
Ill
"I
i
"I
'I
I
I
I
Ill
PC •AS~O'II 'LT NOo4 !TL
;
'
I
j
Tl
PC AU"IO~IIt qUIIREII o300H SL,•STKGI
'
I
'
I
i
I!EL
10125103 I
'I
i
i
I
-ql ...
I "',.
1Gl26400 0
1
I
'
STATUS
PAIT DISC.PnOII
MC"'
I
I
rqsllcr:
n1
IGI25IO!i 6
I'
I P MFX
031 01
ion nJ
I
I
1ue !PI
[o39 1,.i
I
Ia
ou
714119000 I
I
I
:1
I"[
'I
CP
i
IIOC •SHD N0o4 Elf TOOTM L• TYI> A & 1
j03" 101
i
I
I
TrAM 115C KYRn '50H7
H~X
WI OUT
""
I
"
OIICIII'hON
I " I ?5~
QUANYITY
02~
IGI7'5108
~z
KO. NO. OUT
,,,.I" I
nR•
IOIACW PH 114•:0011/2
1/4L
ftUitATI
12•23•71>
I
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
021
9!ill!!i301 2
?,5
ICO.IJIO. Iff
~-:t:or:tllll81
PC •••~r· ll'lT Nft,~ !Tl c~
•c r.HO ··I"' ·assv
...., ..
....
fiLl CIIAIIOI MO.
'I
l
!Ill
SI!Lhl.l:ISHI
71452900 !:.
.'
1
PC PANI!;L • AC~t:SS lfUilSH•IOLDI
!04 01
111402100
.
.'
i·
1
PC Kt:YIIOARD ASSY 110 KEYI
N
!~5 01
~140ZlO!iu
1
PC CAlLE: ASSY KYIIU INTEIIMAL
A
t1
~1402400 :.
.'
1
PC CAlLE ASSY .DC POWER
A
!149193!
1
PC
01
!·
ease:.
TI:RNINAL IIOLD•r lNISHI
~1•orus;•
1
PC CAILEo INTENSITY
A
~12 01
613?0905!•
1
PC VIDEO. DISPLAY A55Y
8
1
PC POWER SPLY ASSY
'
~140!447 :·
~,4 01
!11901902 !J
AUD~8LE
?14~1!»801 !~
1
2
PC STANnOf'' NALE/'ENALI!: ••40 STL P
016 01
!01158501
3
PC SCREW 10X1/2 TYPit A M&X HD
LU8 'Ill 2
10126403 !•
8
PC WSHR NO.lO EXT TOOTM
!11858529!•
8
PC SCREw IEL' UPP1N8
!20 01
~086030~
6
PC
021 01
!0160311 !u
6
PC "SCR SltL' LK8 HEX MO llll2131B 8
~22
10125606!:.
z
PC •ASHER 'LT NO.I 5TL !=I'
2
PC GNO WIRE ASSY
z
PC SCRW "ACH PM I/4•2UX1c#2 CRSHC II
!I
PC SCREW 3/4L SZ 10 MU
~23 01
111391105
~24 01
10127153
025 01
!11158503
....
16o
T INDNO
!•
!·
[y
......
IIUILil ARC
'co
I
U
...........,
1!1630502:1
PAI'FNVMMI
...
440
I
CD
A
~K
8
r•~>
oz
STATUS
MC
PAI'FDIKIIPTIOIII
'il$125301
iii!
AR
10125101 /u
4
!28 01
116300072
!7
.
,.
Ri'
!29 01
!01805801 !1
4
PC IIUMP[Ao R\IIBER .300H
!30 Dl
1012560~
2
PC WASHER 'LT N0,4 STL C~
~L,•STK8
4
PC WSHA N0.4 EXT TOOTH L" TYP A
1012510~!'
z
PC HUT IIEX MCH 4••0 STL
~~3 01
61407!552
11
.
.
'
1
PC ,AONT PAN~L ASIY NOD '
71.9184!1
1
PC PANEL BLANKe SWITCH
1
PC SPACER PIIR SPL Y IITG I'I.ATE
1
PC SUPPnRT LD&lC MODULE
!3!5 01
!141?00!! 1
037 01
1012!5105
!38
01
101211401
~~9 01
111407656
.
-
.
i·'
i•'
- iu
'
I
ICO. 1110. OUT
PILl DATI
,,.
Ji!•Z1·1~
WICIIII
WIC OUT
~p
OR
~p
1
PC NUT HEll M!=H 6•:Ji! STL
PC WSHR N0~6 EXT TOOTH L"
1
PC D!= I!NTRY PNL ASST
8
ZPB
A
oJ!LlSTI~I
1
B
8
10126400. io
0~6 01
ICO. NO. IN
~"!'"3-P
D
PC GENULDIY CHART
031 01
i!l'
.
!148!100!' 1
STAnn DAfl
u-1s-16
PILl CMAMOI NO•
~I
ItNO.ntP.
12-•n·~f
PC NUT 14EX N!=H 1 P•32 STL CP OR Z 8
!~2 01
!U 01
YLD
....
1'11111' IAfl
1
8
Llll: TITE SUUNT REO
026 01
,.
A
8
!21 01
i•
8
166-
DIKIIPnOM
.,.
OUT
SlL,•LK8 HEX HO e•3i!X318 II
.... ASSEMILY PARTS "'LIST
l u I 752 TERM 15C KYBD W/CL 6UOOZ I N REL
QUANI'ITY
"",. w•
.J
8
!17 01
01
lii!•Z •46
TYP A 8
!18 01
!?
PILl DAft
.,.
A
!15 01
~SCR
KO. NO. OUT
p
PC ALAIIN
iJ
I
u.ts-16
p
~11 01
~~3 01
...
~~~!13·H
p
!,, 01
~~·
ITAfUI OAfl
ICO.t~G ...
PILl CKAJIGI MO.
~ l
lIIIO.niP.
p
!1
.
12•2?•!6
STATUS
RcL
....
NRIIITDAft
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST l
p
o,.
7-10
'CD
.,~.
Ill
440
p
"
"
011 lP II
T~P
A
•
•
A
!"1 01
~086~309!·
z
PC M!ICR Hll PLN SL,•LIII 11•3ZX11•
!,3 01
~U9ilo•
i'
1
PC GNO lllRE ASSY 4o!5 l68A
!"4 01
10126•02!•
- .'
1
PC
~46
01
!1.91949 !!it
1
PC LABEL POIIER 1 NTERCONN
p
~47
•IHA
N0!8 UT TOOTH Lll TvP A
II
II
01
!1492174 !9
1
PC BROUND CLIP CIIT
a
!48 Dl
=;191705,!l
1
PC MA&N!:T BAR
p
049 01
519170!51
i·
1
PC MAillET BAR
p
62957400 A
i
_!
l
.
....
,.... I
!51
u
01
!11 11
!12 II
~13
II
.
Ul4 01
~II
!56
~IT
--
•••
lfUILD ARc_;
.., - ... _
01
01
•co
I
t!ionD!lftll'' 1
co
~19I'!'Oiir
!•
!iol91701;tj•
f>100406llf
.
• I .
!v
i•
•zatHOO !u
lt04il?:l!
1111038!
.
~
I .
•zzooaz•ia
•zzo~v.•!ll!
-· .......-·
a
I
11
1
.,
.,
.,
1
1
liEf
ASSE-LY PARTS LIST
I ,.,.
.,.
·-......
ua.. asr
orvan •~c:t
•ad
I "'11
~
sr•ru•
.,
"'
PC MAIN[T BAll
,.
PC MAINET BAll
p
...
_.
....
1 12•17•·!6
"A1UIMR
u.th76
KO.IIO.•
---·
I
KO.IIO. OVf
........
. . . CIIAIIOifiO.
I i!l
~!~f>l·H
....
... -··
.. ...
iZ•ir
lOO PC ADII!SI WE.o AIIUII SYII E!-AsTOIIt:ll 8
PC GEON OIIT CORRECTION
0
PC ID ENBLEIIo PllnDUCT lllUIUIO A!-
p
PC ACIOC PIIA IIIT!IICDNN OtAII
0
PC LDIIC DIAl LUT fiiOO J
D
PC JNTCONN DIAl SIINAL
0
ODIO TOTAL LINES
i'
'
62957400 A
7-11
....
1160
IIUILD
I
IIV.
U•630!I03 'tl
PAU-l
ASSIMILY PARTS LIST
440
AR~
AIIIMM.Y - · 1(0
a
CD
·-
DWG.
I
u
I 7!12
QUAtmn'
IIC
I
n:R11 asc KYID lOHZ
U/M
ITAfUI
N REL
Me
CRT 12 I"
!II 01
rl49193! !u
I
PC
01
rJ491n•!·
I
PC HDDD TERM.IN&L
!~3 11
7149193¥!•
.
. '
1
PC PANEL
01
111407539
!·
•
.
•I
1
PC Kt:YIIOAIID ASSY IOIIt:Y lllHIELDI
"
!!5 Dl
~140Uo~i~
I
PC CAlLE ASSY IIYI!D INTEROIAL
A
!~6 01
111402410:.
.•
. I
1
PC CAlLE AllY
!!• 01
rJ491974
I
PC liAS[ TERM SHIELDED
!~Z
!14
!:t
II~ZEL
DC PDIIt:ll
PC PANEL AllY RE&R 50HZ
A
I
PC VIDEO DISPLAY AllY
I
013 01
~140744!:•
I
PC PDII[II IPL Y &SST
A
IJI6 01
111901902iJ
1
PC ALARM AUDI8Ll LUI 'II 01
P
PC STANOol'' MALli,EM&Lt: ••40 STL P
714111801
.
.'
iii
2
!~6 01
111111101i:t
,·
3
PC
!17 01
1012'403!•
8
PC IIIMR NDo10 EXT TOOTH
10XI/2 TYPE A HkA HD
S~R[W
~~~
111151!119 !·
I
!0160303 !7
6
PC
!21
!0160311
•z
PC OISCR SIL, Lll8 Hill HO 1ti3ZX311 II
"0 0 1 ITL C:l'
8
PC GMO lilliE ASSY 7 oil 161•
A
PC SCR[W l/4L SZ 10 HU
1011!160~! ..
!23
01
1113tUoll•
01
101271!1~!·
z
z
025 01
!018511503:'1
5
....
IIUILD
11110
T I-NC
A~!;
,,.
AIIIIIILY-1
I
"
026 01
HI63D!ID3 :,
PAIITNU-1
9!1121>301
... I .... I
I
co
~~
!2T 11
10121101 iu
028 01
11630,072
:,
•
,
, I'
029 01
!o110!i801 !1
!30 01
o:n
01
!lZ
u
QUANTm'
AR
•
""
01~11
SIL,•LIII Hill HD ••32Xlll II
PC WASHER
'L!
PC SCRW MACH PH I 14•2011112 CRSIIC II
..
B
_
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
640
A
.,.
MC
IN
7!1:1! Tt:RII uc IIYBO lOHZ
oz
I'AIT DIJCM1'110f1
STATUI
RE
MC
PC GENULDIY CHART
1012106G~ i'
2
PC WASHER 'LT NOo6 ITL
10126400 :,
I'
4
PC WIHA N0o4 EXT TOOTH La TYP A B
PC NUT H[X MCH 4•40 STL o.P OR lPB
10U!IU~ [1
z
'140!512 !1
I
PC ,RO"T PANEL ASSY MOD l
A
!~· 01
?1691841 ill
1
PC PANEL ILANICt SWITCH
t~L.STIC:I
p
1
PC SPACER PIIR SPLY IITI
P~ATt:
p
01
'
?1•111oo :1
036 01
?161,00!!1
I
PC Sl!f'PORT LDBIC MODIJLE
!3T Dl
1012510!1
1
PC NUT HEll MC:H 6•32 STL
OJI 01
lolz••o~l'!t
l
PC •SHII N0o6 UT TOUTH Lo. TYP A II
~~~
OR ZP 8
0140!6!16!0
1
PC DC: ENTRY PNL aSSY
~0160309 !·
2
PC IISC:R Hlll PLN SL,•LIII ••521114 II
!,3 01
11139U06
~~~
1
,c
GMO WIRE ASST 4o5 168A
!44 01
10126402
1
PC
li~R
046 01
!1491969!•
I
PC LAI[L POilU INfERCDNfl
p
01
!1492174 [11
1
PC GROUOID CLIP CRT
A
01
!:IJ917056~Z
1
PC MAI"F.T BAR
p
069 II
!119170!11 :.
1
PC OIAIII[T BAR
p
!••
KO. NO. OUf
....
fiLl DAll
I
1Z•ii! •fll
SIN
w• OUf
'
A
!~9 Dl
~47
~!~113·~.
p
041 01
!•
P.. ICHANDIIIO.
I
8
C~
01
!•
KO.IIIO.tN
~
IIIG.IUP.
ITAfUIU.fl
u-n•76
·-
I)
033 01
~~·
I
PC ILIUT HEll MC:H 10•32 STL CP OR Z II
PC IIUMitERt R\!81111 olOOH IOL,•STIIB B
L
no
. .NT DAN
1 12•27•·!6
B
LOC: T1 TE I£ALA"T RED
4
•
)
waOUT
I
!22 01
ou
waiN
8
!II Ol
i•
U•ii!1•fll
7YP A 8
!20 01
01
S/N
A
1
01
KO. 110. OUT
P
~1407633!9
!J5
.........
P
111370901
!4
.
'
KO. MO. ..
I
P
ACC~SS
!~I 01
I
ITAIUIINlfl
&2·15•711
P
~lllt:Luln
IHit:LDi~
!12 01
,.
nD
1h1=z-:;,;~;'=".~r:-:-+l=··~r~_1___:_:'"'=-;:,~u;rn:;:o;:l,"::-:,.,:,!,-,
G
NDo8 EXT TDDTH LA TYit A II
)
7-12
62957400 A
)
....
!160
T INOMO
lfUJLU ANC:
AIII....Y N\IMM.
1.
Ll
050 01
·--
l>Uft"n
I
CO
'¥I
"'
....
uo
A
I
-·
u
QUAN"TY
I 7!12
_
ASSEMBLY
.... PARTS LIST I U•Zl•ff,
_ , . .q
I
T£RM RIC KYBD 50t1Z
,..,. llscwnotl
UIM
"'
N
UAIUI
PC MAI..ET BAR
p
051 01
l>1t1~on:•
1
PC
p
052 01
!t100406J:r
01
l604iieU9:'1
Rt:'
054 01
1!101V30f :!t
11£1'
IPC 10 [M&LEMt PRODUCT 14£1111!11 AL
p
055 01
11219'1500 :v
liE'
!PC ACIDC PWR 1NURCUIIN U&At;
0
1~56
01
bZZooez• i1
RE'
PC LOIIC 01AG LIAT MOD 1
0
01
bZ20U94fl :~
RE'
PC 1NTCOIIN DIAG SIINAL
D
~57
,.,.,.,ET BAR
100 PC ADH[SJV[, AMBI'R
sv..
tcO.IIO.IN
"'"'
1
on
u-15•"
ELA~TOMt:;H
PC GEDM DIST COIIIIECTION
·-
PILl CIIIIUIOI 1110.
~O~D]•f.
~I
ALihll
1110.......
SfATVIMn
H
!ii19HO!IZifl
I
I
,,.
KO. NO. OUT
..... .......
1Z•i1!1•1fl
I"
D
I
!
I
I
I
I
I
U050 TDTAL LIOI£5
I
!
I
!
I
I
I
I
!
r
i
I
i
I
I
_)
7-13
IYATUI DAN
I ...u .. oo. ~ 7 I
,.... I
T IMDIIG
Ll
PAIT 111.111111
u
QUANmY
I
I
'52 URI! dt ~Y80_~50~Z
N
U/M
II tL
MC
!!1 01
?1U2600 !a
1
!1U2100
ir
PC BU!L 1ZIN CIIT
!!2 01
1
PC loiOOD, Tt:IIIIINAL CIOLD
!03 01
71651900:,
.
. '
1
PC PANt:Lo
0!6 01
!1601101!'
1
I'C Kt:TIDAIID ASSY CIO IC[Y!
N
005 01
!160230!io
PC CAlL! AllY ICYI!ID I NTt:IINAL
&
, , , 01
. !.'
1
111611600
~
1
I'C CAlLE ASSY DC I'ONEII
A
,,. 11
?1691930!!1
1
I'C BASt:, rt:IIIIINAL
I'
!~1 01
!161?63~
1
I'C PAN[L ASST !lUll !!IoOHZ
A
1
I'C VIDEO OISI'LAY ASSY
8
1
I'C PDIIfll SI'L Y AS!IY
A
I'
!"
AC~ESS
"INUH•IOLDI
CIOLD•~l~ISHI
111370905
!6
•·
.
I
!~3 01
!160?667:•
!16 01
51901902: ..
1
I'C &LAIIN AUOIILt: LUI I'll 2
!~5 01
?1 . .5801
!~
2
I'C STANOO, NALEII't:IIALt:
01
!i1151!!1o01i:t
3
I'C SCREW 10U/2 TYPE A lt&A HO
8
I'C OSHA N0o10 EXT TOOTH
I
~.-
•••U
8
TYP A B
1012~603 !·
il
B
!20 01
~0860303
6
PC MSC::A SlLI'•LIII IlEA HO ••,2X311 B
!21 01
!0860311
6
PC NSCA St:LI' LIIG IlEA HO •112UI8 II
~~~
022 01
10U!!Io606i:.
2
PC •&SliER 'LT N0,8 STL
C~
B
!23 01
111391105 ;..
2
PC GND Mill[ ASSY 7 o!i 168&
A
!U 01
10U115:J!•
2
PC SCIIW MACH PH 11••2DX112 CRSIIC 8
025 01
!0185.~03 ; ...
5
PC SCII'-11 l/6L SZ 10 HU
··-
IIUILU All!;
DIV.
•6o
I
T INDNG
"
...........
!26 01
~.
'"
l!i630!!Io06'71
PAII'IIIU. . .I
"
11512!1301!~
iu
!2? 01
10125101
028 01
116300012
!7
.
,·
!Z9 01
li1805801
f'
. , -·
HV.
&
u
I
QUANTITY
All
~
Rl!:,
8
..........
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
.,.
TERM RSC IIYBO 50HZ
oz
LDC T1 Tt:
I 752
"'
I N
PAft HICIIntON
PC NUT lolt:ll
~t:ALANT
M~H
ltATUI
HE
"' "'
8
RED
PC dUIIP!Rt RUBBER olOOH
10125603 i•
2
PC WASH! II 'L! N0,6 5TL
1ouo~oo. !u
I.
6
PC WSHA NDo6 !liT TOOTH
!32 01
~0125103 il
z
PC NUT lol[ll
!:Jl 01
61607551
1
PC ,MONT PANEL ASSY NOD l
A
!36 01
71691865!:0
1
PC PANEL ILANICt !IWITCiol
'"~ASTICI
p
!35 01
?141!10! :1
1
I'C Sf'AC!R PIIR SPLY lOTI
P~ATt.
p
!36 01
7l61900! ia
1
PC SUPPORT LOIIC MODULE
!37 011
031 01
10121105[•
1
PC NUT HEll MCH 6•3Z STL
~01Z~40ll•
1
PC NSHA N0o6 UT TOOTH L• TYP A 8
!~9 01
b1607657
. . :i•
1
PC LOll C IIOOULE ISSY
!41 01
00160309!•
2
PC NS!=A
!,3 01
~1391106
i"
1
PC GilD IIIRE ASSY .,5 16GA
!66 01
101ZII601
1
I'C IISHA ND!B UT TOOTH Lll TYP A 8
!•
H~ll
KO. NO. Nil
J
l't1l CMANOI NO.
f!!l>3•!!
~I
lNG. alP.
KO. MO. OUT
..LI DATI
l~-21•/b
""
Wit OUT
... IN
~·
TYP A B
6•60 STL tiP DR ZP 8
p
~p
DA ZP B
A
PLN SLI'•LIC& •·3Zlll• II
:
I
I
'
I
II
!•• Ol
!16919691:0
1
I'C LAI!L I'OIIER INTERCONN
p
!1692174
i"
1
PC IIROUNO CLII' CIIT
A
!61 01
11191705.
1
PC MAINET BAR
049 01
5191?051
1
PC IOAINET BAR
"
i·
12·15•711
....
8
c~
!67 01
it
ITAJUIO:AYI
I
~L~·STICII II
!30 01
I
12-n-~~~
u
6
on 01
!'
_.. ..n
1
lO•lZ STL CP OR Z 8
PC GENUL08Y CHAFIT
M~H
1/11
STL P
:018U529!•
---
I
KO. NO. OUT
P
01
!?
!•
12-15-16
KO. JIO, ..
I'
!11 01
!~?
'flll
P
~liii.ISHI
!12 01
0~6
7-14
I
&
CD
p
62957400 A
-· ............. .,.
,_. ··--·-IIUILII AR!=
....
.... I
440
'"'
I
!lo.'ID!io• ; r
u
I
a
CD
f
u
I ?Sl!
--·--
..
TERN IISC KYllO lOHZ
IN
.. ...
""""
R
~50 01
lo191105Zjtt
1
PC MAIN!T B•R
p
051 01
111191~953!•
1
PC MAIINf:T liAR
p
~!12 01
!iuo•oo3ir
!'il
01
l60o.2739
os•
01
15010307
~55
01
1>219¥500
REF
PC
01
~22ooaz•
[1
RE'
PC LOGIC DUG LUT MOO I
0
1>22009••
~~
Rl'
PC INTCONN DIAG Sl8NAL
D
~··
I
~!~3-!!
trA1UIMrl
12-1s-1o
KO.IIO• •
I
KO. 110. out
...........
.... QIMIOIIIO.
~I
.... .....
12•2
""
£00 PC ADHESIVE, AMIFR SYN t.I.AsTOIIER 8
.'
013
057 01
_.... --·
ASSE-LY PARTS LIST I U•l?•'l'f·
REF
!:.
1
. :u
'
PC BEDM OIST CORRlCTION
0
PC 10 EMILEMt PROUUCT MlWIUM AL
p
A~IDC
PIIR INURCONN II&AA
D
0050 TOTAL LIOIU
:
'''
''
'
I
'
I
'
'
'
62957400 A
7-15
....
IIUILU
ll6o
I
lll63o~to!l
U
,AITIIIU-1
.
A
IlK. . . . .
DWG •
u
QUAtrn'lfY
I T!ll!
nR.. •sc KYBo w1c•
PAn IIIC..notll
U/M
l
~u"z
N
~Gl 01
!145l600
jl
1
PC IIU[L 12111 CRT
?l4!12800iT
PC MDOO, TIAIIINAL C&OLD
0~3
G1
. :!:.
I
114li90D
1
PC I'ANI!:L o Atct:SS
!04 01
11140~100
.
:•
'
1
PC KIYBOAIID ASSY 180 KIYI
N
A
.
11140ZlO!io
1
PC CAlLE ASSY KYllO INTER"AL
01
111402400!.
.
.'
?1 ..193Ui!i
1
PC CAlLF. ASSY DC POWIR
A
1
PC BAS!o TIIIMINAL CIDLD•' I•I.SHI
p
I
PC PAN[L ASSY IIIUR !f>OHZ
!~2 G1
111310905!•
1
PC
up 01
11140144"!'[•
'
1
PC POW !A IPLY ASSY
A
!14 01
!119111902/:.t
1
PC ALARM AUDIBLE LU& fl& i
p
i.,
01
~1411101 l~
2
PC STANDO, MAL!Ift:IIALI •••O STL P
!III5.So1[:t
3
PC SCII!W 101112 TYPit A Hr.A HD
01
101211403 [•
8
PC wSHR N0o10 EXT TOOTH t." TYP A •
~~·
01
!111511529!•
~20 01
~0160103!?
•
PC SCREw SEL' TAPPINI
6
PC IISCA •ltL,-LKG MEA HD a•!2l3/. I
021 01
UOI6031l
6
PC
2
PC wASHER 'L T NO,I STL
2
PC GNO WIRE ASSY
z
PC SCRW MACH PH li••20Xl/Z
s
PC SC:Rt!:w 314L SZ 1U HU
!u
'
i"
!•
!22 01
1012160'
~23 01
11139110!!> :·
~24 01
lOI2Tl5l
ozs
01
....
IIUILLI AHf!
INDMO
Ll
!26 01
440
:co
AISIMM.YIIUIIMI
.... I
on
"1858503 :.,
t!tna""" :• I
"
PAHNU..I
:~
"'512!0301
01
101Ul011 :u
021 01
116300012:7
!29 01
!1110!1101 l
i
""·
a
I
....
u
QUANtiTY
>~Sc;R
J,~
II
IN
TlRII nc KYBD WIC:L §u"z
PAH OltcltPnOtl
•
Z
PC GfNUL08Y CHAI>T
~L~•STKII
032 01
1012!110~
i
PC OSHA 111Do4 EXT TOUTH I.I\ TTP
l
z
PC NUT HEX NtH 4•40 STL
033 01
111407S5Z il
1
PC 'A0NT PANEL ASSY MOD l
'
71481100:1
~~·····5 :~
I
PC PANEL IILANKo SWITCH oi'L•STI~I IP
1
Pt
1
PC SUPPORT LOBIC 140DULE
1012!1105 :•
1
PC NUT W[A 14CH 6·32 STL
~TL
c:~
~,.
[u
1
PC WSHA N0o6 EXT TOOTH
1
PC DC: ENTRY PNL ISSY
P
p
~p
L~
011 lPII
TTP A
I
A
''1 01
!016~309
i• i
2
111391104
iv/
I
PC GNO WillE ASSY 4o!l U&A
G
I
Pc MSC:A HEX PLN SL'•LKG
e•~i!X114
8
~44
01
10I2640ZJ•
1
PC •SHII Jll0o8.EXT TOOTH Ll\ TYP A
II
~,.
01
1149&949
I
PC LAI[L PDII!II INTENCONIII
p
~41
01
1149iiT4i'l
I
PC &ROUND CLIP CAT
A
ill
\141 01
11191TO!I4fi!
1
PC 14AIN!T I&A
p
049 01
111911051:.
I
PC MABNE:T BAll
p
-,
" " Dllfl
1l•21•111
KO. NO. OU'
WI IN
""
WI OU'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'
'
!
A
1~43 01
1
KO. MO. IN
LIA lPII
I
I
10126401 :.
'!~!lo3•! ~
12·15·111 I
. :1
PWR SPL Y IITG Pt.ATt.
1114076!16
FILl CMANGI NO.
lNG. HIP.
II
PC wASwEA 'L T N0,4
1~;9101
PAGI
I "I
II
2
038 01
n·21·76
ITA,UI DAU
D
PC tiUIIP[IIt IIUBB!I> olOOH
SPAC~R
...
. .NT DATI
1
I
II
PC NUT W[A 14CH U•3i! STt. C:• OR
•
RE
MC
4
~~7101
I
SfAfUS
MC
1012!1603 iu
?141~uo~f'i
I
8
Ol LOt T JTE SEALaNT RED
REf
l
I
A
~IISMC:
HICiti'TION
"'"
AA
I
I
C~
16GA
10126400 iu
!35101
036 01
!
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
ITs'
'
!
i
SEL, LKB MEA HD e/3i!l311 II
031 01
034 01
I
II
030 01
'
i
I
~p
.
" " DAfl
A
016 01
~115
.... .....
1l•ill•lb
1/N
a
DISPLAY ASSY
~ID!O
out
I~'!'Dl• ..
p
01
11140763~
I
ICO. 1110.
PtLII CMAMOI MO.
I
p
CflNISM•&~LDI
~06
01
12-n-T6
ICO. MO. IN
1
I'
ti~ISHI
!~5
on
...
AIL
MC
....·- .,,
I
ITAfUI DAfl
lfAfUI
MC
002 01
!~· 01
7-16
ASSEMILY PARTS LIST 1 12•27•· 6
........y . . . . . . . , .
T IMD..O
'
, _ ..n
uo
... I
:.1
AH~
l
I
I
I
!
I
I
I
'
'
iI
I
I
'
i
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
62957400 A
....
IOUlLU
ASdJIILY NU-l
eo6o
T I. . NO
I
• .... u .. n ..
U
leo
:.I
PAITN.,_.
....
,...., DATI
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST I u-n-r~
440
AH~
"
A
I
I 752
u
QUANTITY
!SO Ol
lol9l!OSZ to
l
!51 Ol
!>19110SJ 4
1
!52 01
!1100406~
053 01
16042?3'1 v
RE'
054 01
15010307 "
1
055 01
lt2199500 0
RE,
056 Ol
lt220t824 1
RE'
057 01
bZZOOUit
RE'
TERM asc KTBD .,c
PAIT DHOtPnON
U/M
!
I I
i
II
!
II
I
I
I
I
!
I
..
II I
62957400 A
ICO. MO. OUT
....
Pill DAlf
U•Zl•fb
liN
M
OUT
0
p
A~
D
0
lo
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
u-n-" I
ICO. MO. tN
!~!D3•!.
lNG. IIIP.
Ip
I
I
.I
I
TOTAL LlN[I
...
ITAIUI OATI
PILf CMAMGI NO.
E~A~TONER ~
LDIIC DUB LIAT MOU I
PC INTCONN DUG SIGNAL
I
I
"'
PC AC/DC PWA lNTERCONN D&Ar.
IPC
I
I
RE
PC G£014 DlST CORRECTION
I
I
N
p
PC 10 EMILEMo PRODUCT NEUIUM
I
I
I
I
PC MAGNET BAR
100 PC ADHESIWEo AH8£A SYN
I0050
I
so .. z
tfATUI
"'
PC MAGNET BAR
!
~
DIKIItnON
OWG.
....
I 31
I
I
i
I
I
I
1
I
I Ill
7-17
~
Q)
"l:/--CP2(~
R(t'Q)
oon.s:
&
&
_&
3
().
~
~
8
>
&
loi"2K AS~Y (;,1407447" OIJ ~RFAC.E. INDICATED
PE.R CDC SPEC 1012.1;<)8.
MARK SER.IA.L tJO. • <:./~
"OIJ stlRrACf.
IIJDICA.TE.D PER. CDC ST!) I.OI,OZ'!:> A•.Jt>
CDC SPEC 1012.1'708.
APPLY FINO NO. 14 TO :JNDEI<:SI[:JE OF F,N[>
NO. 4 BEFO~ MOUNT:iiJ(,,
S4FETY GROUND: TO 6E CONNECTED AT N•oY.T
HIGHER 4SSEM8LY.
o116o
I
..V.
I (D
1>1407447:
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
230
IIUILU ARC
AIIIIUI.Y JIUMII.
•I
II
I " I
QUAimTY
I
POWER SPLY ASSY
A
71487Joo! 1
PC CHASSIS (PWR SPLYI
002 01
90460538! J
PC CO ASSY 6A,D•O PwH SPLY
6
003 01
~191Sl00!
1
PC THANS,.ORMER I PWR SPL Yl
P
~04 01
!>171!1200!
u
PC RECTifiER ,.ULLUVE 50~Jv 15A
006 01
0212110'1: J
.
'
~07 01
~l•••~zz! •
008 01
U080U30li 1
'
009 01
1012!;105! b
010 01
1.1904U202j
~
P
PC Tf.RN RECP 'STN 11>•14
7!10 ,.T WIR 168A STRD REU
4
•
owr.
]QUV
IILU
I
I
PC "UT HEX NCH 6·32 STL ~p UR LP t1
PC WASHER LOCK OTSHI::D TOUTH
~Oob
1o12~1o3! 1
U14 OJ
~1003'16~
•i
OZ PASTEo HEAT XFA CMPD :Ill! SIDE
/i\
~ARSII:£
-.
Jr 11'
I
d
1
SECTIOH D-D
j
(1\'P DIODE POLAii!'I"N ml
cu. 1ce, ftVEn£
'I I
ILJ
I
1C I
II
C2
II
C4
C3
c~
•"" c~1- < er5l
CE>
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lj
l'lll!SIDE
POURil'r
ClliSS •FUEICf TilLE
IEffiEIG. DESICINlTIIIll
~
~I
4
5
6
7
21.
8
'I
I1"J
~~
~4
~Eo,n
R8
210
10
llll
II
~11.
11.
ll"
I~
RIO:.
IE.
Rllo,RIT
17
CI,Ct,C'S
I!I
C.4,C~,C6
I 'I
C"T,C8,C't1 C IO,C II
1.0
CI1.,CI'3
NOTES:
21
Cl4
22
CIZZ,CRS,cR4,Ce
.&
24
YRI
1.5
&
vn
3.
~u:
ClNL¥
27
HJ2
-·--
APPLY ASS¥ NO,, REV. LEVEL, AND LOC. CODE IN AREA
sttllllt. lARK PEA CDC SPEC 10121501: CHARACTER
NEit:MT.12(12PT)CDLORIHITE.
lARK SERIAL HO. "SIN
" IN AREA SHOIN PER
CDC STD. I .01.075 AND CDC SPEC 10121508.
FIND HUIIfltS, ELEIIENT IDENTIFIERS, REFERENCE
DESIIiiATIOJIS Allf FOR 'EUitENCE ONU AND DO NOT
APfiEIRDNPART • •
.&,roSETOUTPUfTD+5,0VOLTSt.2SVDLTSREMDVER13
FOR A DECREASE OF .5 'IOLTS AHD/OR Rl2 FOR A DECREASE
& ~~LT~i:D TVPE
!>C.KD-0 AND APR."
DA'fO*O IN AREA SI-IOWN. MARK. PE~ COC
~PEC IOI'Z.ISOS; CI.IAICfCIE~ I-lElGHT .1'1..
I'Z. PT C.0\.052 Wloi\TE.
<0.
....
o-
I!'EF"
~
~
8
)>
~ECTION
SECTION
C-C
1!-8
lt14,1l~,C.RI,
I-IJ"I, NOT USEe·
....
0860
T INDH
bUILD 4RC
ASIEIUI.'f HUIUII
210
nv.
'CD
I
90460538 '31
"
"
PAll,..,....
8
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
owo.
J
90436()00!2
001 01
I
Is
CD lSSY ~AFD-0 PWR SPL Y
PAIT DIICIIPTIOll
U/M
STATUS
REL
M(
p
I
PC PW•Rn 5CKO•O CPOWER SUPPLY I
I
Pc IC L"305 11PIN VOLTAGE RGLTR
I
PC MES
~1
004 01
~SCj96~38 :~
2
PC RES FXD .J OHM 511
005 01
Z4150UU3S
lt
I
PC RES
006 01
Z4~i0UJZS\Z
2
PC RES ("0MP 27 014M 11411 ~p
p
I
PC ME$ t:OMP le5K OHM l/4W !IP
p
003
:
24501.H)67 :·
007 n1
ww
~XD
50 OHM
sw
01
9436D34s!a
1
C!4'S071ZS!l
I
PC RES
1
PC RES FXD FILM 1780 OHM 11411 lP p
i
010 01
~4360324 I
~XD
9436!'444\7
I
PC RES FXO FILM "'J.7KOHM 1/411 IP p
Z4~ouo 9 o
I
Pc ME$ r:OMP IJK nHM 1,_11 SP
p
015 r1
Z4507132jv
1
PC RES orXD r.OMP ?00 OHM IW SP
p
016 Ill
24507167 !!>
2
PC RES
017 01
'<557Jr.03!7
3
PC CAP !4000UFO !SV
p
018 01
9'559740413
3
PC CAP h0 7500 ttF 3'5VOC
p
019 01
24504333!6
5
PC CAP FXD TAIIIT 2e2UF ZOI' ~vocw P
020 n1
51R3'1108 I
2
PC CAP FXD CEA 47Pf 100V lOP
021 01
24So•3s&iJ
1
PC CAP
i
TAIIIT !SOUF 281'
iI
p
I
~t6tu~ooj~
4
PC DID 1>~CT SIL 700V 25 ...
15151~03:11
1
PC IC IJ~78~o•IZ ,STU POS V RGLTR P
....
oa6o
NDN
AS--.'t' Nu..ll
I
"
:co
,.
9~460~3~:31
,.....,...,...
.....
210
nv.
8
.........
I
u
NIC-
"'
ASSY f.AFD·O PW1> SPLY
16
PAMDI~
U/M
v RGLTR
15151402 3
I
PC IC UAT900•12 ~56C NEG
027 01
021 P2
!>}906105 !>
51906114 1
I
I
PC CON~ 0 12PIN Pr. MTO Tl~ ~18 4
PC COlli~ 12PIIII PC liTO
~18
028 H
6}405700 It
1
PC HEAT
029
~1
I0127J75 1
]
PC SCI' "!iH PAN P"L
030
at
IOI25•0l ~
o;
PC oSHA N0e4 SPG LOCK STI,, eP
0]1 r.l
10125103 I
2
PC IIIUT wEX IICH 4•40 STL
•
N
Tl
MSC~
~IIIIK
ASSY LUT MUD 1
4•40 X
UAYUS
REL
"' '"
p
p
8
~p 0~
ITAfUS DATI
vwwurv
l!NG. liSP.
o:s-11•?6
KO.IIICI.IN
111001
PillE DAft
I
~C511A.
teo. 110. our
lO!•GI•'!'6
SIN
I'
I
11709!
..
'
I
I
W11: OUT
""I.
'!641
:T...
8
ZP 8
PAN PHL 4•40Xl/4 CTYP II 8
101?7102 I
2
PC
!>19Db601 J
2
PC liT
034
~I
~5594500
PC FASTFNEA
p
035 Cl
1~001>500
.
4
0
~I
lolll~o•
~tNKt
SEMI fIG 3 AL.UM &LK
p
liEF
PC FAIIqtCATION SPECIFICATION
5
liEF
PC "AIIKT!\18 01ET140n5 C~JLK•SCtrTCI D
037 "1
.. 0436!>00 •
REF
PC SCM niAG !ICKD•O POWER SuPPLY
03R 01
5}003962 I
AR
oz
fiLl CNAMGf MO.
I "I
e438 I
~I
036
~
P
033 01
l
....
....., OAfl
025 01
032
I
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST I O'II•OY•
I CD
WI. OUT
WI. IN
.
p
024 01
lAC
S/N
our
p
OZZ A1
~UILLl
HO.
p
COMP 1e5fll OHM llf 5P
.-xo
1co.
ICO. NO. IN
•!·•a-16
I
011 01
no
PILf DATI
CCSBh
p
COMP !00 OH'4 IW SP
012 Cl
!tt'
I
o3.1a-'!'6
p
oo, 01
I
0001170¥
IHG. liS".
STATUS DATI
p
PC RES FXD FILM 3160 OHM 11411 lp p
OOe
fill CMANGI NO.
I
1
p
~p
68 OIIM 11411 !tP
~OMP
"'
I
p
9~'592b00; 1
~16(U:I71415
002 01
f
u
QUAfifiiT'f
M(
Dllcal"'lON
,.AGI
,.IIHT DATI
1 o•-o•-~6
PAST~.
HEAT XFR CMPO
NOOI•COND
D
:
!'
8
003" TOTAL Lt"'£5
!
i
I
62957400 A
I
i
I
7-21
.......
I
~
!2)(3)
'2.'
01
0
li'J(3)
0
0
7
!\JOT£5!
I. R.EFE:R.E.IJC.E. DE.':>IG.IJA.TIOt-!5 A.I>•OV tV f'l K.
R.E.FE.R.E.NCE. O>.ILY AND MA.Y 1\JOT t>.PPE.A.R
OIJ PA.RT.
MA.I
BUILD ARC
....
oa60 I
, _ .. u
on
....
230
1cD
61405700'
al
CD
A
I
u
.....,
..........
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
"' '""'"
I N REL
I HEAT SINK ASSY LilT MOD 1
-· .,.
..
···-·
AI._Y...,...
PAI'riHC111'11011
"'""
71411000 3
I
PC BRKT•MTIIIHEAT SINK I
p
51915600 4
2
PC IIEAT SINK
p
94791~00
6
2
PC XSTR NPN T03
004 11
51110400 3
I
PC XSTR T0•66
015 01
5!605400 4
z
PC SOCKET TAAN51STOA TO•J
p
006 01
94135100 2
1
PC PWA SKT, XSTA PT$•4
p
007 01
16791719 7
2
PC WASHER MICA TO•l 01SK
8
PC WASHI!A MICA T0•66 0!511.
8
oz
8
11
ooz 01
on
...
01
01
16798720 5
1
009 01
51003962 1
AR
'"'
HEAT TRAN"ER COMPOUNII
PU CMANGI NO.
106113•0:
'I
stATUI DAti
I
lZ-31•75
1(0.110. . .
....
Ptu DAq
CCHll•D
ICO.IIO. OUT
o1-n-n
'"'
W.OUT
I
i
'
'
I
i
I
PC SCR 1 TPG PAN PilL 6•201112 STL 8
18607914 1
2
10126401 8
12
PC WASHER EXT TOOTH LOCK
N~o6
8
PC SCREW MACH $•nX5/I PAN HD
8
012 01
10127115 3
10
ou 01
10127102 1
4
PC SCREW MACH PAN HD 4•40Xt/4 ST 8
014 01
10126400 0
4
PC WASHER EXT TOOTH LOCK NOo 4
015 01
65449556 3
016 01
6140560
1
·-
11110......
p
010 01
A[,
I
p
StL
011 01
0
......, DATI
1 01•06•76
1~7
"
WIR 16 GA SLD 1000¥ MIL W
76~
'
!
i
B
w
:
I
I
I
I
I
PC W/L HEAT SINIC ASSV LIAT MOD I D
I
001• TOTAL LlloiES
I
I
i
I
i
I
62957400 A
l
I
l
I
I
I
I
l
J
7-23
liWN
DAK
_QOOL ]A';.
rL•·
~
.....-e.
77.~
MFG
£.1t.~
f--
~
,..,,_, Jf
'REFIX
rLE
~/L
HEAT SINK ASSY
CC543A
I"A
DOCUMENT NO.
NHA 05700
FIRS1 USED ON
1<-11·711' co~~!,";~·
I
I
1
SHEET
of
2
REVISION RECORD
SHEET REVISION STATUS
2
1
I REV
~
lA A lA
'~s-'~
I DRFT
DESCRIPTION
ECO
RELEASED CLASS
/
ED CLASS
I ORFT
C
r1V
~~:R!u:~..
11ELE.A5E.D CLASS A
Revised per ECO
v
rt
DATE
APP
L~
111/.a.k,- ~~
·r-m 1'?.(.-,,
Jtc;.y-
.... -,
I~~
NOT~=S·
1·
Bulk identify with CDC part number.
APL
61402300
DETACHED LISTS
DOCUMENT NO
SHEET
2
61402300
r
~
7-26
.x to.s
62957400 A
I
CONDUCTOR
FIND
GAUGE
COLOR
I DENT
NO
(REF.)
(REF_)
1
8
24
9
1.~::~:;,
8-0
CODE IDEN
I
SHEET
I
3
DESTINATION
FIND NO
AP1
4
3
I"A
DO
ACCESS
ACCESS
ORIGIN
I DOCUMEN ;-;m
WL
REMARKS
FINO NO
1
DJ1
Co Indicator
4
Page/Scroll
1
2
3
12
3
Kybd Data 2 6
4
13
4
Kybd Data 25
14
5
Kybd Data 2 4
15
6
Kybd Data 2 3
2
5
6
--;;2
7
16
7
Kybd Data
8
17
8
Kybd Data 2 1
9
18
9
:
10
5
10
1
11
Kybd Data 2°
Data Rdy
11
Online/Local
12
2
12
Full/Hall
13
10
13
Break
7
14
High Rate
14
9
15
15
1
17
8
9
18
110
0
19
9
2
20
.10
0
24
Low Rate
Odd
116
16
P~rity
=-ity
11
20
Gnd
18
• 5V
23
8.0
21
AP1
3
DJ1
Duplex
24
Gnd
4
AA3183 "EV. 8 71
0
I
CONDUCTOR
FINO
GAUGE
COLOR
IOENT
NO
(REF )
(REF)
,~::~:;,
COOE IDEN"
21
11
24
6
8.0
AP1
12
20
5
3.0
DJ1
23
12
20
5
9.0
Conn Shel
FIND NO
19
20
62957400A
I I
WL
4
[A
DOCUMEN"" NO
ACCESS
DESTINATION
3
DJ1
4
Conn Shel
.ogic Chass .s
'
!
.
SHEET
ACCESS
ORIGIN
22
'''"' ""
I
REMARKS
FIND NO
25
4
-12V
Protective Ground
13
Protective
5
Ground
I
TED 11\i U.S.A
7-27/7-28
....
oe6o
T INDIIIC
~UlLU
AIIIMkY NUMIII
I
"
ARC
I
104
0
6140uoo: ol
PAITN~I
'
CD
....
sI
-·
A
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
I "'A REL
I CABLE ASSY KVBD INTERNAL
QUANIIIY
STATUI
Dllcall'nON
,,.
"'
PAIT DIKuonotl
p
01
Sl65Z901j 0
1
PC CONNo PC !DCIE 22 POS
!02 D1
~3397914! t
1
Pc CONN, 'EM 25P05N PLUII ALON£
p
1
~Dl
~o!!lllll
!OJ 01
94Zt99ozj
21
PC CONUCToFLAG 26•22AW8 STAll'
p
!~4 01
53391917:
·, ~
22
I'C CONTACT o STRIP SKT Zt•I4GA
p
!IS 01
!>1797117: u
1
PC LUG, CAMP R TERM o22•11GA 10~ II
01
!~· Ol
94277•.00[ l
942174ou: 1
2
3
PC STRAP CABLE TIE TYPE l
PC STRAP tAIL£ TIE TYPE l
~4277~o•! z
3
PC STRAP CABLE Tii TYP£ o
"'
!!7 01
008 01
Z45411310[' it
'
01
24541303! 7
!~0 01
Z4541301~ l
!~1 01
~4!548307!
~~·
11
l3~
••• ""
"
1 333
666
If
~12 01
9346Z555i ..
1
!13 01
!i1797Z04: II
1
UR 248A STAO WHT 301¥ UL
...
p
p
p
PV~
WlR 24GA STRD REO 300¥ UL PVC
UR 24GA STAD ILK 300¥ UL PV!=
w
w
I
wi
wrR zoe• STAD BAN 300V UL
PV~
w
w
PC LUI, CAMP A TERM oZZ•liCIA
41i~
B
"
"
WlA 248A STRD ILU 300¥ IJL PVC
1
os~';-=!';
....
1'11.1 CNAIIGI NO.
·~•llD!!
~I
FlU OA1'f
lNG. ftlf'.
STATUI DAfl
12-~~·!• 1
KO. 110. IN
I
~~~~~A•D
KO. NO. OUT
,,.
... ,.
D5•lD•'6
WK OUT
I
I
1154!
HI•!
H••r
I 1~~1
!!211
1
,.~1
:
i
II
0014 TOTAL LINES
62957400 A
7-29
3
....
~
fc fB
JD
~~
1..
DIM.·~·
..1
c
NOTE.S:
I. BULK. IDE.~TIFY WITH CDC. P~RT
1-JUMBE R. A..t-JD RE.V lSI ON LE.TTE.I<..
I0
Q
~
:::9
B
--.. ......
..,_,
T ........... ..
........
.
....... .................
,......
....,...,
~
~
~
IMUIO.....II'ICifiiO
TITlE
. ...
--·
Dl. . . ltONS~ .. _..S
IOI.IIAICIS
0
0
)>
GROUND WI~.E A.SSY
Ott AWING
4
lA
....
BUILD aRC
Alllllai.YNU..I
OIV.
OIA
'
Alnllo§:
I
61
001 01
001 02
93507555! 6
5ZIIOOISi 9
002 Ol
51?97236! 0
OWG .
~
CD
PAIT NUIUII
"
... Ill
1 CD
I
c
DIICIII'110N
I
QUANI'IrY
"'n WIRO' &SSY 'l'o§ 161U
U/M
PAIT DIKIIt'TION
o<
1 II•OI•h
l
J1'ATUI DATI
STATUI
I A Rrl
05-u-nl
w
w
I
fill CNANGI MO.
Fill DAII
u-oa-n
CCII4A
Wll: IN
""
U'l'61
11 'Til
006TiiJT
lNG. HIP.
ICO. 1110. OUT
KO. NO. IN
o< ...
61!!1 I"T WIR i6GA STRD SAN 600~ Ill PVC
625 I"T WIR~ ELECT tN'U 11\GA IA!EII
q
PAOI
,_NT DATI
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
104
Wll OUT
TUI
7641
PC LUG, CAMP R TO'RM 16•148& lOSS I
2
0003 TOTAL LI"!S
'
''
:
I
i
.... "
.......,Iii. . . . .
a6a I
104
'CD
A1nlln6: 41
PAIYM.,_I
'
..
.... ..
BUILD ARC
....
'
I
l
A
CD
001 01
001 02
9:t!I0755Si6
5281001!1: 9
00! Ol
51797236!0
I
.,.
--
C I &ND wiAI" ASSY 'loS 168A
QUANTifY
PAITOIIC..,ION
o<
I •
'1'90 I"T •IA i61A STAD GAN 600V UL PVC
790 I"T IL .'IC tO,!.
7-32
62957400 A
I
CONDUCTOR
FIND
GAUGE
COLOR
I DENT
NO
(REF)
(REF l
1~~~:~:;,
I
COOE IOEN"
920
5HEET
.A.CCES5
ORIGIN
FIND NO
I
3
I
WL
r~
DOCUMENl NO
ACCESS
DESTINATION
REM.A.RKS
FIND NO
1
9
16
2
]24. a
HP2
11
4
AP3
1
4
+ sv
2
9
16
2
124 .a
HP2
12
4
AP3
7
4
+ SV
3
10
16
a
]24. 0
HP2
8
4
AP3
2
4
Ground
4
1a
16
a
124. a
HP2
9
4
AP3
_8
-~
~
7
4
AP3
9
4
HP2
1a
4
AP3_
3
4
-12V
HP2
1
4
AP3
6
4
A(
HP2
4
4
AP3
5
4
Ground
3
_4
BP2
1
----
5 '
4
-:·-f-·i 6 '
4
BP2
5
11
16
3
1
6
12
16
6
]24 '0
7
113
16
8
8
l1a
16
a
! 24 .a
! 24. a
9
9
16
2
6.a
HP2
1a
l1a
16
a
6.0
HP2
16
a
13.Q
HP2
110
11
24 .a
i
2_
!
CE3
+12V
r-----
"\
J
TP
+24V
5
Ground
8
Ground
I
!
I
~
.O.All83 FilE\/
71
PRINTED IN US A
~UILU
DIY.
T IND MO
AlllllllT NUMatl
U
ARC
I'AIT NUMIII
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
104
IIY.
:CD
CD
QUANTITY
U/M
MC
001 01
5!901>005! 1
PC CONN PLUG U
0~2
519011004! u
PC CONN PLUG 9 PIN
01
..
r--...-l.,.
..::r.·.'.:m~:.---r,.;•.;T-,1
1 ·~···.n-.,~"'1'::'n!:~fi.;....
1
DWG
~03 01
519U59ooi u
004 01
519o6Zo4i"
19
005 01
51905804: ..
2
006 01
94277409:
PC CONN RECPT
~
PIN
ftD
f(O. NO. IN
ECO. NO. OUT
I
!
iP
PC CONTo PIN 20-14GA .13UINS STR P
PC STRAP CABLE Tll TYPE 1>
p
6
PI
7
PC STRAP CABLE TIE TYPE I
PC STRAP CABLE TIE TYPE I
I
PC LUG, CRMP R T[RM 16•146• 10551
~4ZT74oo: 1
942774oo: 1
008 01
517972311! u
009 01
V3464ZZ2~ •
4 SOU ~T WIR 16GA STRO REU 30UV UL PVC W
010 01
010 02
Y3464ooo: •
93464000! ..
T ~33 FT WIR 16GA STRO 8L~ 3UUV UL PV~ W
I
I
Hm!
HSHI
7 250 FT WIR i6GA STRO
BL~
Ip
300V IlL PVC W
~11 01
9]464l33l
'i
Z
~T
WIR 168A STRO ORN 300V UL PVC
~
9346411611: ~
2
FT Will 16GA STRD BLU 300V UL PVC
~
011
~J464BIIi l
2
FT ~IR 161A STRO IRY 300V lJL PVCi W
0015 TOTAL LINES
7~Z1i
!~21
1~~1
~
012 01
:
WIC OUT '
2 CONTACT'
PC COIITACTo SKT l0•148A n~IP &
007 01
007 Ol
013
WIC IN
!
i
I
I
$/N
113941
i
I
I
I
62957400A
I
i
I
7-33
4
3
....
~
D
c
El3 .5 t 6.4 mm
~2\'::l:
I '::OLOCR WIRE. (F/t-..1 2) \0 F/~
e.
Pf.R
coc..
c::,?~
I0120300.
BULK iOCUTIFY VJ\11-\ CJJC. F't...l<..\
~UM~.
~
~
1'B
~
TftLI
-:::..::-:•'=':/AIM
~
8
IOUUtCII
--10
CRT GROUND Cll P A '55'(
>
4
3
2
A
....
o•.. l
' ....
u
IIi
...Ill .... I
IUJLD ARC
AII....YNUMUI
01
Ill 01
00
01
00~
01
'"'
A
71492174' "
PAll NUMMI
7149221~
"'
9J46Z!5!5~
!517972:1~
QUAimTY
I
I
I
9421990~!
:'
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
104
751
HKIII'nON
IRDUND CtJI' CRT
PAll' DISCIU"FION
U/M
CLIP~
"' ""''"'
I A R!L
"'
,"
IIIII 20IA STIID IIIN 310V UL PV
"'
CONTACT ,;LAI 2!•11AIII STIIJI'
II
...
CRt IRDUND ICOI'I'!III
LUI, i:RIIP II t!IIM 16•HIA lOS
l'lllllt DATI
r
01 .... -'l"r
stATUS DAII
....'!
'ILl CNAIIOIIIO •
UU.Il9U
IIIIO.IIIP.
1D·l9•nl
ICO. ItO. IN
I
PIU DATI
~C!IIIlA
ICO. NO. OUt
""
Ol•l?•fT
WI IN
WI: OUf
I
0004 tOTAL LINES
:
!
:
I
1
:
i
62957400 A
7-35
,)
tJ
U-
Jl
u
I
I
0
0
0
0
- --- _ _ _ _ ______L__~-----------.---
7-36
------------
1-1\~
ill I
___________ I
]
62957400 A
bU!LO ARC
AUIIULY NUMUI
DIY.
0860
T INDNCI
I
Ll
61407657
'"'
:el
CD
Po\U NUMMI
I
o
QUANfffY
I LOGIC
I "'A
MnouLE ASSY
PAit DIICIIf"'lON
0/M
71485QOO !6
I
PC MOU"TING
71488~00 il
l
PC
~M
6
PC SPATe CKT 80 Vl6 NYL FTG I
10127104 :7
PC 5CAf'-<'
10126400
:o
2
4
PC wSHP
002 01
003 Ol
004 01
51777300
006 01
A
DfKit"ION
PC CO ASSY 6CUD-n LOG
9o46069B is
01
.... ......
I
001 n1
00~
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
~3i'J
~OU
PA~
~·0.4
007 Ol
I0!22qOI
i~
•
009 01
51R75>04 :1
2
PC
STD~~~'
010 01
71491•29 i9
I
PC
S~IFLOIP•R
s~F~L
PC '·UT TWIN SELF LOCKING 6-32
~000
AS~Yl
FILl CMANGI NO.
I
1
LU0~3-
lNG. liSP.
ITATUS DATI
12-IS-76
KO. MO. IN
FILl DATI
... '"
I
12-21-76
0/N
1(0. NO. OUT
w11 our
p
EXT TOOTH L• TYP A
H~X
L
p
PlATE
HO 4-40V318
M-F
REL
PAGI
PliNT DATI
12-~~---
A
PLAT~
"RAr~ET ~TG
"' ...
STATUI
_I
BRS 4•4nXS/8
p
9
B
!
B
R
p
TOTAL L l''ES
:
II
!
!
I
:
62957400 A
I
I
I
'
I
I
I
7-37
.......
I
w
0)
•--L-L..L..L...L
CROSS RE.F£A:£NC.£. 1.-..Sll
FIND
RUlf'£NtE. DlSIGNATION
·No.
....
4'5
.,
50
5I
52
"'
54
55
&--
Ql
Q>
C2 1L3,C4,CS,C.8, C 14,C.I'5
C.li,C.l~
C2A
c.q,c1~
Ct,C~C.lC.l~
C25
CIO
CI4>1 C.Il,CJ8,C...I'l
C 31,C40,C.q I,C.42.,C43
C.441 C.4S,C4O
NOTES
101
3l (.33 C3"1,05C36o,C3'1;C38f.
(30
C27
IQq
110
ill
112
114
R 2.8,Rzq, R 34, R5'R57 R"'O,R<..I
&
APPLY ASSY NO , REV. LEVEl, AND lOC
CODE IN
AREA SHOWN. lURK PER CDC Sl'fC 10121508. CHARACTER
HEIGHT .12 (12PTICDLORIHITE
&
MARK SERIAL NO. IN ARU SHOIN PER CDC STO 1 01 025
AND CDC SPEC 10121508, 12 HEIGHT, COLOR Wt!ITE
.1\
R,_
R56
gf,2
&
""
"'
I 'R~F
.:'>lCTIQII A-A
~OTATED
90" COOIIT"Eil CLOCK Wl!oE
R14,RI'::l
R40
~-l
R42
R4>
R44
R4C..,R47
CRI,C.R2.,LRIO
VRI
~1,'52.
".
.,,
"'
Roq
87
ql
CI-WIIG.E TAB
BlE
J.DDtTlONS
>010 WlltE;
a::LETIONS
Rq RIO
8<.
N
10
INSTALL 14PtN
POSITION.
Rn
R24
Rl<.
R4
84
8'
R.41 R45
(1~PT) (OLOR WHIH~
Rl7
R"31,R32.
"'"
85
bUJD·O IN A~f A. JH0\11 ...... MI\H< PlR
CDC5PH.I012.1508(H .... RIVH_Ft liFIGHT.IC
R:lll,R2.2.
a:,
88
o1'.)
R3~ R~G.
~-~
lil
~-14
~·I
4.-l.
4·~
TO
TO~
~PPLY
.&
R~o
R5,RG:.,R1, R8, RII 1Ril,R13,Rl
]0
72
B
Sll TCII CONTACTS ARE CLOSED IHEN TOGGL£ TOWN!.l)
OF BOARD IS DEPRESSED
£
R21
R·'::>
TO AJ'I-11
IC.
~00
IN
I EFT Mos-f
I
INONO
f
:co
AUEMilY NUMIII
'"
"60
ll
IIV.
IR
90460698 ~
PAll NUMIII
01 11
90460533
02
02
88924400
66299o99
"iMI
4
DUCIIniON
DWG.
"'
,,.
~
~0~
"' ~EL
PAIT DIICIIniON
PI: P
1
TYPE 7400 TTL qUAD 2•1/P
TTL QUAO 2•1N NAND
~
12170
12170
3
3
04
66299102 ~
2
p
IC TTL DUAL 4•1N NAND
F
88885500
66299103 j
3
3
:
IC !YPE 7402 TTL ~UAD NOR GA
IC TTL QUAO 2•1N 'lOR
:
•4
P
1
05 11
05 ~~
o:
6 112
'
.:'
]9389700 :
1
~8885700
08
1
51761500
09
1
88886400
r~o
1
50254300
~11 ~1
96744155
! .
I'
12
I
~13 ~1
~14 ~I
. !015 I
jou
'ol
'
~8924500 ~
07
I
I
~
c
c c
c c
9
~
F
)
:
TYPE 7406 TTL oUAD Z liP
74161/9316 158 TTL CNTR 6
6
c
C TYPE 74157 TTL QUAD 21/P
1
c
c 74123 193 TTL 2 RETGII 14Y8
2
c jxc TYPE 1406 TTL HEX 1NY
~
7
C !C TYPE 7408 TTL QUAD 21/P
96744172 ~
8
c IC 74J2 21R TTL QIJAD
88897000
I
88885400
~
95814600
~
I
"
2
66299110
c IC !YPE 9024 TTL
15
21~
~UAL
6629V111
~
4
PC !C TTL DUAL 4 TO 1 WUA
52342700
iJ'
J
PC !C 74191/9336
019 01
151H400
:~
1
PC !C 74174 519 TTL •-SIT 0 LTCH
RUlLO AHC
860
1
90460b98 :,
HV.
A
1
I
i a2o
01
A8882800
15104500
:1
15108600
A89~3600 ib
'an
o1
: 024 01
\J' !.
jJ
a26 01
51861711
on
01
~1861709 :7
o1
36l8b400
~. jo. 291o1
' ·a29 02
.luo IOI
'
~BIT
r
t
la34 o1
51892310 !1
I
~18923ll :, I
: !
fT40
7r.4o
:
'
p
p
p
p
i
I
'
I
I
I
~ 2200-13
"
ll-15-76
!
i
I
1
REL
I
I
'
I
I
I
rm I
I
I
CC555
jPc TC !YPE 74165 TTL
~BIT
1
PC IC
4~24
P iI
p!
lp
582 TTL DL/V CONT MYB
1
r
Pc 1 c zs6BIT 32xe aP-ROM ASSY
Fv
IPc IC l56BIT 32x• sP-ROM ASSY
IY
~5681T
32Xe
BP-~OM
!
I
ASSY
jp
!
P
I
!
I
1
jPc jtc TRt6oz• 941 TTL AsvNc otR
s 1892309 i~
7 40
i
I
!
iJ
ol
~ 7~40
uno
I
3618&500 ;9
518923n8 :1 I
~~40 7~40
II
IP ·
P [
lou o1
7~40
!
12170
!C ITL QUAD LINE ~ECEIY~R
PC IC MCI489 901 DTL QO LN RCVR
15125700
I
7~40
WK OUT
fP
IPC
A8896too io i
i ! m o1
!YPE 741&4 TTL
PC IC MC1488 900 OTL QD LN DRVR
66299lt6i!:t
''"
D LATCH " I
IC 1485 524 TTL 4R ~GNTD CPTR
jtc
IPC IC
)i
[OJ! 01
lou
rc
[Pc
i
CS1861706
; [are
4
88923700 :•
' I
1510S7oo !7
025 01
~RIT
PC IC 74175 5211 TTL 4 BIT 0 LTCH
:b
021 01
Wk IN
U/M
PC IC 74114 519 TTL
ii
022 01
BIN
I6
u jCD ASSY 6CUD-o LOG MOn
QUANTIT't'
019 02
4~
OWG
J
~5-25-17
uno
12170
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
210
: CD
FILl DATE
lNG. IUP
I CC555
ICO. NO. OUT
FLIP FO ~
PC IC TTL I OF 10 OECODEH
TTL
aq
~I
018 01
AUtMil't NUMIII
12170
r
'U!\.C.tttlff.f
I
OR
c IC 74160/9310 503 TTL UP DEC
~12
I •
12170
IC TYPE 7404 TTL HEX INVERTER P
C TTL QUAD 2 1/P 7404
I
~
IC TYPE 7410 TTL 31/P PDS
IC TrL3 31/P NAND PLA5TIC
017 ~1
I
"' '"
88898200 b
66299100 ~
6
6
ICO. NO. IN
p
03 11
03 ~~
"'~
STATUS DATE
12-15-76
dO 6AQ0•0 REFRESH dO
:
:
1
2
i"-·~-
STATUS
~0 ASSY 6CUD-o LOG
QUANTITY
Pto-Gf
PIINT DATE
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
210
BUILU ARC
I
i
12170
7125
12170
'r
PC IC TYPE 7414 TTL "EX 5CH/TIG61P'
I
PC IC IOZ4BIT 256X4 RP-RUM ASSY
IV
PC IC I024BIT 25~X4 qp.RQM ASSY
y I
PC !C I0248!T 256X4 RP·ROM ASSY
lv
i
PC !C I0248!T 256X4 RP·ROM ASSY
1036 Ol
51892315io
PC IC I024RIT 256X4 ijP-ROM ASSY
laJ1
01
t;189Z313il
PC IC I0248IT 256X4 BP-RON ASSY
[a38 01
51892314!9
PC !C I0248!T 256X4 RP•ROM ASSY
I
62957400 A
7-39
AUILU AR(;
DIV.
0160
'
... 1110
Olt
AIIUIILY..,_I
I
904601198
Ll
PAITN~I
'"
ASSEMILY PARTS LIST I
:!II e I u 1 co
"
01
1!1140300
040 01
1!5144500
041 01
!3
DIKIIf'nON
.,.
QUANI'ITl'
Ia"'
ASSY 6CUD·O LOG MOO
PAI'F DIIC..I'TtOM
,
1!5105600 [9
1
PC IC ,044 '!ill TTL PH/FRIQ OEII'R
p
04!1 01
1§1003059 ib
1
PC
046 Ol
51887100
1
PC XSTH T0•18 LO• LVL 'iP" SILl
p
9
PC CAP FXD CER ,1UF lOP lOUVDCII
p
1
PC CAP FICO TANT 1 UUF 20P 15VOCII
,
XST~
DOl 10~ ~PITU NI'N SIL
049 Ol
oto
01
24504369
011 01
51839142
!u
2
PC CAP f'XD CER ,033UF lOUV lOP
p
0!52 Ol
5187910!5
i"
•
PC CAP FXD TANT IOOUF lOP 6VOCII
p
0!53 Ol
24504317 !9
I
PC CAP
24504322 i'~
no
.tuF 20P 3!1VOCII ip
TANT
1
PC CAP FXD TANT 47UF 20P 6VDCW
]P :
id
•
PC CAP FXD CER 3qOPF lOP IOOVDCW
!P
10!56 01
~1001119 :•
62
Ol
517811437 !7
A
PC CAP SOLin TANT 33UF ZUP UV
Ol
24104312
1
PC CAP
TANT 6o8UF 201' hWVDC
p
p
1057
0!18
i·
I
PASS • 0 1 '41'0 Z!IIIVDC
1
FXD
I'
1060 01
q4227216!Z
I
01
1066
067 01
245000!1!1
!"
I
PC RES COMP 470 OH" 11411 SP
p
24!1oooe7
I
PC RES COMP IOK OHM 1/U !IP
p
068 01
~4500039
2
PC PES COMP 100 OHM I/4W
SP
p
069 Ol
'
2450U063!J
070 01
?4500079:'1'
RUlLO
DIV.
0160
T INDNO
:3
AR~
ASSlMilV NUMIII
'CO
,AIT NUMIII
ll
...
~ES
PC
,
A
""'
O~M
lt4W
I u I 'o
QUANTITY
DIS(IIPTION
ASSY 6CUD-o LOG ~on
,All DUCIIPTION
"'"
..
071 01
?4500027 b
I
072 01
?4500016
~
I
PC OES COMP 75
073 Ol
?4500048 •
~
PC ~ES COMP 24C: O>IH 1/4W
074 01
245000~1
s
I
PC ><£5 COMP 5,6K OHI' I/4W 5P
075 01
24<;00073 2
2
076 Ol
1770S903 7
I
IPC •ES FXD COMP 43K nHM
IPC
O~M
RES COMP 2, 7K
,,
O~M
5P
~
I
~
I
PC IRES
079 01
62012900 7
I
PC RES MOO nUAL 1156 OHMS
080 01
62012906 •
2
PC RES MOO OUAL
I
08) Ol
62012920
s
2
PC RES MOO nUAL 4.7K 01-tM 125MW
lp
I
082 01
24500056 7
I
PC RES COMP Sl i' OHt-1 l/4W 5P
lp
24500077 J
I
PC oES COHP 3,9K OHM l/4w 5P
~
I
1085
Ol
086 Ol
jo87
01
I
17105908
24500071
~
COMP 7.5K OHM l/41111 !5P
125~111
IK OHMS 125'111
PC RES FXO CO'IP 68K OHM o2~W 5P
I
I
'
I'
24500074 0
I
PC
~ES
COMP 3K OHM 114"
I
I
I
STATUS DATI
ICO. NO. IN
'VTCr
I
lNG. Ill,.
I
FILl DAtE
Wll IN
S/N
Wll OUT
!
iI
i
l
U5•25•H
CCU!I
ICO. MO. OUT
I
I
I
PILl~
I
12-15-16
I
I
...
!litH DATI
I •~·c'
I
i
!
I
I
!
I
I
I
I
:
I
I
I
!
I
I
I
I
'
i
I
!
'P
~p
I
i
1:
p
PC RES CDMP 22u OHM I/4W 5P
I
IP
p
I
I
I
1:
PC RES COMP 2,2K OHM I/4W 5P
24500047 b
I
I
I
1:
?4500098
1
I
I
245000A4
I
I
p
114• 5P
I
I
I
p
5~
I
!
i
p
078 01
1084 o1
'
p
5P
.2~~
I
i
I
I
I
IIEL
077 01
:on
!
i'
STATUS
PC OES COMP 30K l')&.tM l/411 SP
01 i
!
I
"' "'
PC RES COMP 33 OHM lt4w 5P
I
I
I
p
IG"'
out
I
I
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
OWG
WI.
WIC IN
''"
I
p
~p
Pr "ES COMP 4 1 71'( OHI'It 1/4'11 5P
21n
9046069~ :~
I
12
COMP IK
KO. MO. OUT
os-u-n
P
PC CAP DIP MICA 39PF lP JOUVDCII
iz
Ptu DAn
c;cstt
I
i
51839119
~y
....
PILl C AMG
I
I
IO!i!i 01
PCICAP CER
....
lNG. HSP.
p
i'*
51839147 !'*
:u
KO. MO. ttl
I
p
PC IC MCM6!570 560 MOS CHAR GEN
!•
u-n-r• I
REL
"' "'
PC IC ll02•2 TTZA MOS 10248 RjiM
14
,....,fl\fl
·~·c"'.
STATUS OAU
ltAYUS
I
0!14 01
7-40
... .....
210
I
088 01
94360292
il
2
PC RES FXO FILM 9090HMS I/4W IP
p
089 01
51001239 b
1
PC 0!0 S~ITCHING SIL 1~3U64
p
HGL~R
090 Ol
15151500 •
I
PC !C UA7800•5 )S1l PO$ V
091 01
51862504 I
2
PC SW, PC 80 TGL 8 IN-LINE SPST
p
!
:
I
I
I
I
i
p
I
I
I
I
i
62957400 A
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST I .,..C2'
DIY.
ASS._T NUMIII
0!60
I
T INDNO
Ll
210
'"
HV.
90460698 o!i I
,.
PAHN~I
DIIQIPnCIN
OWG.
8
IB"'
!CD ASSY 6CUD·O LOR MDn
I u
PAHHK..I'ltON
U/M
QUANTITY
REL
094 01
51904105 J7
1
PC OSCILLATOR TTL DIP(6,745 NHZI p
095 01
51848401 !v
1
PC SOC KETo IC 16 POS DL•lN-LlNE
p
096 01
!l8484o4!J
1
PC SOC!I.fTo IC 24 POS DL•lN•LlNE
p
09T 01
11486102
8
PC .-us. PWR 11.3~LG W/POSTS CU
p
PC BUSt PWA 3,6LG W/POST5 CU
p
PC CONN, 9 PIN PC MTn GOLD FIG 3 p
[a
098 01
71486101
:u
4
099 01
51906111 !J
1
J01 01
95642805 :•
soo
I
FT wiR SLD ?.4GA TINNED
I
I
1012!11101
iu
1
103 01
10125103 il
1
PC NUT HEX MCH 4•40 STL ~p OR ZP I
PC ~SCH PAI>I SLT 4•40X5/16 SST
Ill
'
PC FABHICATION SPECIFICATION
io
i
9Z?aooa•i7
1
01
16006500 iv
REF
110!1
,106 01
i:::
10121508 J!:l
16019!100
!•
01
'1046U!I32
01
02
94315102
o1
I
REF
I
PC "ARKING METHODS l~ILK•SCoETCI
~~~
REF
PC SC+i DlAG 6ARD•O MET LOG USIC 0
4
PC liES COMP 3,3K DHI' l/4w !i>P
i•
3
PC RES BPlN NTWK 3,JK 3P l/811
p!
1
PC PES COMP 820 OHM 1/411 !IP
p
I
112 01
245000'59 J I
I
PC PES COMP
nHM 1/4W 5P
p
lU 01
5189i!316 :..
1
PC I C 1 0248!T
2S~X4
p
RP•AUM ASSY
I
!"'
114 01
'14375109
115 01
!'2629.491'~
RUlLU AHC
AIIIMILY IIUMIII
OIV.
0160
I
T IIIDN
"
,..,. .........
1 1;,''0 FT
.... I ....
'"'
A
"
u
QUANTITY
306A SLI' -HT IJL
I
I
I
I
DIKIII'TION
1 co ASSY
"'"
~cuo-o
Lor,
to~un
i
!
i
v
i
I
I
SfATUI
IG"'
n
12·15·16
MC
ICO. NO. IN
!
YLD
i
I
I
ITAnll DATI
AEL
"Aif . .~ON
I
I
I
I
iI
"
~VNAI•
..
All<
I
1
"ILl DATI
KO. NO. OUT
l
TuS-15•17 l
CC555
!
I
I
IlliG. niP.
I
I
'
I
I
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST I
210
9o46o69e :s I
10·1~
i
I
I
p
PC RES @PIN NTWK IK 3P 1111•
1
i
!
i
68~
i
'
I
'
24500061 7
I
i
I
!
111 01
!no
I
!
0
:
I
J09
I
io
24!100075 !7
I
I
I
I
PC IDEQ/INSTALLATION oF EXT CKTS
!
I
II
REF
WI OUT
Will: IN
''"
I
JOZ 01
J04 01
oS·U•H
~C555
I
"
STL CP
1
KO. MO. OUT
KO. NO. IN
PC wSHH N0,4 SPG
LOC~
fiLl OATI
lNG. IUP.
u-n-r6
"" "'
...
I " I
IJATUS DAn
STATUS
fiLI.CHA~LtJQ.
PAG.J
8U'TI.'TI
BUILD ARC
wtt••Tvn:our
""
I
I
:
I
I
I
i
I
:
i!
:
i
I
I
I
'
I
'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
!
I
I
I
i
I
'
'
I
'
:
!
62957400 A
7-41
(\j
' ''
u
I
0
0
0
0
AEI
7-42
0
62957400 A
~U!LO
I
lo860
f
ARC
AIUMII.T MUIMII
DIY.
INOJtO
Ll
61407656
I'A.,-MUIIIIIII
,,.
:o I
"
230
uv.
a
.... I
I
o
QUANTin
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST I
OIKitiPflON
"'
DC E"TRv pNL ASSY
I'AIT DIKIIniON
0/M
I•
REL
"'
•
001 01
90460701
jl'
1
PC CO AdY 6CVO•O LOG
002 01
l't4asqoo ;6
1
PC
~OUMT!NG PLAT~
p
on
ll
~OU
2
PC "RACKET MTG PLATE
p
6
PC SPRT, CKT 80 1/16 NYL F!G 1
p
10121'104 :7
l
PC SCREw PaN HO 4•40XJ/8 STEEL
006 01
10126400 fo
4
PC wSHP N0e4 nT TOOTH LK TYP
007 01
loi22901 :1
4
IPc
NUT TWIN SELF LOCK!'IG 6·32
8
009 01
51875304 il
2
PC
STO!'~Fo
8
010 01
7t491P.29!9
1
PC SHIFLOIPWB AS5YI
01
1'1481;'500
004 01
5t7T7300
005 01
;s
'
I
:
oooo
M•F
H~K
•
BR$ 4-4,K5/8
I'AGI
l'lltHT DATI
lz-1!5·76
nD
1(0. MO. IN
Fill CMANGI MO.
j
I •I
ll•ZZ·T~
ITATUI DAfl
stATUI
luv~•·
lNG. lllf'.
I
ICO. MO. OUT
.....
1'1~1
QSEI9!502
0/N
DATI
12·21·'6
vn out
8
8
p
TOTAL LiliES
''
'
'
'
I
I
62957400 A
7-43
.....,
I
t
ltOfES:
&
&
APPLY ASSY ItO., REV. LEV!L, AND LOC. CODE IN
.lRU SHOIN. lARK PER CDC SPEC 10121501: CHlRioCTER
HEIGHT .12 (12PT) COLOR
&
.&.
aun.
lARK SERIAL NO, IN AREA SHOIIN PER CDC STD. 1.01.025
AND CDC SPEC 10121508, .12 HEIQIT, COLOR IHITE •
CAPQC.Ii'Oil C8'1 ..aT U'iED,
FlltO NUIIBERS, ELEHNT IDHHIFIERS, AND REfERENCE
DESIQrtATIIIIfS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY AND DO NOT
APPEAR ON PART.
f.
&
SIITCH CONTACTS ARE CLOSED -.tEN TOGGLE 10VrMD TOP
OF BOARO IS DEPIIUSEO •
.£ . .
PPLY f, C.\10·0
IN ARt" .SHOWN- MARK N .. R
(~DP\)5r~~~~~~~~~::'(HI\IV.CTE"
&
IN~TA.L'-.
14PIN IC 'tOO IN
PO'So!TION.
C14A.NG.E. TAel£
AOorrtatts
ADD WIRE:
DELETION~
1.} lil~·l4 TO !l~·l4
2.l ~S·I TO ll4"1
~ le44. TO A~-~
.)lil:4·!1 TO A.T'l.-11
oIl.)
\00
~
~
0
0
)>
I )RE.F
5lCTIOMA-"'
R0\~~'0
\0
90• tCUlr4TE2. C.L.OCK.
WI~E
HEIGHT .IC
LEITt-10~T
{
....
oB6o
I!U!LU ARC
Alla-.YitUMIII
I
9o46o7o1 •71
PAII'N. . . .I
' .... u
R
CD
'
V0460~33~4
001 Dl
004 01
.,.
~On
PAIIDIKIII'ftoN
...
""
ltAfUI
REL
1
PC PC 1!0 6AQO-n
~
PC !C TYPE 740•1 TTL .,uoo 2•1/P
PC REPLACED BY ~~924Un 11690
p
p
B8898200 :6
66('99100 :9
3
1
PC IC TYPE ~41!! TTL 11/~ P05
PC REPLACED qy Aq~98201 11 ~oo
p
:5
2
Pr IC TTL DUAL 4•JN
p
'
01
02
........
-
ASSY 6CVD-o LOG
I ""G
6
:m:m ~~
002 01
002 02
on
an
.,. ... I -·u -T co
--
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
210
66299102
:
!•
~EFAES~
""
~·~o
3
3
006 01
006 o2
118924500
J93BY7oo
iT
4
4
PC IC TYpE 140• TTL ~EK INVf RTER p
p
PC TC 14Q6 TTL QIIAO 2 t/ ...
01
8BR8~700
aoe
!u
!•
01
51761~00
009 Ol
tSR8864QO
010 o1
!;oz543oo
011 01
'~674411§511
~AA97000 !1
012 01
!o
Ji
1
PC IC TYPE 741} .... TTL '11JA.t) 2 J/P
9
PC JC
~
Pr. IC TYPE 74! ~7 TTL
PC JC TYPE
74tl>:'>
TTL "EK !OIY
1
PC IC TYPE
r•o•
TTL
PC 1C 1432 2JP TTL
96744]72
i"
itRR85400
l7
IS
015 01
'~~5914,00
6629'1111
018 Ol
~Z342700 13
019 Ol
l15to•4no
....
01160
T INDNO
~UILU
I
"
:o
PC IC TYPE
Pr 1C hj91f931(o
1
PC IC 74j74
··"'
I"
ll~
OR
5!~
~CV0-0
TTL 4A
~12
TTL
lOr.
7ho
12170
1740
iT~
p
'zzoo•IJ
I ""G
~o"
1
1(0. NO. IN
KO. NO. OUT
022 01
tte923600 jn
I
PC IC TYPE 741'4 TTL q1JJ
p
023 01
88923700 :.
I
151057oo J7
I
I
Pr IC TYPE 741•5 TTL •BIT
p
1
DC IC 74!75 52_ TTL 4
~IT
~
LTC>i p
PC IC 7485 524 TTL 4•
,.t;NTLl
CPTR p
1
PC IC 4024 o;qz TTL
~tB6t7n6 ]3
PC IC ZS68IT
fiP·A014 ASSY
G
026 01
5186!711
ij
I
I
PC IC 256BIT 32XP P,P.ROM ASSY
v
027 01
5t8617'l9 !7
I
PC IC
028 01
36}86400
2
PC IC MCJ48q
QO LN ORVR
p
029 01
029 02
!;!I
b6299!11o :~
36!86500 :~
I
I
PC IC TTL QUAD LINE RECEIVER
PC !C MC!48Q 911 DTL QO L,. RCVR
p
~L/V
IUICI
CC555
122oo-u
04.19-17
""
-~·
?1?1
p
12170
12170
7740
030 Ol
1512~700
I
PC IC TRI60?A ;41 TTl. UYNC 0/R
p
I
HB896t
no jo
I
PC IC TYPE 7414 TTL "EK SCH/TJGG p
I
032 01
~JB923oB )1
I
PC IC 1o24S!T
v
256K4 BP·AOM ASSY
v
v
qp-IIQM ASSY
033 01
5189Z3o9!"
I
034 01
s 1e9ZliO )r
I
PC IC lo249TT >56X4 RP-110'4 ASSY
035 Ol
St892311 !~
I
PC IC
036 01
5j892315
I
PC IC lo24BfT
?~6X4 BP·R~N
ASSY
v
on
!to
Ol
5!89231311
I
PC IC I0248TT
>~6K4
liP-RON ASSY
v
038 Ol
51~92314!~
1
PC !C lil24BJT ?56X4
qP.RUto4 ~~ssv
v
62957400 A
140
I
I
v
PC IC I024FI!T >56X4 RP·R0'4 ASSY
1~24B!T
Wll OUT
v
031 01
?5~··
'U
PILl DATI
CONT MV8 p
HXR 8P·A'M AS5Y
~TL
PILl CNAIIGI NO.
PAG!
lNG. 1111'.
12.15-76
4
7727
I •I
STATUS DATI
""
p
;z
vx~
PltNT DATI
1 o4-19-
AEL
l51Q45DO
LATC>i
ll
...
STATUI
15108600 jb
'
7140
p
PC IC 74J74 51• TTL MIT
!3
1740
p
1
9::~
1~110
1740
p
0 LTC>i p
6-~IT
I'Ain'DIICIIPTION
l~68tT
??40
p
020 01
025 01
lll10
7140
p
021 01
024 01
77to
p
11
0~
1ZI70
12170
.....
..., ..n
... ,.
""
u•-,•-n
p
H88Rl8oo
019
00012fTO
p
~UK
DIKIN'TION
ASSy
CC555
ICO. NO. OUf
uno
p
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
U/0
........
p
DEr~iJE,.
PC TC TTL OIIAL 4 To ,
l
QUANTITY
Qq-~
I
Pal CMAMOI MO •
1
p
21/P
QU~n
ICO. NO. IN
.... I
TTL ''UAL FLIP FO P
PC IC fTL 1 OF 1 ,.
?I"
p
Of.~4
~V8
~ETGA
PC IC T4160IQ310 503 TTl. U" DEC
.,. •.. .....
I
I co
9046o7ot •7
PAIIT NUMIII
4
i.,
Ao'600 !'~
1
PC IC 6046
062 01
51681100 !7
1
PC XSTR 2N5J89 liP 'I Sll
063 01
51003092 :7
1
Pr XSTH 2N2?22 HY
066 01
!iJ716000 !o
1
PC XSTH 2'12q97
065 01
51003059~6
l
PC XSTH
D~J
066 01
5188r1oO
i"
1
PC
TO•J9 Ln• LVt ,,_,.,. SlL
O•"
26506173 !2
1
PC C-P FXD f'P 4711F
061 01
z•so•eot!,j
I
PC CAP
FX~
IIYL
... ~z'l"
069 01
518!916r !'
9
PC CAP FXD
~F.D
.J•IF JOP lO'JV!lC-'
·-
ol6o
.._,_.let
I
touoro1 •r
u
01
8
r
r
r
r
D
...
""""
Ia"" IIEL
""
CD ASSY 6CYD.O LOll 1400
PAll'-~
PC !C Z102•2 r72i 0105 10268 .....
~STH
wos
CHoR GtN
TTL p .. /FR~Q DE Til
~R1
•PN S!L
S!L
•gN
?~g
t~,
1~~1)C:"
... lt•n\11
p
p
.
p
I
PC: CAP FXD TArH I NF ?rP I ~VOC•
PC CAP FXO
052 01
51879]1)1§
i"
4
PC CAP FXO TA,.T
053 01
Z650431 r
jv
1
PC CAP FXO TA'.l'!' •ltJF zoP
)~VOCW
p
056 01
245o•32Z
]~:~
PC CAP FXO TA"l
p
055 01
51A3¥119
l"
1
6
PC ClP FXO CEW
056 01
~10011191•'
~2
.c"13VF' 1 OroY I OP
1nouF
-.\'oe ..
1 ~,,..
p
p
4'7 1JF
29"
~V~Cio
l~OPF
H~
lOOY!lCO p
•o1"'" ~~-•oc P
.-~.~s
HNT 3lUF
057 01
5)78661r:7
~
PC CAP
058 01
Z4S041tZ
!·•
1
PC c•P FXO U"'T !1-eCUF ::!OP f"'I'VOC
p
060 01
'1622rzt6ii
I
PC CAP DIP
Jouvoc•
p
. ...
1P
~oalr'
1!V
~-P
·~
.,.
1\CVr.-o LOt:= MUP"''
061 Ol
-·
,. .........
···-·
245048171"
I
PC
FXD
062 Ol
Z45000A5 :~
4
Pr. PES COI!P t.C'K OH,; 11•·' 5P
063 Ol
Z45ouo~l
~
PC WES CO .. P 33'
064 01
24!00443
1
PC
160
"
~'f-1
,
9r16~o7nt •7
I
'
j"'
!.,
M
1G"'
. .IC..-riON
I u leo •ssv
~ES
~ES
PAit . .ICIW'nOII
12
CO~?
~~~
OH~to·
COOIP 1S ..
""-
2~lTT
5~
..
,,
SP
t/60
5~
177p5916
i•
I
PC RES FXO cn'4P n•t2"£'r, •25" 5P
066 01
26500055
!~
2
PC qEs COOIP 67
n... .- 116• SP
o67 01
l6'5oo~•7 :l
2
PC RES
068 01
Z65o~oJ9
2
PC RES
069 01
l45ooo6l
!J
!J
"""
:
r
1~
p
p
CO~P
IO•l !:'Hill! 1'6'" 51'
t/• '
Z45ooo79
~9
?
PC
Z65ooozr :b
1
PC RES CO"P 33 OHM 1/60 ,p
p
or2 01
l4Sooo36!'~
1
PC RES CONP 75
p
073 01
24500048;4
2
PC RES co•P 261 """ 116W 51>
p
074 01
265ooost
js
1
PC RES COMP Set-K OHM tl•• <;P
p
or!i 01
i!65ooonjz
2
PC RES COMP 2•7t(
or6 01
l77o59o3 i'
1
PC RES FXO r.ONP 6]M nHOI oi!'5W sP
p
077 01
Z65ooo•a!~
1
PC liES CONP 30K 01101 1/6W 5P
p
ora 01
265oooR4i"
1
PC RES COMP
O~"
r,o;~
1/6•
o.. ~
!)P
~p
)14• sP
OHOI 116• 5P
079 01
~>2on•oo !r
1
PC RES NOD DUAL 56 004105
010 01
62012906 i6
?
PC RES 1100 (IIJAL t• 01410S li!5"W
~
pr
011 01
t.201Z~20 !!;
~ES
KO. MO.fM
........
-
UUOUIIU
..... .. ...
PILIIAft
CC555
ICO. 110. OUf
-
PILICIIAJIUIIO•
04-19-17
""
p
~p
071 01
01'4~
SYA'IUIU.TI
u.ts-16 I
- -·.
I •I
p
p
CO"P 4 • 7ff
-~·
p
oro 01
~ES
.... - ....- -
p
114• 5P
OHM 114"
_.
p
1P'
I~
- -
1 ••·19-77
p
CO~P
PC MES t:OIItP
...
ITA1US
R[L
"'
065 01
r
p
-·-·
ASSEMILY PARTS LIST
no
""
....
06.19.17
woovr
..
?
I:III!Lll lAC
ovr
p
fo
MJC~
CCSS5
110.
p
26506369;o
SOLI~
I
aco.
p
5t83914Z
~v
.... ....
VVtliU ru
p
051 01
PC CAP C:ER
KO.IIO. . .
""CIIAIIIIIJIO.
p
Syl
ltJ'l EPI~AlC
~Eq
ITA'JUIUH
12.n-r•
....·-
I ~...,.I
p
SP~E~
P~P
. .IITDA11
I u.-u-
p
050 01
,_.... 1
7-46
ASSEMILY PARTS LIST
210
1251411
MOO n!•4L 4.7tt ,.,." 12-; ... w
p
I
p
p
p
p
p
62957400A
....
0860
INOIM
J
AI--YMUMRI
I
PAnNU..I
owo.
DIICiti'YtON
......... .,.
I
A
1 co
u
•ssv
I "'G
6CyD.o LOG 140n
PAn OIIC."ION
oaz D1
24!0U0~6 !7
1
Oil Ol
Z45ooo77!l
I
PC RES COMP ],9K
1
PC RES FXD CDMP 68K OHM oZ5W SP
1
PC RES COMP 2 0 2K OHM l/40 5P
171o5toa i•
le.
Z4500071
085 Ol
2450004 7 :•
I
z.souo74
I
¥436UZ9Z io
I
086 ol
!o
on Ol
Oil Ol
i·
~1001239
089 Ol
090 Ol
091 01
1!5151500
l•
!J8625o•
~~
RES
OH~
p
I
PC IC U&7Bon•~ l~7A POS ~ ~"'L'TR
p
2
PC S•• PC ~n Tf,L 8 I~·LI~E SPST
p
p
I
PC OPTICAL !Sn,_ATnR
I
PC
Tl4T 1l 10L£'1 FlG 3 p
C\PgiN,
~1 1 H
,4~t
p
TINNF~
"8
c~
HKttrriON
ot,C._-0.'1
·~sy
PC ...1UT
PC
MC
1_01~
I
Mt)~'
(j
PAn OIICIIPYION
U/M
1ol2511')3
p
..:/..,OSTS Cu
- - -
t-~!='X
~SCH
'-4C1~
ITAYUI
"'
KO.IIIIO.IIill
S~T
:~
OEF
PC
••~~!'IG "ET~ons
f•
~F.:,.
PC
~EQIJ~ST&LL•TIO~ ~F
oEF
PC SCH oi•G bA ·D•O MET l.OG "'SIC D
~ES
COMP 3.31(
ElT CKTS
1t4• 5P
OH~
4
110 01
9437!:n o2
)
PC
~ES 8PI~
Ill Ol
1
PC
~ES
liZ Ol
Z4Sooo61 !7
I
24Souos9 i1
1
PC RES CONP ~~-
Ill ol
5t89i]t6
i•
l
PC IC
114 01
'-'4375tn9
j~
1
PC RES APIN 'IT•K lK JP 118•
115 01
Sz6Z9949jt~
l,l~
3P 1/AW
COMP P?,il OH;-4 T/4W
n-.,.
lo~4RIT ~5f~4
I ;,,g FT WIR loG A SL
1
ti4W
~4-IW-17
.. I.
Wll OUY
D
0
I
II
p
p
so>
p
I
so
pi
!
RP•AUM ASSY
•~IT~
OlZO TOTAL L J'IFS
ICO. MO. OUY
..LIIt.\1"1
.,.
( SILK•!!C o ETC I 0
:
NT-~1(
CC555
8
PC Flf!HIC&TIO•I SPECIFIC•TIO••
Pr.
I
-
UVOl~liU
IIIO.HIP.
IZ.U-76
- -· -· --
..LI CMAMOI MO.
PAOI
I "I
ITATUI DATI
...
~.---
oq ZP 8
4•40 C\TL CP
PAN SLT 4•4ux5/1a
, ..., DAn
I ••·•¥·n
~[L
~EF
'
I
ASSEMILY PARTS LIST
I • I " I co
coiMI QIIAiilll"ITY
103 nl
TC >4 P1lS OL•I'I•LINE
-
...
....
p
PC W5Hrt NO•• SPI; LOCK STL.
I
.,. .. .. .....
p
·~ PJS DL•l"t•LPoiE
Q P!'l
soc~n
~··~ FT •IR SLO
,I"
:co
9~••o7o1 :1
PC
I~
!·•
aRC
~WR
PC CONN,
I
l"
102 Ol
~UILU
•
soc~n.
ICO. NO. OVY
..LIDAn
04-19-17
p
~t'Z)
r,Jot"•l4~
PC SOCI\J:Tt !C
!"'
CC!i!l!l
I
-vOlJlTIJU
p
S!L !Nlu64
btR2~700 !1
lNG......
'ILl CMAIIGI MO.
p
2
093 01
~
p
p
1
.... I
p
PC RES F"KO FIL>' 9g90HMS j/4W lp
lOOOtOOO ib
!t9o•tos!7
KO. MO. IM
PC RES C014P ]K OHM l14W 5P
otz 01
094 01
"'
PC
PC PUL5F
...
12-U-71>
1
PC 010
I
STAnn DAn
R[L
I
10
u-1•·n
p
!14W SP
C014P 22 11 OHM TI4W 5P
SWITCH!•~
HINT DAti
1
ITAYUI
p
PC RES C014P 510 OHM 114W !iP
o&4 Ol
f
'"'T
' "'
9046o7ot •7
"
....
ASSEMILY PARTS LIST
210
IIUILD •RC
I
i
I
lv I I
:
I
p
w
I
I
'
I
I
'
I
I
I
II
i
I
62957400 A
7-47
........
!.
co
REAR VIEW
SCHEMATIC
DIAE.RAM
0
·roAWIIO-~
OISC.O •
REF
=o·
AVA - - - - -
®
~)R.E.f
~
~
~
8
)>
REF
DETAIL-A·
SCALE: NONE
OETAIL-B
sc.A~: HOI'jE
I )REF
OETijiL- C
SC.II.LE: NONE
ARE!>. SHOWN PEF
C.DC SPEC 10121508.
2. REFERENCE. DESI6NATION5 ARE SHOWN FJFREF ONLY AND MAY NOT APPEAR :JN PAF1.
CBI
0
I )REF
NOTES:
~MARK"ASSY oi407&~5·1N
Q9
@
DE
P£111PiiEIW. - -
0
PRIMARY CIRGUIT 8RI
GOUP CIRC.UIT PF\IMAIRI
0
dU!LD
AUtMILY NUMIII
'"
0860
I
T INDHO
Ll
001 01
:CD
... .....
I • I
61407635 :4
PAll NUMNI
A
002 01
71491951
003 01
51899703
(t
!o
00. 01
9S'587COl
005 01
Sl,:~i99QOO
DIICII"ION
I CA•L~.
QUANTITY
"
71492?.20 )o
AC
I
PC
PC FILTFRo RF! ~·
iS
I
PC rs
iti
I
PC
co~n,
006 01
3615tN09 jo
I
PC
~U'i~tNGt
007 01
5t770ft03
CLA~P,
008 01
36053423 14
009 01
lo125108
CO~Fo
~-P
PANEL
E~TRV
12-15-76
"'
tCO. NO. IN
p
STRATN•REL BLK NYL
R
1
pr.
PC STA~·"''OFF,
io
l
PC
010 O!
10126403[-
4
Pr \l'SHR NO,] 0 OT TOOTH LK TVP A R
011 01
lo12640l
iH
6
Pr
""SHR
012 01
1o125105 \"
~
PC
~UT
013 01
IOI271ll
f2
014 01
10126103
i·J
015 01
~1 9081'-02 !-~
016 01
51797414
(j
017 "1
Jooas~oo
(.,
OIR r 1
<>1407n30
019 01
~4277~00
020 O!
'5) Qt)5..,0S
021
51 QQb?OO
~I
~1JllL 1
OB6n
I
T INONO
Ll
PC
1'7 FT
REF
6t4o76ls :.
1
"
02?. o I
17973GOfl ~1
023 c 1
~1797?36
~p
rNS ,Ofl6f'I!A T/W "-:AT TEF
n~t;;,
p
A
p
CT~lP
PC "/L qEAP PNL f'o!Ot-tZ
"
CARLf TTE TYPf I
8
1
PC C:ON"' DECPT \2 C0NTACT>
p
~
PC fONTAr"lt SKT >O•l4GA >T"!O T
p
... ..... I
• I,
QUANfiT'f'
'T~io
DUCII"ION
I "'A
CAOLF. !•TENSITY
PAIT DIKII"ION
V/M
PC
S1ATU5
12-ls-7&
"' "'
ICO. NO. IN
il}
I
PC LUG,
l
PC LlJG, CRMP R Tc:'A'-' +22•l8 .... A lOS B
02~
Cl
24528~17 :·
026 01
93464•44 :-
027 nt
9]463444
02R r 1
9J46Jc;sc;
029
oI
114?1'9· 24 !b
R TC:ORM l6-14G' 1055 B
CR~o
T~G,
t"-~SUL
~J0,6
FT
~·o
FT ,..IP
i~GA
PC !LKG
CnNN TYP •
nE~ICEo
i3
I
PC CA8LF ASSY
c1
51Q00201 [z
>
p~
032
~I
90460IC,95)1
l
PC Cll
033 01
lol2610l :•
?
PC !NT TOOTM L•
loi?7!nl
?
PC
034
nt
0}407~31
!J
'
,,.~~-
flU DATI
12·2t-7o
1
tCO. NO. OUT
Ol•
WIC IN
Wll OUT
~fAQ
PNL
CONTaCT o SKT >O•l4GA
A~SY
SCR~~
i
W
I
sTqn YEL )OOV 'IL PVC W
031
030 nt
P~C
2C.O FT •!R 18GA STRn GRN JOOV ''L PVC W
4
fill CMANGI NO.
lNG. HSI'.
I
e
RLtr Ut. "YC
·IR t6Gl <;TRO VEL 300V ;,L
~17
PAGI
I , I
CRIMP TYOf INSUL 1·>•!2GA P
TEA·~
~17117?\ 7 iu
'i"O FT
PIINT DATI
•~·a•r•
STATUS DATE
REL
oI
ie
I
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST I
>
I
I
I
TOOTH LOrK STL R
02~
!r,
I
I
8
OR ZP 8
01 SC 2, • OHI' 1 OP 1'-"W
THM~.
WIC OUT
8
Pr
I
Wll IN
p
z
I
tn•
:CD
OR
c~
L< TYD A
TOOT~
I~Tl
PC I UG TJ:'RMyNA.l
I
!"''
PAI'f NUMIII
PC ·.,SHn "-10.6
l
!•
STL
1~"~•32
MCH 6·32 STL
~EX
0/N
B
CFS 6•3iX::'.'500
NO,, EXT
1(0. NO. OUT
PC "•SCfl PAN PHL •·32X 1/4 (TYP II 8
2
:t
41-lC
AUIMe&.Y NUMIII
DIV.
!s
•
CRL (41 3/)601• "OM
u£X MCH
12-21-16
p
2
:~UT
flU DATI
I
p
3 wiRE PWR liL 9"T f;RA
~EX
no
>UQ~)-
ENG. liSP.
p
SLD
11~-27~~
":~AMP
6~~oc
REL
FlU CHANGf NO.
I , I
'
STATUS OATt
p
60~Z
1
:o
I'
PAll DUCII"ION
"'"
PC OEAo pANEL
STATU$
"'
J>.;TENS!TY
I
I
I'AGI
I'IINT OATI
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST I ~~-a-
104
A~C
6CTO••
!.~SHR
4•40X 1 }CI7
I
I
!
I
··/TYP3 p
A
~CNTTOR
~Toto
T
p
A
I
•4
R
I
8
i
0034 TOTAL L l"ES
I
I
'
'
'
629574000
7-49/7-50
...
I TR, IlTMAN
OWN_
CHKO
r 11.
••••
-
W/L RE.lR PANEL A~~y bOHZ
~
~(b'~
MFG
TLE
h .. I
-I
lf,A-
FIRS" USED ON
~~ co~~~~E;T
PR•ml
DOCUMENT NO.
NHA
b1407b35
CC555
I
SHEET
I"A
30
1
of
2
...
REVISION RECORD
SHEET REVISION STATUS
2 .1
V'
A lA lA
ORFT
DESCRIPTION
ECO
I•Ev
~ I RELEA~ED
DATE
/
CLA~~- "C"
IJD65.3-77 11fo.u:~tsco cJ./js~ 19
i / ;'?IJ.Si7, !'Cr.
NOTE So
FOR FIND NO. IDENTIFICATION SEE APL b1407b35.
1·
I
I
CONDUCTOR
FIND
GAUGE
COLOR
IDENT.
NO.
(REF.)
(REF.)
1~~~::;,
CODE IDEN'
I
SHEET
I I
~INTEO
WL
1407b30
ACCESS
DESTINATION
FINO NO
REMARKS
FIND NO.
lo
5
0
3
P1
FL
1
25
PWR CORD {HOT}
2
5
~
3
P1
FL1
3
25
PWR CORD
----
DETAIL-B
SGALElNONE
I )REF
@
•
DETAIL- C
SC.ALE: NONE
I )REF
&
\'...;
CSI
AVA - - - - -
NOTES:
"f'lli...Y L"'-e£1... lO Qo..l!oLE. PER Oll>-'lollt.IC> 82.1"11061,
M£TIIOD 6. IMR.K "'-":. C:.II0\1/l!.
£MARK"ASSY o1407633"1N AREA SWW'N PE~
C.OC SPEC 10121508.
&fA(1()1(_Y SETTII.lb C..~'<•~•~·'~ --'·•'-';;_ -··
GOUP GIRC.UIT PRIMAIR
~-
0
t...':;:-?.~1'."'--
R.ti'Ell.lt..IC.E. OE.'>IC.t.l._T\0\J':> ,._IU. ':>1'0\IJU FOR
REF OOLY AIJO 111/1.'1 IJOT II.PJ'91..R 01\1 P"-\<::1.
~UILU
AISEMil'f NUMIII
DIY.
s.n
l
INDNO
ARC
I
6. •nT&n
ll
P1\IT NUMHI
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
230
:CD
DUCllP1'10N
OWG
"'
:Y I J
""
I PA~EL
u
"'
l
ASSY REAR SnHZ
PAitT DIKIIP1'10H
0/M
QUANTIT't'
STAtUS
A
1z-u-16
"' "'
7149Z221
~~
I
PC REAP PNL 50HZ
002 01
71491951 :I
I
PC COVEQ AC ENTRY PANEL
p
003 01
!:tl89VTOl!b
I
PC FILTER o RFI SA 115•270¥ SLD
p
004 01
~SS8700Z)
1
. ,·
I
PC C8 S·P 250VOC 2,0 AMP
p
005 01
71446500:~
I
PC CdL •SSV(AC PWR)WIRE
~06 01
J6151910:•
I
PC
~07 01
~1TT660~!b
I
PC CLAMP, CBL (41 3/1601A "OM
~08 01
J605~4Zl\•
009 01
101Z5toejo
2
~EX
H~K
STRAJN•REL
IPc STANOOFF, HEX CFS
~Ht
OHM
~OCK
10~
STL 8
PC •IL REAR PNL
D
3
PC STRAP CABLE TIE TVPE o
8
1
PC CONN RECPT 12 CONTACT>
p
PC CONTACT t
OWG
DESCIIP1'!0N
I PANEL
u
"f"
QUANTITY
A~
4
1>1407631 J
1
030 01
V3948~09
1
0~1
01
b2021406 •
I
1
]Pc CONTACT PIN 2n•l4 AWG IIOASS
I .032
01
Y3947010 u I
2
jPc CONN I
~r
2]
]PC I CONT SKT 20•14tlA P8
Y4277400 I I
!
i !034101
~202150<;1
I
Y0460695 I
1012!101
1012&101
I
FlU CHANGE NO
PAGE
1~1>03•
II
I
FlU DATf
,;.
lll•i!l•lb
Wit OUT
Wit IN
i
I
'
!
!
I
I
I
'
I
PC LKG OEVICEo CnNN TVP • '·1/TVPJ P
IPC CABLF. ASSY REAH PNL
PC STRAP
SKT HOUSING
~ABLE
~·f
TIE TYPE I
A
I
~~I
:pI
I
pi
STRIPH
js i
I
i
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
PC CD ASSY 6CTD•o
I
~!
PC SCRtw 4•40Xo107
·I
!
M~NJTOR
PC[CONNECTOR I PTN HOUSING
I
I
62957400 A
i
I "I
i
I
I
I
I
I
i
o2e ot
[o33 01
!
i
ECO. NO. OUT
I
I
I
lNG. liSP
STATUS DAU
I
I
I
8
~00
029 01
1
no
i
o~c
I'IIMT DATI
ji2•27•H
fCO. NO. IN
023 01
I
!
12•15•1& I
PC TER• CHIMP TYPE INSUL 1••12eA P
!
I
HEL
2
i
I
I
'
"'
17973&06 I
I
I
I
I
!
STATUS
"'
022 01
2
I
I
I
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
:y I A I
""
u
I'
p
SKT •0•14GA >T>IP T
I
I
p
14"W
p
...
I
FT THG, INS o066nU T/W "AT TEF IH
Z30
:co
2.~
PC LUG TERMINAL STRIP
5
tiUILU AHI!
I~TL
PC THMSo DISC
167
017101
021 01
I
I'
I
8
TYP A
NUT HEX MCH 6•32 STL •P OR lP d
014 01
01
!
TVP A 8
IPC
PC MSCq PAN PHL 6•32XI/4 CTVP II 8
0~3
WI OUT
H
MCH lft•3l STL CQ OR
~K
Wit IN
I
I
010 01
I~·ZI•lb
•I•
KO. NO. OUT
G
NYL
6·3~X2!SOU
4
FILE CNANGE NO
I
I
ENG. liSP.
ICO. NO. IN
001 01
PAGE
I
STATUS DATE
REL
p
~USHIN6t
PMNT DATI
1 12·27··7~
[PC ]tNT TOOTH LK WSHH •4
I
I0037
i
I
I
I
I I
I
I
1
I I
I
TOTAL LIN£5
7-53/7-54
TRA TMAN
DWN
~-
CHKD
ENG
MFG
-~
r n_
-
RK ';>ERIAL NO, IN 1\i!EII. SIIOINN pc_~ C' C
STD. 1.01.025 AND CDC S~<.. 10111'-0~
.1~ HEIGHT, COLOR WHITE,
'
!llllll!!l!
uuummu
()oo
~
~
g
)>
PC CII'RD ASSEM:SL"' GCTD·Q
RUILU ARC
....
~860
I
·~ .. u
G04606Q5 •1
PAll'-·
-· ........-·
I • I
"'
..........
ASSEMILy PARTS LIST
nn
,.,,._, • .._. teo
.,.
0 -'CD ASSY
j
~CTD-0
"'A
PAll' Dl.-ncMI
12·1S·T6
"'
ICO.IIO.M
~1
90461Jf.94
!•
1
PC PW
76379306
j•
2
PC H£lr1FRo lOPIN STRAI!;HT
003 01
5339TQ14~2
2
PC C.ON'I, FEM 25PI'ISN PLUG ALO'IE
p
004
~1
St63oqot jo
1
PC
p
00"! 01
1>2031~00 :6
24
006 01
16006<;00 'J9
OOT nl
9046UI.9]
'
.:e.
I
ao
~~ITCH
p
6CTD•O
~CP
SLIDE
I
~CS55
....,3.
. . . CIIAJIU 110.
12·21·71•
ICO.IIO. OUI'
p
PC rONTACT SOC P.C. ITT
p
REF
P(' FA8DICATIDN
D
REF
PC SCH ntAG 6CTD·O
SP[CIFICHI~ ..
·-···· ................
""
I •I
"ATUI Mfl
REL
002 01
001
...
RATUI
....
i IZ::::;:
D
000? TOTAL LI.,ES
62957400 A
7-57
\)
UJ
~
u
0
u
~
8
::E
9
_2
z
0
7-58
62957400 A
...
'"
I
ltiiDNO
AUIIIMLYNUMMI
I
L1
.1
•ft2)ftft:
I'AIT NUMIII
I
I
PC liAS[ 1t£YBOARO
I
PC C0¥[11 KEYBOARD
~1915.0117
1
~·si 011
6
lOlUf>OS; !J,
10
Oti
~016030·! !>I
o1l
61310500:
••I
2456!>003] 1)
I
90ti
i
oui 01
I
i
I'Aitt DISCatniON
U/M
11416900! !>
0086UOl! 1
0061
~o.,i
ooe!
Olj
31
•
I
KF' RO&An &SSY IRD KEY'
01
~o•. 011
:
I
002 01
003 01
I
u
QUAfolflTY
"
DIKII"IOM
DWG.
11453Zooi ~
~01
!
~:
uv
:co
N
RIEL
"' no
I:[
I PI
PC KEYBOARD 80 KEY
I
PC MSCII S!LF-LKI HE~ HD •-32l318i &j
.
I '
PC -SHR N0o6 TYP A PLAIN STL CP
el
PCI
I
MSCR S[LF-LK6 HEX HO •-3ZX1121 81
1
PC CAlLE ASSY CKIEYIOARO-UU:MNALI: Aj
I
PCI CLAMP, S/16DIA CAlLE
~~
II
PC SCR, TP8 IND/HU e-11&112 STLI 11
!>1eO!isO 1! 1
•I
PCj BUIOP[Rt RUBB[R ,300H ~LF-STK6• P
:
la6D19D8j
'
I 0010
•L~
I
NYLO!
I
OS-04-16
I uz-ll-76
ICO. NO. IN
I
I
I
I
Fill CHANGE NO
10663-13
11
lNG. lUI'.
UATUlDATI
stATUS
"'
I'AGI
~Af£
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
440
IIUILD ARC
I!
I
FlU DA1f
<;cseu-o
•IN
ICO. NO. OUT
I
os-o4-n
WI IN
WK OUT
I
!
'
I
i
I
I
i
!
1
•i
TOTlL LINU
I
I
i
I
I
62957400 A
'
I
7-59
I
I
I
DWN
CHKD
ENG
MFG
We. ls
PREFIX
IJIJ/1-TLE
~
~a--
,4.11..1.11
CABLE ASSY K£YBOAND EXTENNAL
(ob,.; !d1
I FIRST USED ON
c~~~~~EN
r-
I
[NHA
cc Ci014 1 c::cwel
I"
oocu•EN r NO
A
j61370100
1
61370500
F
1 of 4
SHEET
REVISION RECORD
SHEET REVISION STATUS
[4 [3
-
[2
11
[REV
I/ ~
I DRFT
DESCRIPTION
ECO
APP
DATE
,,-C, I / liO.IY-1< llf..J
'!=~~~~.:~~ ~ . J' ~4 ~
N£LEAS£D CLASS
[o1 lo1 lo1 jol !co-a~
n!oz. !oz. c-z::z.1
~ ~z:r-u [8~,
,,.. 11'1 111 lA 111 !O&S3-I =~~
I1PE'-CifiSI!:O cLIIISS 1"1 - ~;;;~
Ct.
[RE.V15E.b. f'E.f( E..C.C
lA IB lA IB IB IOC108
~,~ [92Jk
~.;
lA Is lc lc c ic.DI09SZ IAD[)(O OM 5.00!.25
19<41-..
.ADD lilT DIll L"'ll~"
lc [c. [c. Ic.
~,;;:~ ~~c. I c. [c. c_ c. 1,.... , .. ,6 [ADO INT OJV l..A8ELAA57ZO -
1-
IU<
~
-
1-15
ID lo lo lo ID leo 11436 [fEVISED FEIZ ECO
.....
INC ,...
~
r- :-
lm•
~
~
D
.
[o [o
...1-·
~...
~
"" ~:..,
[
I»
E
IF
E
E
ic»11547
F
F
lCD l 14>1
't-2-~
I~
r't I..;;; .,I·~
Revised per' ECO
'RI:.VISE.O fif:RTto
r7"'n:>
if-
[o.i-:-M
~71
w
.. ... ....
Ol ...
NOTES,
t&
Bulk identify with CDC
Pa~t
Number.
Put extra wires in F/N l2 and mount under cable tie as shown-
r
Tie wra~ and·screws included with connector hood.
SHEET
r
··-APL
61.370500
DETACHED LISTS
2
~£F
PiN 1
DPI (REF)
EPI
(REI=')
1.-------33.0 j: 1.0 - - - - - - - - - '
7-60
62957400 A
I
lc";';:,TOR
FINO
GAUGE
NO
I REf I
1
7
COLOR I lENGTH
I REf I I
"An
'""
.;;c.
'..I.
-.<
'7~
PREFIX
-ITLE
;;o
'IRST USEO ON
cf~~~JN'
-
APPR
4
3
iA lA
A
2
1
I
REV
ECO
A
1'""53·'0
A A
8
1 of 5
SHEET
~
DESCRIPTION
RELEASED CLASS
DRFT
ApP
DATE
' / ~74. i':ll>tT"
A
PUT EXTRA WIRES IN f/N 10 AND MOUNT UNDER STRAP AS SHOWN•
~ DIVIDE INTO TWO {2} HALVES. SECURE EACH HALf TO ONE {1} GROUND CLIP
A 4~ ·~, q~ i
r
REVISION RECORD
5
&
IREA
DOCUMENT NO
INHA
161407520
CC6B1D
SHEET REVISION STATUS
NOTES~
I
CABLE ASSY KEYBOARD EXTERNAL
AND SOLDER.
CABLE TIE fURNISHED WITH CONNECTOR.
J 1
I
I
APL 61407519
DETACHED LISTS
REV
DOCUMENT NO
SHEET
A
61407519
SEE DETAILSHEET
.3
A
3
7.50:!:
7-66
.25-~----~,.._-1.50
:t .25
62957400 A
5HfET
3
GROUND CLIPS I
DETAIL-A
SHIELD WI21NC:. VIEW
OF COWNEC101t DPI
l=tNO NO 7 -~
NOT SHOWN
62957400 A
7-67
I
CONDUCTOR
FINO
GAUCE
COLOR
JOENT
NO
IREF)
(REF )
,,~::::;
I
SHEET
ACCESS
ORIGIN
FINO NO
I I
5
61407519
ACCESS
DESTINATION
REMARKS
FIND NO
21
6
26
5
36-0
DP1
17
5
EP1
3
Gnd
26
b
36 .o
17
b
DP1
18
5
EP1
19
3
Gnd
11
LUG
lil.l!ll"!'\1.
,••A
DOCUMENT NO
WL
22
DP1
7-68
COOE IOEN"
12
BRAIDED CABLE SHIELD
I"~INfEO
IN US ll.
62957400 A
....
d,
T IMONO
BuiLD ARC
.
A$SIIUI.Y NUMMI
I
U
nv.
•t.a7&tD; al
PAn NUlllll
a
,.
MKMPTION
OWG .
I
I
&
QUAN11TY
• u 1 ~ •••v otO'VDftaaft J'•UDII&I
U/M
I
""
PAIT DfKilii'TION
5t6!i29tTJ o
1
PC CONN, PC !DI! ZZ POS I o'11811
ttl! 01
!i3!9Tit4\ 4
1
PC CONN, MAL[ Z!iPOIN PLUI &LON€
p
n
•utt9ozj'
zz
PC CONTACTt,LAI l!O•ZZAIII ITIIIP
p
01
5339TitTj T
22
PC CONTACTt STIIIP PINS 21-f41A
p
:s
J
"
o1
!i1toe•ozj 4
1
PC CONN HOOOt ,41tlo390 ~Bl DIA
tl
'
94211021:2
2
Pc LKI DE'IICEo CONIIIEcTOII TvP 311
p
n
94Z'I'Y4tt\1
2
PC STRAP CAlL[ Tl[ TY!O[ l
p
lt:l
........,.
...
'" n
OO!i
!ittoesoti
tlt tl
517SI11J~ 9
714tl90?J' T
Dl
!il?tT2!itt 2
lOll
01
2
PC CLI!Ot IRDUND ICoPP!A"IN PLI
1
I
ICO. MO. OUT
KO. MO. IN
PC Llleo CRill" A T[IIM tZ.lOaa 815
0011 TOTAL LIN€1
··-·
..... ....
II'ILI DAft
c., ... ,,,
Wll OUT
1/N
I
I
CBlo SHLD ' l l 2 25 CN8CT 310y If
250 , . INS SL¥•CLAoiOYC HUT IHAIOIK
lOH:S•IO
lNG. HIP.
.... u ...
no
o<
f'ILI CMAMGI NO.
T q
STATUS DAft
UATUS
p
ttl
PAGI
" ' " ' DAlf
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST I OI•O!i•!J6
104
1 CD
I
I
p
I
!
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
p
I
•t
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
i
I
II
II
II
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
II
I
!
I
II
i
I
I
!
I
'
I
I
I
I
II
62957400 A
I
i
I
1
I
I
7-69
'fJ
~
i'IREF
,.,
~ F/N~ 51,54 t 55 ADJUSTh'IE~
P110C.ECVRE;
I. 1~5TALL FIN 51 0'-1 l, METHOD 10. MARK AS .SHOWI\i,
·
&Mr.l2.1( <;.E.RII>..L ~0. "5/!.l _ _ _ _ .. IU ~
SI-\OVJIJ ~12 CCX: STO. 1.01.025 MJO C.DC
SPt(. \012\50&.
&
SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLy AND
NOT APPEAR ON PART.
'
.
~INSTALL LINEARITY SLEEVE WitH COPPER
SIDE AG.AINST THE CRT GLASS AND THE
ETCHED EDE.E TOWARD THE YOKE. ('Ffli 12.)
TWO ED6E5 SHALL MEET ON A Ll NE.
PARALLEL WITH THE CRT AXIS ANJI.ALI~
WITH PIN 7 OF CRT.INITIALL'l A.PMok'·~"'
IMAIELY ONE HALF" OF SL[£ \li:. l,
/'>.LENGTH ISINSERIED INTOYpKE.,
!::A DO NOT iC9ACHE Cl1l.OOSOI Ntn:. ON H.V. FL~
UNIT, FIN II, USE IIIUT,F/11140 AII::J S~NtlOFF, 1'/N
Sl..
o-
~
~
0
0
)>
POSITIONING BANOS
\
1370905
...
....
'·-Mel
•..
T Tc
BUILD AR~
1
AI. . . .YIIUMMI
1
440
c•
.
t13T090!5 :4
rAft..-.
Ll
QUAMmY
714!56300
61407419 !3
014 11
11
"'
rAJtNICIIf'tKMII
lfAfUI
"'
PC FRAME VIDEO DISPLAY
I'C CHOKE ASSY
~146061911
1
PC CD ASSY 68ND•O CN/COMP VIOEOI A
lotZTt!Z \'
4
PC SCIIfW MACH 8·32 X 3/8 PAN HD
8
\~>
4
PC WSHH N0o8 EXT TOOTH LK TYP· A
8
on u
101Z290Z :•
4
PC NUT TWIN SELF LOCK I NCI 1•32
8
011 01
11122901 \t
4
PC NUT Til IN SI!:LF LOCKING 6•32
!It TTT3!4 ~
!5t'7T1314 :9
•
010 11
Olo 02
1
4
PC SPRT, CKT 80 3/16 NYL FIG 2
PC SPliT, CKT BD 3/t6 NYL FIG 2
ITAfUI . .fl
10-l9-T6
I
ptLI OAfl
o,.u.n
CC61at
KO.IIO. OUT
KO.IIO.IN
•uco
~
Wllll'll
""
w. our
I
I
:
p
12197
A
REPLACED BY 6140769'5 1Z10T
H18M VOL TAt;E TRANSFORMER ASSY A
1Zl07
01
61417417 17
6140769!1
!8
1
1
!Pc
PC
OlZ 01
61407418 !5
1
PC YOKE ASSY
A
013 tl
61407540 !6
\
PC CAT CAP ASSY
A
021 01
614o761 T
jz
1
PC REGULATOR ASSY •11\V
A
ozz 01
61407420
jt
1
PC CABLE ASSY VIDEO DISPLAY
A
028 01
6UT82oo
PC W/L VIDEO !IISPLAY
0
[z
942774o9 jz
029 01
REF
2
PC STRAP CABLE TIE TYPE b
8
030 01
16035100 i3
REF
PC RASTER SCAN CAT llTSPLAY
D
031 01
1o12!i6o5 is
PC WSHM N0.6 TYP A PLAIN STL CP
8
032 01
1o1Zh13
i's
2
2
PC MSCH PAN PHL 6•3ZrV8 CTYP II 8
033 01
71468100
i•
1
Pc SLHV£ L!NfARITY cONTHOL
---- ------Al~'fiiiUMMI
I
Ll
035 Ol
',.
6l3109os :4
PAif NU..I
5}916874
L---·----
440
IIUILD aRC
....
1 0
co
i·
DIKIII'TIOIII
.,.
QUANflfY
PAIT DISCibP'UON
1
PC PLATEt DaNGER VINYL '"'T /REO
•n•po8 :o
6139 111 :·
l
1
~g
038 01
Tt492QAT :3
I
PC !NSUL,TOR,
039 01
lo1261ol
!"
3
=~
I
8
IG"'
!VIDEO DISPLAY ASSY
STATUS
"'
GND WIRE ASSY 5o0 ~OAA SOCKU A
A
GND W!R£ ASSY 3,0 ?OGA SKT
~00
PAPER IJL
c !NT ToOT,. L~ •s~R ••
...
ll[l
p
771!1
?Tt5
I
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST I
......
TC
7T1T
1Zt07
----- -----------
---
-.
7f17
1Zt97
p
:u or
031
03T
-
r.... ...,_I
A
totzuoz
T INDNO
.... ..
..........
"
1
1
016 Ol
~·0860
...
REL
p
PC CRT !ZIN PHOS P4 ~LOSS•MI~ 60
1
l•
Otz tl
• ., 11
.,.
,.
..
1 viDEo DisPLAY ASSY
D
5&907303 js
••• 01
00!1
IWO .
-
ASSEMILY P~RTS LIST I
.._
...
~·
n
'
stATUI DAti
.
....
----------.
I
I
T -ccurr
lNG. HlP
1 o.a- r6
ICO. NO. IN
KO. MO. OUT
FlU DAti
.,.
~~~-err
Wll IN
noT
1
p
i
8
4•4t. C.TL CP OR ZP
~
1o1251n3 \t
Pe NUT
94277400
ll'
1
042 01
2
PC STRAP CAPLE TIE TYPE 1
047 01
7}479201 JT
1
Pr LA8lL, 1110•1 .•OJ "'/1't..!Tc- •SITY
p
i
049 01
7t491984
1
PC
PI
I
I
PC LUGt R SLO TERM NO
PC LUG, R SLO TE~M t-.11"1
050 01
050 02
')2
51817102 io
~181TlnZ :o
?
lq
~CH
SPRING•E1T CAT
AHf"U~f)
a f""lf; 1
~
t' J(; 1
I
I
~
b
8
051 01
51917060
500 PC 111AGNfTt
Ptt-..u:
1 RI)AI!!;~
054 01
St917061 !7
1~0
PC
M,t,G~fTt
RI~G
l*GAIJSS YOKE/CRT p
055 01
5}9}7062 )!>
3~0
Pr
MAG~FTt
RING
lfiiGAUc;5 YOKF./CRT P
056 01
516738'-4 !2
1
PC SPACFR, WEX ALUM
4•40~1.250
p
057 01
1012T1•4[7
I
PC SCRE•• PAN Hfl 4•4C•v3/R STEEL
8
058 01
62200937 il
REF
PC SCHl,.ATICo VIDEO "!SPLAY
D
rr.~~
Wll: OUT
HOT
119<;4·
!1954
040 01
~4
!
1
I
VfiKf/CMT p
I
I
iI
i
!
TOTAL L!NFS
I
I
'
'
I
62957400 A
I
7-71
'I"
~···
~
~REF
~~~
~~ ~
Tl'PV 11~~,\~~~TI~f\!
CRIA,
QF
.IOORE>l ...
c'
e•,.
g
VIUVC·C
~, R~f
TYP INSTAlL AI IC;N DF
R2:A, RBA,RZ8A.,IB3A.
1(.3.,
G.~A
Af§'J
t-,j§
0
0
..,.
0
c
0
TABLE.
ADDITION5
I.1C.UT FOIL AT
'!.)DRILL HOLl,SH. Dllc:.o;A-e TO 'F'E.ED- TAIL"E'FOit SIZE AND
THRU (CS).
MEASllltEME.Nl.
)ADD PIN A.ND WUU.,
SU. 1/IE..III\.I:"t()ftQRil·
l·
-
TII~U
"·
3) 0£H... L (3) .035
HOLE5 11-J
7<)(3)
·~"-&
~.15(,
Q] '"""I
A~EA
(2) . . ~
APPLY ASSY. Ill •
.:v
LEVEL A.l-10 LOC COD~
IN AREA SNOitll. lARA PER CDC SPEC. IDIM-:
CHaRACTER HEIIiMT .12 tlZPT) COLOR 'ft41R.
&
3.
S1-40Wt..l
~':!:~!~E,:o
.3~2l-1·1 C TO
"Z''
/am
1\MVl Pill. 5,BJ\,
1(!:.5). HOLE MMM.o"z"
6
,&
&
&
~
(
TYP IMSTP..\\..,._iiON
a~ 'R'l..'3A.,~"36"''R38A
VIEW
P-0
HEAT SlloJK. ~OT
Slot:)WN FOR. CL AQ:ITY
tOMf'O~E.N'T ~IDl
oN
~
~
8
)>
RlWOf\K f"tl'l: C.CK &r-£...L \U.Q\q~QO •
.0/8:!.005
&in:•.lii:"IWM'I' > p(TAIL l
...
10
VIEW F -F
PIN ORIENTATION OF"BJS""
APPLY F/N~)eETWEEI-JF/~(I)AIJDF/N(el).
PC CARD ASSY i,BND·C
VIDEO)
9D4h0b/9
BUILD ARC
ASUMilT NUMIII
DIY.
l
INDNO
PoUT NUMUI
ll
l
PC
1170591~
9
l
PC RES FXD COHP ftol5 MEG o15W 51 F
9
l
PC RES VAR 14INAT "00 OHM o!IW
~
l
01
00
011
01
oo~
nj
24500031:
I
I
I
Ol~
Oil
01~ Oll
!
~. o1~ o11
02~
01
~oll
~p
P( RES FXD COMP 4 7000 0'410 , SW 5
2450006~ ~
1
PC RES cOMP I K 0'414 l/4W tP
~
1
PC RES FXD COMP 39K OHM e2"1W SP
ti
Pj RES FXD Fill' 7500 OHM l/4W
~
P
I
24!16!171
:
~
RES cOMP 430 OHM 1/4W 5P
1
111
j
Pj
1
I,
: 1
OII
i
02~ 011
I ozi'
02
oti
011
! 02
011
i
1
I
PI
2450007~ .
11
RES COMP 2, 7K OHM l/4W SP
2450010~
1j
RES FXD C014P 3,3 0HI4S I/2W 5P Pi
71
1170591~
l
03~
oti
n,U
i
MEG o?5W
2450004~
~
;~
Z450TI!I~ ~
I
2450015~ ~
Pi
~
PI
RES cOMP Ze2K OHM 114• ~P
pq CAP
P~
2450436~ ~
~
FXD CER l"'OPF ZOP lnOYDC1
CAP FXD TANT 4 0 7UF ZOP
03~
01!
9569113~ ~
P9 CAP El[CT 27GUF 25V •I 0.1 OOP i
011
5186870~
P4 CAP FXD SOU, •l0/•75P 5nVDCW
03 .. 011
Z45052TS:
03 . 01,
2450683~ I
:
,
..~
3613714~ 1
0.1 01
2450.361! 1
04l 01
245068d t
l
'I
~
~.i
t5YOC~ ~
P9 CAP FXD MYL ontUF lOP lOOVOCaj
62957400 A
!
.~
5178550~ ~
~
I
I
I
5~ ~
Z4S0680.,:
J I
I
I
I
I 041 01
I
I
RES FXD COMP
03~ 01(
03~
I
~118550~ 0
Pd CAP ,OlUF 20P l500Y SPARK GAPI PI
011
I
I
1
~
5190800~ ~
Oli
1
i
I
Z450l16':
03~
I
210
03~
I
I
L __ _ _ _ _ __ _ _
P
I
i
~L---~~L--Lp~-~~~ES~F~X~D~C~O~MP__4_7_K~O~H~M~t2:c~_•_5~P-LPJ__L______
l770590·
__
03)1 011
011
I
I
!
P
Z450TIII~ ~
245ooon: ~
03~
j
I
I
: pll
24500070: 8
ol,
I
I
~~
1Pj ~
i450005~ 1
02
i
! Pj
2453822~
BUILD ARC!
1
I
i
!
1
~p
PC RES FXD COHP 16 OHM IW
I
F
~
1
zi
i
~
R[S FXD COMP I KOHM 1 UW 5P
2450710~ ~
24!1ooo5~
I
i
I
"" ... ""' ' "' '"" '"1 '
PC
1?72050~
94]6038..:
I
. I
5171551~
l77o59oZ
WI( OUT
i
I F.
11
Wit IN
""
I
P( R£5 coMP 220 OHI4 1/4W 5P
p
ICO. NO. OUT
12·07-lb
I,
PI RES FXD COMP 1120 OHM lW 5P
1
•!LIE DATE
Q5El9502
I'
l
011 24!10016~
fCO. NO. IN
00ll7HA
ENG. liSP.
I
24501161! ,
0111
to-a-76 I
FlU CHANG! NO.
11
I
PC RES I"XD COMP 4 7 O>!M l14W 5P
"""'':l l
STATUS DATI
L
F
P( RES cOMP 4, '1'K OHM l/40
011
1
IC T4l2l 193 TTL 2 Rf:l&q MYB
l
011
YLD
PAGf
PIINf DATI
12•07·7~
F
24!1000791
00~
016 011
i
5)78550~
01
1
!
MC
2
01~ 01!
01J
Oli
.•
I
01~ 01
1
PoiUtT DIKIWTION
"'"
502!1430~
i I
II
R[l
002 01
I
I
CD ASSY ABND•O CN/COHP YIII[Otl
PC PW RD TY HON MULTI•UU
Ol~ 011
1
QUANTifY
"
I
l
001
i
U
e
Oil
00! Ol
1
J
a
STATUS
"'A
9o42uoo!
OOJ
:
tl
DIICII"ION
DWG.
"'·
001 01
004
I
:CD
900l.06 ~
I
o86o
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST I
210
I
1
PI
PI
1'9 ,~ ... .... ""'' ... "OC'I1
PC
CAP FXD MYL oP33 14FD •ooV lOP P
PC
CAP FXD MYL lftUF lOP IOOVOC
i PI
P( CAP FXD TANT 2e2UF ZOP 15VOCWI
PC
CAP FXD MYL ,47UF lOP
~
IGOYOC~ ~
I
I
'
i
7-73
BUILD
AIIIMil'f ~~
OIV.
T INDNC
Ll
PAR
il!lO
AR~
:CD
N~l
HV.
CD
DWO.
DIKIIIPTION
QUANTm
MC
STATUI
MC
U/M
5117911~ 8
1
PI CAP ,XD TANT HOU' 101' 6VOCW
I
044 01
3611073~
i
I
PI CAP "YL Oo33 11,0 400VIIC 20P
I
04! 01
9569115~
I
1
PI CAP !LECT 61U, 60V •l . . toOP
I
041 01
Z.50009li 4
I
PI RES CDIIP 15K OHII U4W 5P
I
04
01
Z.S0433~
I
I
Pl CAP 'XD TANT 2o2U' 2011
041 01
51908200~
i
1
P
010 A!RIIN HI VOLT 320¥ TA
I
I
04
01
~5VOC•
5100123~
e
i
P
DID SWITCHING SIL 11113164
051 01
9563730~
4
l
P
010 SIL 1111400'1 600PIV lol VIII I
O!ll 01
5190760~ ~
1
PC XSTA T0•92 IIIPN SIL PLASTIC
I
05
01
5190810,.
I
PI XSTA 51 NPII
I
05
01
51907100!
~
I
PI XSTA T0•3 G[R"N POWER p.,p
I
0!5
01
510030!5~ ~
Pp:: XSTR 001 106 I!'PITAX
'
OS
01i
5190690~ ~
I
011
95!59050,
i 0. 5~
0!5~
OS~
0!5~
0601
011
51907900:
Oil
h23392~
011
011
011
061
06l 01i
Ill
l
~
YLD
KO. 110. ..
KO. NO. OUT
1/N
I
I
II
PC
1
p~
P~
1
1:
P~
519Uoo~ ~~
1515151~ j
X'""· ST!P•DOWN !Ill
1
ltV ISMA
II
1
COIL VAll T•UIIICIIO H[N
1
Pc HUT siiiiK
Pc 1c u•TIOO•S l'!TA PDS v II<A
P
07~ ol
0711 0
07~
01
OT~ Oil
~
07
01
nj
II
~
~~
Z1
_Ujli
II
p
A!
I P
1
20
I
1
1
I~
•-•o
TEAM sTUD TUIIII£T
P
1
,
WSHA 110o4 EXT TOOTH L6 TYP A
"u' HEX MCH
AE
~
SCRh PAll HO 4•40X311 STEEL
P
; 0
1
STL
0
PASTE o HEAT X'A CIIPO
, ,...
I~ATJDII
~P
011
z~ ~
014 1116
1
1
•ON•CON~ ~
I~
SPECI'ICAliON
CSILK•SC:tETCII ~
~
SCH I)JAG 611110 CNICOMP VJOI!OI
P
Plllo TEAM PC liT& ,03Jio062
'
Tllo INS o034DIA Till IIIAT TE'
I
~
!~
SP ~
P~
A!$ II'XD COIIP Oo62 N!l 112•
P
CAP ,XD MYL ontu' SP lOOVOCW
i ,.
P
SCH!MATICo VIDEO DISPLAY
!0
ol~
P
CAP II'XD CEll
P
RES COIIP Z21C nHM II.W 51>
lOP IOOVDC•
!~
~
AE5 ViA NIIIAT SOK OHM 2/P 0 511 ~
RES VAll NINAT lOOK OHMS oSW
,
7-74
_
jl
,
•SMA N0o6 EXT TOOTH L• ?YP A
P
R[ll
OT~ 01[
or~ nj
OT~ Oil
li,
!
!
I
i
I
i
210
NUT HEX MCH 6·32 STL c;p OR
::
i
i
1
pll
P
!
!
,
INDUCTOR l!llllt'AO HEll
HT StiiKo SEMI '16 3 ALU" BLK
P
::~
I
I
I
'
~
LL0~6~~~1~~-9~2~T~I~01~6~Z~:~li__~~~~~P~~S=C=A~E~w~M=A~CH~A~D~H~0~6~13~2~&~31~1~S~ST~~~~------~----~--
,,, 011
Wll OUT
-, XSTA T0•92 NPII 51L
5190660i: 11
I:IUILO ARC:
Wll IN
~~~ SJL~I
PC XSTR pOWER NPN 51L
5190750~
All DAU
lNG. HIP.
I
04! 01
~
STATUI DATI
0
AOH!~IV[,
'
WIRE BUSS 228A SOLID CU Tit
SILIC
'
1
poz:
71021
I
62957400 A
BUILD
DIV.
AUHIILY N..,_l
ll
··~
oe
:CD
90UA6l~ 11
eu I
T tNDNO
....!10
AR~
f'AifN~I
1601950~
Ol
01
I
5262994~
I I
I I'
I
!
I
I
I
AI
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST I
OWG.
I
o
QUANfiT\'
"
4
.,.
DtKIUPTION
co ass' ...ND.o rNJCONP v111Eo1l
"'A
Ptdl IIIKMPftOM
PC REO/fNSTALLATION CW UT CKTS
REF
400 ,
0
•IR !08A SLO •MITE
UATUS
...
R[L
"'
"""'0An
12•01•76
STATUS OAJE
10-19-76
KO. NO. IN
'
I
I
teo.
....!:II
'tll CKANGI NO
•vu7•••
ltiiG. . . Sf'.
flU D4ft
USU9S02
MO.
owr
SiN
I
I
I
•
!
lZ•OT-rb
MIN~ WK
OUt
I
'
I
0016 TOTAL LINES
'
1
I
I
I
I
!
~~---
62957400 A
7-75
•
4
...
~
D
c
&
~TE..~:
2.
&
~
~
~
0
..-...o... ... _.,
..... cn-. ...c••••
A
0
0
)>
3
1-11/:t...Y OOT ~~Q.. 00 ~T.
A..PPLY ~t:.L TO CABLE. PE.R COC
ov..t:. 82191061, (Mtnoo 6). ~~
AS S\.\OVJ~.
IB
YITU
JOUU!ICIS
4
MI>RK"f>...SSY 6140~rf IU Ni?..U...
PE.R C.OC ".JPE.C. \0121S08.
12i.FERWC..t.. ottc;.IC..)Jt...l\0~':1 /Jo.R.f..
S't-IQ'IJ)J fOR i<.t..t"t..R't..\.lc..f. OOLY /t..llD
~t-1
2
....
ftAo
1' • • •
•..
,1 • I
BUILD •RC
·-- .
Aue.aY · -
I
I CD
•• ••7•n!
"
011 01
·-
DWG.
.........
c
511186303! 6
1
I .....
...
PoUt NSCM'nDII
PC HT -.tNK~ SEMI '18 II ALUU BLK
p
p
ltZ 01
!5160!1408!4
z
PC SOCI«f'T TRANSI~TOR To-a
15130!104! z
1
Pr:
rc
D
PASTFo MEAT XO'R CMPO NOOI•COII(
!IUOJ116Zj 1
AI
Z4!104llli 6
l
PC CAP hD T•NT ,.,ZUF ZOP
016 ei
94271409! z
I
PC STRAP CARLE TT[ TVPF. 6
I~
...
11
6140?618: 0
REI'
93463010! s
\ ZIIO
,,
Ic
ti
01
9346UZ2~
!5
I
011 ei
!l19t6ZOO! 4
l'
01i II
!lt986000!·11
I
liZ 01
51 nnzo! a
I on
'",
'
WJR h&A STRO "LK 100V •ol PVC II
WJR i811A STRO R[D 300V IlL PVCI-
PC CON'fai'To SICT l'ft•l481 IT•JP T
..,
"
PC COtiOI PLU8 Z pt 01
400
,
INS ,034nu T/11 NU T[l'
i p!
!i
Z4!511BD1~
S
!519ti!IIJ01~
II
01! oi
!51'1061'04! I
,
oi
16?98719! .,
l
PC ~~~~~~~~ "IrA IN'IUL Tl\•3 1"111 4
on 01
9!1'196!544! 1
I
PC A[S hD 1111 o'!li OIIM !Ill !51>
p
018 oi
9!1!196'503! 3
I
PC RES ti'XD 1111 4,, OHM !Ill !IP
p
019 01
9!11137304!.,
oi
5101860~ 1
I
OZI 01
Sl~Z8014i 4
I
016
020
BUILD lAC
.-. - . •co
.... ...
~.,.~
I
T ....
Ll
.
1!.1UU17;l!l
,.
,....,_.
022 01
10127115! 3
OZ3 01
lo12640ll•
n!l
"
WI AI" BUS 'I ZZII SOLID C:U TP
PC CONOI R[CPT
'
!
I
"I
IIi
1
I
I
I
•
p
I
!
8
'
..
... I .... I
1
C
QUMn'l'f't'
•
"
I
B
.,.
·-·
At'~ULATnD AUY • IIV
l'ot.ft•K. . .ION
PC OISCD P•N PML
~-3?X!I/ft
I "'A
STATUI
....
RO'I
"'""
lfAIVI DAft
10-~t-n
KD.IID.IN
I
.......
PC' WSHR NO,,. EXT TOOTH Ll< TYP l
PC OO$CQ PIN PHL 4•40X1/4 (TYP II 8
PC WSHD ND,4 EXT TOOTM Ll< TYP l
021 01
10IZ510!1~ 6
I
PC NUT M[X MCM 6•'2 STL tP OR ZP A
on
oi
10127113!8
1
PC IISCR PiN PHL "'•3213/11 ITYP II 8
021
ei
62Z00112i 6
REI'
PC SCM nt &8 AE8Ut.lTOR ISSY +ISV
0
029
oi
SI?I540Z~ 2
l
PC FUS' OILDi:K I211VAC \ftl 3 H~
p
OJO oi
24!112'22!6
I
PC I'USI' l'lST zsov 11/i!AMP
p
i
\
PC STRIP CA"L[ TT[ TYI'[ I
8
''
PC CON" OUJCK 22•11 Alii " " 2
p
9!1643212! 4
'
'
~
.... .....
flU OAII
10•2!1·?6
I
2
032 oi
l06!11.;tT
(I
?
94!1?400: 1
aW.o--.--..o.-
(TYP II 8
lOlZ'FIOZ! 1
03i oi
i
SIN
10126400! n
I
'
CC6B1C
KO.IID.OUT
oi
I
PILl
Zj
ozs oi
024
I
I
I
I
,.., ...,.
I
i
I
I
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST 1 u-Z6•'" T
nn
i
i
p
TEA"iNAL STAll> 4PiN P T¥PII'
i
I
PC DJO 'Ill iN4004 400PIV 1,1V/1A p
PC XSTD ZN41JOI PIIII[R PNP STL
I
i
p
PC CONTACT o SKT '"ti•I48A ITDIP
I
!
I
II
3 CONTaCTS
i
I
8
014 01
I
10·2 -76
P
~!IVOCII
PC W/L
I
OVf
.,.
11
oi
'
cc••t"
KO. MO.
l
KO.IIO• •
106!13-67
u1iBoi•l!l ~!I!IE POS v ABLTII ~
Ot!l ei
......,
11110. . . . .
1•->D-7
.......
.. .. .....
flU CMAIIOIIIO.
11
I
tTATUINn
• ...
~ft ae.v .,,..;
""'
1 10•26·'~
"' """"
I
"'
113 II
114
_.... ·-
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
230
8
i
i
i
I
I
!
i
I
I
!
00Jll' TOTiL LJNIS
i
'
I
I
i
I
'
i
I
I
I
I
'
I I
62957400 A
j
7-77
OWN
, CHKD
ENG
MFG
-
I»·
bA~N~~
~,."'"~
"""..r.
~ '" '" "'"""" "" ''""
~~~"'
FIRST USED ON
2
1
REV
lA lA A A
2.
I
SHEET 1
of 3
REVISION RECORD
3
1·
I"A
••<"Mi.N1\o.7b18
NHA
b1~07b1 7
CCbB1 C
SHEET REVISION STATUS
NOTESo
I
06!>.;1"'6,
I DRFT
DESCRIPTION
ECO
RELEASED CLASS /}
DATE
I/ v~
APP
~(.r.
fer find no· designations see parts list b1~07b17·
Reference designations are for ref only and may not appear on pll!lrt.
I
64)IIO"E'I.I'71
DETACHED LISTS
"'INTEC IN U.S.A.
DOCUMENT NO.
SHEET
W/L
2
b1~D7b18
Q\-1£.
Q\-C..
Q2-E
RE~E~t.JC.L OE.~IC:o'-lflo-1'\0l-.SS
\IJI~I~G, 'I \~\U
7-78
62957400 A
I LcSo~;~oEN I
SHEET
I IOOCUME:~:007b18
WL
3
CONDUCTOR
FIND
GAUGE
COLOR
I DENT
NO
{REF.)
fREF.l
1.~::::,
2
9-0
XF1
2
XV1
J.
110 •11
2.0
Q1
B
Q2
B
{12 ·13
JUMPER
Q1
BPS
1
114 •1S
+15
1
9
18
2
13
22
-
3
9
18
2
4-0
FIND NO
4
13
22
-
2-0
Q1
s
9
18
2
4-0
Q1
b
8
18
0
4-0
Q2
7
8
18
0
11·0
Q2
8
13
22
-
o.s
c
c
c
c
c
TB1
9
9
18
2
Xf1
A,.t.JIU II Ell. 8
71
62957400 A
2.5
ACCESS
ACCESS
ORIGIN
TA
DESTINATION
REMARKS
FINO NO
+20
Q2
E
112-13
JUMPER
BPS
3
114 ,1S
+1S
BPS
2
114·15
GRD
XV1
2
110·11
GRD
1
TB1
2
13
1
TB1
1
JUMPER
PII'INTEO IN U.S.•
7-79
~~~- '_;;.&~~[R: -~.
LM'U
~;~
__
~-
-
:~~ ~
~
I~
TlE
""'"'II
A
CABLE ASS'Y-YOKE
1":.:._
OOCUMEN' NO
61407411!
.....
1--:,,.,lo""sT"'u""se=-Do " " " - - - - - - - - - - t . . - : - : - : - - ' - - , - - - - - - - ' - - - - - - 1
c~o_E_I~~·CC6B1 AlB
~rA.
'SHEET
1 of 2
_ L_ _ _ _ _ _L__L~~~-~~-L-----------,---------~-----L------------~
SHEET REVISION STATUS
I·
12
REVISION RECORD
I
REV
ECO
I DOFT
DESCRIPTION
DATE
APP
Bulk identify with CDC part number and revision letter ..
I PL
t
61407416
_I
DETACHED LISTS
REV
s
SHEIET
t----1.0!.5 ----1-t
YELLOW
Wl/i!£
7-80
62957400A
lllllO ARC
...T.an--·-r·Gf..J
210
OJ•Is-r,;--·
1 f-
•Ill CM"NGI NO
00111413
'
i
~~~~~~~~~~~~======~~~========~~~~~;~~:~~~:~·~=$~~=~~~~~~;:,;
1(0.
~~~~=-~~~~~~-+=+------~~=---------~-+~~
Oil 01
!ittl?oto! 7
Otz 01
941l"Ui 5
"!: ..
IN II~ICO.. ~:.....!!~ .L_!_!__.;_~
I
'
,
I
OUf
i'
'
'
Olfp TITAL LIII!S
'
i
I
i
:I
II
II
62957400 A
7-81
I
I
I
I
nwN
CHKD
ENG
MFG
•PPR
Trautmar
Ld."~
:.A
II. Jf-L
lf..t'D_~
£
f--
7b
I PREFIX
TITLE
'/.Vh jAilCB> OOND lte:~T 27, 2.8 ~~ ltl¥1? •. I ;'.!_
l!?t:Lc."'s_;L
-.
ID ID ID
.. --.. ~ "'"
... ... ~... '"
--: [.~· ,_.
D
lo
ICD9.U.hl-)'
D D
'/N. •f?JV
.-
'""'"~'- s:'l!
f8,44176 ~G-r.
joot
.... ..~
....
~-
~· "~
NOTES•
For Find Number Identification~ See APL 61370900.
1.
I
I coo; 51~';o 1
SHEET
lco~:.."/o'
CAUGf
COlOR
NO
litH)
(IfF)
',:c~·~~
ORIGIN
XV1
7
BP4
"
13
XV
.,
AP'
B
XV1
6
BP4
4
13
XV1
2
BPI.
5
13
XV1
1
BP4
6
13
XV1
4
BP4
7
_3_
1
BP4
2
I DOCUMENT
_1
1-
l£Q_
----
1---1-1-2 1-·
P"IINTEO IN U S.A
To
NO
!.:~~·~
OfSTINATIQN
13
REMARKS
4
115
CONTACT POST
FIL
GND
1 - VERT PEAKING COIL
A
.,
L2
BP4
6
.___
VERT PEAKING COil
9
12
L1
IGRN
BP4
9
f--
VERT YOKE
10
12
L1
lvn
8P4
11
'22
""
'22
13
11
14
11
~--
--·-
L2
--
-·-
11
----
11
1--
1:7
11
Dll
112
112
'
1-
1-
.
--
.,------ .--
1'i>
li't
1--
1 - 1-- 1--
15
..
~~~:;~~:1
1
3
7-84
FINO
Wl
2
DETACHED LISTS
-
---
"
--
--
----
-
-----:
7
I 10 e-.1- 1 11-
T1
5
BP4
113
T1
7
BP4
114
-
-
1-
-
T1
I
BP4
_16_
T1
3
BP4
c1Z
--.. f--- --
---
-
lu
I L1
-
~ED
BP4
I BLU
ba
BP~
. 19
I~
VERT YOKE
-190V TAP
.-
HV GND
--
PRIMARY
FLYBACK
PRIMARY
GND FLYBACK
-
I
+465V TAP
1---
1---
HtRZ YOKE
HORZ YOKE
62957400 A
I
lco:,ro•
fiNO
NO
GAUGE
liEF .I
COLOI
I REF I
~~~~~~=
ORIGIN
3
WL
1.:~~·=
DESfiNAfiON
•..
. .
REMARKS
..
~---
-·
...
. ...
-- ..
··- ...
..........
...
--
......
-
--
.
1------\1.
ii!O
~~
Tl
BJ7
137
1-------
------
1----
b
~~ON
5
BPij..
ARC GND
-
-------------
~~~ H~'YR~f\lji::J\!.."'rew
·IPOS1
I··
...
lloAJIIJ •••.•• q
62957400 A
l..b
IOOCUM(~~~
, ....
.·
~---
SHEET
. ......
·-·.
--
I
1.:·:.
COD< IDENJ
1--------··
-
..
.•.
-------·
-
-·-
7-85
ow•
CHKO
1•
n.
.r.' .-..,
!@-TITLE
~
~!~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-~~
f-''=.PPR-+'~"'-·"""'H.ar:::K.'--f~~·'l~st c~o:~~6"T
r---
I"A''
PREFIXIDocu•ENT NO.
CHOKE ASSY
~FI~RST'~USE~O>O~N----------------~~NH~A~---,-~---------L~~
61370~00
CC681A ,8
SHEET
1 of2
REVISION RECORD
SHEET REVISION STATUS
2
1
IA
A
REV
ECO
DESCRIPTION
A /1)65li.U RELEASED CLASS
I DRFT
DATE
•••
A
NOTE So
&
Bulk
iden~ify
with CDC part number and revision letter.
SHEET
2
I
APL
61407419
I
DETACHED LISTS
DOCUMENT NO
REV
6140741~
A
WIRE SUPPLIED WITH
COIL
7-86
62957400 A
....
no
... I
:sl
~w-to
0110 I
·~-
.
........
-IUJLD ARC
u
011 11
001 II
11•01•1•:
S1tlllto 1
• .,...., s
A
a I
ASSIMBLY PARTS LIST
.,. a.••
:MiliCI!:
·----
"'
I A
1
'C COIL :JIO MJLLtNINAY
2
PC COMTACTo,LAI PI•11AWI STAJP
......
",
lfAM
AI
_,
....
1 12•31•Ts
~...,.
lfAYUIMft
u.11-n I
KO.IIO. Ill
-......... ... .......
I
11613-26
11
CCdLAII
KO.IIO.
our
'"'
.... .....
12•1 •75
ttl! TOTAL LJNII
I
62957400 A
7-87
» Garner
lc.
r Grono
~217!
» W Pearson ~2.
.2, I!
Unk
OWN
CHKD
ENG
MFG
TITLE
PREFIX
Vo 1 tage Transformer Assy
FIRST USED ON
co~~;;~·
1.PPR
r--
SHEET REVISION STATUS
I
SHEET
of ~
1
REVISION RECORD
4
3
2
1
REV
Ie. Ia I& I& 8
c Ic. IC Is lc c.
NOTES•~
I·~
DOCUMENT NO
b~~.A
CCbB1A/B
s
I
ECO
ct> 11!.11
CD l\l\1o"1
! ORFT
DESCRIPTION
~~;Y~~~s~~~b! • R;~~~e<
per
~tut>
~
1\.l.::t: (W<;."l'.
Shown for reference on 1 y and may not appear on part.
Slip >·D inch of .375 dia tubing. FIN b. over each end of the soldered
resistor-diode junctions. At each end the tubing should extend up to the
resistor body and o~~~bJ~g;:;~e insulation. Shrink tubing. Next slip
3 inches of .so dia
f/N 4 over resistor-diode and center over
this -~ssembly.
sl'lrink
•
ft
II
OATE
~ I••/"!(,
~f::>l.
APP
lllf
IK".c
APL b1407417
OET ACHED LISTS
.OA3180REV.871
SHEET
.----7.8~
'!,500
1.375
--:500
~ leads to be soldered so that no sharp points are visible.
4.
7-88
Bulk identify with CDC
letter.
62957400 A
c
REV
SHEET
3
REV
~
~
~
v
LII.S'LO
AL.TERNATE COHSTRUC.TION
62957400 A
7-89/7-90
l
CQI)!_IDENT
I
SHEET
I I
WL
5
ACCESS
ACCESS
CONDUCTOR
FIND
GAUGE
COLOR
IDENT.
NO.
IREF.)
(REF.)
1
2
20
3
u.s
T1_
5
BP~
lo3
loO
2
2
20
3
h·.!i
T1
7
BP~
lo4
10
3
2
20
3
llo•.!i
T1
1
16
10
(~~=.
ORIGIN
DESTINATIC*
FIND NO.
~
2
20
3
ilo•S
T1
3
5
2
20
3
3.0
T1
~
6
2
20
3
i.~.s
REMARKS
FIND NO.
17
Tab
-1~0V
H.V Tab
+~65
Tab
Primary. Flyback
10
Primary Gnd· Flybaclt
7
T1
17
DOCUMENT NO.
T1
6
BP~
5
7
T1
a
T1
1
Diode,
a
T1
1
T1
~
Cap • . 02
10
1N~005
....... --
1Al1Rl RF'II. R
....
oa6o
T IHOMO
IIUILO ARC
I
..........., ...,...
L1
'CD
61 .. •7417: 71
PAin NUMIII
CD
ASSEMILY PARTS LIST I
230
nv.
r
DWO.
I ~ I
QUANTITY
DIKIIPTtON
HIGH YO!. TAGE TRANSFORMER
U/M
""
~ssvl A REL
PAin DIICI'"tON
001 01
51908300! 0
1
002 01
9lf053l3l 0
4 666 FT •IRE 20GA STRO ORANGE 600Y UL
003 01
51909001! 3
1
004 01
24534712[' 5
005 01
51500283: 0
'
PC TRANS,ORMER 'L YBACK
MC
p
PC RES FXD FILM 250 MEG tW 5P
250 I'T INS SLEEVE 3/~ BLACK
1
PC LEAD ELEC ANODE 40 K Y DC
008 01
95637305! 4
1
PC DIO SIL 1N4005 600PIV 1,1Y/1A P
009 01
9484218417
1
PC CAP FXD CER O,OZUI' IKW
p
5
PC CONTACTtFLAG 22•1BAWG STRIP
p
1
PC STRAP CABLE TIE TYPE I
p
94217400~ I
'
'
04·07-76
FILl DATI
''"
""'"
W11 OUT
B
Z4534710i 9
011 01
CC681A/8
p
snsuoof 1
010 01
I
ICO. NO. OUT
B
007 01
94219903[' !I
12-Jo-75
t(O. NO. IN
OOOllo-..+ C~D:9·~~N·
NHA
b137[]q[][]
CC681A,B
I
SHEET
1
of 3
REVISION RECORD
SHEET REVISION STATUS
3
A
1
2
ECO
REV
'!-_ ~
// ,;,J;;;"llS IKr-:T.
DRFT
DESCRIPTION
A
A 10,53-U.
DATE
APP
NOTE So
&.
2.
Apply label to cable per drawing
82191061~
~ethod
b.
Mark as shown.
Bulk identify with CDC part numBer and revision letter.
I
I
DOCUMENT NO.
SHEET
2
61407420
APL
61~07420
DETACHED LISTS
REV
A
BPS"
7-92
62957400 A
I
CONDUCTOR
FINO
GAUGE
COLOR
IDENT.
NO.
(REF.)
(REF.)
1~~~=::
I
CODE IDENT
SHEET
ACCESS
ORIGIN
FIND NO.
oocuoEN r NO.
ACCESS
DESTINATIO\I
REMARKS
FIND NO.
1
b
18
RED
b.S
BPS
1
s
BP~
a
2
2
b
18
RED
~
BPS
3
5
BP~
122
2
18
BLK
b
BPS
2
5
BP~
3
2
2
3
lA
I ." I
3
~
7
20
YEL
b.S
BP3
2
~
BP~
112
5
7
20
YEL
b.S
BP3
1
BP~
lu
2
b
7
20
YEL
a.s
~
BP3
3
~
BP~
121
2
c--
.......,. ....
AA31UIIII£V.I'71
...
BUILD ARC
_
AI-Y·MUMMI
1 CD
IAAft
I
uana2A ~
T IMINO
Ll
PAII-I
ol
CD
--
230
I
....
A
QUANTITY
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST I
OIICIII'flON
I ·••. ~
U/0
uev
MC
u•n~n nrcDo •v
PAir HKI'IPIION
I •
STATUS
MC
"D
51652901! 0
l
PC CONN PANTD CKT EDif 22 POS
p
002 Ol
9Ul9903~5
6
PC CONTACTtFLAG 22•18AW8 STRIP
p
on 01
51916001!.
2
PC CONN PLUG 3 PTN
p
014 01
51905Boofz
3
PC CONTACT PIN 2"•14 STRIP
p
005 01
51905804;4
3
PC CONTAcT PIN
p
016 01
93463222!5
1 291 "
OOT Ol
9]462444:.
1 Ttl 'T IIIII 20IA STRD YEL 300V liL PVc W
001 01
94ZTT4o9! z
2
009 01
93463000! 5
I
l
STRIP
STATUS DAn
"-"ft-
001 Ol
2~·14
12·30-T'i
KO .
..O.
lfl
r
T
10613-26
!MG. IIIP.
,,._
'ILl DATI
I'!I'!AaiHR
ICO. NO~ OUT
TED IN U.S.o
Pill atAIIOI tiD •
11
''"
Wk IN
•T5
WI[ OUT
IIIII 1R6A STRD liED JOOV IlL PVc W
PC STRAP CABLE TIE TYPE 6
p
500 'T lilA 1181 STRD ILK JOOV UL PVc II
0009 TOTAL LINES
I
I
I
'
I
I
!
'
62957400 A
7-93
4
3
....
~
D
c
c
NOTES:
A
~A
I
MARt\ "AS5Y ~ 1407552."' IN AREA (\j
SHOWN PER CDC SPEC 101 2.1508. ~
o
t-
..q.
-..9
B
B
R;
~
~
8
UJI&UI
or-..
SI'IC.IfiiD
TIHE
DI. . .IIONIAII .. INCMIS
10UIMCIS
A
FRONT PANEL
ASSEMBLY, MODI:
)>
SECTION
4
A-A
DRAWING
3
NO
BUILD ARC
DW.
••,
T I-NO
AS..__,....,_.
I
Ll
001 01
1 CO
,1 ... .,"~'~":
fAir - ·
tl
'
CD
T149H!44~ B
ASSE-LY PARTS LIST
Z~O
""·
MC
DWO.
• I c I FRONT
QUANTifY
PtNI!L
.ssv ~oo
1
I
UATUS
A R[L
"'""
U/M
PC PAN[t
INOICATnR BLANI<
1>1315Uo[ !'>
PC CABLO' ASSY IJNT[NStTY CnNTI
G
003 01
51915101!3
PC I2
1
/
B
..!
ECO
~
lo• [oz oz.
"'
A
REV
[o1 01
[o3 Ire p3o
lA lA A
,,.., A
..
J
I"E6
·1375200
NHA
SHEET REVISION STATUS
,_...
I DOCUMENT NO.
ENSITY CONTROL CABLE ASSY
DESCRIPTION
RELEASED CLASS
j
C0'3"
ADDED
COIIO
CJ./4. L~frT#T 6.0 TO t$~0
03. C'Z.I''Z.
~IN
DRFT
v
'C.'
,.O.S 1l> PoT I~
t+
/f£Lci9S.!:l) CL/9YS t9
A
9'11>1-/'1
ADO IHT DIV LAaiLI.
B
CD115~7
Rt:!vised per ECO
:10·1~
APP
'·
[n-•74
).' )J
~
I~ 111~ 1' ,.v.J?
:=~~~OF' C
p
DJ
51199042!"
1
PC RIES VAR olHEIOHII ,II
\IOZ Ol
!;190!t90l; •
1
PC CONN
003 01
51906Ztoi"
3
PC CONTACTt SKT 20•141A
!••
Ol
"'"zn•o•! 1.
••2n•o•l 1.
z
1
PC STRAP Ci'ILE TIE TYPE a
PC STRAP CABLE TIE TYPE •
005 01
"5 02
"'3462. . .! •
934624441 •
1 500 'T WIR 20IA STRD YEL :SOtV UL PVC W
WIR 20IA STAD YEL 300V UL PIIC W
3 J!IO
01
2453"'01:"I 5
001
004 01
.....,
01
'14ZYJ400~ 1
:
~TRIP
"
I
I
R~CPT
zoo 'T INS SLEEVE 3/16 ILACII
1
PC STRAP CABLE TIE TYPE 1
'
...
I
KO.MO.tN
!I
PU CMAIIO~
•!•~&'"!.
1
••n
....
·--~·-~~
Piu
lNG. IIIP.
STATUI DATI
'"·z•-r•
·-
.,.
!:~..~···
ICO. 1110. OUI
Wll OUT
p
p
p
•
p
UM!
HM!
Ht•T
J6Zl
!~11
~~~·r
TN1
!~ll
US,!
1
!611
I
Oil' TDTIL Llllll
I
I
I
I
I
I
62957400 A
7-97
PLlNTENBERG
OWN
'.l!r.~
CHKD
ENC
MFC
~iior
R&ar·P~n~l
uu..~
IRA
FIRST USED ON
ccsss
1.1... '7,] C~~E~~~NT
SHEET REVISION STATUS
NHA
15630500
s
I
1
SHEET
of
5
.REVISION RECORD
4
3
2
ECO
1 !REV
v
lA A lA lA lA
~
DESCRIPTION
DRFT
RELEASED CLASS " '
A ltb653-77 I:KeL.CRSEP c,t..l'/rsA
DATE
APP
/
/ '1/M• 1~-<="..,..
~L..
L. ~
)
NOTES,
&
.&"31
Cut wire into two 3" pieces to ground each end of coax.
See Sheet 2 for additional notes.
1'1
II
I
I
171
SHEET
b1'107b31
DETACHED LISTS
2
REV
A
Notes cont.:
1.5 inch max from end of ferrule to far end of crimped on center contact {2}.
Dress wires to left side of connector as shown before securing find number 12.
4-
Bulk identify with CDC Part Number.
Identify pin 1 of connector housing {find no. 14} by placing a white dot
adjacent to socket assigned as no. 1, as shown below•
1""1NTI:D IN U.S.A
7-98
62957400A
SHEET
)
12.0
IZ.O
t
l~ACARM
12. (II )
RINTEO IN U.S.A.
ISUILU All!;
DIV.
oau I
T INDHO
ll
ASSIMII. Y NUIUU
6 ... 7b~l
,,..., NUMIII
ASSEMBLY PARTS LIST
....
10 ..
~CD
DIKIIPT10N
OWG.
:31 • I • I CABL~
"
QUANTITY
U/M
ASSY REAR PNL MONITUR
I'AIT DIKIIf'hotf
I
"'
~01 01
!>165Z907
!u
I
~~2 01
'iUI'i90Zi1
27
PC CONTACToFLAG 16•Z2AwG STRIP
~03 01
:>165290,. ,.I
I
PC CONN, PC EDGE 14 POS co,40W
I
PC TER14INAL Z6•20IIA NO I U
~o,.
01
~OS 01
006 01
i
'13541038 i I
'~3747011 Ju
'i30U0!19 i1
I
~07 01
!>100329~ ~I
~08 01
c4S48310Jc
009 01
Z454t1301 f 1
010 01
~~I 01
012 01
~~·
z•s•aJo~i!
~·54163~~ Ju
'
~4217 ... 00; 1
'
.
iu
01
'14361102
015 01
'1424!1602
016 01
~4219903
017 Ol
1760!>947 ::.
i•
!:.
"j
PC CON.,, PC EDGE 22 POS
z
z
•!~8BW
6M8E~
PC CONTACTt RECP 24•2ZGA STI!i3•!?
lNG. Hll'
ITATU$ DATE
IIEL
fK.I CHAMGI MO.
J '1
IZ•Z1•·7~
I
fill DATI
~CSS!>
ICO. NO. OUT
""
·~·ll-'"
Wk IN
Wk OUT
.
p
p
8
.
.
1 !>00 FT CABLE RADIO F~[Q COAX 9) OHMS w
FT •IR Z4GA STRD WHT 300V l.tl PVC W
15
z 800
FT WIR l4GA STRD IlLII 300V IlL PVC W
1
FT olR Z46A STRD MEU 300V IJL PVC W
315 FT WIR Z4GA STRD GRN 30UV IJL PVC W
PC STRAP !;ABLE TIE TYPE 1
6
1
PC HOUSING CONN SOCKET Zo CAV
p
16
1Z
PC CONTACT SOC 24•26AWG ~TRIP
p
I
PC CONT&CftFLAG ZZ•18AW6 STI
1
3
IRIY.
I DOCUIIINT NO.
SPL
3
LOGIC
LOGIC
1
~
SuppDr't Plastic P .{.
~
Monitor' Bd Suppor't
25
KEYBOAI!II
51'115~01
1
1
21
51'11105 ..
1
[1
l
1
l
26
51'117051
lo
jl
1
l
51'117052 l:t.
[l
[l
21.
'2'1
:¥.]
3l
5100~01.3
51'117053
1
l
!
l
lo
1
1
1
l
1
60 KEY
1
I'IAGNET S. 7 GAUSS
l
l
I'IAGNET 2.0 GAUSS
1
1
MAGNET 3.0 GAUSS
1
1
ADHESIVE
1
l
I'IAGNET
• 0 GIUSS
..
62957400 A
7-103
,l!wOQL\ol
OWN
CHwg 519093xx}
with Parity-Switch selectable.
I
..
I
SPARE PARTS liST OF CUH
I F~~D
I
SHEET
~E
2 of 2
I
PL
I
oo:~;:N:aN:o
rE~
NOMENCLATURE
SPECIF !CATIONS,
OR DESCRIPTION
NOTES, OR MATERIAL
662~5666
1
Board Plug-In {Sign a!}
662~5602
1
Board Plug-In {Control}
i 662~566 7
1
Frame Fin~] Assy
662~560~
1
Power Supply {60 Hz}
1
7-104
QUANTITY REQUIRED
PART
IDENTIFICATION
CODE IDEN1
15~20
DETACHED LISTS
~p, 1tr Mech · 0 ~a: Sw
62957400 A
.,.;.
~TITLE
CHKD
ENG
. MFG
APPR
SPL
~e.£..
.'i:fi'--.
IRK...£.
~I~
.
·IS~
PREFIX
P~INTE~,
SE~IAL,
THE~MAL
SO Hz
SP
I
DDCUMEN"" NO .
I
FIRST USED ON
,/,.,/,d c~~~2"oENT
CU1~
SHEET
c.
1 ••
bb2~~7DD
1 of 2
REVISION RECORD
SHEET R_e:V!SI(JN_ST_ATUS
1/ lz. I REV
lA lA A
IB Ia
Ic.
I
Is
ECO
- I.,,
I DRFT
DESCRIPTION
~/131/ f~~:umo
c. I c. p:>1U~.S I~1/lset
~
APP
DATE
,.
--""'"-!P CJ.IISS A
,~
~·
t*¥74. l..tloc..
/?, l'l;lf~l I~
P!.IZ I!"CO
NOTE So
On site spare parts list for SO Hz printer {CDC Dwg 519093xx}
with Parity-Switch selectable.
I
SPA~E PA~TS
IF~~·
PART
LIST
FO~
CLl1i
QUANTITY REQUIRED
CODE !DEN"
"T
SHEET
lu~~T
I••••
2 of 2
I I
PL
DOCUMENT NO.
I"C:
NOMENCLATURE
SPECIFICATIONS,
OR DESCRIPTION
NOTES, OR MATERIAL
bb29Sbbb
1
Board Plua-In Uianal>
bb2~Sb02
1
Anard Plua-Tn Unn•rn
t.?9Sbb7
1
bb2~St.OS
DETACHED LISTS
Frame Final Assy.
~~~~~r 1 ~:~~,b~:r
Sw
Pnwor '
Greater Than
$
Dollar Sign
?
Question Mark
%
Percent
@
Commercia I At
&
Ampersand
[
Opening Bracket
Apostrophe (Acute Accent)
\
Reverse S Iant
(
Opening Parenthesis
J
Closing Bracket
)
Closing Parenthesis
Circumflex
*
Asterisk
Underline
+
Plus
Comma (Cedilla)
Hyphen (Minus)
Period (Decimal Point}
I
Slant
Colon
t
Semicolon
Exclamation Point
II
•
NAME
t:
t'
Vertical Line
t{
t}
Opening Brace
."'•
Grave Accent
Closing Brace
Equivalent or Similar
Parity Error (Rubout)
These characters are not available for keyboard entry when the display's 96/64 character set
switch is in 64 position.
00849-2
62957400 A
A-1
ocx:x:x:x)e
()()()CX)e()
C>CXX*X)
C>CXX*X)
C>CXX*X)
()()()CX)e()
()(X)«)()()
()(X)e()()()
ocx:x:x:x)()
ocx:x:x:x)()
c:x:x:xx:x:>o
ocx:xxx:xJ
()(X)«)()()
()(X)e()()()
o•••••o
ocx:x:x:x:x:>
cxx:x::x::>oe
:oe>E
ocx:x:x:x)()
0 50
:JDE
Seo e«x:x::>eo
~
oeoooeo
~
DCX:X::X:)k)
e«x:x::>eo c:x:x:>oeoo
OJMe(X)
ocx:x:x:x)()
ocx:x:x:x)()
: : cf __Q_]_[J
c
c:oeooeo oecxx:oo
c:xJeCXXX)
oe<:x:x)e()
0 ••• •••
~
~
O«:XX)«)
O«:XX)«)
OJMe(X)
ocx:x:x:x)()
~·
()()M()()()
()()M()()()
oecxx:oo
ocx:x::x:x>o c:x:x:xx:x:>o
·v9-
CM8CX)
()()M()()() ()()M()()()
ocx:x:x:x:x:> ocx:x:x:x)()
CXXXXXX)
ocx:x:x:x)() ocx:x:x:x)()
()()M()()() ocx:x:x:x)()
()()M()()() ocx:x:x:x)()
ocx:x:x:x)()
ocx::x:x:xx> ocx:x:x:x)()
CC'~E 054
CODE
055
()()()CX)e()
cx::x:x:x:x:>o
:ODE 06 3
S 0111110
o•••••o
cx:x:x:x)e()
O«:XX)«)
OJMe(X)
ocx:x:x:x)()
_____Qk1
~
O«:XX)«)
-~-
c:x::::oc.x
o
oeeMeo
c:x:xx:Deo
:-
c~•
C>CXX*X)
()(X)e()(X)
()(X)«)()()
()(X)e()()()
ocx:xxx::o
~~~~
··vgo:--rr-
SYMB~~
o OCXJeOOO
cxx::>«XX)
cx::.-x:>oo 0111e1o
~
cx::::>ec)X)()
~
co:x:.:::o
ocx:x:x:x)()
'XXXXX)O
074
. .,.g
<
o1••••o
-,vs:"
~
oecxx:.c)
cx::xx.e :)
()(X)e()()()
c:xx.c::>co
ocx:xxx::o
()(X)«)()()
ocx:x:x:x)() ocx:xxx::o
ocx:xxx::o ocx:xxx::o ocx:xxx::o
C77
ocx:x:x:x)()
ocx:x:x:x)()
....
()()e()()()()
076
075
~
=
.... 8
)
•V9.-
"'
02001
Figure A-1. Alphanumeric Dot Matrix Formations and Octal Codes (Sheet 1 of 3)
A-2
7
62957400 A
t
lllel•• ooeeeeo
o1111eo ooeMOO elllllo ooeeeeo 1111100
oeooooe
eoooooo
eoooooe oeoooeo eoooc:x::>e oeooooe ec:x::>C:X*) eoooooo
···~··· eoooooo eoooooo
eoooooo
ec:xJeeOe eoooc:x::>e eoooc:x::>e eoooooo eoooc:x::>e eoooooo
eoeooeo lllllel II IIIlO eoooooo eoooc:x::>e ..-cx::x:> ..-cx::x:>
ecoeeoo eoooc:x::>e eoooc:x::>e eoooooo eoooooe eoooooo eoooooo ~
eoooc:x::>e eoooc:x::>e eoooc:x::>e oeooooe ec:x::>C:X*) eoooooo eoooooo oeooooe
0111110 eoooc:x::>e II IIIlO ooeeeeo 1111100 1111111 eoooooo ooeeeeo
()()()(X)()()
()()()(X)()() ()()()(X)()()
ooocx:x:>O
ooocx:x:>O
CODE _]J'ill
SYMBOL~
,,.
ooooc:x:x:>
CODE 101
A
SYMBOL
ooocx:x:>O
~~
SYMBOL
8 •
SYMBOL (
()()()(X)()() ooocx:x:>O
()()()(X)()() ()()()(X)()()
CODE
104
SYMBOL
D
lleeleo ooeMOO llllelo 01111eo IIIII ••
eoooc:x::>e oeoooeo eoooooe eoooooe cx:x:>eooo
eoooooe eoooooe eoooooe eoooooo cx:x:>eooo
1111110 eoooooe 1111110 01111eo cx:x:>eooo
eoooooo eoooeoe ec:xx:>eoo ()()()()CX)e cx:x:>eooo
eoooooo oeoooeo ecx:x:x:>eo eoooooe cx:x:>eooo
eoooooo ooeeeoe eoooooe 0111110 cx:x:>eooo
ooocx:x:>O
ooocx:x:>O
~ :lDE ___12_0
S•MBOL _E_
ooocx:x:>O
ooocx:x:>O
C:lC"E_1_2j,
S•MBOL ..
Q_
CODE~
SYIIIBC~
R
C:lDE
_1.2_3_
L
ocx:xJeM
ooocx:x:>O
ooocx:x:>O
~ O::'E __ Ja..3.g
()()()(X)()()
:~='E
13~
SYMBOL
_x_
ooocx:x:>O
()()()(X)()()
1_3_1
:J~E __
SYMBCL
y___
:::x'E
~·MBOL
()()()()k)()
()()()()k)()
()()()()k)()
()()()()k)()
()()()()k)()
()()()e()(X)
SYMBOL
105
E
e<:x::xXX)e
eoooooe
eoooooe
eoooooe
eoooooe
eoooooe
0111110
ooocx:x:>O ooocx:x:>O ooocx:x:>O ()()()(X)()()
ooocx:x:>O ()()()(X)()() ()()()(X)()() cx:x:xxx:>o
eoooooe eoooooe 1111••1
oeoooeo oeoooeo ()()(XX)e()
ooeoeoo c::oeoeoo ()()()()k)()
()()()e()(X) ()()()e()(X) cx:x:>eooo
c::oeoeoo ()()()e()()() C>OeCXXX)
oeoooeo ()()()e()(X) C*XXXX)
eoooc:x::>e·
CODE
124
....B c : · · r
125
s y 1118;-,-=--uCODE
eoooooo eeeo.::x:>o
C*XXXX)
c:x:::>ecXX)()
()()()e()(X)
cx::x::oeoo
c:x:::>ecXX)()
OeCXXX)
111111. ocx:xJeM
()()(XX)e()
()()()()CX)e
cx::.oooo
cx:x:xxx:>o
ooocx:x:>O
()()()(X)()()
()()()(X)()()
ooocx:x:>O ooocx:x:>O
z_
_--~E _13_2_
-·,.vg;;.
';• ...B·:.
[
.
-~
.. ... g,·
134
\
ooocx:x:>O
ooocx:x:>O cx:x:xxx:>o
CODE
106
F
SYMBOL
CODE
ecx:x:x:x:>e ecx:x:x:x:>e
eoooooe
eoooooe
eoooooe
oeoooeo
ooeoeoo
()()()e()(X)
()()()(X)()()
()()()(X)()()
eoooooe
eoooooe
eooeooe
eoeoeoe
eoooooe
eeoooee
ooocx:x:>O
cx:x:xxx:>o
126 CODE 12 7
CQ:JE
SYIIIBOL
v
ocx::>eoOO
ooeoeoo
oeoooeo
ooocx:x:>O
ooocx:x:>O
()()()(X)()()
SYIIIBOL ..
1if
cx:x:xxx:>o
()()()(X)()()
()()()(X)()()
()()()(X)()()
()()()(X)()()
()()()(X)()()
eMCXXX> ooocx:x:>O ooocx:x:>O
ooocx:x:>O ()()()(X)()()
cx:x:xxx:>o ooocx:x:>O lllelle
135 ::err _J,_I~ :
13?_
~~£
-~r
- •MS.:>,
)_
-;v~sc
. . -A- -
3"'¥BC~
02003
Figure A-1. Alphanumeric Dot Matrix Formations and Octal Codes (Sheet 2 of 2)
62957400 A
107
G
SYMBOL
A-3
~
SYMBOL __
eoc:xxx:>o ()(X)«)()() cx::x:x:x:)e()
ecx:xxx:>o oocx:x:xx:> cx::x:xxx:D
~ ()(X.")e(X)() cx:xxx:>eo
eecxx>eo ()(X.")e(X)() cx:xxx:>eo
ecxxx:>eo ()(X.")e(X)() cx:xxx:>eo
ecxxx:>eo ()(X.")e(X)() cx:xxx:>eo
ecxxx:>eo ()(X.")e(X)() cx:xxx:>eo
cx:x:x::x:x::>o cx:x:x::x:x::>o cx:x:x:>e::;O
oocx:x:xx:> oocx:x:xx:> oeeecoo
: :CJE
_____1_51)
SYMBOL
_____l:L_
COQE_1_5_1_
SYMBOL
i _
152
CODE
SYMBOL__j__
d
oocx:x:xx:> oocx:x:xx:>
oocx:x:xx:> oocx:x:xx:> oocx:x:xx:>
C*XX)OO
()(X)«)()() 0CX:XX:XX)
c.coeoo
C«)eeOO
(X)()«)()()
()(X.")e(X)()
()(X.")e(X)() ~
()(X.")e(X)() ~
()(X.")e(X)() ~
()(X.")e(X)() ~
cecx:x:>oo
OMOCX:X>
C«)eeOO
c.coeoo
eeeoeeo
~
~
ecxxx:>eo
~
eecxx>eo ecxxx:>eo
ecxxx:>eo ecxxx:>eo
ecxx::>oeo ecxx::>oeo
cx:x:x::x:x::>o cx:x:x::x:x::>o cx:x:x::x:x::>o cx:x:x::x:x::>o cx:x:x::x:x::>o
oocx:x:xx:>
CODE 15 L
SYMBOL
____k__
c:xxxx::x:x)
·:OC'E
154
'C'Y .,.BOL
___l__
oocx:x:xx:> oocx:x:xx:> oocx:x:xx:>
156
CODE _157
CODE 155
CODE
SYMBOL
_m__
CXXXXXXJ
oocx:x:xx:>
SYMBOL
___n__
SYMBOL __Q___
cx:xxxxxJ
ooocx::>eC:XX)N
()()e()eOO
CXX)I()(X)
OICXX.>Oe ~
OICXX.>Oe OICOOIO
<::X)MI()e
oocx:x:xx:> oocx:x:xx:>
~ ~
-"!___
SYMBOL
CXXXXXXJ CXXXX)M
cx:x:x:x:x)()
0111110
cx:x:DeOO
cxx:~
CXXC*)()
cx::oeoco
cxx:-=x:::o
0111110
CXXXX)M
c:xxxx::x:x)
cxxxxxx
::x:x-.Jeex)
OC*X>OO ::X::C,Qe(X)
cx:x:x::x:x::>o exxxxxx;.
-
~f
_17 2
- ,.,.s-
Z
:~~E
cv ... B
17 3
-{
U
S•MBOL
01111eo
0111110
0111110
01111eo
011e110
oe1e1eo
0111110
cx:x:x::x:x::>o
~
,.,. 8 -_
DEl
02002
Figure A-1. Alphanumeric Dot Matrix Formations and Octal Codes (Sheet 3 of 3)
A-4
62957400 A
CONTROL+
@
CONTROL t
A
CONTROL t
B
ETX
CONTROL+
D
CONTROL t
CONTROL+
E
eeeeooo
F
G
OMCXX:lO
oeooooo
.
.eooeooo
eooeooo
oeeoeeo
eooeooo ()()()()e()e
oecx»oo
cx::>eoec:x:;
eoeoeoo
eoec::x::lOO
ecx::x::x:x:>o eooeooo
ecx::x::x:x:>o ecx::x::x:x:>o
ecx:x:x:xN
oec:x:>ecX)
()()()()tK)()
()()()()tK)()
cx:x:>eecX) ()()()OM()
CXX>eOOO
CXX>eOOO
- -~ED..1_L
>MBOL
-
CONTROL+
I
LINE
FEED
CONTROL+
K
CONTROL t
FF
CONTROL+
L
()()()()e()e
()()()()e()e
CQDE~
~:::::-E_01_l
SYMBOLLfL
SVMBC~
CARRIAGE
RETURN
CONTROL+
N
-S-1-
CONTROL+
0
oeooooo
eoeoooo
ecx::x::x:x:>o
oeooooo
ooeoeoe
eoeoeoe
oecx:x:>eo
()()()()()eO
cx:x:x::xJeO
:ODE 026
SYMB;;:_
CONTROL+
CONTROL t
Q
P
CONTROL+ CONTROL t
R
S
CONTROL+
CONTROL+
T
U
s'i~
CONTROL t
CONTROL+
V
W
eeeeooo ecx:x:x::x.x)
oeeeooo ...:x::>OO ~
eooeooo ec:x::>ec) )()
ecx::x::x:x:>o
ecx::x::oeo ec:x:xx::.o ec:xJeOeO ec:xJeOeO
~ ~ eeeoeoe eoceeoe
eocx:>eoo eooeec:xJ eoeoeoo eooeeoo
ec:xJeOeO ec:xJeOeO oeeooeo
ecx::x::oeo
()()()()(X)e oeeoooe cxx:x::x::x:. cx:xJC:XX:)e
~
CONTROL+
X
CONTROL +
y
t
ESC
c:xx:x::>eoe c:xx:x::>eoe c:xx:x::>eoe
cx:x:x::xJeO cx:x:x::xJeO cx:x:x::xJeO CXXX)()e()
-, D3S
·034
::~E 036_
--;03?
.... 'iGs_ -,._.9C" RS_
Y5
FS
•Y9, us
CONTROL t CONTROL t CONTROL+ CONTROL+
M
H
c
J
NOTE: ASCII delete code {DEL) is listed with preceding alphanumeric codes
{see lna).
Figure A-2. Control Code Dot Matrix Formations and Octal Codes
62957400 A
A-5
The nonimpact printer character set and character repertoire and the impact printer
character repertoire are shown in table A-2, figure A-3, and figure A-4 respectively.
TABLE A-2. NONIMPACT ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTER SET
UPPERCASE
SYMBOLS
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
LOWERCASE ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
SYMBOLSt
NUMERALS
0 123456 789
CHARACTER
NAME
CHARACTER
NAME
Space (Nonprinting)
;
Semicolon
!
Exclamation Point
<
Less Than
II
Quotation Marks (Diaeresis)
=
Equals
#
Number Sign
>
Greater Than
$
Dollar Sign
?
Question Mark
%
Percent
@
Commercial At
&
Ampersand
[
Opening Bracket
I
Apostrophe (Acute Accent)
\
Reverse S Iant
(
Opening Parenthesis
)
Closing Parenthesis
• +*
,
.
Asterisk
Plus
••
••
J
Closing Bracket
t
Up Arrow
+-
Left Arrow
Grave Accent
Comma (Cedi II a)
'
{
Opening Brace
Hyphen (Minus)
I
Vertical Line
I
J
,....,
Period (Decimal Point)
I
Slant
:
Colon
••
Closing Brace
Equivalent (Overline)
Space for Parity Error
t Characters differing slightly from those of display character set.
ttCharacters completely different from those in display character set.
00849-3
A-6
62957400A
CODE 040
SYMBOL
CODE 041
SYMBOL
••
•
CODE 043
SYMBOL
le
le
le
le
CODE 0112
SYMBOL
CODE 053
SYMBOL
CODE 044
SYMBOL
..
I•
I•
•
le
CODE 084
SYMBOL
• •• •• • • •• •• • ••••
le
• ••••
••• • • • •1e ••
•• •• • le • 1e
••
le
I•
CODE 073
SYMBOL
CODE 074
SYMBOL
CODE 07!5
SYMBOL
•
••••
•
•••• • •• •• ••••••
••
•
•
•
1e
CODE 056
SYMBOL
CODE 10!5
SYMBOL
CODE 106
SYMBOL
,. ,.
CODE 100
SYMBOL
CODE 102
SYMBOL
CODE 103
SYMBOL
CODE 124
SYMBOL
CODE 12!5
SYMBOL
CODE 066
SYMBOL
CODE 077
SYMBOL
••
1e
le
CODE ICI
SYMBOL
••••
.
••
••
.. •••••• ••••
.. •••• • ,.,. ••
CODE
110
SYMBOL
CODE 107
SYMBOL
I•
.
CODE dil20
SYMB L
I••
le
le
ttl
le
CODE 071
SYMBOL
CODE 070
SYMBOL
le
1e
le
CODE 067
SYMBOL
•• • • • •• •• • • ••• ••••• • •• •• •
•
•• • • •• •• •• •• ••• •• le• ••• ••
• • •• •• • •• •• •• •• •• •
•
•
'• •1e le le • le • • e1e 1e 1e 1e
CODE 076
SYMBOL
le le
le le
le
I•
Iii
.I• ••
•
•
••
•• •• • •• •• •• •• ••• •• •• ,
• • • ,.• •• •• ••
• • • • I•• •
Le
CODE 061
SYMBOL
le
I•
I•
CODE 117
SYMBOL
I
••• • •••
•
•
Iii
•
•
le
• , •• ••• •••
•
•• • ••••
CODE 060
SYMBOL
•• • ••• •• •• • •• •• •••• •
••••• ••
•• ••• ••• • ,.••• ••••• •• •le ••••
•le ,. le • • elee le ,. •.-•• • ., •
I• I• I• I•
CODE 118
SYMBOL
.
141
CODE 072
SYMBOL
CODE 08!5
SYMBOL
~
CODE 1111
SYMBOL
CODE 0!57
SYMBOL
le
~ I•
••• •• ••• •• • •• •• •• ••• •• •• ,•
le
1e
•
•
• ••,•
•
lee ,.
•• • •
••
••
•
•
,
•
••1e 1.1.• •• ••
•
•
•
•
•
,.
,.
1e
••re
CODE 104
SYMBOL
•• •
••
•
I•
I•
CODE 083
SYMBOL
CODE 047
SYMBOL
~
le
CODE 062
SYMBOL
CODE 046
SYMBOL
Ia
CODE 05!5
SYMBOL
CODE 0!54
SYMBOL
CODE 04!5
SYMBOL
• ••• •• •
•• •• ••• • •• • •• ••
•
••
••• ••
le
• •••
•
•
•
••
•
1e
CODE 0!51
SYMBOL
CODE 060
SYMBOL
•• •• ••
• • ••
•• • ••• ••
•••
••
•
•
•
• • •• • • • ••
• • •li
••
•
••
•
,
• •
•• • ••
• • ••
·~ •• •
CODE 042
SYMBOL
le I•
CODE
Ill
SYMBOL
CODE
112
SYMBOL
le
le
I•
• •• • •• •• ,. •• •• ••• •
,.•• ••!.•• •••••• •••• •
CODE 121
SYMBOL
CODE 122
SYMBOL
CODE 123
SYMBOL
lele e1e
le
I•
I•
•
•
1e
I•
elelii
•• ••
e1• 1e I•I• 1e
Iii
•••
r.
•••• •
figure A-3. Nonimpact Printer Character Repertoire (Sheet 1 of 2)
62957400 A
•
A-7
•• •• •• •• •• •• •• ••••••
• •• •• •• •le ••• • ••
••• • • ••• le• • • •• ••• 1e• •• ••
CODE 126
SYMBOL
•••
•
••
le
le
CODE 127
SYMBOL
CODE 130
SYMBOL
CODE 131
SYMBOL
CODE 132
SYMBOL
le
le
le
CODE 137
SYMBOL
CODE 140
SYMBOL
CODE 141
SYMBOL
CODE
142
SYMBOL
CODE 143
SYMBOL
•••• •
•
••
··~
•
•
••
••
•• •• •
••
••
•• ••
• •
•
••
CODE 133
SYMBOL
CODE 134.
SYMBOL
CODE 131S
SYMBOL
CODE 136
SYMBOL
Ia
le
le
CODE 144
SYMBOL
.,.
CODE 141S
SYMBOL
CODE 146
SYMBOL
CODE 147
SYMBOL
•• ••
•• • •••• •• ••• •• • ••• • ••
•• • ••• •••
• • •• •• • •• ••
•
•
• •• •• •• •• • • •• •••
•• •• 1e •• ••• • •• ••
•
1e
ele ie
1e le •
• •• •• • • • • •1e •• •• • •
•
•
•••• • •
•
~··
CODE IISO
SYMBOL
CODE 1111
SYMBOL
CODE 1112
SYMBOL
CODE 1113
SYMBOL
CODE 1114
SYMBOL
CODE 1115
SYMBOL
CODE 156
SYMBOL
CODE 157
SYMBOL
CODE 160
SYMBOL
•• ••
•• •• ••
•• •••• •• •• • •• ••
• •• ••••
• •• • • ••
•
•••
•
•
•• • •• •• •••• •• •• ••
•• 1e• •• • •• ••• •• ••
•• •
•
1e
1e
1e
1e
1e
• • • • • •• •
• ••• • •
• • •• • • •
•
le
CODE 161
SYMBOL
CODE 162
SYMBOL
CODE 163
SYMBOL
CODE 164
SYMBOL
•• • •• •• ••
• ••ele•• • •••
•••• •••• •••
•• •• • ie • • •• 1e • • •••
le
.
• I•
,
••
•
•• •••
•
••
•
•
••
•
•• •
• 1e
CODE 172
SYMBOL
CODE 173
SYMBOL
CODE
174
SYMBOL
•
I
I
I
CODE
SYMBOL
I
BACK
SPACE
I
I
I
LINE
FEED
CODE 166
SYMBOL
CODE 167
SYMBOL
CODE 170
SYMBOL
§$~~0~71
•• 1e• •• •• • le • • • • •• ••
• •• •• • • •• •• 1e• ••le •• ••• •
1e
• • • •• 1e • • 1e
••1e
~
~
.I•
CODE
176
SYMBOL
CODE
177
SYMBOL
CODE
SYMBOL
CODE
SYMBOL
CODE
SYMBOL
CODE
SYMBOL
CODE
SYMBOL
CODE
SYMBOL
CODE
SYMBOL
CODE
SYMBOL
•• •• •
•• • • •• •
•
le
•• ,. le•
1• •
CODE
SYMBOL
CODE
171S
SYMBOL
CODE 165
SYMBOL
1e
CODE
SYMBOL
I
CARRIAGE
RETURN
PRINTER MECHANISM
CONTROL CODES. NO
CHARACTER PRINTED.
Figure A-3. Nonimpact Printer Character Repertoire (Sheet 2 of 2)
A-8
62957400 A
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
050
liltlllilll.l
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
060
061
········062
063
064
065
066
067
070
073
074
075
076
077
100
101
071
072
11111111111811
102
103
•••••••••
•••••••••
•••••••••
104
105
106
107
110
II I
112
113
114
115
116
117
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
'
~ SYMBO~
13 7
OCTAL CODE
Figure A-4. Impact Printer Character Repertoire (Sheet 1 of 2)
62957400 A
A-9
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
160
161
163
164
165
166
167
170
171
172
114
175
176
177
162
173
OCTAL CODE
PRINTER MECHANISM CONTROL
CODES,NO CHARACTERS PRINTED
Vlln'ICAL
,..
012
TOP OP
I.~~~
I
I
CAittUAel
ltiTUit.
013
014
015
'"""
anm
"""'
Figure A-4. Impact Printer Character Repertoire (Sheet 2 of 2)
A-10
h.
62957400A
B
MOS CIRCUIT PRECAUTIONS
This appendix contains MOS circuit handling precautions.
Integrated circuits consisting of MOS (metal-oxide semiconductor) elements are
susceptible to unrepairable damage if exposed to excessive static electricity. Since
such excess charge can be easily built up on and carried by the person servicing the
equipment which contains MOS circuits, certain MOS circuit hand Iing precautions
must be followed. The terminal subsystem contains a variety of MOS circuits throughout (ROM chips, receiver/transmitter chips, static shift register, etc.) so, rather
than identify each of the many MOS circuits for special handling, it is safest to
follow MOS circuit handling precautions at all times when performing installation,
checkout, or any rna intenance. The precautions to observe are as follows.
1) Never insert, install, remove, replace, or otherwise connect/disconnect
any circuit(s) with in the terminal subsystem with primary power applied to
any of the cabinets and/or equipments within the subsystem. Power off
for the cabinet being worked on is not sufficient. An interface adapter
module, powered within another cabinet, may be supplying signals to the
bus or backplane of the cabinet in which you are installing/removing a
MOS circuit. This may be sufficient to damage the MOS circuits upon
..
initial contact with the powered circuit.
WARNING
When observing static grounding precautions, do
not touch powered-on electrical equipment and
chassis frame at the same time.
2) Before touching, grasping, or handling any circuit, connector, cable,
or bus/backplane - always touch hand(s) to an exposed portion of the
associated chassis frame to equalize potentials (bleed off any possible
static charge from your hands onto the ground-level chassis).
3) Especially in dry ambient air, any movement may cause static electricity
build-up due to friction. In the case of shuffling one's feet across a dry
carpet, such charge may be quite high and may easily jump from a cable
connector being held onto the pins being mated to on an equipment. This
could damage the MOS circuits within the equipment. Thus, the chassis
frame must always be touched immediately before connecting any cable
to it.
62957400 A
B-1
4) When removing, replaeing, or otherwise handling any assembly/module
which contains MOS circuits, do not touch circuit paths or conductors
if at all possible. Do not carry aMOS circuit assembly across a room
while touching its circuits.
5) When a module is out of its chassis, if it is to lay somewhere where it
may be touched, if it is to be carried to some other location, or if it is
to be shipped, alwCiys try to keep it in a special conductive bag or other
approved MOS circuits protective container/wrapping.
B-2
b.
62957400A
CONTENTS
for
82-Key Typewriter Keyboard
Page
GENERAL DESCRIPTION •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• C-1
THEORY OF OPERATION •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• C-2
CONTROL\'/ARE CONFIGURA TOR, GENEALOGY, TOP LEVEL ASSEMBLY,
and CABLE ASSEMBLY
Equipments: CA150A •••••••••••••••••••••••••• C-10
CA150B •••• .•••••..••.•••...•.•.. C-14
CA150C •••••••••••••••••••••••••• C-22
CA150D •• •••••••••••••••••••••••• C-26
SPARE PARTS
Equipments:
gii~8~} ·•••·····•··••·•····•••••C-31
g!i~g~ ·····••······••••········C-34
c -i fc-ii
82-Key Typewriter Keyboard
c
This appendix describes the 82-key Typewriter Style Keyboard.
It is one of three detachable keyboards available with the 752
display terminal subsystem. The other two detachable
keyboards, the 80-Key ISO and the 80-Key FTZ licensed units are
described elsewhere in this manual.
Because of the many similarities between the 82-Key Typewriter
Keyboard and the 80-Key ISO {International Organization for
Standardization} keyboards, this appendix will be used in
conjunction with the existing manual content. Contained herein
will be information which should be used to describe the 82-Key
Typewriter Style Keyboard only, and that which is not covered
in the manual.
Deletions may also be indicated.
Here follows the arrangement of this appendix:
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
•
Keyboard Assembly
•
Keyboard Features
•
Operator-Control Features
•
Features Summary List
THEORY OF OPERATION
•
Keyboard Assembly
•
External Controls
•
Keyboard Data-Entry and Control Keys
•
Typomatic Keys {new addition to keyboard)
{Note: The three above subheadings are not specifically listed
in the manual but are used to explain the 82-Key Typewriter
Keyboard).
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
KEYBOARD FEATURES
The 82-Key Typewriter Keyboard of the terminal serves as both a
terminal control and a data input unit for the terminal operator. The terminal control function of the 82-Key Typewriter
Keyboard is discussed in this appendix. The keyboard uses a
main cluster of 68 keys, similar in appearance to a standard
teletypewriter keyboard, and a 14-key numeric entry cluster, to
facilitate making numeric entries, located just to the right of
the main key cluster. See figure C -1.
CAUTION
Do not use a "lead" pencil to set
switches under-keyboard lift-off
cover. Graphite dust from the pencil can cause an equipment
malfunction.
FEATURES SUMMARY LIST
Add the following items for the 82-Key Typewriter Keyboard to
the "Features Summary List."
•
82-Key Typewriter Keyboard with a 68-key main cluster
and 14 key numeric entry cluster
•
Cursor controls:
•
Typomatic Keys - When the key is depressed and held,
the repeat feature is activated without having to
depress the Repeat Key
up, down, left, right and home
THEORY OF OPERATION
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
Differences in operation of the 82-Key Typewriter Keyboard are
described under these new headings:
•
External Controls and Indicators
•
Keyboard Data Entry and Control Keys
•
Typomatic Keys
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
Those controls and indicators (external) previously mentioned
under •operator-Control Features" have a new location on the
82-Key Typewriter Keyboard. The only switch with any significant change is the 96/64 Switch.
c.-"1..
Figure C -l.
82-Key Typewriter Keyboard Layout
OPERATOR CONTROL FEATURES
The following list notes those switches which previously on the
80-Key Keyboard were located across the top of the keyboard and
which on the 82-Key Typewriter Keyboard are all located under a
lift-off cover, just above the numeric cluster. These switches
are now two position rather than three position toggle
switches. The list below names the switches as they appear
left-to-right (also see figure C -2).
•
96/64 switch
e
FULL/HALF DUPLEX switch
e
300/HIGH BAUD RATE switch
e
300/LOW BAUD RATE switch
e
NO PARITY/ODD PARITY switch
e
NO PARITY/EVEN PARITY switch
e
PAGE/SCROLL switch
As noted earlier, the display terminal has external (operator)
controls located on the keyboard and the front panel, and the
rear panel. No change has occurred with the 82-Key Typewriter
Keyboard external switches except for location on the keyboard.
However, the change in function of the 96/64 switch is worth
noting (see figure C -2).
··----- ~ :--=--- -----.::...:::.::.-=::=
l
\f
I
•llllfNS>T'
0
__..
j
64/96
(DECAL ON BACK OF
LIFT·OFF COVER)
NOT USED
FULL/HALF DUPLEX
300/HIGH BAUD RATE
300/LOW BAUD RATE
NO PARITY/ODD PARITY
NO PARITY/EVEN PARITY
PAGE/SCROLL
Figure C-2.
82-Key Typewriter Keyboard and Operator Control
Features
l
2.:-
•
•
OtJ
• •
•
()FF) tzoo
}0 otJ
SJ
')
(
otJ
~Aud
.)
96/64 Switch
In addition to the existing information regarding the "96/64
Switch," the following will be added in discussing the 82-Key
Typewriter Keyboard:
Also in the 64 position, symbols thus shown (A,·~,{,', and!) are
not accessible via the keyboard. .The positioning of the 96/64
switch does not affect received information.
With the switch in the 96 position, lowercase letters and symbols '(grave accent), f
This key functions the same as the Cursor Up Key, except that
the cursor motion is downward. Displayed data is not affected.
The code is LF.
HOME Key
The HOME Key on the 82-Key Typewriter Keyboard has the same
function as the RESET Key on the 80-Key Keyboard.
*Front of keytop B to be engraved with STX.
**Front of keytop C to be engraved with ETX.
c-~
Typomatic Keys
When any encoded key is depressed and held, the repeat feature
is activated without having to depress the REPEAT Key. The
following legends will be Typomatic when depressed (see figure
c -3).
t
1.
(underline)
6.
2. -
(hyphen)
7. X (upper & lower case)
3. + (upper legend)
8. I
4.~
9 •. _
s . .f.
10.~
There shall be a 0.5 second delay from the time the key is
depressed until it will repeat.
If CONTROL is depressed along
with these keys, they will not repeat.
Use this figure in conjunction with the Typomatic information.
T"P•~.,.,c. \'1 fio"t\\
~~l~P~~~~~
J
Figure C-3.
82-Key Typewriter Keyboard Typomatic Keys
NOTE
When typomatic keys are pressed for
more than one-half second, key symbol or function continually repeats
until key is released.
If control
key is pressed in conjunction with a
typomatic key, this repeat does not
occur.
C.-"l
~®
[!JIQUtP. . .T
CORI">>\''TION
OCOMtltOLWA.I
CIJf'mOL MT..t.
II'ICII'ICATIOM NO
............
0
'~
~
....,
-
'
no
15,20
,.,OOfiDf
...,
2401
Fairview AV[ •
St. Paul ..
55113
(AlSO A
COMI"IGUIATIOM
no
..
Data Systems Division
Roseville
IDI .. TII"ICATIO.. NO,
lbO'tC!7,D
-· --
DillON ACTIVIT\'
""
. . .."
ltiVISIOM STATUS OP SMli!TS
I
l
7
'- '
ol 01-
lfM IP"'"TT
...
01
I
DDC. . .MTNO.
[(
A
15~30,72
152
ISO K[YBOAitt NUft[ltiC PU
ltlfYIS&OMS
OAT.
0\.IC.IPTI-
""
'"~
501~
IJ .-
• ....,
0
i!!£F=- EC'•
li-':f.-::--..7- .....
··-
.,...77 ......
•·
1.
TOP ASS£nBLY NO•
~-
J£SCRIPTION• This is a s~cial purpose ~D key keyboard s.,.cif'icly ftsiqned to ..... t the
752 requirements for an ISO Layout Keyboard. The keyboard _..d ita associ•ted encoding
electronics is enclosed in a free standinCjl hovsing. The keybo•rd h• a p.vallel
interf.ce to its contr,..ller. The keyboard has alphi!:"lu.,..ric .. <.ursor control .. CIU control
..,d line control keys • The lceybo•rd has a nutnerir; pad with [nter Plua .,d [nt.er "inue
ke~·
The cable len9th to the controller ie 3D inch••·
3.
-·
Nono
SUPPLEMNUL ITtnS'
UUIPnENT IIANUALS'
--H. Todd
JV•l~\1~1'.
L...--
~2~57300
l
r
~.Jjf".x:...f
I"Affoz/.,;
' ':J I
WECIFICATION No~
DIIIGM AC.n'f'lfY,
!CUf"ld:MT. TY
~lo0427~0
s.
~1402100
r
l•t• S)'!t•. . JivieiDI"'
Roeev1lle
i!lfOl Jl. f •irvi•• Ave ..
~t .. P.,l .. ftll S511J
NO.
CAlSOA
...
SPA Ill: PARTS LIST'
?.
t•I'UT POilU CHAIIACTUISTICS•
• S VOLTS J.( . • .~oaa '""
-lir VOLTS J,( . . . •asa AIIP
..
...
lll:fCIIUCE [C'S•
~..ID7..:::-D?
API.
1~30~72
. , . . . . . UST
~~-1-J(. ........... ~.
uom~IK
--1~30'17i!
•
I EN
llaiiPII!MT WOIM:MC:LitTUII.
JA
15i!
ISO Kt18tall• IIUIIriiiC PU
~loi!'IDlDO
U~l0,84
~~30~85
~~30~8..
~~30~17
CCSSSG
CCSSSH
CCS5SJ
((5551<
EIIVIIIHIII:·T:~0 C~II~TI~~~~~S•
lP
CEKAUU•
"'
....31111751.
-··"·
.
-
-
-·
A.
IOEt.IT PLATE
tNR)RMATION
SC:Al.; Ill
ASSEt.\ILY PARTS LIST
ui u
•n u
,.,
t1
6l4DZ100! •
I
PC •UIOARD ASSY 110 K[YI
1!111411;·
I
PC 10 pt.Af[• [QUIP "!DIU" Vlll'l'\.
P
1A1Z4Zil! 1
I
PC
0
~ORM
'CO LOG
Uti JOTAL Llotf:S
Ii
I
l
i
i
I
C-11
I
1 ,..';..";.
1 ~ 1.
... au..~ ...
u
I
I
c
..g\
57I
~,
"
luoa Gl tt•:to•?•!'
I
II
en
01
~'tllt,OS
:
;o
IOU•I• T1l
.
I'
I
I
i
i
I
iI
I
I
!
I
I
I
I
I
c_-as
200
, . . lnOf•'
u
1:
I
-- IUILO AIIC
I
.i
.
i
~
!
I
I
I
.___.,_ -- -"·
...... --- - ---·
-· --
ASSEt.1BLY PARTS LIST 1 ~,:;
,...,_
''"""
••8
wo
- .....
. . . . wDUrR NUU pan PU
~
IH KYIO AllY I!KI¥
I"
IPC
N
tTUI
tO ~.,•• 1,&1.11£ t!&RI!.!• !I'"L
U~
PO.... PCO LM
LISftNIIt eMt.t
~
"'I
,
I
I
-~-~
t&lS.J.
D
- · tef~·LINII
I
!
!
i
'
j
I
I
~
~
.,
.D
....,
fc.
'..
-
•
-
.
-n •1\IISOt lfATUI
ftlYISfON filE CORD
Jl Jl I I I ""'( ca I
OtltllwriOII
1••"1 D•TII""'•I ...
I I I I I I I -l•••••..,lb•- c.---zr I / l"·'·'i- .1+<1
I I I I I I I •A
·--··
........... ,.. l
•
l.!'..!.
-
.
l
I
.....
I ,_ I
"-
1 / ll';o.J'II / J#O·
I
IPUOIIII_
l'llltll•
IC
I
IIUIIIS
Ill
I
l
-
•
!U ffPINIIII
I
lCIIIIIUJ
,::.,-:~
,.,..,~l?•t~~s~~ .:-~4,.sr il"
I
UYIIIIII
.::.~:.
I
l
I
C.III.IASSY
11011111
.
I
.. '
~•
.
~
--·-
•--m
..
_,ll .......... -11.
-711
11111'11111 ....l ....
·~
I
I'........._"""'""' DOAWINU ./I•~·"'"L~
'-...... _,;/'
.,';!';,., CA 150 B
_,. . _
•s (()M~U
f
ANCI
f'
-'
~
4
I
3
+
1" 1" ......" " "0
YAlUI
t.&l..:.
=
.....
MIG
•..,
2
'
/<&1.
-
)
-
__
GENEALOGY CHAI"•ll•ll
I
lfAtUI N11
t.••oT·?I
KO. • . •
I
-
•I
--~-
CAl!i~ii
Ko. .a our
...........
......
... l .... .....
l
IC'OYII•a•
o..ll•?l
i
II
P
!PC CC~T•CTo STRIP "I"S Z~•241iA
~ACK
_,
1
'" ,, '.
P
P
IPC
!
"'
1PC ;LIP• ~RCU .. D ICOPPIEA/TJN PLI
Jlli FT INS SLEEVE 3/16
...
A AIEL
I
I
n•'"'
CC~~ ~Sio J~ CAV 211&11SKT ~L~ P
1i
l
"\
II
;7
IJ
S19C•4.Z "
I
DATA
£P1
01
I
KEV 5 BLOt.:
&
+SVDC
IPc STRA• CAHLE TIE TVPE 4
\112 01j
&
3
z[
'I
NOT USED
2~
5
24~3U.7
Jwulo1
}N)T USED
IJ
EP~
9"277•.·7 0
\10&1
REMARKS
FIND NO
OPEN
\lilT 111
Juot1
l"i..
s
s
s
1
I
ACCESS
OPEN
5
•oc
.•.•.
1:.•
'C.
614' 7•9•' 71
U
DOCUMENT
'
I
BUILD AIIC
....
WL
DESTINATION
FIND NO
DP1
I I
5
SHEET
ACCESS
23
24
f
1~~~=1
I
I
i
I
I
I
II
I
!
II
i
lI
i
'
;
;
I
i
I
I
i
I
!
'
j
:
i
I
I
I
'
i
l
c.- -a-.1
II'ICI~ICA TIOM
IDIMTII'ICATIOM NO,
flO
lbDif~?"'D
-·
...::::..
0<0
,,.
CAlSOC
....,
CUfiii'IGU.ATIOM
·~··1'•
...' ."
•tYISION STATUS 01' s.tlfTS
.,,.,,.,.,y
0<0
' ,'
~
0101-
I
J{)l
1.
z.
..
].
...
lata Systems Jivision
Roseville
~lfDl N. fairview Ave.
St .. Paul, nN
55113
Oco..TaOLWAal
COOf'OI\'IOON
l5,~ol
DIIIOM ACTIYifY
@JIOUII'MIMT
~:!>
c;oNfApl Oo\TA
61
75~
__,.
•IYtSIOIU
Ottr•t•'l'•-
0<0
s •• ., ..
"Z>"
-RE,• ...sap
Nona
SUPPLEIIENTAL IT EllS •
UUIPIIENT IIANUALS:
I
~~,57300
1- 171'h-W
,_,
III'ECifiCAriON.NO
1~0-~7~0
..
,.
IJ
'
C.4-IIS.s
D£SCIUPTJON: This is a special purpose !0 key keyboar-d apecificly deai9ned to ..,..t the
?Sl requirements for an ISO layout keyboard that will be used with a f'TZ ter•inal. The
keyboard and its associated encoding electronics is enclosed in a free standing housing.
The keyboard has a parallel interface to its controller. The keyboerd haa alphanuMeric ..
cursor control, CRT cont.rol er~d line control keya. The keybo,ard haa • numeric ~ .. ith
[nter Plua and [nter Minus key•. Tha c•bla length tv t.ha controller i• lO inch••· Thi•
keyboard will be P'TZ li•t•d·
'F· ~
...
11-J.'J
-=
Ab~S.,.c.N..
bl.0753,
TOP ASSEnBL Y NO:
I - ; . Todd
s.
... ··-
ISO KEVBOAitD-NUnEitiC PAJ, f"TZ
API
I
...
A
l5b30,73
T
TITLio
...
.
DOCu.wT • .
[(
1;1/A~.f~
~'JT.l::'»
OIIIGMACTt'fiT't:
I·
l•t• Syeta• livi•ion
Roeeville
fQUIPIIIENT-
TYII'E NO
SPARE PUTS LIST:
I:W
ftiniperipher•l Syote,.. I
TerMinal• Divisinn
T"l NO.
INPUT POilU
'
GENEALOGY:
to
t1l
T
•••
---
lS.. lli!S'I
_lA
Hl
l
"'
ls.;3mas
CC555H
l51o3ml7
CC555K
U'lUU
CCSI .. J
u ..nu3
15lol1U-
CCSI ..L
CCSI ..ft
u~nu~
CCSI~K
CHA~ACTrRISTICS'
[NVUONIIENTAL CHARACTERISTICS:
soo,
IK
l5'1lll
~~30071..
+5 VOLT •. c...... oo ·~p
-12 VOLT J.C. •t .Q50 AIIP
10.
t.1n'
IYII• ?Si!• IIUIIERIC PAl
PUTS LIST:
rc·s•
15~31~5,
•Taa..
,.,.,....., ......a..arun
CA150J
~uE~lNCE
APL
W'.7h.W~ ~- C.lf./1.4.. IW~
. . . . . ACTI'IIT'f'1
IIOUI'MI•T
JIOH NO
SP~~E
1Vw.1~7""1""·~
'·j
l~0-27,0
..
""
.
l5bll25,
TITLI•
55113
' ' ' .• .' • ' . ....
...
ooa.., ....
I [(
DESriUPTION:
This is • special purpose &i2 key keybo~rd sp.ci ficly d2sign•d to Meet. the
7Si2 requirem~nts for a T;~pewriter layout K~ryboard.that will be us•d with a FTZ listed
~C1F1Ci
7-
P-!iul,
.,.,
!5,20
•eYiiiOM STATUS OP SMIITS
IIMIPI'"1'Y
,
r:l•TI' ' ...
s.
......
COM.IGU.aTICIIII
l-;;:'7odd
...
st.
CA150J
ol
2.
Mi•1iperipheral Systams I
TerMinals Division
2•01 N. fairview Av••
IDIMTIPICA TIOM MO.
lL.D .. i!?"tO
-
11110• ACTI'f'ITT
COIITIIOLWAII
1n°'
10. - RH
'
I
..uooni!
I
.;.
!DENT PLATE
IN~TION
KALil Ill
.""
-
8111 Ill
Ill
f1101
zoo
. -- .. --·
IUILD
... -·-·(8
..... ,.•. rl
Ill
~IIC
lltJIZ~J.I
ISIO&IU~ I
~
loaa-zuy! a
i
i
!
I
I
!
'
A
i
a
a
- ---
... ..... -- -...... __....,..,_
ASSEI.'USLY PARTS LIST
I
nl
YU. n~ NUN
ru
LJt
I~ RYIO· AllY II RIY INIILDID
I'C ID """''•
ooOJ QTAL LliCI
·-.
-·
. ..
;ji
I•
~IUIJI ICDIUit ¥I'""· II
IJIC ~~~~~· PCD LDD
·-·
""
..
I•
_1
~7. ..1
""
-
--- -· --
~~
.CAltOD
It~
D-~?1
s
fD ~~
,! fj''
i~~
1- ~ t!}
-
..,
I
\
J.
1- 1-
I"
I II ~ I~
~ II~
i ill
~
-
";"
I
.
~~
~
0
~
.
~
~
-~~ !""
·~zjj
.~~
lu
J1
1-3
\
i\
.~
5~ ~~ J
I ..~~:1!il .
I
8
I
~ \
hi
J •' 1;.
-
...
I
..
I
p
c:;.t""O'VV~;'/IU
Y
.
<
~
1\:)
!I- I-I-
;t: I-II-ISf- f-1-f-1-
It- 1-1-
...-
N
.-- ~
~
.
il I"~ 2u
if\ \
i
L..-
I !I
I
I
.---
i
~
~~ §!
II' :
w
~
~
A
i
'
1...--
;
==e 1-w ~~~ I-
··- ·-
~:
··~
....-.!
...
I
N
I•!
~
....-=..
'~
A c
c una•~ deled f /Ns ~~ thf"u :n rt ''!t?l•
c. A c
03 OJI'lJ
c
c
I
0
"
f
,
F
G G
,
J
NDTU
&& s..
/.?/.:77
;:r-r r Afti'S ~Aii?7•ff~ttvtty
-
":1
J~l./11!(11
.,....,
PIMO
NO. IDfNT!ftCAnON
CODI tDIMT
I
15~20
I
. ..
.....
OP
I'""'
QUANTITY III!QUIIIED
10
1213
n
1-
I:SPL
5
lS
1~
1-J
·•ftt.oaun-.
~-••o.
W.2..ulDD
IIICIIIIMCLA'IUIII
OIIDEKII"MIM
INCIFICATI-.
1
51'1DI'IIIil
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SOULERT
2
511~~703
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Fll TER, · RFI, REAR PANEL
3
51'11Sl01
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
51777300
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
KNOB, PLAIN
SUPPORT, LOGIC CARD
(PLASTIC}
5
~1375200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
~
51'107303
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
~1~07~1~
1
1
1
1
l
1
lo
'10~~0~1'1
"1"10'7"5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
~1~07~1&
1
1
1
1
1
1
IS PLAY ASSY n& • •
OK[ ASSY, JlSPLAY
"-4011151 i 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AP ASSV, CIT
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
..
-
10
n
~
2~512'122
1l
1513050~
1-
'15~3730~
15
51011~02
3
1
3
3
1
1
3
1
3
3
1
ABLE ASSY-IIITEIISITY COli
.
CRT, 12 INCH
HOKE ASSY. DISPLAY
r CABJ, DISPLAY· ~NI
.
FUSE 1·5 AftP
IC CHIP VOLT REG
3
tlODE· VOLT REG
1
TRANSISTOR. VOLT REG
1
1~
17
'111~~0531
1
1
1
1
1
1
PC URJ, PIS,
11
51'115300
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRANSFORftER·, PIS
1'1
51715200
1
1
1
1
1
1
20
~5517003
1
RECTIFIER, PIS
~·~~.:~•R. ~u••,
Jlfl.' ~ ,,
1
I
'1~;'':1
....... ,
""D
NO. IDDITIFICAtiON
--..
21
'15517002
22
'10~~053~
-23
1
10
COOOIOIHT
J.s-.zo
I
..en
.....,
UNIT
QUANTITY II!QUIIED
n
lZU
1
1
1~
15
1~
~
'loq~o53~
'10~~0537
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
~-··-
~~2'10100
LOGIC PC ASSY
~.<81-0.
LOGIC PC ASSY
~ACJ-0
51'115~00
51'115~01
1
1
i!l
h'll7050
1
1
1
1
1
2'1
5>'117051
1
1
1
1
1
1
rtagnet i! • D Gauss
30
~l .. J.705i!
1
l
1
1
l
1
ftagnet 3. 0 Gauss
ll
5>00-0~3
·1
·l
·1
•l
·l
·1
32
!.1.071.1
33
3•
'10~~0715
5177731•
• • • • • •
35
Sl'IDI~Di!
1
1
··-
assy un-o
a.
1
1"•.r
INGPICAntllll.
IIDTII.GR MTIIItAL
LOGIC PC assY ~•u-o
27
1
sM
m
NGIIIEMCLATUII
GRDISC.. ..,IOM
LOGIC PC
1
1
SPL
~•• -~...,
'~t~~::s !.<>d'
~K!a=~~R, SO HZ,
1
'10~~0535
25
~
~AFJ-0
~~·=~~RD, BaSIC.
1
~~·:~~RJ,
~
0
c
ul
::1
!:
~
f
(
0>
"'
'-
-
.;
"'
0:
0>
:I
~I
NO POSTAGE STAMP NECESSARY IF MAILED IN U.S. A.
FOLD ON DOTTED LINES AND STAPLE
STAPLE
STAPLE
J
FOLD
FOLD
--------------------------------------------~
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 8241
MINNEAPOLIS, MINN.
w
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
z
::;
NO POSTAGE STAMP NECESSARY IF MAILED IN U.S.A.
C>
z
0.....
...
<(
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY
::::l
u
CONTROL DATA CORPORATION
Technical Publications Department
2401 North Fairview Avenue
St. Paul, Minnesota 55113
FOLD
FOLD
CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS, P .O . BO X 0 , MINNEAPOLIS, MINN. 55440
S ALES OFFICES AND SERVICE CENTERS IN MAJOR CITIES THROUGHOUT THE WORLD
@:?)
CONTI\_OL DATA COf\POR(\TION
LITHO IN U .S.A
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Create Date : 2014:11:01 00:13:10-05:00 Creator : Adobe Acrobat 10.1.9 Modify Date : 2014:11:01 04:56:27-05:00 Title : Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26 Metadata Date : 2014:11:01 04:56:27-05:00 Creator Tool : Adobe Acrobat 10.1.9 Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:fb86ad88-1174-4aab-ad80-6310aa6f8ce4 Instance ID : uuid:5efd19ba-3972-4dee-b27c-babb64fb34a3 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 10.1.9 Paper Capture Plug-in Page Count : 460EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools